Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2

 

 

Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici

Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2
Browse the Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.2 document to quickly access related publications. 

Book-level PDFs are generated periodically and therefore may not reflect the latest updates to documentation as contained in the chapter-level HTML or PDF documents below. This book-level PDF was last generated on July 03, 2012.

Suggest ways Cisco technical documentation can be improved and better serve your needs.
Participate in the Technical Documentation Ideas forum.

Click the links on the left to view the individual chapters in HTML format.

Voir également :

[TXT]

 Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASA-5500.htm      01-Jun-2013 07:45  2.1M  

[TXT]

 CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-836-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-837-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:37  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 10:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:44  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:40  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:34  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:24  3.7M  

[TXT]

 CiscoPrimeNetworkCon..> 04-Sep-2012 09:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:35  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IOS-XR-XML-API..> 03-Sep-2012 18:29  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:25  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:20  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:15  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IOS-XR-Carrier..> 03-Sep-2012 17:10  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:07  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Introduction-t..> 03-Sep-2012 16:57  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Security-Appli..> 03-Sep-2012 16:54  4.2M  

[TXT]

 liendocumentationcis..> 28-Jan-2012 10:29  5.2K  

[TXT]

 white_paper_c11-4621..> 28-Jan-2012 10:24   55K  

[TXT]

 cisco.htm               26-Jan-2012 17:35  1.5M  

[TXT]

 liendocumentationcis..> 26-Jan-2012 17:32  5.2K  

[TXT]

 liensdocumentationci..> 26-Jan-2012 17:31  5.0K  

[TXT]

 CiscoASA5500.htm        01-Jan-2012 22:26  3.3M  

[TXT]

 ciscoVPNClientAdmini..> 01-Jan-2012 12:56  223K  

[TXT]

 Cisco7600SeriesRoute..> 01-Jan-2012 12:51  2.7M 
Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 527-0883 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454-M2, and Cisco ONS 15454-M6 Product and Software Release 9.2 July 2012 Text Part Number: 78-19285-02THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental. Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 Copyright © 2007–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.iii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 CONTENTS Preface lvii Revision History lvii Document Objectives lxi Audience lxi Document Organization lxi Related Documentation lxiii Document Conventions lxiv Obtaining Optical Networking Information lxx Where to Find Safety and Warning Information lxx Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM lxx Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request lxx CHAPTER 1 Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI), ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf Assembly 1-1 CHAPTER 2 Common Control Cards 2-1 2.1 Card Overview 2-2 2.1.1 Common Control Cards 2-2 2.1.2 Card Compatibility 2-2 2.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) 2-3 2.2 Safety Labels 2-3 2.2.1 Hazard Level 1 Label 2-3 2.3 TCC2 Card 2-3 2.3.1 TCC2 Functionality 2-5 2.3.2 Redundant TCC2 Card Installation 2-6 2.3.3 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators 2-6 2.3.4 Network-Level Indicators 2-7 2.3.5 Power-Level Indicators 2-7 2.4 TCC2P Card 2-8 2.4.1 TCC2P Functionality 2-10 2.4.2 Redundant TCC2P Card Installation 2-10 2.4.3 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators 2-11 2.4.4 Network-Level Indicators 2-11 2.4.5 Power-Level Indicators 2-12Contents iv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 2.5 TCC3 Card 2-12 2.5.1 TCC3 Functionality 2-14 2.5.2 Redundant TCC3 Card Installation 2-14 2.5.3 TCC3 Card-Level Indicators 2-15 2.5.4 Network-Level Indicators 2-15 2.5.5 Power-Level Indicators 2-16 2.6 TNC Card 2-16 2.6.1 Functions of TNC 2-17 2.6.1.1 Communication and Control 2-17 2.6.1.2 Optical Service Channel 2-18 2.6.1.3 Timing and Synchronization 2-18 2.6.1.4 MultiShelf Management 2-19 2.6.1.5 Database Storage 2-19 2.6.1.6 Interface Ports 2-19 2.6.1.7 External Alarms and Controls 2-20 2.6.1.8 Digital Image Signing (DIS) 2-21 2.6.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-21 2.6.3 Lamp Test 2-22 2.6.4 TNC Card Installation (ONS 15454 M6) 2-22 2.6.5 Card-Level Indicators 2-22 2.6.6 Network-Level Indicators 2-22 2.6.7 Power-Level Indicators 2-24 2.6.8 Ethernet Port Indicators 2-24 2.6.9 SFP Indicators 2-24 2.6.10 Protection Schemes 2-25 2.6.11 Cards Supported by TNC 2-25 2.7 TSC Card 2-25 2.7.1 Functions of TSC 2-26 2.7.1.1 Communication and Control 2-26 2.7.1.2 Timing and Synchronization 2-27 2.7.1.3 MultiShelf Management 2-27 2.7.1.4 Database Storage 2-27 2.7.1.5 Interface Ports 2-28 2.7.1.6 External Alarms and Controls 2-28 2.7.1.7 Digital Image Signing (DIS) 2-29 2.7.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-29 2.7.3 Lamp Test 2-30 2.7.4 TSC Card Installation (ONS 15454 M6) 2-30 2.7.5 Card-Level Indicators 2-30 2.7.6 Network-Level Indicators 2-30Contents v Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 2.7.7 Power-Level Indicators 2-31 2.7.8 Ethernet Port Indicators 2-32 2.7.9 Protection Schemes 2-32 2.7.10 Cards Supported by TSC 2-33 2.8 Digital Image Signing 2-33 2.8.1 DIS Identification 2-33 2.9 AIC-I Card 2-34 2.9.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 2-35 2.9.2 External Alarms and Controls 2-36 2.9.3 Orderwire 2-37 2.9.4 Power Monitoring 2-38 2.9.5 User Data Channel 2-38 2.9.6 Data Communications Channel 2-39 2.10 MS-ISC-100T Card 2-39 2.10.1 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators 2-41 2.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections 2-42 2.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC 2-42 2.11.2 MIC-C/T/P FMEC 2-45 CHAPTER 3 Optical Service Channel Cards 3-1 3.1 Card Overview 3-1 3.1.1 Card Summary 3-2 3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-2 3.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 3-3 3.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 3-3 3.2.2 Hazard Level 1 Label 3-3 3.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 3-3 3.2.4 FDA Statement Label 3-4 3.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 3-4 3.3 OSCM Card 3-5 3.3.1 Power Monitoring 3-8 3.3.2 OSCM Card-Level Indicators 3-8 3.3.3 OSCM Port-Level Indicators 3-9 3.4 OSC-CSM Card 3-9 3.4.1 Power Monitoring 3-13 3.4.2 Alarms and Thresholds 3-14 3.4.3 OSC-CSM Card-Level Indicators 3-14 3.4.4 OSC-CSM Port-Level Indicators 3-15Contents vi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 CHAPTER 4 Optical Amplifier Cards 4-1 4.1 Card Overview 4-1 4.1.1 Applications 4-2 4.1.2 Card Summary 4-2 4.1.3 Card Compatibility 4-3 4.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds 4-5 4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 4-5 4.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 4-5 4.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label 4-6 4.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 4-6 4.2.4 FDA Statement Label 4-6 4.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 4-7 4.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card 4-7 4.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports 4-8 4.3.2 OPT-PRE Block Diagrams 4-9 4.3.3 OPT-PRE Power Monitoring 4-10 4.3.4 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card-Level Indicators 4-11 4.3.5 OPT-PRE Amplifier Port-Level Indicators 4-11 4.4 OPT-BST Amplifier Card 4-11 4.4.1 OPT-BST Faceplate Ports 4-12 4.4.2 OPT-BST Block Diagrams 4-13 4.4.3 OPT-BST Power Monitoring 4-14 4.4.4 OPT-BST Card-Level Indicators 4-15 4.4.5 OPT-BST Port-Level Indicators 4-15 4.5 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 4-16 4.5.1 OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports 4-16 4.5.2 OPT-BST-E Block Diagrams 4-17 4.5.3 OPT-BST-E Power Monitoring 4-18 4.5.4 OPT-BST-E Card-Level Indicators 4-19 4.5.5 OPT-BST-E Port-Level Indicators 4-19 4.6 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card 4-19 4.6.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports 4-20 4.6.2 OPT-BST-L Block Diagrams 4-21 4.6.3 OPT-BST-L Power Monitoring 4-22 4.6.4 OPT-BST-L Card-Level Indicators 4-23 4.6.5 OPT-BST-L Port-Level Indicators 4-23 4.7 OPT-AMP-L Card 4-24 4.7.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports 4-25 4.7.2 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagrams 4-26Contents vii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 4.7.3 OPT-AMP-L Power Monitoring 4-28 4.7.4 OPT-AMP-L Card-Level Indicators 4-28 4.7.5 OPT-AMP-L Port-Level Indicators 4-29 4.8 OPT-AMP-17-C Card 4-29 4.8.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports 4-29 4.8.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Block Diagrams 4-31 4.8.3 OPT-AMP-17-C Automatic Power Control 4-32 4.8.4 OPT-AMP-17-C Power Monitoring 4-32 4.8.5 OPT-AMP-17-C Card-Level Indicators 4-32 4.8.6 OPT-AMP-17-C Port-Level Indicators 4-33 4.9 OPT-AMP-C Card 4-33 4.9.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports 4-34 4.9.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Block Diagrams 4-35 4.9.3 OPT-AMP-C Card Power Monitoring 4-37 4.9.4 OPT-AMP-C Card-Level Indicators 4-37 4.9.5 OPT-AMP-C Card Port-Level Indicators 4-38 4.10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 4-38 4.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports 4-39 4.10.2 Card Block Diagram 4-40 4.10.3 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Power Monitoring 4-42 4.10.4 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Level Indicators 4-42 4.10.5 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Port-Level Indicators 4-43 CHAPTER 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 5-1 5.1 Card Overview 5-1 5.1.1 Card Summary 5-2 5.1.2 Card Compatibility 5-2 5.1.3 Interface Classes 5-2 5.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan 5-5 5.2 Safety Labels 5-8 5.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Labels 5-8 5.2.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 5-8 5.2.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label 5-9 5.2.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label 5-9 5.2.1.4 FDA Statement Label 5-10 5.2.1.5 Shock Hazard Label 5-10 5.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards 5-10 5.2.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 5-11 5.2.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label 5-11Contents viii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 5.2.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 5-11 5.2.2.4 FDA Statement Label 5-12 5.2.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 5-12 5.3 32MUX-O Card 5-13 5.3.1 Channel Plan 5-15 5.3.2 Power Monitoring 5-17 5.3.3 32MUX-O Card-Level Indicators 5-17 5.3.4 32MUX-O Port-Level Indicators 5-17 5.4 32DMX-O Card 5-17 5.4.1 Power Monitoring 5-20 5.4.2 32DMX-O Card-Level Indicators 5-21 5.4.3 32DMX-O Port-Level Indicators 5-21 5.5 4MD-xx.x Card 5-21 5.5.1 Wavelength Pairs 5-24 5.5.2 Power Monitoring 5-24 5.5.3 4MD-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 5-24 5.5.4 4MD-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 5-25 CHAPTER 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units 6-1 6.1 Card Overview 6-1 6.1.1 Card Summary 6-2 6.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 6-2 6.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Cards 6-2 6.2.1.1 Hazard Level 1M Label 6-2 6.2.1.2 Laser Source Connector Label 6-3 6.2.1.3 FDA Statement Label 6-3 6.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 6-3 6.3.1 Key Features 6-4 6.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram 6-5 6.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports 6-6 6.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram 6-6 6.3.5 Lamp Test 6-6 6.3.6 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Card-Level Indicators 6-6 6.4 Monitoring Optical Performance 6-7 CHAPTER 7 Protection Switching Module 7-1 7.1 PSM Card Overview 7-1 7.2 Key Features 7-2Contents ix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 7.3 PSM Block Diagram 7-2 7.4 PSM Faceplate Ports 7-3 7.5 PSM Card-Level Indicators 7-4 7.6 PSM Bidirectional Switching 7-5 CHAPTER 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards 8-1 8.1 Card Overview 8-1 8.1.1 Card Summary 8-2 8.1.2 Card Compatibility 8-2 8.1.3 Interface Classes 8-3 8.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan 8-7 8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers 8-8 8.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 8-9 8.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label 8-9 8.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 8-9 8.2.4 FDA Statement Label 8-10 8.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 8-10 8.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card 8-11 8.3.1 Power Monitoring 8-13 8.3.2 AD-1C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-14 8.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 8-14 8.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card 8-14 8.4.1 Wavelength Pairs 8-16 8.4.2 Power Monitoring 8-17 8.4.3 AD-2C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-17 8.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 8-18 8.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card 8-18 8.5.1 Wavelength Sets 8-20 8.5.2 Power Monitoring 8-21 8.5.3 AD-4C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-21 8.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 8-22 8.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card 8-22 8.6.1 Power Monitoring 8-24 8.6.2 AD-1B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-25 8.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 8-25 8.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card 8-25 8.7.1 Power Monitoring 8-27 8.7.2 AD-4B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-28Contents x Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 8.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Port-Level Indicators 8-28 CHAPTER 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 9-1 9.1 Card Overview 9-2 9.1.1 Card Summary 9-2 9.1.2 Card Compatibility 9-3 9.1.3 Interface Classes 9-5 9.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans 9-11 9.2 Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards 9-14 9.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 9-14 9.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label 9-15 9.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 9-15 9.2.4 FDA Statement Label 9-15 9.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 9-16 9.3 32WSS Card 9-16 9.3.1 32WSS Faceplate Ports 9-17 9.3.2 32WSS Block Diagram 9-18 9.3.3 32WSS ROADM Functionality 9-21 9.3.4 32WSS Power Monitoring 9-21 9.3.5 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan 9-22 9.3.6 32WSS Card-Level Indicators 9-23 9.3.7 32WSS Port-Level Indicators 9-23 9.4 32WSS-L Card 9-23 9.4.1 32WSS-L Faceplate Ports 9-24 9.4.2 32WSS-L Block Diagram 9-25 9.4.3 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality 9-28 9.4.4 32WSS-L Power Monitoring 9-28 9.4.5 32WSS-L Channel Plan 9-28 9.4.6 32WSS-L Card-Level Indicators 9-30 9.5 32DMX Card 9-30 9.5.1 32DMX Faceplate Ports 9-30 9.5.2 32DMX Block Diagram 9-31 9.5.3 32DMX ROADM Functionality 9-32 9.5.4 32DMX Power Monitoring 9-33 9.5.5 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan 9-33 9.5.6 32DMX Card-Level Indicators 9-34 9.5.7 32DMX Port-Level Indicators 9-35 9.6 32DMX-L Card 9-35 9.6.1 32DMX-L Faceplate Ports 9-35Contents xi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 9.6.2 32DMX-L Block Diagram 9-36 9.6.3 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality 9-37 9.6.4 32DMX-L Power Monitoring 9-38 9.6.5 32DMX-L Channel Plan 9-38 9.6.6 32DMX-L Card-Level Indicators 9-39 9.6.7 32DMX-L Port-Level Indicators 9-40 9.7 40-DMX-C Card 9-40 9.7.1 40-DMX-C Faceplate Ports 9-40 9.7.2 40-DMX-C Block Diagram 9-41 9.7.3 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality 9-42 9.7.4 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring 9-43 9.7.5 40-DMX-C Channel Plan 9-43 9.7.6 40-DMX-C Card-Level Indicators 9-44 9.7.7 40-DMX-C Port-Level Indicators 9-45 9.8 40-DMX-CE Card 9-45 9.8.1 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate Ports 9-45 9.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram 9-46 9.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality 9-47 9.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring 9-48 9.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan 9-48 9.8.6 40-DMX-CE Card-Level Indicators 9-49 9.8.7 40-DMX-CE Card Port-Level Indicators 9-50 9.9 40-MUX-C Card 9-50 9.9.1 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate Ports 9-50 9.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram 9-51 9.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring 9-52 9.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan 9-53 9.9.5 40-MUX-C Card-Level Indicators 9-54 9.9.6 40-MUX-C Port-Level Indicators 9-55 9.10 40-WSS-C Card 9-55 9.10.1 40-WSS-C Faceplate Ports 9-55 9.10.2 40-WSS-C Block Diagram 9-56 9.10.3 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality 9-58 9.10.4 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring 9-58 9.10.5 40-WSS-C Channel Plan 9-59 9.10.6 40-WSS-C Card-Level Indicators 9-60 9.10.7 40-WSS-C Port-Level Indicators 9-61 9.11 40-WSS-CE Card 9-61 9.11.1 40-WSS-CE Faceplate Ports 9-62Contents xii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 9.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card Block Diagram 9-63 9.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality 9-65 9.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring 9-65 9.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan 9-66 9.11.6 40-WSS-CE Card-Level Indicators 9-67 9.11.7 40-WSS-CE Card Port-Level Indicators 9-68 9.12 40-WXC-C Card 9-68 9.12.1 40-WXC-C Faceplate Ports 9-69 9.12.2 40-WXC-C Block Diagram 9-70 9.12.3 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring 9-71 9.12.4 40-WXC-C Channel Plan 9-72 9.12.5 40-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators 9-74 9.12.6 40-WXC-C Port-Level Indicators 9-74 9.13 80-WXC-C Card 9-74 9.13.1 80-WXC-C Faceplate and Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-75 9.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring 9-77 9.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan 9-78 9.13.4 80-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators 9-80 9.13.5 80-WXC-C Port-Level Indicators 9-81 9.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9-81 9.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features 9-82 9.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card 9-82 9.14.2.1 40-SMR1-C Faceplate Ports 9-82 9.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram 9-83 9.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring 9-85 9.14.2.4 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan 9-85 9.14.2.5 40-SMR1-C Card-Level Indicators 9-86 9.14.2.6 40-SMR1-C Port-Level Indicators 9-87 9.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card 9-87 9.14.3.1 40-SMR2-C Faceplate Ports 9-87 9.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram 9-88 9.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring 9-89 9.14.3.4 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan 9-90 9.14.3.5 40-SMR2-C Card-Level Indicators 9-91 9.14.3.6 40-SMR2-C Port-Level Indicators 9-91 9.15 MMU Card 9-92 9.15.1 MMU Faceplate Ports 9-92 9.15.2 MMU Block Diagram 9-93 9.15.3 MMU Power Monitoring 9-94Contents xiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 9.15.4 MMU Card-Level Indicators 9-94 9.15.5 MMU Port-Level Indicators 9-95 CHAPTER 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 10-1 10.1 Card Overview 10-2 10.1.1 Card Summary 10-3 10.1.2 Card Compatibility 10-5 10.2 Safety Labels 10-8 10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards 10-8 10.2.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 10-8 10.2.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label 10-9 10.2.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label 10-9 10.2.1.4 FDA Statement Label 10-10 10.2.1.5 Shock Hazard Label 10-10 10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards 10-10 10.2.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 10-11 10.2.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label 10-11 10.2.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label 10-11 10.2.2.4 FDA Statement Label 10-12 10.2.2.5 Shock Hazard Label 10-12 10.3 TXP_MR_10G Card 10-13 10.3.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-15 10.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Card-Level Indicators 10-16 10.3.3 TXP_MR_10G Port-Level Indicators 10-16 10.4 TXP_MR_10E Card 10-16 10.4.1 Key Features 10-17 10.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-17 10.4.3 Client Interface 10-18 10.4.4 DWDM Trunk Interface 10-18 10.4.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature 10-19 10.4.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-19 10.4.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping 10-19 10.4.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-20 10.4.9 TXP_MR_10E Card-Level Indicators 10-20 10.4.10 TXP_MR_10E Port-Level Indicators 10-20 10.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 10-21 10.5.1 Key Features 10-21 10.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-22 10.5.3 Client Interface 10-22Contents xiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10.5.4 DWDM Trunk Interface 10-23 10.5.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature 10-23 10.5.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-23 10.5.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping 10-24 10.5.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-24 10.5.9 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Card-Level Indicators 10-24 10.5.10 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Port-Level Indicators 10-24 10.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10-25 10.6.1 Faceplate 10-27 10.6.2 Block Diagram 10-27 10.6.3 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-28 10.6.4 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators 10-29 10.6.5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators 10-29 10.7 MXP_2.5G_10G Card 10-29 10.7.1 Timing Synchronization 10-32 10.7.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-32 10.7.3 MXP_2.5G_10G Card-Level Indicators 10-32 10.7.3.1 MXP_2.5G_10G Port-Level Indicators 10-33 10.7.4 MXP_2.5G_10E Card 10-33 10.7.4.1 Key Features 10-34 10.7.5 Faceplate 10-35 10.7.6 Client Interfaces 10-36 10.7.6.1 DWDM Interface 10-36 10.7.7 Multiplexing Function 10-36 10.7.8 Timing Synchronization 10-37 10.7.9 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability 10-37 10.7.10 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-37 10.7.11 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing 10-38 10.7.12 Client Interface Monitoring 10-38 10.7.13 Wavelength Identification 10-38 10.7.14 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-39 10.7.15 Jitter 10-39 10.7.16 Lamp Test 10-39 10.7.17 Onboard Traffic Generation 10-40 10.7.18 MXP_2.5G_10E Card-Level Indicators 10-40 10.7.19 MXP_2.5G_10E Port-Level Indicators 10-40 10.8 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 10-40 10.8.1 Key Features 10-41 10.8.2 Faceplate 10-42Contents xv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10.8.3 Client Interfaces 10-43 10.8.4 DWDM Interface 10-43 10.8.5 Multiplexing Function 10-44 10.8.6 Timing Synchronization 10-44 10.8.7 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability 10-44 10.8.8 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-45 10.8.9 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing 10-45 10.8.10 Client Interface Monitoring 10-45 10.8.11 Wavelength Identification 10-45 10.8.12 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-48 10.8.13 Jitter 10-48 10.8.14 Lamp Test 10-48 10.8.15 Onboard Traffic Generation 10-49 10.8.16 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card-Level Indicators 10-49 10.8.17 MXP_2.5G_10E and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators 10-49 10.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10-49 10.9.1 Performance Monitoring 10-52 10.9.2 Distance Extension 10-52 10.9.3 Slot Compatibility 10-52 10.9.4 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches 10-52 10.9.5 Client and Trunk Ports 10-52 10.9.6 Faceplates 10-52 10.9.7 Block Diagram 10-53 10.9.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-54 10.9.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators 10-55 10.9.10 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators 10-55 10.10 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 10-55 10.10.1 Key Features 10-58 10.10.2 Faceplate 10-59 10.10.3 Wavelength Identification 10-60 10.10.4 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card-Level Indicators 10-63 10.10.5 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Port-Level Indicators 10-64 10.11 40G-MXP-C Card 10-64 10.11.1 Key Features 10-66 10.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-67 10.11.3 Wavelength Identification 10-68 10.11.4 40G-MXP-C Card-Level Indicators 10-70 10.11.5 40G-MXP-C Card Port-Level Indicators 10-70 10.12 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10-71Contents xvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10.12.1 Key Features 10-72 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list 10-74 10.12.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-74 10.12.4 Client Interface 10-77 10.12.5 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card-Level Indicators 10-78 10.12.6 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Port-Level Indicators 10-78 10.12.7 DWDM Trunk Interface 10-79 10.12.8 Configuration Management 10-79 10.12.9 Security 10-79 10.12.10 Card Protection 10-80 10.12.10.1 1+1 Protection 10-80 10.12.10.2 Y-Cable Protection 10-80 10.12.10.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection 10-81 10.12.11 IGMP Snooping 10-81 10.12.11.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions 10-82 10.12.11.2 Fast-Leave Processing 10-83 10.12.11.3 Static Router Port Configuration 10-83 10.12.11.4 Report Suppression 10-83 10.12.11.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters 10-83 10.12.12 Multicast VLAN Registration 10-84 10.12.13 MAC Address Learning 10-84 10.12.14 MAC Address Retrieval 10-84 10.12.15 Link Integrity 10-85 10.12.16 Ingress CoS 10-85 10.12.17 CVLAN Rate Limiting 10-86 10.12.18 DSCP to CoS Mapping 10-86 10.12.19 Link Aggregation Control Protocol 10-87 10.12.19.1 Advantages of LACP 10-87 10.12.19.2 Functions of LACP 10-87 10.12.19.3 Modes of LACP 10-87 10.12.19.4 Parameters of LACP 10-87 10.12.19.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes 10-88 10.12.19.6 Supported LACP Features 10-88 10.12.19.7 LACP Limitations and Restrictions 10-88 10.12.20 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management 10-89 10.12.20.1 Maintenance Domain 10-89 10.12.20.2 Maintenance Association 10-89 10.12.20.3 Maintenance End Points 10-89 10.12.20.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points 10-90 10.12.20.5 CFM Messages 10-90Contents xvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10.12.20.6 Supported CFM Features 10-90 10.12.20.7 CFM Limitations and Restrictions 10-91 10.12.21 Ethernet OAM 10-91 10.12.21.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM 10-91 10.12.21.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM 10-92 10.12.21.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM 10-92 10.12.21.4 Ethernet OAM Supported Features 10-92 10.12.21.5 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions 10-92 10.12.22 Resilient Ethernet Protocol 10-93 10.12.22.1 REP Segments 10-93 10.12.22.2 Characteristics of REP Segments 10-93 10.12.22.3 REP Port States 10-93 10.12.22.4 Link Adjacency 10-94 10.12.22.5 Fast Reconvergence 10-94 10.12.22.6 VLAN Load Balancing 10-94 10.12.22.7 REP Configuration Sequence 10-94 10.12.22.8 REP Supported Interfaces 10-95 10.12.22.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions 10-95 10.13 ADM-10G Card 10-96 10.13.1 Key Features 10-96 10.13.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC 10-97 10.13.2.1 POS Overview 10-97 10.13.2.2 POS Framing Modes 10-98 10.13.2.3 GFP Interoperability 10-98 10.13.2.4 LEX Interoperability 10-98 10.13.3 Faceplate 10-98 10.13.4 Port Configuration Rules 10-99 10.13.5 Client Interfaces 10-100 10.13.6 Interlink Interfaces 10-101 10.13.7 DWDM Trunk Interface 10-101 10.13.8 Configuration Management 10-101 10.13.9 Security 10-103 10.13.10 Protection 10-103 10.13.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes 10-103 10.13.10.2 Port Protection Schemes 10-103 10.13.10.3 Flexible Protection Mechanism 10-103 10.13.11 Circuit Provisioning 10-104 10.13.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics 10-104 Available Circuit Sizes 10-105 10.13.13 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-106Contents xviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 10-106 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 10-106 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions 10-107 10.13.14 ADM-10G Card-Level Indicators 10-110 10.13.15 ADM-10G Card Port-Level Indicators 10-110 10.14 OTU2_XP Card 10-111 10.14.1 Key Features 10-112 10.14.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-113 10.14.3 OTU2_XP Card-Level Indicators 10-115 10.14.4 OTU2_XP Port-Level Indicators 10-115 10.14.5 OTU2_XP Card Interface 10-116 10.14.5.1 Client Interface 10-116 10.14.5.2 Trunk Interface 10-116 10.14.6 Configuration Management 10-117 10.14.7 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules 10-117 10.14.8 Security 10-119 10.14.9 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-119 10.14.10 ODU Transparency 10-120 10.14.11 Protection 10-120 10.14.11.1 Y-Cable Protection 10-120 10.14.11.2 Splitter Protection 10-120 10.15 MLSE UT 10-121 10.15.1 Error Decorrelator 10-121 10.16 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 10-121 10.16.1 Key Features 10-121 10.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-122 10.16.3 Client Interface 10-123 10.16.4 DWDM Trunk Interface 10-123 10.16.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature 10-123 10.16.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-124 10.16.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping 10-124 10.16.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-124 10.16.9 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-124 10.16.10 TXP_MR_10EX_C Port-Level Indicators 10-125 10.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10-125 10.17.1 Key Features 10-126 10.17.2 Faceplate 10-127 10.17.3 Client Interfaces 10-127 10.17.4 DWDM Interface 10-128Contents xix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10.17.5 Multiplexing Function 10-128 10.17.6 Timing Synchronization 10-128 10.17.7 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability 10-129 10.17.8 FEC and E-FEC Modes 10-129 10.17.9 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing 10-129 10.17.10 Client Interface Monitoring 10-129 10.17.11 Wavelength Identification 10-130 10.17.12 Automatic Laser Shutdown 10-131 10.17.13 Jitter 10-131 10.17.14 Lamp Test 10-131 10.17.15 Onboard Traffic Generation 10-131 10.17.16 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-132 10.17.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Port-Level Indicators 10-132 10.18 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 10-132 10.18.1 Key Features 10-134 10.18.2 Faceplate 10-135 10.18.3 Wavelength Identification 10-136 10.18.4 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-138 10.18.5 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Port-Level Indicators 10-138 10.19 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection 10-139 10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection 10-139 10.19.2 Splitter Protection 10-141 10.20 Far-End Laser Control 10-142 10.21 Jitter Considerations 10-142 10.22 Termination Modes 10-143 10.23 SFP and XFP Modules 10-144 CHAPTER 11 Node Reference 11-1 11.1 DWDM Node Configurations 11-1 11.1.1 Terminal Node 11-2 11.1.2 OADM Node 11-8 11.1.3 ROADM Node 11-10 11.1.4 Hub Node 11-27 11.1.5 Anti-ASE Node 11-31 11.1.6 Line Amplifier Node 11-32 11.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node 11-33 11.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 11-34 11.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node 11-36 11.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification 11-36Contents xx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 11.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 11-38 11.3.1 Channel Protection 11-38 11.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection 11-40 11.3.3 Line Protection 11-40 11.3.4 Standalone 11-41 11.4 Multishelf Node 11-42 11.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout 11-43 11.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations 11-43 11.5 Optical Sides 11-44 11.5.1 Optical Side Stages 11-44 11.5.1.1 Fiber Stage 11-45 11.5.1.2 A/D Stage 11-47 11.5.2 Side Line Ports 11-47 11.5.3 Optical Side Configurations 11-48 11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 11-53 11.6.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards 11-53 11.6.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 11-58 11.6.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node 11-58 11.6.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 11-59 11.6.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards 11-61 11.6.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 11-63 11.6.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node 11-64 11.6.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 11-65 11.6.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards 11-67 11.6.4 XC Termination Mesh Node 11-69 11.6.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts 11-70 11.6.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 11-73 11.7 DWDM Node Cabling 11-74 11.7.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-74 11.7.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-77 11.7.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-79 11.7.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-79 11.7.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-81 11.7.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-83 11.7.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 11-88 11.8 Automatic Node Setup 11-90 11.8.1 Raman Setup and Tuning 11-93 11.9 DWDM Functional View 11-96 11.9.1 Navigating Functional View 11-97Contents xxi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 11.9.2 Using the Graphical Display 11-98 11.9.2.1 Displaying a Side 11-98 11.9.2.2 Displaying Card Information 11-99 11.9.2.3 Displaying Port Information 11-100 11.9.2.4 Displaying Patchcord Information 11-101 11.9.2.5 Displaying MPO Information 11-102 11.9.2.6 Alarm Box Information 11-103 11.9.2.7 Transponder and Muxponder Information 11-103 11.9.2.8 Changing the Views 11-104 11.9.2.9 Selecting Circuits 11-105 11.9.2.10 Displaying Optical Path Power 11-105 11.10 DWDM Network Functional View 11-106 11.10.1 Navigating Network Functional View 11-107 11.10.2 Using the Graphical Display 11-108 11.10.2.1 Displaying Optical Power 11-109 11.10.2.2 Selecting the Circuit 11-109 11.10.2.3 Exporting Reports 11-110 11.11 Non-DWDM (TDM) Networks 11-111 CHAPTER 12 Network Reference 12-1 12.1 Network Applications 12-2 12.2 Network Topologies 12-2 12.2.1 Ring Networks 12-2 12.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 12-2 12.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 12-3 12.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 12-4 12.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology 12-5 12.2.2 Linear Networks 12-6 12.2.3 Mesh Networks 12-7 12.3 Interconnected Rings 12-9 12.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios 12-11 12.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 12-11 12.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 12-13 12.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring 12-14 12.4 Spur Configuration 12-16 12.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios 12-16 12.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in RemoteTerminal T 12-16Contents xxii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 12.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 12-17 12.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 12-18 12.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-18 12.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card 12-19 12.7 Optical Performance 12-19 12.8 Automatic Power Control 12-20 12.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level 12-20 12.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer 12-21 12.8.3 Managing APC 12-23 12.9 Power Side Monitoring 12-24 12.10 Span Loss Verification 12-25 12.10.1 Span Loss Measurements on Raman Links 12-26 12.11 Network Optical Safety 12-27 12.11.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown 12-27 12.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction 12-28 12.11.3 Network Optical Safety on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-29 12.11.3.1 RAMAN-TX Settings on Raman Pump 12-29 12.11.3.2 COM-TX Safety Setting on EDFA 12-29 12.11.4 Fiber Cut Scenarios 12-30 12.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards 12-30 12.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards 12-32 12.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards 12-34 12.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-35 12.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension 12-37 12.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-39 12.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers 12-40 12.12.1 Gain Tilt Control at the Card Level 12-41 12.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control 12-43 12.12.2.1 System Gain Tilt Compensation Without ROADM Nodes 12-43 12.12.2.2 System Gain Tilt Compensation With ROADM Nodes 12-45 12.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations 12-46 12.13.1 OC-192/STM-64 Data Rate (9.95328 Gbps) 12-46 12.13.2 10GE Data Rate (10.3125 Gbps) 12-46 12.13.3 10G FC Data Rate (10.51875 Gbps) 12-46 12.13.4 ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Rates 12-47 12.13.4.1 OC-192 Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (10.70923 Gbps) 12-48Contents xxiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 12.13.4.2 10GE Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps) 12-48 12.13.4.3 10G FC Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) 12-48 12.14 Even Band Management 12-48 12.15 Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown 12-52 CHAPTER 13 Optical Channel Circuits and Virtual Patchcords Reference 13-1 13.1 Optical Channel Circuits 13-1 13.1.1 OCHNC Circuits 13-2 13.1.2 OCHCC Circuits 13-3 13.1.3 OCH Trail Circuits 13-3 13.1.4 Administrative and Service States 13-5 13.1.5 Creating and Deleting OCHCCs 13-6 13.1.6 OCHCCs and Service and Communications Channels 13-6 13.2 Virtual Patchcords 13-7 13.2.1 PPC Provisioning Rules 13-12 13.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 13-13 13.3.1 End-to-End SVLAN Provisioning Rules 13-13 CHAPTER 14 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 14-1 14.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods 14-1 14.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card 14-2 14.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation 14-2 14.2 CTC Installation Overview 14-2 14.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements 14-3 14.4 ONS 15454 Connections 14-5 14.5 CTC Window 14-8 14.5.1 Summary Pane 14-10 14.5.2 Node View (Multishelf Mode), Node View (Single-Shelf Mode), and Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) 14-11 14.5.2.1 CTC Card Colors 14-11 14.5.2.2 Multishelf View Card Shortcuts 14-13 14.5.2.3 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Card Shortcuts 14-13 14.5.2.4 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Port Shortcuts 14-14 14.5.2.5 Card View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Port Shortcuts 14-14 14.5.2.6 Multishelf View Tabs 14-14 14.5.2.7 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Tabs 14-14Contents xxiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 14.5.3 Network View 14-15 14.5.3.1 Network View Tabs 14-16 14.5.3.2 CTC Node Colors 14-17 14.5.3.3 DCC Links 14-17 14.5.3.4 Link Consolidation 14-17 14.5.4 Card View 14-18 14.6 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 14-19 14.7 TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card Reset 14-22 14.8 TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card Database 14-23 14.9 Software Revert 14-23 CHAPTER 15 Security Reference 15-1 15.1 User IDs and Security Levels 15-1 15.2 User Privileges and Policies 15-2 15.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Task 15-2 15.2.2 Security Policies 15-6 15.2.2.1 Superuser Privileges for Provisioning Users 15-7 15.2.2.2 Idle User Timeout 15-7 15.2.2.3 User Password, Login, and Access Policies 15-7 15.3 Audit Trail 15-8 15.3.1 Audit Trail Log Entries 15-8 15.3.2 Audit Trail Capacities 15-9 15.4 RADIUS Security 15-9 15.4.1 RADIUS Authentication 15-9 15.4.2 Shared Secrets 15-9 CHAPTER 16 Timing Reference 16-1 16.1 Node Timing Parameters 16-1 16.2 Network Timing 16-2 16.3 Synchronization Status Messaging 16-3 CHAPTER 17 Management Network Connectivity 17-1 17.1 IP Networking Overview 17-2 17.2 IP Addressing Scenarios 17-2 17.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 17-3 17.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to a Router 17-3 17.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway 17-4 17.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer 17-7Contents xxv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 17.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 17-8 17.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF 17-10 17.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server 17-12 17.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet 17-17 17.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 17-19 17.2.9.1 Secure Mode Behavior 17-19 17.2.9.2 Secure Node Locked and Unlocked Behavior 17-22 17.3 DCN Case Studies 17-23 17.3.1 SOCKS Proxy Settings 17-23 17.3.2 OSPF 17-23 17.3.3 Management of Non-LAN Connected Multishelf Node 17-24 17.3.4 DCN Case Study 1: Ring Topology with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections 17-24 17.3.4.1 DCN Case Study 1 IP Configuration 17-25 17.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations 17-27 17.3.5 DCN Case Study 2: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends 17-28 17.3.5.1 DCN Case Study 2 IP Configurations 17-28 17.3.5.2 DCN Case Study 2 Limitations 17-30 17.3.6 DCN Case Study 3: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends Using OSPF Routing 17-30 17.3.6.1 DCN Case Study 3 IP Configurations 17-31 17.3.6.2 DCN Case Study 3 Limitations 17-34 17.3.7 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies With Two DCN Connections 17-34 17.3.7.1 DCN Case Study 4 IP Configurations 17-35 17.3.7.2 DCN Case Study 4 Limitations 17-37 17.4 DCN Extension 17-37 17.4.1 Network Using OSC 17-38 17.4.2 Network Using External DCN 17-38 17.4.3 Network Using GCC/DCC 17-39 17.5 Routing Table 17-39 17.6 External Firewalls 17-41 17.7 Open GNE 17-42 17.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking 17-45 17.9 Link Management Protocol 17-49 17.9.1 Overview 17-49 17.9.1.1 MPLS 17-50 17.9.1.2 GMPLS 17-50 17.9.2 Configuring LMP 17-51 17.9.2.1 Control Channel Management 17-51 17.9.2.2 TE Link Management 17-52Contents xxvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 17.9.2.3 Link Connectivity Verification 17-52 17.9.2.4 Fault Management 17-52 17.9.3 LMP WDM 17-53 17.9.4 LMP Network Implementation 17-53 17.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility 17-54 17.11 IPv6 Native Support 17-54 17.11.1 IPv6 Enabled Mode 17-56 17.11.2 IPv6 Disabled Mode 17-56 17.11.3 IPv6 in Non-secure Mode 17-56 17.11.4 IPv6 in Secure Mode 17-56 17.11.5 IPv6 Limitations 17-56 17.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1 Routers 17-57 17.12.1 Card Compatibility 17-57 17.12.2 Node Management 17-58 17.12.2.1 Physical Connections 17-58 17.12.2.2 CTC Display 17-58 17.12.3 Circuit Management 17-59 17.12.3.1 LMP Provisioning 17-59 17.12.3.2 OCH Trail Circuit Provisioning 17-60 17.12.4 Cisco CRS-1 Router Management from CTC 17-60 17.13 Photonic Path Trace 17-61 17.14 Shared Risk Link Group 17-62 17.15 Proactive Protection Regen 17-63 CHAPTER 18 Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management 18-1 18.1 Overview 18-1 18.2 Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Slot, or Port 18-2 18.3 Alarm Display 18-2 18.3.1 Viewing Alarms by Time Zone 18-3 18.3.2 Controlling Alarm Display 18-4 18.3.3 Filtering Alarms 18-4 18.3.4 Conditions Tab 18-4 18.3.5 Controlling the Conditions Display 18-5 18.3.5.1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions 18-5 18.3.5.2 Conditions Column Descriptions 18-5 18.3.5.3 Filtering Conditions 18-6 18.3.6 Viewing History 18-6 18.3.6.1 History Column Descriptions 18-7 18.3.6.2 Retrieving and Displaying Alarm and Condition History 18-8Contents xxvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 18.3.7 Alarm History and Log Buffer Capacities 18-8 18.4 Alarm Severities 18-8 18.5 Alarm Profiles 18-9 18.5.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles 18-9 18.5.2 Alarm Profile Buttons 18-10 18.5.3 Alarm Profile Editing 18-10 18.5.4 Alarm Severity Options 18-11 18.5.5 Row Display Options 18-11 18.5.6 Applying Alarm Profiles 18-11 18.6 External Alarms and Controls 18-12 18.6.1 External Alarms 18-12 18.6.2 External Controls 18-12 18.6.3 Virtual Wires 18-13 18.7 Alarm Suppression 18-14 18.7.1 Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance 18-14 18.7.2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command 18-14 18.8 Multishelf Configuration Alarming 18-15 18.8.1 Viewing Multishelf Alarmed Entities 18-15 18.8.2 Multishelf-Specific Alarming 18-15 18.8.2.1 Ethernet Communication Alarms 18-16 18.8.2.2 Multishelf Correlated Alarms 18-16 18.9 Threshold Crossing Alert Suppression 18-16 18.9.1 Overview 18-16 18.9.2 G.709, SONET, and SDH TCA Groups 18-17 CHAPTER 19 Performance Monitoring 19-1 19.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring 19-2 19.2 TNC Card Performance Monitoring 19-2 19.2.1 Optics PM Window 19-3 19.2.2 Payload PM Window 19-3 19.2.3 RMONs Supported by TNC Card 19-6 19.3 Transponder, Muxponder, Xponder, and ADM-10G Card Performance Monitoring 19-7 19.3.1 Optics PM Window 19-9 19.3.2 Payload PM Window 19-10 19.3.2.1 Payload PM SONET/SDH Window 19-11 19.3.2.2 Payload PM Statistics Window 19-12 19.3.2.3 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Payload Utilization Window 19-16 19.3.2.4 Payload History Window 19-17 19.3.3 OTN PM Window 19-17Contents xxviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 19.3.4 Ether Ports PM Window 19-20 19.3.4.1 Ether Port Statistics Window 19-20 19.3.4.2 Ether Ports Utilization Window 19-22 19.3.4.3 Ether Ports History Window 19-22 19.4 DWDM Card Performance Monitoring 19-23 19.4.1 Optical Amplifier Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-23 19.4.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-23 19.4.3 4MD-xx.x Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-23 19.4.4 OADM Channel Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-24 19.4.5 OADM Band Filter Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-24 19.4.6 Optical Service Channel Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 19-24 19.5 Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions 19-27 19.6 ITU G.709 and ITU-T G.8021 Trunk-Side PM Parameter Definitions 19-28 19.7 Full RMON Statistics PM Parameter Definitions 19-30 19.8 FEC PM Parameter Definitions 19-33 19.9 SONET PM Parameter Definitions 19-34 19.10 SDH PM Parameter Definitions 19-35 19.11 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 19-37 CHAPTER 20 SNMP 20-1 20.1 SNMP Overview 20-1 20.2 Basic SNMP Components 20-3 20.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement 20-4 20.4 SNMP Version Support 20-4 20.4.1 SNMPv3 Support 20-4 20.5 SNMP Message Types 20-5 20.6 SNMP Management Information Bases 20-6 20.6.1 IETF-Standard MIBs for the ONS 15454 20-6 20.6.2 Proprietary ONS 15454 MIBs 20-7 20.6.3 Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs 20-11 20.6.4 MIBs Supported in GE-XP, 10GE-XP, GE-XPE, 10GE-XPE Cards 20-14 20.6.5 MIBs Supported in TNC and TSC Cards 20-14 20.7 SNMP Trap Content 20-15 20.7.1 Generic and IETF Traps 20-15 20.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings 20-16 20.8 SNMPv1/v2 Community Names 20-22 20.9 SNMP in Multishelf Management 20-22Contents xxix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 20.10 SNMPv1/v2 Proxy Over Firewalls 20-24 20.11 SNMPv3 Proxy Configuration 20-25 20.12 Remote Monitoring 20-25 20.12.1 64-Bit RMON Monitoring over DCC 20-26 20.12.1.1 Row Creation in MediaIndependentTable 20-26 20.12.1.2 Row Creation in cMediaIndependentHistoryControlTable 20-26 20.12.2 HC-RMON-MIB Support 20-27 20.12.3 Ethernet Statistics RMON Group 20-27 20.12.3.1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable 20-27 20.12.3.2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 20-27 20.12.3.3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable 20-27 20.12.3.4 64-Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table 20-28 20.12.4 History Control RMON Group 20-28 20.12.4.1 History Control Table 20-28 20.12.4.2 Row Creation in historyControlTable 20-28 20.12.4.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 20-29 20.12.4.4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table 20-29 20.12.5 Ethernet History RMON Group 20-29 20.12.5.1 64-Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable 20-29 20.12.6 Alarm RMON Group 20-29 20.12.6.1 Alarm Table 20-29 20.12.6.2 Row Creation in alarmTable 20-29 20.12.6.3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 20-31 20.12.6.4 Row Deletion in alarmTable 20-31 20.12.7 Event RMON Group 20-31 20.12.7.1 Event Table 20-31 20.12.7.2 Log Table 20-32 APPENDIX A Hardware Specifications A-1 A.1 ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf Specifications A-1 A.2 General Card Specifications A-2 A.2.1 Power A-2 A.2.2 Temperature A-4 A.3 Common Control Card Specifications A-4 A.3.1 TCC2 Card Specifications A-4 A.3.2 TCC2P Card Specifications A-5 A.3.3 TCC3 Card Specifications A-6 A.3.4 TNC Card Specifications (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6) A-6 A.3.5 TSC Card Specifications (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6) A-7Contents xxx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 A.3.6 AIC-I Card Specifications A-8 A.3.7 AEP Specifications (ANSI only) A-9 A.3.8 MIC-A/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only) A-10 A.3.9 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only) A-10 A.3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card Specifications A-11 A.4 Optical Service Channel Cards A-11 A.4.1 OSCM Card Specifications A-11 A.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Specifications A-12 A.5 Optical Amplifier Cards A-13 A.5.1 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Specifications A-13 A.5.2 OPT-BST Amplifier Card Specifications A-13 A.5.3 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Specifications A-14 A.5.4 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Specifications A-15 A.5.5 OPT-AMP-L Preamplifier Card Specifications A-15 A.5.6 OPT-AMP-17-C Amplifier Card Specifications A-16 A.5.7 OPT-AMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications A-17 A.5.8 OPT-RAMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications A-17 A.5.9 OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Card Specifications A-18 A.6 PSM (Protection Switching Module) Card Specifications A-19 A.7 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards A-20 A.7.1 32MUX-O Card Specifications A-20 A.7.2 32DMX-O Card Specifications A-20 A.7.3 4MD-xx.x Card Specifications A-21 A.8 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards A-22 A.8.1 32DMX Card Specifications A-22 A.8.2 32DMX-L Card Specifications A-24 A.8.3 32WSS Card Specifications A-26 A.8.4 32WSS-L Card Specifications A-28 A.8.5 40-MUX-C Card Specifications A-30 A.8.6 40-DMX-C Card Specifications A-30 A.8.7 40-DMX-CE Card Specifications A-31 A.8.8 40-WSS-C Card Specifications A-32 A.8.9 40-WSS-CE Card Specifications A-34 A.8.10 40-WXC-C Card Specifications A-37 A.8.11 80-WXC-C Card Specifications A-38 A.8.12 40-SMR1-C Card Specifications A-39 A.8.13 40-SMR2-C Card Specifications A-40 A.8.14 MMU Card Specifications A-42 A.9 Optical Add/Drop Cards A-44Contents xxxi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 A.9.1 AD-1C-xx.x Card Specifications A-44 A.9.2 AD-2C-xx.x Card Specifications A-44 A.9.3 AD-4C-xx.x Card Specifications A-45 A.9.4 AD-1B-xx.x Card Specifications A-47 A.9.5 AD-4B-xx.x Card Specifications A-50 A.10 Transponder and Muxponder Card Specifications A-54 A.10.1 TXP_MR_10G Card Specifications A-54 A.10.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Specifications A-56 A.10.3 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Specifications A-58 A.10.4 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Specifications A-60 A.10.5 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Specifications A-63 A.10.6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Card Specifications A-64 A.10.7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Specifications A-68 A.10.8 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Specifications A-71 A.10.9 MXP_MR_10DME_C Card Specifications A-74 A.10.10 MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Specifications A-77 A.10.11 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Specifications A-79 A.10.12 TXP_MR_10E Card Specifications A-81 A.10.13 TXP_MR_10E_C Card Specifications A-84 A.10.14 TXP_MR_10E_L Card Specifications A-87 A.10.15 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Specifications A-90 A.10.16 40G-MXP-C Card Specifications A-93 A.10.17 ADM-10G Card Specifications A-95 A.10.18 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Specifications A-96 A.10.19 OTU2_XP Card Specifications A-98 A.11 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Card Specifications A-99 A.12 Mesh Patch Panel Specifications A-100 A.12.1 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Specifications A-100 A.12.2 PP-MESH-8 Patch Panel Specifications A-101 A.12.3 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Specifications A-101 A.13 SFP and XFP Specifications A-102 A.14 Patch Panel Specifications A-102 APPENDIX B Administrative and Service States B-1 B.1 Service States B-1 B.2 Administrative States B-2 B.3 Service State Transitions B-3 B.3.1 DWDM Shelf Service State Transitions B-3 B.3.2 DWDM Card Service State Transitions B-4Contents xxxii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 B.3.3 Optical Payload Port Service State Transitions B-8 B.3.4 OSC Port Service State Transitions B-10 B.3.5 OCHNC, OCHCC, and OCH-Trail Service State Transitions B-12 B.3.6 Transponder/Muxponder Card Service State Transitions B-13 B.3.7 Transponder/Muxponder Port Service State Transitions B-18 CHAPTER C Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference C-1 C.1 Understanding PCLI C-1 C.1.1 PCLI Security C-2 C.2 PCLI Command Modes C-2 C.2.1 Common Commands C-2 C.2.2 User EXEC Mode C-2 C.2.3 Privileged EXEC Mode C-3 C.2.4 Global Configuration Mode C-4 C.2.5 VLAN Configuration Mode C-4 C.2.6 Interface Configuration Mode C-5 C.2.7 Service Instance Configuration Mode C-6 C.2.8 Policy Map Configuration Mode C-7 C.2.9 VLAN Profile Config Mode C-7 APPENDIX D Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration D-1 I NDEXFIGURES xxxiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 2-1 Hazard Level Label 2-3 Figure 2-2 TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-5 Figure 2-3 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-9 Figure 2-4 TCC3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-13 Figure 2-5 TNC Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-21 Figure 2-6 TSC Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-29 Figure 2-7 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram 2-35 Figure 2-8 RJ-11 Connector 2-38 Figure 2-9 MS-ISC-100T Faceplate 2-41 Figure 2-10 MIC-A/P Faceplate 2-42 Figure 2-11 MIC-A/P Block Diagram 2-43 Figure 2-12 MIC-C/T/P Faceplate 2-45 Figure 2-13 MIC-C/T/P Block Diagram 2-46 Figure 3-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 3-3 Figure 3-2 Hazard Level Label 3-3 Figure 3-3 Laser Source Connector Label 3-4 Figure 3-4 FDA Statement Label 3-4 Figure 3-5 FDA Statement Label 3-4 Figure 3-6 Shock Hazard Label 3-5 Figure 3-7 OSCM Card Faceplate 3-7 Figure 3-8 OSCM VOA Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 3-8 Figure 3-9 OSC-CSM Faceplate 3-11 Figure 3-10 OSC-CSM Block Diagram 3-12 Figure 3-11 OSC-CSM Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 3-13 Figure 4-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 4-5 Figure 4-2 Hazard Level Label 4-6 Figure 4-3 Laser Source Connector Label 4-6 Figure 4-4 FDA Statement Label 4-6 Figure 4-5 FDA Statement Label 4-7 Figure 4-6 Shock Hazard Label 4-7Figures xxxiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 4-7 OPT-PRE Faceplate 4-9 Figure 4-8 OPT-PRE Block Diagram 4-10 Figure 4-9 OPT-PRE Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-10 Figure 4-10 OPT-BST Faceplate 4-13 Figure 4-11 OPT-BST Block Diagram 4-14 Figure 4-12 OPT-BST Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-14 Figure 4-13 OPT-BST-E Faceplate 4-17 Figure 4-14 OPT-BST-E Block Diagram 4-18 Figure 4-15 OPT-BST-E Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-18 Figure 4-16 OPT-BST-L Faceplate 4-21 Figure 4-17 OPT-BST-L Block Diagram 4-22 Figure 4-18 OPT-BST-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-22 Figure 4-19 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate 4-26 Figure 4-20 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagram 4-27 Figure 4-21 OPT-AMP-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-27 Figure 4-22 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate 4-30 Figure 4-23 OPT-AMP17-C Block Diagram 4-31 Figure 4-24 OPT-AMP-17-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-31 Figure 4-25 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate 4-35 Figure 4-26 OPT-AMP-C Block Diagram 4-36 Figure 4-27 OPT-AMP-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4-36 Figure 4-28 OPT-RAMP-C Faceplate 4-40 Figure 4-29 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Block Diagram 4-41 Figure 4-30 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functional Block Diagram 4-41 Figure 5-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 5-9 Figure 5-2 Hazard Level Label 5-9 Figure 5-3 Laser Source Connector Label 5-9 Figure 5-4 FDA Statement Label 5-10 Figure 5-5 FDA Statement Label 5-10 Figure 5-6 Shock Hazard Label 5-10 Figure 5-7 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 5-11 Figure 5-8 Hazard Level Label 5-11 Figure 5-9 Laser Source Connector Label 5-11 Figure 5-10 FDA Statement Label 5-12 Figure 5-11 FDA Statement Label 5-12Figures xxxv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 5-12 Shock Hazard Label 5-12 Figure 5-13 32MUX-O Faceplate 5-14 Figure 5-14 32MUX-O Block Diagram 5-15 Figure 5-15 32MUX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5-15 Figure 5-16 32DMX-O Faceplate 5-19 Figure 5-17 32DMX-O Block Diagram 5-20 Figure 5-18 32DMX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5-20 Figure 5-19 4MD-xx.x Faceplate 5-22 Figure 5-20 4MD-xx.x Block Diagram 5-23 Figure 5-21 4MD-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5-23 Figure 6-1 Hazard Level Label 6-2 Figure 6-2 Laser Source Connector Label 6-3 Figure 6-3 FDA Statement Label 6-3 Figure 6-4 FDA Statement Label 6-3 Figure 6-5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplates 6-5 Figure 6-6 Block Diagram of TDC-CC and TDC-FC 6-6 Figure 7-1 PSM Block Diagram 7-3 Figure 7-2 PSM Card Faceplate 7-4 Figure 7-3 PSM Bidirectional Switching 7-5 Figure 8-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 8-9 Figure 8-2 Hazard Level Label 8-9 Figure 8-3 Laser Source Connector Label 8-10 Figure 8-4 FDA Statement Label 8-10 Figure 8-5 FDA Statement Label 8-10 Figure 8-6 Shock Hazard Label 8-11 Figure 8-7 AD-1C-xx.x Faceplate 8-12 Figure 8-8 AD-1C-xx.x Block Diagram 8-13 Figure 8-9 AD-1C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8-13 Figure 8-10 AD-2C-xx.x Faceplate 8-15 Figure 8-11 AD-2C-xx.x Block Diagram 8-16 Figure 8-12 AD-2C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8-16 Figure 8-13 AD-4C-xx.x Faceplate 8-19 Figure 8-14 AD-4C-xx.x Block Diagram 8-20 Figure 8-15 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8-20 Figure 8-16 AD-1B-xx.x Faceplate 8-23Figures xxxvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 8-17 AD-1B-xx.x Block Diagram 8-24 Figure 8-18 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8-24 Figure 8-19 AD-4B-xx.x Faceplate 8-26 Figure 8-20 AD-4B-xx.x Block Diagram 8-27 Figure 8-21 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8-27 Figure 9-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 9-14 Figure 9-2 Hazard Level Label 9-15 Figure 9-3 Laser Source Connector Label 9-15 Figure 9-4 FDA Statement Label 9-15 Figure 9-5 FDA Statement Label 9-16 Figure 9-6 Shock Hazard Label 9-16 Figure 9-7 32WSS Faceplate and Ports 9-18 Figure 9-8 32WSS Block Diagram 9-19 Figure 9-9 32WSS Optical Block Diagram 9-20 Figure 9-10 32WSS-L Faceplate and Ports 9-25 Figure 9-11 32WSS-L Block Diagram 9-26 Figure 9-12 32WSS-L Optical Block Diagram 9-27 Figure 9-13 32DMX Faceplate and Ports 9-31 Figure 9-14 32DMX Block Diagram 9-32 Figure 9-15 32DMX Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-32 Figure 9-16 32DMX-L Faceplate and Ports 9-36 Figure 9-17 32DMX-L Block Diagram 9-37 Figure 9-18 32DMX-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-37 Figure 9-19 40-DMX-C Faceplate 9-41 Figure 9-20 40-DMX-C Block Diagram 9-42 Figure 9-21 40-DMX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-42 Figure 9-22 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate 9-46 Figure 9-23 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram 9-47 Figure 9-24 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-47 Figure 9-25 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate 9-51 Figure 9-26 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram 9-52 Figure 9-27 40-MUX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-52 Figure 9-28 40-WSS-C Faceplate 9-56 Figure 9-29 40-WSS-C Block Diagram 9-57 Figure 9-30 40-WSS-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-58Figures xxxvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 9-31 40-WSS-CE Faceplate 9-63 Figure 9-32 40-WSS-CE Block Diagram 9-64 Figure 9-33 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-65 Figure 9-34 40-WXC-C Faceplate 9-70 Figure 9-35 40-WXC-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-71 Figure 9-36 80-WXC-C Faceplate and the Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9-76 Figure 9-37 40-SMR1-C Faceplate 9-83 Figure 9-38 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram 9-84 Figure 9-39 40-SMR2-C Faceplate 9-88 Figure 9-40 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram 9-88 Figure 9-41 MMU Faceplate and Ports 9-93 Figure 9-42 MMU Block Diagram 9-94 Figure 10-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label 10-9 Figure 10-2 Hazard Level Label 10-9 Figure 10-3 Laser Source Connector Label 10-9 Figure 10-4 FDA Statement Label 10-10 Figure 10-5 FDA Statement Label 10-10 Figure 10-6 Shock Hazard Label 10-10 Figure 10-7 Class 1M Laser Product Statement 10-11 Figure 10-8 Hazard Level Label 10-11 Figure 10-9 Laser Source Connector Label 10-12 Figure 10-10 FDA Statement Label 10-12 Figure 10-11 FDA Statement Label 10-12 Figure 10-12 Shock Hazard Label 10-13 Figure 10-13 TXP_MR_10G Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-15 Figure 10-14 TXP_MR_10E Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-18 Figure 10-15 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-22 Figure 10-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates 10-27 Figure 10-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram 10-28 Figure 10-18 MXP_2.5G_10G Faceplate 10-31 Figure 10-19 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Block Diagram 10-32 Figure 10-20 MXP_2.5G_10E Faceplate 10-35 Figure 10-21 MXP_2.5G_10E Block Diagram 10-36 Figure 10-22 MXP_2.5G_10E _C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-43 Figure 10-23 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates 10-53Figures xxxviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 10-24 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram 10-54 Figure 10-25 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-60 Figure 10-26 40G-MXP-C Cards in Unidirectional Regeneration Configuration 10-66 Figure 10-27 40G-MXP-C Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-68 Figure 10-28 GE_XP and GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-75 Figure 10-29 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram 10-76 Figure 10-30 Recommended Topology for Using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS -SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs 10-77 Figure 10-31 ADM-10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-99 Figure 10-32 ADM-10G Card Port Capacities 10-100 Figure 10-33 OTU2_XP Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-114 Figure 10-34 TXP_MR_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-122 Figure 10-35 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-127 Figure 10-36 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-136 Figure 10-37 Y-Cable Protection 10-141 Figure 10-38 Splitter Protection 10-142 Figure 11-1 Terminal Node Configuration With 32MUX-O Cards Installed 11-3 Figure 11-2 Terminal Node Configuration with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed 11-4 Figure 11-3 Terminal Node with 40-MUX-C Cards Installed 11-5 Figure 11-4 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-6 Figure 11-5 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-7 Figure 11-6 Terminal Node with 40-SMR2-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-8 Figure 11-7 Amplified OADM Node Configuration Example 11-9 Figure 11-8 Amplified OADM Node Channel Flow Example 11-10 Figure 11-9 ROADM Node with 32DMX Cards Installed 11-11 Figure 11-10 ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed 11-12 Figure 11-11 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-13 Figure 11-12 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-14 Figure 11-13 ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Cards Installed - 15454 - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11-15 Figure 11-14 80-Channel Colored Two-Degree ROADM Node 11-16 Figure 11-15 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Colored Two-degree ROADM Node 11-17 Figure 11-16 80-Channel n-degree ROADM node with Omni-directional Side 11-18 Figure 11-17 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel n-degree ROADM node with Omni-directional Side 11-19 Figure 11-18 40-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with 40-WXC-C Based Colorless Side 11-20 Figure 11-19 40-Channel Four-degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Based Colorless Side 11-21Figures xxxix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 11-20 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node 11-22 Figure 11-21 80-Channel Colorless Two-degree ROADM Node 11-23 Figure 11-22 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node with OPT-RAMP-C Card 11-24 Figure 11-23 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Two-degree Colorless ROADM Node 11-25 Figure 11-24 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 32WSS or 40-WSS-C Card 11-26 Figure 11-25 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 40-SMR1-C Card 11-27 Figure 11-26 Hub Node Configuration Example with 32-Channel C-Band Cards 11-29 Figure 11-27 Hub Node Configuration Example with 40-WSS-C Cards 11-30 Figure 11-28 Hub Node Channel Flow Example 11-31 Figure 11-29 Anti-ASE Node Channel Flow Example 11-32 Figure 11-30 Line Amplifier Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and Cisco ONS 15454 M2 11-33 Figure 11-31 OSC Regeneration Line Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, and Cisco ONS 15454 M2 11-34 Figure 11-32 OSC Regeneration Line Node Flow 11-34 Figure 11-33 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node 11-36 Figure 11-34 OPT-RAMP-C Card or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Configuration 11-37 Figure 11-35 Line Site Configured with OPT-AMP-C 11-37 Figure 11-36 Line Site with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE On One Side 11-38 Figure 11-37 PSM Channel Protection Configuration 11-39 Figure 11-38 PSM Multiplex Section Protection Configuration 11-40 Figure 11-39 PSM Line Protection Configuration 11-41 Figure 11-40 Multishelf Node Configuration 11-42 Figure 11-41 Interconnecting Sides Conceptual View 11-44 Figure 11-42 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf 11-54 Figure 11-43 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-MUX-C Cards 11-55 Figure 11-44 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-WSS-C Cards 11-56 Figure 11-45 Line Termination Mesh Nodes—ROADM With MMU Cards 11-57 Figure 11-46 40-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-58 Figure 11-47 40-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-59 Figure 11-48 40-Channel n-Degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omni-directional Side 11-60 Figure 11-49 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-61 Figure 11-50 Line Termination Node 11-62 Figure 11-51 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram 11-63 Figure 11-52 80-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-64 Figure 11-53 80-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-65 Figure 11-54 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omnidirectional Side 11-66Figures xl Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 11-55 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11-67 Figure 11-56 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf 11-68 Figure 11-57 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram 11-69 Figure 11-58 XC Termination Mesh Node Shelf 11-70 Figure 11-59 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Block Diagram 11-71 Figure 11-60 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Signal Flow 11-71 Figure 11-61 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Block Diagram 11-72 Figure 11-62 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Signal Flow 11-73 Figure 11-63 Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 11-74 Figure 11-64 Fibering OSC Terminations—Hub Node with OSCM Cards 11-76 Figure 11-65 Fibering a Hub Node 11-78 Figure 11-66 Fibering a Line Amplifier Node 11-80 Figure 11-67 Fibering an OSC Regeneration Node 11-82 Figure 11-68 Fibering an Amplified OADM Node 11-85 Figure 11-69 Fibering a Passive OADM Node 11-87 Figure 11-70 Fibering a ROADM Node 11-89 Figure 11-71 WDM-ANS Provisioning 11-92 Figure 11-72 Raman Gain on Node B 11-95 Figure 11-73 Functional View for an Eight-Sided Node 11-97 Figure 11-74 Side A Details 11-98 Figure 11-75 Side A OPT-BST Card Shelf and Slot Information 11-100 Figure 11-76 Side A 40-MUX Port Information 11-101 Figure 11-77 Patchcord Input and Output Port State Information 11-102 Figure 11-78 MPO Information 11-103 Figure 11-79 Side A MPO Connection to an MXP Before Double-Clicking 11-104 Figure 11-80 Side A MPO Connection to an MXP After Double-Clicking 11-104 Figure 11-81 Side A View Options 11-105 Figure 11-82 Side A View Options (after Selecting Fit to View) 11-105 Figure 11-83 Optical Path Power 11-106 Figure 11-84 DWDM Network Functional View 11-108 Figure 12-1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 12-3 Figure 12-2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 12-4 Figure 12-3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 12-5 Figure 12-4 Meshed Traffic Topology 12-6 Figure 12-5 Linear Configuration with an OADM Node 12-6Figures xli Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 12-6 Linear Configuration without an OADM Node 12-7 Figure 12-7 Single-Span Link 12-7 Figure 12-8 Mesh Network 12-8 Figure 12-9 Multiring Network 12-9 Figure 12-10 Interconnected Rings 12-10 Figure 12-11 Colorless and Omni-directional n- Degree ROADM Node 12-10 Figure 12-12 Colorless Two-Degree ROADM Node 12-11 Figure 12-13 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-1 12-12 Figure 12-14 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-2 12-12 Figure 12-15 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-1 12-13 Figure 12-16 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-2 12-14 Figure 12-17 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-1 12-15 Figure 12-18 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-2 12-15 Figure 12-19 Spur 12-16 Figure 12-20 Scenario A: Spur Without 15454 Chassis in RemoteTerminal T 12-17 Figure 12-21 Scenario B: Spur With Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 12-17 Figure 12-22 Scenario C: Spur with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 12-18 Figure 12-23 Using Amplifier Gain Adjustment to Compensate for System Degradation 12-21 Figure 12-24 ROADM Power Monitoring Subtab 12-25 Figure 12-25 Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards 12-31 Figure 12-26 Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards 12-33 Figure 12-27 Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards 12-34 Figure 12-28 Nodes Using OPT-AMP Cards 12-36 Figure 12-29 Fiber Cut With DCN Extension 12-38 Figure 12-30 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-39 Figure 12-31 Effect of Gain Ripple and Gain Tilt on Amplifier Output Power 12-41 Figure 12-32 Flat Gain (Gain Tilt = 0 dB) 12-42 Figure 12-33 Effect of VOA Attenuation on Gain Tilt 12-42 Figure 12-34 System Tilt Compensation Without an ROADM Node 12-44 Figure 12-35 Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters 12-45 Figure 12-36 System Tilt Compensation With an ROADM Node 12-46 Figure 12-37 ITU-T G.709 Frame Structure 12-47 Figure 12-38 104-Channel C-Band plus L-Band ROADM Node 12-50 Figure 12-39 112-Channel C-Band plus L-Band ROADM Node 12-51 Figure 13-1 Optical Channel Circuits 13-1Figures xlii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 13-2 Optical Channel Management 13-4 Figure 13-3 Network View Provisionable Patchcords Tab 13-10 Figure 14-1 Node View (Default Login View for Single-Shelf Mode) 14-9 Figure 14-2 Multishelf View (Default Login View for Multishelf Mode) 14-10 Figure 14-3 Terminal Loopback Indicator 14-13 Figure 14-4 Facility Loopback Indicator 14-13 Figure 14-5 Network in CTC Network View 14-16 Figure 14-6 Static IP-Over-CLNS Tunnels 14-20 Figure 14-7 TL1 Tunnels 14-21 Figure 16-1 ONS 15454 Timing Example 16-3 Figure 17-1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet (ANSI and ETSI) 17-3 Figure 17-2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to Router (ANSI and ETSI) 17-4 Figure 17-3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP (ANSI and ETSI) 17-6 Figure 17-4 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing (ANSI and ETSI) 17-7 Figure 17-5 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer (ANSI and ETSI) 17-8 Figure 17-6 Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination (ANSI and ETSI) 17-9 Figure 17-7 Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations (ANSI and ETSI) 17-10 Figure 17-8 Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled (ANSI and ETSI) 17-11 Figure 17-9 Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled (ANSI and ETSI) 17-12 Figure 17-10 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet (ANSI and ETSI) 17-14 Figure 17-11 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets (ANSI and ETSI) 17-15 Figure 17-12 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings (ANSI and ETSI) 17-16 Figure 17-13 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet (ANSI and ETSI) 17-18 Figure 17-14 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets (ANSI and ETSI) 17-19 Figure 17-15 Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode Enabled 17-21 Figure 17-16 Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode Enabled 17-22 Figure 17-17 DCN Case Study 1: ONS 15454 Ring with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections 17-24 Figure 17-18 DCN Case Study 1: ONS 15454 Ring with Two Subnets, Two DCN Connections, and GRE Tunnel 17-25 Figure 17-19 DCN Case Study 2: ONS 15454 Linear Topology with DCN Connections at Both Ends 17-28 Figure 17-20 DCN Case Study 3: ONS 15454 Linear Topology with DCN Connections at Both Ends Using OSPF 17-31 Figure 17-21 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies with Two DCN Connections 17-35 Figure 17-22 Network Using OSC 17-38 Figure 17-23 Network Using External DCN 17-38 Figure 17-24 Network Using GCC/DCC 17-39 Figure 17-25 Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations 17-44Figures xliii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Figure 17-26 Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port 17-45 Figure 17-27 OSI/MSTP Scenario 1 17-46 Figure 17-28 OSI/MSTP Scenario 2 17-47 Figure 17-29 OSI/MSTP Scenario 3 17-48 Figure 17-30 OSI/IP Scenario 4 17-49 Figure 17-31 LMP and LMP-WDM Relationship 17-53 Figure 17-32 LMP System Implementation 17-54 Figure 17-33 IPv6-IPv4 Interaction 17-55 Figure 17-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node and Cisco CRS-1 Router Network 17-58 Figure 17-35 Cisco CRS-1 Router in CTC Network View 17-59 Figure 17-36 Cisco CRS-1 Router PM Parameters 17-61 Figure 17-37 Photonic Path Trace 17-62 Figure 18-1 ONS 15454 Shelf LCD Panel 18-2 Figure 18-2 External Alarms and Controls Using a Virtual Wire 18-13 Figure 18-3 Navigating to Shelf View from Multishelf View 18-15 Figure 19-1 ONS 15454 ANSI Node PM Read Points for TXP_MR_10G Card 19-8 Figure 19-2 ONS 15454 ETSI Node PM Read Points on TXP_MR_10G Cards 19-9 Figure 19-3 ONS 15454 ANSI Node PM Read Points on OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 19-25 Figure 19-4 ONS 15454 ETSI Node PM Read Points on OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 19-26 Figure 20-1 Basic Network Managed by SNMP 20-2 Figure 20-2 Example of the Primary SNMP Components 20-3 Figure 20-3 Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager 20-4Figures xliv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02TABLES xlv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 2-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards 2-2 Table 2-2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators 2-6 Table 2-3 TCC2 Network-Level Indicators 2-7 Table 2-4 TCC2 Power-Level Indicators 2-7 Table 2-5 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators 2-11 Table 2-6 TCC2P Network-Level Indicators 2-11 Table 2-7 TCC2P Power-Level Indicators 2-12 Table 2-8 TCC3 Card-Level Indicators 2-15 Table 2-9 TCC3 Network-Level Indicators 2-15 Table 2-10 TCC3 Power-Level Indicators 2-16 Table 2-11 TNC Card-Level Indicators 2-22 Table 2-12 TNC Network-Level Indicators 2-23 Table 2-13 TNC Power-Level Indicators 2-24 Table 2-14 TNC Port-Level Indicators 2-24 Table 2-15 TNC SFP Indicators 2-25 Table 2-16 TSC Card-Level Indicators 2-30 Table 2-17 TSC Network-Level Indicators 2-31 Table 2-18 TSC Power-Level Indicators 2-32 Table 2-19 TSC Port-Level Indicators 2-32 Table 2-20 DIS Conventions in the Software Version 2-34 Table 2-21 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 2-35 Table 2-22 Orderwire Pin Assignments 2-38 Table 2-23 UDC Pin Assignments 2-38 Table 2-24 DCC Pin Assignments 2-39 Table 2-25 MS-ISC-100T Card Port Assignments 2-40 Table 2-26 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators 2-42 Table 2-27 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector 2-43 Table 3-1 OSCM, OSC-CSM, and MMU Card Summary 3-2 Table 3-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Service Channel Cards 3-2 Table 3-3 OSCM VOA Port Calibration 3-8Tables xlvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 3-4 OSCM Card-Level Indicators 3-8 Table 3-5 OSC-CSM Port Calibration 3-14 Table 3-6 Alarms and Thresholds 3-14 Table 3-7 OSC-CSM Card-Level Indicators 3-15 Table 4-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 4-3 Table 4-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards 4-4 Table 4-3 Alarms and Thresholds 4-5 Table 4-4 OPT-PRE Port Calibration 4-10 Table 4-5 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card-Level Indicators 4-11 Table 4-6 OPT-BST Port Calibration 4-14 Table 4-7 OPT-BST Card-Level Indicators 4-15 Table 4-8 OPT-BST-E Port Calibration 4-18 Table 4-9 OPT-BST-E Card-Level Indicators 4-19 Table 4-10 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration 4-22 Table 4-11 OPT-BST-L Card-Level Indicators 4-23 Table 4-12 OPT-AMP-L Port Calibration 4-28 Table 4-13 OPT-AMP-L Card-Level Indicators 4-28 Table 4-14 OPT-AMP-17-C Port Calibration 4-32 Table 4-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Card-Level Indicators 4-32 Table 4-16 OPT-AMP-C Port Calibration 4-37 Table 4-17 OPT-AMP-C Card-Level Indicators 4-37 Table 4-18 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration 4-42 Table 4-19 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card-Level Indicators 4-43 Table 5-1 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 5-2 Table 5-2 Software Compatibility for Legacy Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 5-2 Table 5-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes 5-3 Table 5-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 5-3 Table 5-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters 5-4 Table 5-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 5-5 Table 5-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) 5-6 Table 5-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) 5-7 Table 5-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan 5-16 Table 5-10 32MUX-O Port Calibration 5-17 Table 5-11 32MUX-O Card-Level Indicators 5-17 Table 5-12 32DMX-O Port Calibration 5-20Tables xlvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 5-13 32DMX-O Card-Level Indicators 5-21 Table 5-14 4MD-xx.x Channel Sets 5-24 Table 5-15 4MD-xx.x Port Calibration 5-24 Table 5-16 4MD-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 5-25 Table 6-1 T-DCU Cards 6-2 Table 6-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value 6-4 Table 6-3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Card-Level Indicators 6-7 Table 7-1 PSM Card-Level Indicators 7-4 Table 8-1 Optical Add/Drop Cards 8-2 Table 8-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Add/Drop Cards 8-3 Table 8-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes 8-4 Table 8-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 8-4 Table 8-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 8-5 Table 8-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 8-6 Table 8-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) 8-7 Table 8-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration 8-13 Table 8-9 AD-1C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-14 Table 8-10 AD-2C-xx.x Channel Pairs 8-17 Table 8-11 AD-2C-xx.x Port Calibration 8-17 Table 8-12 AD-2C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-18 Table 8-13 AD-4C-xx.x Channel Sets 8-21 Table 8-14 AD-4C-xx.x Port Calibration 8-21 Table 8-15 AD-4C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-21 Table 8-16 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration 8-24 Table 8-17 AD-1B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-25 Table 8-18 AD-4B-xx.x Port Calibration 8-28 Table 8-19 AD-4B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators 8-28 Table 9-1 ROADM Card Summary 9-2 Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards 9-3 Table 9-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes 9-5 Table 9-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance 9-6 Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) 9-7 Table 9-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) 9-8 Table 9-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) 9-9 Table 9-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F) 9-9Tables xlviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 9-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M) 9-10 Table 9-10 DWDM C-Band Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing 9-11 Table 9-11 DWDM L-band Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing 9-13 Table 9-12 32WSS Port Calibration 9-21 Table 9-13 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan 9-22 Table 9-14 32WSS Card-Level Indicators 9-23 Table 9-15 32WSS-L Port Calibration 9-28 Table 9-16 32WSS-L Channel Plan 9-29 Table 9-17 32WSS-L Card-Level Indicators 9-30 Table 9-18 32DMX Port Calibration 9-33 Table 9-19 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan 9-33 Table 9-20 32DMX Card-Level Indicators 9-34 Table 9-21 32DMX-L Port Calibration 9-38 Table 9-22 32DMX-L Channel Plan 9-38 Table 9-23 32DMX-L Card-Level Indicators 9-39 Table 9-24 40-DMX-C Port Calibration 9-43 Table 9-25 40-DMX-C Channel Plan 9-43 Table 9-26 40-DMX-C Card-Level Indicators 9-45 Table 9-27 40-DMX-CE Card Port Calibration 9-48 Table 9-28 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan 9-48 Table 9-29 40-DMX-CE Card-Level Indicators 9-49 Table 9-30 40-MUX-C Port Calibration 9-53 Table 9-31 40-MUX-C Channel Plan 9-53 Table 9-32 40-MUX-C Card-Level Indicators 9-54 Table 9-33 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration 9-58 Table 9-34 40-WSS-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration 9-59 Table 9-35 40-WSS-C Channel Plan 9-59 Table 9-36 40-WSS-C Card-Level Indicators 9-61 Table 9-37 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration 9-65 Table 9-38 40-WSS-CE Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration 9-66 Table 9-39 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan 9-66 Table 9-40 40-WSS-CE Card-Level Indicators 9-68 Table 9-41 40-WXC-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration 9-71 Table 9-42 40-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration 9-72 Table 9-43 40-WXC-C Channel Plan 9-73Tables xlix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 9-44 40-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators 9-74 Table 9-45 80-WXC-C Port Calibration 9-77 Table 9-46 80-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration 9-78 Table 9-47 80-WXC-C Channel Plan 9-78 Table 9-48 80-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators 9-81 Table 9-49 40-SMR1-C Port Calibration 9-85 Table 9-50 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan 9-85 Table 9-51 40-SMR1-C Card-Level Indicators 9-87 Table 9-52 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration 9-89 Table 9-53 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan 9-90 Table 9-54 40-SMR2-C Card-Level Indicators 9-91 Table 9-55 MMU Port Calibration 9-94 Table 9-56 MMU Card-Level Indicators 9-95 Table 10-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 10-3 Table 10-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 10-5 Table 10-3 TXP_MR_10G Card-Level Indicators 10-16 Table 10-4 TXP_MR_10G Port-Level Indicators 10-16 Table 10-5 TXP_MR_10E Card-Level Indicators 10-20 Table 10-6 TXP_MR_10E Port-Level Indicators 10-20 Table 10-7 TXP_MR_10E _C and TXP_MR_10E_L Card-Level Indicators 10-24 Table 10-8 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Port-Level Indicators 10-24 Table 10-9 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface 10-25 Table 10-10 Trunk Bit Rates With ITU-T G.709 Enabled 10-26 Table 10-11 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators 10-29 Table 10-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators 10-29 Table 10-13 MXP_2.5G_10G Card-Level Indicators 10-33 Table 10-14 MXP_2.5G_10G Port-Level Indicators 10-33 Table 10-15 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths 10-38 Table 10-16 MXP_2.5G_10E Card-Level Indicators 10-40 Table 10-17 MXP_2.5G_10E Port-Level Indicators 10-40 Table 10-18 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths 10-46 Table 10-19 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths 10-47 Table 10-20 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card-Level Indicators 10-49 Table 10-21 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators 10-49 Table 10-22 Card Versions 10-50Tables l Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 10-23 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation 10-51 Table 10-24 Client Data Rates and Ports 10-51 Table 10-25 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators 10-55 Table 10-26 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators 10-55 Table 10-27 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation 10-57 Table 10-28 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 10-57 Table 10-29 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths 10-61 Table 10-30 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths 10-62 Table 10-31 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card-Level Indicators 10-63 Table 10-32 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Port-Level Indicators 10-64 Table 10-33 40G-MXP-C Client Interface Data Rates 10-65 Table 10-34 40G-MXP-C Client Interface Input Data Rates 10-65 Table 10-35 40G-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths 10-69 Table 10-36 40G-MXP-C Card-Level Indicators 10-70 Table 10-37 40G-MXP-C Card Port-Level Indicators 10-71 Table 10-38 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes 10-72 Table 10-39 Protocol Compatibility List for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10-74 Table 10-40 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card-Level Indicators 10-78 Table 10-41 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Port-Level Indicators 10-78 Table 10-42 OC-48/STM-16 Configuration Limitations 10-102 Table 10-43 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 10-105 Table 10-44 Supported SDH Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 SDH 10-106 Table 10-45 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters 10-107 Table 10-46 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters 10-109 Table 10-47 ADM-10G Card-Level Indicators 10-110 Table 10-48 ADM-10G Card Port-Level LED Indications 10-111 Table 10-49 OTU2_XP Card Configurations and Ports 10-111 Table 10-50 OTU2_XP Card-Level Indicators 10-115 Table 10-51 OTU2_XP PPM Port-Level Indicators 10-115 Table 10-52 OTU2_XP Card Configuration for IB_5G Payload Provisioning 10-118 Table 10-53 Card Configuration Transition Summary 10-118 Table 10-54 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-124 Table 10-55 TXP_MR_10EX _C Port-Level Indicators 10-125 Table 10-56 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths 10-130 Table 10-57 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-132Tables li Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 10-58 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators 10-132 Table 10-59 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation 10-133 Table 10-60 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 10-134 Table 10-61 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths 10-137 Table 10-62 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card-Level Indicators 10-138 Table 10-63 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Port-Level Indicators 10-139 Table 10-64 Termination Modes 10-143 Table 11-1 Supported Fiber Stage Configurations 11-46 Table 11-2 Multishelf ROADM Layout Example 11-49 Table 11-3 Multishelf Protected ROADM Layout Example 11-49 Table 11-4 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example 11-49 Table 11-5 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example 11-50 Table 11-6 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example 11-50 Table 11-7 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example 11-51 Table 11-8 Multishelf Eight-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example 11-51 Table 11-9 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example 11-52 Table 11-10 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node User-Defined Layout Example 11-52 Table 11-11 Ranges and Values for the ANS Parameters 11-91 Table 11-12 Example of Raman Power Measurements 11-96 Table 11-13 Circuits, Optical Power, and Alarms tab 11-107 Table 12-1 Supported Topologies and Node Types 12-19 Table 12-2 Flat Output Gain Range Limits 12-43 Table 12-3 Detection of Power Fluctuation 12-52 Table 13-1 OCHNC Ports 13-2 Table 13-2 OCHCC and OCH Trail Ports 13-4 Table 13-3 Internal Patchcord Ports 13-8 Table 13-4 Provisionable Patchcord Ports 13-11 Table 14-1 JRE Compatibility 14-3 Table 14-2 Computer Requirements for CTC 14-4 Table 14-3 Connection Methods for ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 14-7 Table 14-4 Multishelf View (Multishelf Mode), Node View (Single-Shelf Mode), and Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Card Colors 14-11 Table 14-5 Multishelf View (Multishelf Mode) and Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) FMEC Color 14-12 Table 14-6 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Card Statuses 14-12 Table 14-7 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Card Port Colors and Service States 14-12 Table 14-8 Multishelf View Tabs and Subtabs 14-14Tables lii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 14-9 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Tabs and Subtabs 14-15 Table 14-10 Network View Tabs and Subtabs 14-16 Table 14-11 Node Status Shown in Network View 14-17 Table 14-12 DCC Colors Indicating State in Network View 14-17 Table 14-13 Link Icons 14-18 Table 14-14 Card View Tabs and Subtabs 14-18 Table 14-15 TL1 and Static IP-Over-CLNS Tunnels Comparison 14-21 Table 15-1 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View 15-2 Table 15-2 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Network View 15-5 Table 15-3 ONS 15454 Default User Idle Times 15-7 Table 15-4 Audit Trail Window Columns 15-8 Table 15-5 Shared Secret Character Groups 15-10 Table 16-1 SDH SSM Message Set 16-4 Table 16-2 SSM Generation 1 Message Set 16-4 Table 16-3 SSM Generation 2 Message Set 16-4 Table 17-1 General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist 17-2 Table 17-2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings 17-14 Table 17-3 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules 17-17 Table 17-4 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules 17-17 Table 17-5 DCN Case Study 1 Node IP Addresses 17-27 Table 17-6 DCN Case Study 2 Node IP Addresses 17-30 Table 17-7 DCN Case Study 3 Node IP Addresses 17-33 Table 17-8 DCN Case Study 4 Node IP Addresses 17-37 Table 17-9 Sample Routing Table Entries 17-40 Table 17-10 Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC 17-41 Table 17-11 Differences Between an IPv6 Node and an IPv4 Node 17-55 Table 18-1 Alarm Column Descriptions 18-2 Table 18-2 Color Codes for Alarms and Condition Severities 18-3 Table 18-3 Alarm Display 18-4 Table 18-4 Conditions Display 18-5 Table 18-5 Conditions Column Description 18-5 Table 18-6 History Column Description 18-7 Table 18-7 Alarm Profile Buttons 18-10 Table 18-8 Alarm Profile Editing Options 18-11 Table 18-9 TCA Suppression Groups 18-18Tables liii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 19-1 Optics PM Parameters 19-3 Table 19-2 Payload Ethernet PM Parameters 19-4 Table 19-3 Payload SONET PM Parameters 19-4 Table 19-4 Payload SDH PM Parameters 19-6 Table 19-5 Full RMON Statistics on TNC Card 19-6 Table 19-6 Trunk-Side and Client-Side Optics PM Parameters 19-10 Table 19-7 Transponder, Muxponder, and Xponder Port Type PM Provisioning Options 19-11 Table 19-8 ONS 15454 SONET/SDH Layer Far-End and Near-End PMs 19-12 Table 19-9 Full RMON Statistics on TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP Cards 19-13 Table 19-10 Full RMON Statistics on ADM-10G Card 19-13 Table 19-11 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or Fibre Channel (FC) Payload PMs for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 19-14 Table 19-12 10G Fibre Channel (FC) Payload PMs for the OTU2_XP Card 19-14 Table 19-13 ONE_GE or FC1G Payload PMs for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 19-15 Table 19-14 FC1G Payload PMs on the Client Side 19-15 Table 19-15 GFP-T Payload PMs 19-16 Table 19-16 maxBaseRate for STS and VC Circuits 19-16 Table 19-17 History Statistics per Time Interval 19-17 Table 19-18 Transponder, Muxponder, and Xponder PM Provisioning Options 19-17 Table 19-19 ITU G.709 OTN Trunk-Side PMs 19-19 Table 19-20 FEC OTN Trunk-Side PMs 19-19 Table 19-21 ONS 15454 Optics and 8b10b PMs 19-20 Table 19-22 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters 19-20 Table 19-23 Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval 19-23 Table 19-24 Optical PM Parameters for Optical Amplifier Cards 19-23 Table 19-25 Optical PM Parameters of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 19-23 Table 19-26 Optical PM Parameters for 4MD-xx.x Cards 19-24 Table 19-27 Optical PM Parameters for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards 19-24 Table 19-28 Optical PM Parameters for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards 19-24 Table 19-29 ANSI OSCM/OSC-CSM (OC3) Card PMs 19-26 Table 19-30 ETSI OSCM and OSC-CSM Card PMs 19-26 Table 19-31 ONS 15454 Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions 19-27 Table 19-32 ITU G.709 and ITU-T G.8021 Section Monitoring PM Definitions 19-29 Table 19-33 ITU G.709 Path Monitoring PM Definitions 19-29 Table 19-34 Full RMON Statistics PM Definitions 19-30Tables liv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table 19-35 FEC PM Definitions 19-34 Table 19-36 SONET PM Parameters 19-34 Table 19-37 SDH PM Parameters 19-35 Table 20-1 ONS 15454 SNMP Message Types 20-5 Table 20-2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15454 System 20-6 Table 20-3 ONS 15454 Proprietary MIBs 20-7 Table 20-4 cerentGenericPmThresholdTable 20-12 Table 20-5 32-Bit cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentTable 20-13 Table 20-6 32-Bit cerentGenericPmStatsIntervalTable 20-13 Table 20-7 Traps Supported in GE-XP, 10GE-XP, GE-XPE, and 10GE-XPE Cards 20-14 Table 20-8 MIBs Supported in TNC Card 20-14 Table 20-9 MIBs Supported in TSC Card 20-14 Table 20-10 Supported Generic IETF Traps 20-15 Table 20-11 Supported ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings 20-16 Table 20-12 RMON History Control Periods and History Categories 20-28 Table 20-13 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable 20-30 Table A-1 Individual Card Power Requirements(Typical Values at 25 degrees C) A-2 Table A-2 32MUX-O Optical Specifications A-20 Table A-3 32DMX-O Optical Specifications A-21 Table A-4 4MD-xx.x Optical Specifications A-21 Table A-5 32DMX Optical Specifications A-22 Table A-6 32DMX Channel Plan A-23 Table A-7 32DMX -L Optical Specifications A-24 Table A-8 32DMX-L Channel Plan A-25 Table A-9 32WSS Optical Specifications A-26 Table A-10 32WSS Channel Plan A-27 Table A-11 32WSS-L Optical Specifications A-28 Table A-12 32WSS-L Channel Plan A-29 Table A-13 40-MUX-C Card Optical Specifications A-30 Table A-14 40-DMX-C Card Optical Specifications A-31 Table A-15 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Specifications A-31 Table A-16 40-WSS-C Optical Specifications A-32 Table A-17 40-WSS-C Channel Grid A-33 Table A-18 40-WSS-C Card Optical Specifications A-35 Table A-19 40-WSS-C Card Channel Grid A-36Tables lv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table A-20 40-WXC-C Optical Specifications A-37 Table A-21 80-WXC-C Card Optical Specifications A-38 Table A-22 40-SMR1-C Optical Specifications A-39 Table A-23 40-SMR2-C Optical Specifications A-40 Table A-24 MMU Optical Specifications A-42 Table A-25 AD-1C-xx.x Card Optical Specifications A-44 Table A-26 AD-2C-xx.x Card Optical Specifications A-45 Table A-27 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Specifications A-46 Table A-28 AD-1B-xx.x Channel Allocation Plan by Band A-47 Table A-29 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Specifications A-49 Table A-30 AD-1B-xx.x Transmit and Receive Dropped Band Wavelength Ranges A-49 Table A-31 AD-4B-xx.x Channel Allocation Plan by Band A-51 Table A-32 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Specifications A-53 Table A-33 AD-4B-xx.x Transmit and Receive Dropped Band Wavelength Ranges A-53 Table A-34 TXP_MR_2.5G/TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-59 Table A-35 MXP_MR_2.5G/MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-62 Table A-36 MXP_2.5G_10E Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-64 Table A-37 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Card Trunk Wavelengths A-65 Table A-38 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-66 Table A-39 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Trunk Wavelengths A-69 Table A-40 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-70 Table A-41 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Wavelengths A-72 Table A-42 TMXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-73 Table A-43 MXP_MR_10DME_C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-76 Table A-44 MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-78 Table A-45 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-80 Table A-46 TXP_MR_10E Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-82 Table A-47 TXP_MR_10E_C Card Trunk Wavelengths A-84 Table A-48 TXP_MR_10E _C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-86 Table A-49 TXP_MR_10E_L Card Trunk Wavelengths A-88 Table A-50 TXP_MR_10E Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-89 Table A-51 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Trunk Wavelengths A-91 Table A-52 TXP_MR_10E _C Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-92 Table A-53 40G-MXP-C Card Receiver (Trunk) Side Specifications A-94 Table A-54 GE_XP and GE_XPE Card Receiver Trunk Side Specifications A-97Tables lvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Table A-55 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value A-99 Table A-56 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Optical Specifications A-100 Table A-57 PP-MESH-8 Patch Panel Optical Specifications A-101 Table A-58 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Optical Specifications A-101 Table B-1 ONS 15454 Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers B-1 Table B-2 ONS 15454 Secondary States B-2 Table B-3 ONS 15454 Administrative States B-2 Table B-4 ONS 15454 Shelf Service State Transitions B-3 Table B-5 ONS 15454 Optical Unit Service State Transitions B-5 Table B-6 ONS 15454 Optical Payload Port Service State Transitions B-8 Table B-7 ONS 15454 OSC Port Service State Transitions B-10 Table B-8 ONS 15454 OCHNC Service State Transitions B-12 Table B-9 ONS 15454 Transponder/Muxponder Card Service State Transitions B-14 Table B-10 ONS 15454 Transponder/Muxponder Port Service State Transitions B-19 Table C-1 History Keys C-22 Table C-2 Setting speed values C-86 Table D-1 Limit for Connector Losses D-2lvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information. This section provides the following information: • Revision History • Document Objectives • Audience • Document Organization • Related Documentation • Document Conventions • Obtaining Optical Networking Information • Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Revision History Date Notes May 2010 • Added the section “Flexible Protection Mechanism” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the table “Single-Mode Fiber XFP Port Cabling Specifications” in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. June 2010 • Updated the table “ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View” in the chapter “Security Reference”.lviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface July 2010 • Updated the table “SFP/XFP Card Compatibility” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the section “40G-MXP-C Card Specifications” in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. • Updated the sub-section “Key Features” under the section “40G-MXP-C Card” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the following sections: – Updated the key features for the MXP_MR_10DME card in the chapter, Transponder and Muxponder Cards. – Updated the section, Y-cable protection in the chapter, Transponder and Muxponder Cards. August 2010 • Updated the table “Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) or Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Tabs and Subtab” in the chapter, “Cisco Transport Controller Operation”. • Updated the tables “SFP Specifications” and “Single-Mode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications” in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. September 2010 • Updated the table “SFP/XFP Card Compatibility” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the “OTU2_XP Card” section in the Chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Added the FAPS switching criteria in the section, “Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” in the chapter, “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. October 2010 • Updated the "Class 1M Laser Product Statement" section in the chapters “Optical Amplifier Cards”, “Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards”, “Optical Add/Drop Cards”, “Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards”, and “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the table “Internal Patchcord Ports” in the chapter “Optical Channel Circuits and Virtual Patchcords Reference”. November 2010 • Updated the “SFP/XFP Card Compatibility” table in the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter with a new footnote. • Updated the section, “SNMP in Multishelf Management” in the chapter, SNMP. • Updated the width of the single slot cards for Control cards and Transponder and Muxponder Cards in the appendix, "Hardware Specifications". • Updated the table “SFP/XFP Card Compatibility” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the tables “SFP Specifications” and “Single-Mode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications” in the appendix, “Hardware Specifications”. December 2010 • Updated the table "ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View" in the chapter "Security Reference". January 2011 • Updated the width of all the cards in the appendix, "Hardware Specifications". • Updated the section “40G-MXP-C Card” and the table “40G-MXP-C Card Port-Level Indicators” i nthe chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. March 2011 • Removed the table “8G Fibre Channel (FC) Payload PMs for the 40G-MXP-C Card” in the chapter, “Performance Monitoring”. Date Noteslix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface April 2011 • Updated the section “Interllink Interfaces” and the table “SFP/XFP Card Compatibility” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the table, “XFP Specifications” in the chapter, “Hardware Specifications”. • Updated the section “Safety Labels” in the following chapters: – Common Control Cards – Optical Service Channel Cards – Optical Amplifier Cards – Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards – Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units – Optical Add/Drop Cards – Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards – Transponder and Muxponder Cards • Updated the section “Node View (Multishelf Mode), Node View (Single-Shelf Mode), and Shelf View (Multishelf Mode)” in the chapter “Cisco Transport Controller Operation”. • Updated the section “SFP and XFP Modules” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the power values in the “Individual Card Power Requirements” table in the appendix, “Hardware Specifications”. May 2011 • Updated the section “SFP and XFP Modules” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Removed the sections “SFP Specifications” and “XFP Specifications” and added the section “SFP and XFP Specifications” in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. • Updated the minimum output power value for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. June 2011 • Updated the section “Y-Cable Protection” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the sections “MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Specifications” and “TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Specifications” in the chapter “Hardware Specifications”. • Updated the TNC and TSC card power consumption values in Table A-1 in the chapter “Hardware Specifications”. July 2011 • Added a note in the “PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements” section of Chapter, “Cisco Transport Controller Operation”. August 2011 • Updated the sub-section “Configuration Management” under the section “OTU2_XP Card” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the section “40G-MXP-C Card” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. Date Noteslx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface September 2011 • Updated the key features section of TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and OTU2_XP cards in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Added a note to SONET PM Parameters table in “SONET PM Parameter Definitions” section. • Replaced G.975.1 with G.975.1 I.7 and added a note in the "Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature" section in the chapter, "Transponder and Muxponder Cards". • Created a “Summary Pane” section in the chapter, “Cisco Transport Controller Operation”. October 2011 • Removed the Temperature table and updated the Temperature section with standard operating temperature values, removed the Environmental section from all the 15454 card specifications, and added "Environmental Exception" to “40G-MXP-C Card Specifications” section in the appendix "Hardware Specifications." December 2011 • Updated the power values in the table “Individual Card Power Requirements” in the appendix “Hardware Specifications”. • Updated the section “Termination Modes” in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. January 2012 • Updated the section “GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” with pluggable limitations in the chapter Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. February 2012 • Removed the autonegotiation support statement for ADM-10G card from the “Key Features” section in the chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. March 2012 • Updated the section, “Multishelf Node” in the chapter, “ Node Reference”. April 2012 • Updated the “Functional View for an Eight-Sided Node” diagram in the chapter “Node Reference”. • Added a note in the “Displaying Optical Power” section of chapter, “Node Reference”. • Updated the "Faceplate and Block Diagram" section of "GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards" in the chapter, “Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Upadted the section “SNMP in Multishelf Management” in the chapter “SNMP”. May 2012 Updated the section “Optical Channel Circuits” in the chapter “Optical Channel Circuits and Virtual Patchcords Reference”. June 2012 Updated the section “Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs” in the chapter “SNMP”. July 2012 Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19285-02 and a full length book-PDF was generated. Date Noteslxi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Document Objectives This document provides background and reference material for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division (DWDM) systems. Audience To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician. Document Organization Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters Title Summary Chapter 1, “Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI), ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf Assembly” Provides a description of Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI),Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards” Includes descriptions of the TCC2, TCC3, TCC2P, AIC-I, and MS-ISC-100T cards. Chapter 3, “Optical Service Channel Cards” Includes descriptions of OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. Chapter 4, “Optical Amplifier Cards” Includes descriptions of the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OP-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and OPT-AMP-17-C cards, as well as card temperature ranges and card compatibility. Chapter 5, “Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards” Includes descriptions of the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. Chapter 6, “Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units” Explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. Chapter 7, “Protection Switching Module” Includes descriptions of the 32-MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards. Chapter 8, “Optical Add/Drop Cards” Includes descriptions of the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards, card temperature ranges, compatibility, and applications.lxii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Chapter 9, “Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards” Includes descriptions of the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, and MMUC cards, card temperature ranges, compatibility, and applications. Chapter 10, “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” Includes information about ransponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, and ADM-10G cards, as well as their associated plug-in modules (Small Form-factor Pluggables [SFPs or XFPs]). Chapter 11, “Node Reference” Explains the DWDM node types t available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter cards that are installed in an ONS 15454. Also explains the DWDM automatic power control (APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM) power equalization, span loss verification, and automatic node setup (ANS) functions. Chapter 12, “Network Reference” Explains the DWDM network applications and topologies. Also provides network-level optical performance references. Chapter 13, “Optical Channel Circuits and Virtual Patchcords Reference” Explains the DWDM optical channel (OCH) circuit types and virtual patchcords that can be provisioned. Circuit types include the OCH client connection (OCHCC), the OCH trail, and the OCH network connection (OCHNC). Chapter 14, “Cisco Transport Controller Operation” Describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), the software interface for the Cisco ONS 15454. Chapter 15, “Security Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security. Chapter 16, “Timing Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and node timing. Chapter 17, “Management Network Connectivity” Provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN) connectivity. Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter shows common Cisco ONS 15454 IP network configurations and includes detailed data communications network (DCN) case studies. Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters (continued) Title Summarylxiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Related Documentation Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual in conjunction with the following referenced Release 9.2 publications: • Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide • Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide • Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide • Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Reference Guide Chapter 18, “Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management” Describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) monitoring and management. Chapter 19, “Performance Monitoring” Performance monitoring (PM) parameters are used by service providers to gather, store, set thresholds for, and report performance data for early detection of problems. In this chapter, PM parameters and concepts are defined for transponder, muxponder, and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) cards in the Cisco ONS 15454 including optical amplifier, multiplexer, demutiplexer, optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM), and optical service channel (OSC) cards. Chapter 20, “SNMP” Explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by the Cisco ONS 15454. Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications” Contains hardware and software specifications for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies and cards. Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” Describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) cards, optical payload ports, out-of-band optical service channel (OSC) ports, optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and transponder/muxponder cards and ports. Appendix C, “Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference” Describes Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. Appendix D, “Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration” Describes guidelines to be followed when configuring a Raman link. Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters (continued) Title Summarylxiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface • Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide • Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 • Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 9.2 • Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide • Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions: Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document. Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. Convention Application boldface Commands and keywords in body text. italic Command input that is supplied by the user. [ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional. { x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. The user must select one. Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the Control key while pressing the D key. screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen. boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter. < > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.lxv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt raadplegen. BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla. SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil, référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement. CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden. BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.lxvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento. CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten. TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES ¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña a este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna anordning. SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGARlxvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Prefacelxviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed. GEM DISSE ANVISNINGERlxix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Prefacelxx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Preface Obtaining Optical Networking Information This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section. Where to Find Safety and Warning Information For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation. Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation. Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation, at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.CHAPTER 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 1 Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI), ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf Assembly For information on the Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI), ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies, see the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.1-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15454 (ANSI and ETSI), ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf AssemblyCHAPTER 2-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 2 Common Control Cards Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 common-control cards. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Chapter topics include: • 2.1 Card Overview, page 2-2 • 2.3 TCC2 Card, page 2-3 • 2.4 TCC2P Card, page 2-8 • 2.5 TCC3 Card, page 2-12 • 2.6 TNC Card, page 2-16 • 2.7 TSC Card, page 2-25 • 2.8 Digital Image Signing, page 2-33 • 2.9 AIC-I Card, page 2-34 • 2.10 MS-ISC-100T Card, page 2-39 • 2.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections, page 2-422-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Card Overview 2.1 Card Overview The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter. Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 2.1.1 Common Control Cards The following common control cards are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards on ONS 15454 shelf: • TCC2 or TCC2P or TCC3 • AIC-I (optional) • MS-ISC-100T (multishelf configurations only) The TNC and TSC cards are used to support the functions of DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelves. 2.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 2-1 lists the platform and software release compatibility for the control cards. Table 2-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 TCC2 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454-DWDM TCC2P 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454-DWDM AIC-I 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454-DWDM MS-ISC-100T 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454-DWDM TCC3 No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-DWDM TNC No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 TSC No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2 and 15454-M62-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Safety Labels 2.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) The following Front Mount Electrical Connections (FMECs) are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards: • MIC-A/P • MIC-C/T/P 2.2 Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some of the cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 2.2.1 Hazard Level 1 Label The Hazard Level 1 label is shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008 2.3 TCC2 Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For TCC2 card specifications, see the “A.3.1 TCC2 Card Specifications” section on page A-4. The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET section overhead (SOH) data communications channel/generic communications channel (DCC/GCC) HAZARD LEVEL 1 655422-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2 Card termination, optical service channel (OSC) DWDM data communications network (DCN) termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. Note The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). Figure 2-2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2. 2-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2 Card Figure 2-2 TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2.3.1 TCC2 Functionality The TCC2 card terminates up to 32 DCCs. The TCC2 hardware is prepared for up to 84 DCCs, which will be available in a future software release. FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC2 LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Repeater Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface RS-232 Craft Interface Backplane RS-232 Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) Faceplate RS-232 Port Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC2 HDLC Link Modem Interface (Not Used) 400MHz Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SCC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks (all I/O Slots) -48V PWR Monitors Real Time Clock 1376392-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2 Card The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2 nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure. The TCC2 performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. The TCC2 monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two building integrated timing supply (BITS) ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2 selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TCC2 to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The TCC2 monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2. The TCC2 card has two built-in interface ports for accessing the system: an RJ-45 10BaseT LAN interface and an EIA/TIA-232 ASCII interface for local craft access. It also has a 10BaseT LAN port for user interfaces via the backplane. 2.3.2 Redundant TCC2 Card Installation Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC2 card. For full functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2 cards. When a second TCC2 card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and its database with the active TCC2. If the software version of the new TCC2 does not match the version on the active TCC2, the newly inserted TCC2 copies from the active TCC2, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2 does not match the version on the active TCC2, the newly inserted TCC2 copies the backup software from the active TCC2 again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2 takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2 started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes. 2.3.3 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators The TCC2 faceplate has ten LEDs. Table 2-2 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate. Table 2-2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Yellow (Standby) Indicates the TCC2 is active (green) or in standby (yellow) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TCC2 is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2 database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TCC2 when the active or standby LED is blinking. 2-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2 Card 2.3.4 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-3 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate. 2.3.5 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-4 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate. Note For ONS 15454 ETSI shelf, the power-level LEDs are either green or red. The LED is green when the voltage on supply inputs is between the extremely low battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply inputs is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. Table 2-3 TCC2 Network-Level Indicators System-Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal. Yellow MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red REM LED Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals. Green SYNC LED Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference. Green ACO LED After pressing the alarm cutoff (ACO) button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset. Table 2-4 TCC2 Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Amber/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. Green/Amber/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. 2-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2P Card 2.4 TCC2P Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For TCC2P card specifications, see the “A.3.2 TCC2P Card Specifications” section on page A-5. The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2 card. The primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS timing. The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. The TCC2P card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC2P card acts as a shelf controller and node controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P card supports up to 12 subtended shelves through the MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC2P card allows the ONS 15454 node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. The TCC2P card is compliant to the following standards: • The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius). • The TCC2P card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) complaint. The RoHS regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants in a new electronic and electric equipment. Figure 2-3 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card. 2-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2P Card Figure 2-3 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC2P LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Switch Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface EIA/TIA 232 Craft Interface Backplane EIA/TIA 232 Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) Faceplate EIA/TIA 232 Port Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC2 HDLC Link Modem Interface 400MHz (Not Used) Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SMC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks -48V PWR (all I/O Slots) Monitors Real Time Clock Ethernet Phy SCC12-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2P Card 2.4.1 TCC2P Functionality The TCC2P card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the DCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC2P card and up to 84 section DCCs can be terminated at the TCC2P card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels). The TCC2P selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces. The TCC2P card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards. The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2P card nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure. The TCC2P card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. The TCC2P card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2P card selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TCC2P card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The TCC2P card supports 64/8K composite clock and 6.312 MHz timing output. The TCC2P card monitors both supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P card fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2P card. All TCC2P card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms. The TCC2P card has two built-in Ethernet interface ports for accessing the system: one built-in RJ-45 port on the front faceplate for on-site craft access and a second port on the backplane. The rear Ethernet interface is for permanent LAN access and all remote access via TCP/IP as well as for Operations Support System (OSS) access. The front and rear Ethernet interfaces can be provisioned with different IP addresses using CTC. Two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports, one on the faceplate and a second on the backplane, allow for craft interface in TL1 mode. Note To use the serial port craft interface wire-wrap pins on the backplane, the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire-wrap pin must be connected and active. 2.4.2 Redundant TCC2P Card Installation Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC2P card. For full functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2P cards. When a second TCC2P card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, its backup software, and its database with the active TCC2P card. If the software version of the new TCC2P card does not match the version on the active TCC2P card, the newly inserted TCC2P card copies from the active TCC2P card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2P card does not match the version on the active TCC2P card, the newly inserted TCC2P card copies the backup 2-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC2P Card software from the active TCC2P card again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2P card takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC2P card started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes. 2.4.3 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators The TCC2P faceplate has ten LEDs. Table 2-5 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate. 2.4.4 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-6 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate. Table 2-5 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Indicates the TCC2P is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TCC2P is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2P database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TCC2P when the active or standby LED is blinking. Table 2-6 TCC2P Network-Level Indicators System-Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal. Amber MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red REM LED Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals. Green SYNC LED Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference. Green ACO LED After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.2-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC3 Card 2.4.5 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-7 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate. Note For ONS 15454 ETSI shelf, the power-level LEDs are either green or red. The LED is green when the voltage on supply inputs is between the extremely low battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply inputs is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. 2.5 TCC3 Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For TCC3 card specifications, see the “A.3.3 TCC3 Card Specifications” section on page A-6. The Timing Communications Control Three (TCC3) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2P card. The primary enhancements include the increase in memory size and compact flash space. The TCC3 card boots up as TCC2P card in older releases and as TCC3 card from Release 9.2 onwards. The TCC3 card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. The TCC3 card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC3 card acts as a shelf controller and node controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 card supports up to 30 subtended shelves through the MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC3 card allows the ONS 15454 node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. We recommend the use the TCC3 card as a node controller when the number of subtended shelves exceeds 12. Table 2-7 TCC2P Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Amber/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. Green/Amber/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. 2-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC3 Card The TCC3 card is compliant with the following standards: • The LAN interface of the TCC3 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures ranging from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius). • The TCC3 card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant. The RoHS regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants in a new electronic and electric equipment. Figure 2-3 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC3 card. Figure 2-4 TCC3 Faceplate and Block Diagram FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC3 LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Switch Mate TCC Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA FPGA SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface EIA/TIA 232 Craft Interface Backplane EIA/TIA 232 Port (Shared with Mate TCC) Faceplate EIA/TIA 232 Port Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC HDLC Link Modem Interface (Not Used) 400MHz Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SMC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks (all I/O Slots) -48V PWR Monitors Real Time Clock Ethernet Phy SCC1 2486632-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC3 Card 2.5.1 TCC3 Functionality The TCC3 card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the DCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC3 card and up to 84 section DCCs can be terminated at the TCC3 card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels). The TCC3 selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces. The TCC3 card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards. The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in the TCC3 card’s nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery of data in the event of a power or card failure. The TCC3 card performs all system-timing functions for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC3 card selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TCC3 card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The TCC3 card supports 64/8K composite clock and 6.312 MHz timing output. The TCC3 card monitors both the supply voltage inputs on the shelf. An alarm is generated if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage level above the specified range. The TCC3 card has two built-in Ethernet interface ports for accessing the system: one built-in RJ-45 port on the front faceplate for on-site craft access and a second port on the backplane. The rear Ethernet interface is for permanent LAN access and all remote access via TCP/IP as well as for Operations Support System (OSS) access. The front and rear Ethernet interfaces can be provisioned with different IP addresses using CTC. Two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports, one on the faceplate and a second on the backplane, allow for craft interface in TL1 mode. Note To use the serial port craft interface wire-wrap pins on the backplane, the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire-wrap pin must be connected and active. 2.5.2 Redundant TCC3 Card Installation We do not recommend the operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC3 card. For full functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC3 cards. Install TCC3 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC3 card fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC3 card. All TCC3 card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms. When a second TCC3 card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, backup software, and database with those of the active TCC3 card. If the software version of the new TCC3 card does not match the version on the active TCC3 card, the newly inserted TCC3 card copies from the active TCC3 card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. Copying the database from the active TCC3 card takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the new TCC3 card started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes. 2-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TCC3 Card 2.5.3 TCC3 Card-Level Indicators The TCC3 faceplate has ten LEDs. Table 2-5 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TCC3 faceplate. 2.5.4 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-6 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TCC3 faceplate. Table 2-8 TCC3 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED Indicates the TCC3 card is being reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Indicates the TCC3 is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TCC3 is writing to its database or to the standby TCC3 database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TCC3 when the active or standby LED is blinking. Table 2-9 TCC3 Network-Level Indicators System-Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal. Amber MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red REM LED Indicates first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals. Green SYNC LED Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference. Green ACO LED Indicates teh audible alarms. After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.2-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card 2.5.5 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-7 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC3 faceplate. Note For the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf, the power-level LEDs are either green or red. The LED is green when the voltage on supply inputs is between the extremely low battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply inputs is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. 2.6 TNC Card (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The TNC card combines the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, OSCM, ISC, and AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. Note For TNC card specifications, see the A.3.4 TNC Card Specifications (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6), page A-6 section. The TNC card is provisioned as master and slave in the 15454-M6 shelf, and as a stand-alone card in the 15454-M2 shelf. The TNC card serves as the processor card for the node. On the 15454-M6 shelf, install redundant TNC cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TNC card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TNC card. The card supports line cards from slots 2 to 7. On the 15454-M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC card in slot 1. The TNC card supports line cards in slots 2 and 3. Table 2-10 TCC3 Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Amber/Red PWR A LED Indicates the voltage on supply input A. The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. Green/Amber/Red PWR B LED Indicates the voltage on supply input B.The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds. 2-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card The TNC card monitors both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TNC card raises an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply. You can insert and remove the TNC card even when the system is online, without impacting the system traffic. You can upgrade the TSC card to a TNC card. During the upgrade, the TNC card does not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you can still provision the SFP ports on the TNC card during the upgrade. The TNC and TSC cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. Note Downgrade procedures from TNC cards to TSC cards are not supported. For information on upgrading TSC card to a TNC card, refer chapter, "Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The TNC card supports all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm. Note The LAN interface of the TNC card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from -40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius). 2.6.1 Functions of TNC The functions of the TNC card are explained in the following sections: 2.6.1.1 Communication and Control The TNC card acts as node controller and shelf controller. The control tasks include system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection, and resolution. The control tasks also include SONET and SDH data communications channel (DCC) termination, 84 section SDCC and multiplex section MSDCC terminations, 28 SDCC tunnels or SDCC-to-line LDCC terminations, and system fault detection for the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves. The system initialization tasks include assigning the network parameters to the system and loading the system with the provisioning data stored in the database. The line cards in the system do not boot without the TNC card. The TNC card supports and provides the following: • OSC communication to implement the Optical DCN, User Data Channels and Voice over IP interface. • Supervisory data channel (SDC) for communication between the nodes. • Two point-to-point Ethernet channels at 10 Mbps to carry Voice over IP traffic. • Two point-to-point Ethernet channels at 10/100 Mbps to carry UDC traffic. • Passive inventory of external devices on the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves. • Supports OSC, UDC, and VoIP traffic. Two UDC/VoIP ports are present on the external connection unit that can be configured to carry UDC/VoIP traffic.2-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card Note The TNC card supports UDC and VoIP configuration only when OSC is configured on the ports. To delete the OSC channel on a port, delete the UDC and VoIP configuration on that port. For more information, refer chapter, "Install the Cisco ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. On the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC card must adhere to the following rules for SDCC/LDCC allocation: • SDCC + SDCC Tunnels <= 68 • LDCC <= 28 • IP Tunnels <= 10 • SDCC + SDCC tunnels + (LDCC * 3) <= 84 2.6.1.2 Optical Service Channel The TNC card supports two optical service channels (OSC) through two small-form factor pluggable (SFP) ports. The two SFP ports are named SFP1 and SFP2. The supported SFPs on TNC ports are ONS-SC-OSC-ULH, ONS-SE-155-1510, and ONS-SC-Z3-1510. Note When you replace SFPs on the TNC card, provisioning for the current SFP has to be deleted before the new SFP is plugged in. SFP1 supports the following payloads: • OC-3/STM-1 • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE) SFP2 supports the following payloads: • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 2.6.1.3 Timing and Synchronization The TNC card performs all the system-timing functions for the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves. This includes short-term clock recovery, reducing the need to reset the calendar and time-of-day settings after a power failure. The TNC card ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing and synchronization requirements. The TNC card supports external, line, and internal timing inputs. The TNC card supports 64KHz+8KHz composite clock and 6.312 MHz timing output. Note The TNC card supports the BITS-1 and BITS-2 external timing interfaces on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The card supports the BITS-1 interface on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.2-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card The TNC card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two building integrated timing supply (BITS-1 and BITS-2) ports for accurate frequencies. The card selects a recovered clock, a BITS, OC-N/STM-N, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TNC card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The card supports SNTP operation that allows the nodes to synchronize the system clock automatically with a reference SNTP server following system reboots, card resets, and software upgrades. For more information on the timing function, see the Timing Reference chapter. 2.6.1.4 MultiShelf Management The TNC card supports multishelf management of up to 30 shelves including the node controller. The card supports up to 29 subtending shelves. The subtending shelves can be the ONS 15454 M6 or ONS 15454 shelves. This allows network administrators to isolate faults and provision new services across the DWDM network. In the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, there are six FE RJ45 ports on the ECU and each TNC card supports three FE RJ45 connections to connect subtending shelves. 2.6.1.5 Database Storage The TNC card provides 4 GB of non-volatile database storage (IDE Compact Flash Module) for communication, provisioning, and system control. This allows full database recovery during power failure. The TNC card supports writing and reading to and from an external non-volatile memory device. The card also communicates with the non-volatile memory device through a USB 2.0 standard interface. The USB-WRITE-FAIL alarm may be raised on the TNC card when synchronization occurs between Compact Flash and USB Flash. If this alarm does not clear even after 20 minutes duration, it is recommended to contact TAC. For information on USB-WRITE-FAIL alarm, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide. Note The configuration details are stored in the database of the TNC card. The database restore from a TNC card to a TSC card or vice versa is not supported. 2.6.1.6 Interface Ports The TNC card has three built-in interface ports: • RJ-45 LAN port • RJ-45 console port • RS-232 port (serial port) The RJ-45 LAN port and RS-232 port are located on the faceplate of the TNC card. The RJ-45 console port is behind the faceplate of the TNC card. The front access RJ-45 LAN port provides 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet connectivity to the system. The RJ-45 LAN port has LEDs to provide link and activity status. The RJ-45 LAN port provides local and remote access to the Cisco Transport Controller through a common Web interface. The RJ-45 console port is used to launch a debug session on the TNC card.2-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card The RS-232 port is used to connect to the Transaction Language 1 (TL1) management interface. In TL1 mode, the RS-232 port runs at 9.6 Kbps without any flow control. The front access LAN port and RJ-45 EMS LAN port can be provisioned with different IP addresses by configuring the TNC card in secure mode using CTC. On 15454 M2, the EMS port is on the power module. On 15454 M6, the EMS port is on the ECU. The two SFP ports (SFP1 and SFP2) are used for primary OSC and secondary OSC connections. SFP1 supports OC-3/STM-1, FE, or GE payloads; SFP2 supports FE or GE payloads. The two SFP ports on the TNC card are in IS,AINS administrative state during payload creation. In this state, only the following alarms are raised: • AS-MT alarm on PPM • AS-CMD alarm on PPM and facility • Prov-Mismatch alarm on PPM The TX power is -40 and RX power is -50 for Ultra long-haul SFPs. The TX power is -40 and RX power is -40 for other SFPs. When the OSC is created, the two SFP ports move to IS state. In this state, all the supported alarms are raised. Note VLAN tagged traffic is not supported on UDC or VoIP ports that are present on the external connection unit. 2.6.1.7 External Alarms and Controls The TNC card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and external controls on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The card provides input/output alarm contact closures. The TNC card operates in two modes: • External alarms mode - This is the default mode and up to 14 alarm input ports can be configured. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions. • External control mode - Up to 10 alarm input ports and four alarm output ports can be configured. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans. To configure the external alarms and external controls, go to Provisioning -> Alarm Extenders tab in the CTC node view. To view the external alarms and external controls, go to Maintenance -> Alarm Extenders tab in the CTC node view. For information on how to configure and view the external alarms and external controls, refer chapter “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Note The LCD module must be present in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly to provision alarms from the ECU, fan-tray assembly, or power modules. For information on pinouts of external alarms and external controls, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installtion Guide.2-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card 2.6.1.8 Digital Image Signing (DIS) The TNC card provides services that authenticate the origin of the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, see the 2.8 Digital Image Signing, page 2-33 section. 2.6.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram The faceplate design of the TNC card allows sufficient space to insert or remove cables while accessing the Ethernet and SFP ports. The TNC card can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TNC card has an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the shelf. The TNC card supports field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface. The TNC card has three FPGA: TCCA, SYNTIDE, and FRAMPOS. Figure 2-5 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNC card. Figure 2-5 TNC Faceplate and Block Diagram HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 TNC FAIL ACT/STBY ACO SFP2 PWR A B LAMP TEST SFP1 LINK EIA/TIA-232 LINK ACT TCP/IP LINK ACT ACT TX RX TX RX CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO 1GB DDR2 Mini-DIMM CPU MPC8568E GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy SFP1 SFP2 BusMux CPLD Ethernet Switch Local Ethernet Switch External Glue Logic CPLD SYNTIDE FPGA Boot Flash USB Controller FRAMPOS FPGA TCCA FPGA T1/E1 Framers LOG NVRAM FE Phy 4GB Compact Flash 2778552-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card 2.6.3 Lamp Test The TNC card supports a lamp test function that is activated by pressing the Lamp Test button on the faceplate or from CTC. The lamp test function allows the user to test the working state of LEDs and ensures that all LEDs are functional. When you activate the lamp test function, all the port LEDs illuminate simultaneously for several seconds. 2.6.4 TNC Card Installation (ONS 15454 M6) On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, the TNC card operates in either simplex or duplex (redundant) control mode. In redundant control mode, high availability is achieved. When a redundant TNC card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, backup software, and database with the active TNC card. If the software versions do not match, the redundant TNC card copies from the active TNC card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the software versions match, the redundant TNC card copies the backup software from the active TNC card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TNC card takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the redundant TNC card started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes. 2.6.5 Card-Level Indicators The TNC faceplate has twelve LEDs. Table 2-11 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TNC faceplate. 2.6.6 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-12 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TNC faceplate. Table 2-11 TNC Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED Indicates the TNC card is in fail mode. This LED is on during reset. This LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Indicates the TNC card is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TNC is writing to its database or to the standby TNC database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TNC card when the active or standby LED is blinking.2-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card Table 2-12 TNC Network-Level Indicators System-Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal. Yellow MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red REM LED Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when a critical, major, or minor alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals. Green SYNC LED Indicates the synchronization status; Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference. Green ACO LED Indicates the Alarm Cut-Off status. After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.2-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TNC Card 2.6.7 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-13 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TNC faceplate. 2.6.8 Ethernet Port Indicators Table 2-14 describes the two port-level LEDs on the TNC faceplate. 2.6.9 SFP Indicators Table 2-15 describes the SFP LED indicators. Table 2-13 TNC Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Red PWR A LED Indicates the status of power to the card. The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above high battery voltage/extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG ) or below low battery voltage/extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is 0. Green/Red PWR B LED Indicates the status of power to the card. The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above high battery voltage/extremely high battery (EHIBATVG ) voltage or below low battery voltage/extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is 0. Table 2-14 TNC Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LEDs Definition Green LINK LED Indicates the connectivity status. Amber ACT LED Indicates data reception.2-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card 2.6.10 Protection Schemes The TNC card supports active and redundant architecture. The ONS 15454 M6 shelf supports 1:1 equipment protection with one TNC card acting as active and the other TNC card as redundant. The ONS 15454 M2 shelf supports simplex control mode. In this mode, the active TNC card operates without a redundant TNC card. The ONS 15454 M6 shelf supports both simplex and redundant control mode. In redundant control mode, the active TNC card operates with a redundant TNC card as the backup. If the active TNC card is removed, system traffic switches to the redundant TNC card. If the redundant TNC card is not present or not in the standby state, removing the active TNC card results in loss of system traffic and management connectivity. In redundant control mode, a TNC card can protect another TNC card. However, a TNC card cannot protect a TSC card or vice versa. 2.6.11 Cards Supported by TNC The TNC card supports 15454 MSTP line cards except the following cards: • OSCM • ISC • AIC • AIC-I The TNC card is not interoperable with TCC2 /TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The TNC and TCC cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. The line cards such as Transponder and Muxponder cards can be inserted in the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 shelves along with the TNC card. 2.7 TSC Card (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The TSC card combines the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, ISC, and AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. Table 2-15 TNC SFP Indicators Port Type Link LED Activity LED OC3 • RED - No link • GREEN - Link — FE • RED - No link • GREEN - Link Blinks on packet flow GE • RED - No link • GREEN - Link Blinks on packet flow2-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card Note For TSC card specifications, see the A.3.5 TSC Card Specifications (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6), page A-7 section. The TSC card is provisioned as master and slave in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, and as a stand-alone card in the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TSC card serves as the processor card for the node. On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install redundant TSC cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TSC card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TSC card. The TSC card supports line cards from slots 2 to 7. On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TSC card in slot 1. The TSC card supports line cards in slots 2 and 3. The TSC card monitors both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TSC card raises an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply. You can insert and remove the TSC card even when the system is online, without impacting the system traffic. The TSC card does not support optical service channel (OSC) and SFP ports. You can upgrade the TSC card to a TNC card. During the upgrade, the TNC card does not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you can still provision SFP ports on the TNC card during the upgrade. The TNC and TSC cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. The TSC card supports all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm. Note The LAN interface of the TSC card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from -40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius). 2.7.1 Functions of TSC The functions of the TSC card are explained in the following sections: 2.7.1.1 Communication and Control The TSC card acts as a shelf controller. The control tasks include system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection, and resolution. The control tasks also include SONET and SDH data communications channel (DCC) termination, 84 section SDCC and multiplex section MSDCC terminations, 28 SDCC tunnels or SDCC-to-line LDCC terminations, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 shelves. The system initialization tasks include assigning the network parameters to the system and loading the system with the provisioning data stored in the database. The line cards in the system do not boot without the TSC card. The TSC card supports and provides the following: • Passive inventory of external devices on the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves. • 100 Mbps UDC on the 15454-M6 shelf. 2-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card On the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TSC card must adhere to the following rules for SDCC/LDCC allocation. • SDCC + SDCC Tunnels <= 68 • LDCC <= 28 • IP Tunnels <= 10 • SDCC + SDCC tunnels + (LDCC * 3) <= 84 2.7.1.2 Timing and Synchronization The TSC card performs all the system-timing functions for the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves. This includes short-term clock recovery, reducing the need to reset the calendar and time-of-day settings after a power failure. The TSC card ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing and synchronization requirements. The TSC card supports external, line, and internal timing inputs. The TSC card supports 64KHz+8KHz composite clock and 6.312 MHz timing output. Note The TSC card supports the BITS-1 and BITS-2 external timing interfaces on the 15454-M6 shelf. The card supports the BITS-1 interface on the 15454-M2 shelf. The TSC card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic card and two building integrated timing supply (BITS-1 and BITS-2) ports for accurate frequencies. The card selects a recovered clock, a BITS, OC-N/STM-N, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking loop allows the TSC card to synchronize with the recovered clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The card supports SNTP operation that allows the nodes to synchronize the system clock automatically with a reference SNTP server following system reboots, card resets, and software upgrades. For more information on the timing function, see the Timing Reference chapter. 2.7.1.3 MultiShelf Management The TSC card supports multishelf management with support for up to 30 shelves including the node controller. The card supports up to 29 subtending shelves. The subtending shelves can be the 15454-M6 or 15454-DWDM shelves. This allows network administrators to isolate faults and provision new services across the DWDM network. In the 15454-M6 shelf, there are six FE RJ45 ports on the ECU. Each TSC card supports three FE RJ45 connections to connect subtending shelves. 2.7.1.4 Database Storage The TSC card provides 4 GB of non-volatile database storage (IDE Compact Flash Module) for communication, provisioning, and system control. This allows full database recovery during power failure. The TSC card supports writing and reading to and from an external non-volatile memory device. The card also communicates with the non-volatile memory device through a USB 2.0 standard interface.2-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card Note The configuration details are stored in the database of the TSC card. The database restore from a TSC card to a TNC card or vice versa is not supported. 2.7.1.5 Interface Ports The TSC card has three built-in interface ports: • RJ-45 LAN port • RJ-45 console port • RS-232 port (serial port) The RJ-45 LAN port and RS-232 port are located on the faceplate of the TSC card. The RJ-45 console port is behind the faceplate of the TSC card. The front access RJ-45 LAN port provides 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet connectivity to the system. The RJ-45 LAN port has LEDs to provide link and activity status. The RJ-45 LAN port provides local and remote access to the Cisco Transport Controller through a common Web interface. The RJ-45 console port is used to launch a debug session on the TSC card. The RS-232 port is used to connect to the TL1 management interface. In TL1 mode, the RS-232 port runs at 9.6 Kbps without any flow control. The front access LAN port and RJ-45 EMS LAN port can be provisioned with different IP addresses by configuring the TSC card in secure mode using CTC. On 15454 M2, the EMS port is on the power module. On 15454 M6, the EMS port is on the ECU. 2.7.1.6 External Alarms and Controls The TSC card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and external controls on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The card provides input/output alarm contact closures. The TSC card operates in two modes: • External alarms mode - This is the default mode and up to 14 alarm input ports can be configured. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions. • External control mode - Up to 10 alarm input ports and four alarm output ports can be configured. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans. To configure the external alarms and external controls, go to Provisioning -> Alarm Extenders tab in the CTC node view. To view the external alarms and external controls, go to Maintenance -> Alarm Extenders tab in the CTC node view. For information on how to configure and view the external alarms and external controls, refer chapter “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Note The LCD module must be present in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly to provision alarms from the ECU, fan-tray assembly, or power modules. For information on pinouts of external alarms and external controls, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.2-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card 2.7.1.7 Digital Image Signing (DIS) The TSC card provides services that authenticate the origin of the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. For more information, see the 2.8 Digital Image Signing, page 2-33 section. 2.7.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram The faceplate design of the TSC card allows sufficient space to insert or remove cables while accessing the Ethernet ports. The TSC card can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the 15454-M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the 15454-M2 shelf. The TSC card has an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the shelf. The TSC card supports field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface. The TSC card has two FPGA: TCCA and SYNTIDE. Figure 2-6 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TSC card. Figure 2-6 TSC Faceplate and Block Diagram TSC FAIL ACT/STBY CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO ACO PWR A B LAMP TEST EIA/TIA-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT 256MB DDR2 Mini-DIMM CPU MPC8568E GE Phy GE Phy BusMux CPLD Ethernet Switch Local Ethernet Switch External Glue Logic CPLD SYNTIDE FPGA Boot Flash USB Controller TCCA FPGA T1/E1 Framers LOG NVRAM 256MB Compact Flash 2778562-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card 2.7.3 Lamp Test The TSC card supports a lamp test function that is activated by pressing the Lamp Test button on the faceplate or from CTC. The lamp test function allows the user to test the working state of LEDs and ensures that all LEDs are functional. When you activate the lamp test function, all the port LEDs illuminate simultaneously for several seconds. 2.7.4 TSC Card Installation (ONS 15454 M6) On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, the TSC card operates in either simplex or duplex (redundant) control mode. In redundant control mode, high availability is achieved. When a redundant TSC card is inserted into a node, it synchronizes its software, backup software, and database with the active TSC card. If the software versions do not match, the redundant TSC card copies from the active TSC card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the software versions match, the redundant TSC card copies the backup software from the active TSC card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TSC card takes about 3 minutes. Depending on the software version and backup version the redundant TSC card started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40 minutes. 2.7.5 Card-Level Indicators The TSC faceplate has twelve LEDs. Table 2-11 describes the two card-level LEDs on the TSC faceplate. 2.7.6 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-12 describes the six network-level LEDs on the TSC faceplate. Table 2-16 TSC Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED Indicates the TSC card is in fail mode. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Indicates the TSC card is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control. When the active TSC is writing to its database or to the standby TSC database, the card LEDs blink. To avoid memory corruption, do not remove the TSC card when the active or standby LED is blinking.2-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card 2.7.7 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-13 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TSC faceplate. Table 2-17 TSC Network-Level Indicators System-Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal. Yellow MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal. Red REM LED Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when a critical, major, or minor alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals. Green SYNC LED Indicates the synchronization status; Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference. Green ACO LED Indicates the Alarm Cut-Off status. After pressing the ACO button, the ACO LED turns green. The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.2-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards TSC Card 2.7.8 Ethernet Port Indicators Table 2-14 describes the two port-level LEDs on the TSC faceplate. 2.7.9 Protection Schemes The TSC card supports active and redundant architecture. The ONS 15454 M6 shelf supports 1:1 equipment protection with one TSC card acting as active and the other TSC card as redundant. The 15454-M2 shelf supports simplex control mode. In this mode, the active TSC card operates without a redundant TSC card. The 15454-M6 shelf supports both simplex and redundant control mode. In redundant control mode, the active TSC card operates with a redundant TSC card as the backup. If the active TSC card is removed, system traffic switches to the redundant TSC card. If the redundant TSC card is not present or not in the standby state, removing the active TSC card results in loss of system traffic and management connectivity. Table 2-18 TSC Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Red PWR A LED Indicates the status of power to the card. The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is above high battery voltage/extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG ) or below low battery voltage/extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input A is 0. Green/Red PWR B LED Indicates the status of power to the card. The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is above high battery voltage/extremely high battery (EHIBATVG ) voltage or below low battery voltage/extremely low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply input B is 0. Table 2-19 TSC Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LEDs Definition Green LINK LED Indicates the connectivity status. Amber ACT LED Indicates the data reception.2-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Digital Image Signing In redundant control mode, a TSC card can protect another TSC card. However, a TSC card cannot protect a TNC card or vice versa. 2.7.10 Cards Supported by TSC The TSC card supports 15454 MSTP line cards except the following cards: • OSCM • ISC • AIC • AIC-I The TSC card is not interoperable with TCC2 /TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The TSC and TCC cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. The line cards such as Transponder and Muxponder cards can be inserted in the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves along with the TSC card. 2.8 Digital Image Signing (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The DIS feature complies with the new U.S. Government Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-3 to provide security for all software provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454 M2 platforms. This standard requires software to be digitally signed and verified for authenticity and integrity prior to load and execution. DIS feature automatically provides increased protection. DIS focuses on software security and provides increased protection from attacks and threats to Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 products. DIS verifies software integrity and provides assurance that the software has not been tampered with or modified. Digitally signed Cisco software provides counterfeit protection. New controller cards, such as TNC/TSC, provide services that authenticate the origin of the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The signage and verification process is transparent until verification fails. 2.8.1 DIS Identification Digitally signed software can be identified by the last three characters appended to the working version and protected version field in CTC. The DIS conventions can be viewed under the working version displayed in the Maintenance > Software tab in CTC. For example, 9.2.0 (09.20-X10C-29.09-SDA) and 9.2.0 (09.20-010C-18.18-SPA).2-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards AIC-I Card The significance of the three characters appended to the software version is explained in Table: For information on how to retrieve and view DIS information in CTC please refer to the “Turn Up a Node” Chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, 9.2. 2.9 AIC-I Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.3.6 AIC-I Card Specifications” section on page A-8. The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides 12 customer-defined input and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are via the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals. If you use the additional alarm expansion panel (AEP), the AIC-I card can support up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs, which are connected on the AEP connectors. The AEP is compatible with ANSI shelves only. A power monitoring function monitors the supply voltage (–48 VDC). Figure 2-7 shows the AIC-I faceplate and a block diagram of the card. Table 2-20 DIS Conventions in the Software Version Character Meaning S (first character) Indicates that the package is signed. P or D (second character) Production (P) or Development (D) image. Production image—Software approved for general release. Development image—development software provided under special conditions for limited use. A (third character) This third character indicates the version of the key used for signature generation. The version changes when a key is revoked and a new key is used. The values of the version key varies from A to Z.2-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards AIC-I Card Figure 2-7 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram 2.9.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators Table 2-21 describes the eight card-level LEDs on the AIC-I card faceplate. AIC-I Fail Express orderwire Local orderwire EEPROM LED x2 AIC-I FPGA SCL links 4 x IN/OUT Power Monitoring 12/16 x IN Ringer Act Ring Ring Input Output 78828 FAIL ACT ACC INPUT/OUTPUT EOW LOW RING AIC-1 (DTMF) (DTMF) UDC-A UDC-B DCC-A DCC-B ACC PWR A B RING DCC-B DCC-A UDC-B UDC-A Table 2-21 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED Indicates the AIC-I card is provisioned for operation.2-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards AIC-I Card 2.9.2 External Alarms and Controls The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to 12 external alarm inputs and 4 external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made using the backplane wire-wrap pins or FMEC connections. For information about increasing the number of input/output contacts, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm Expansion Panel” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm lines, one LED representing all of the inputs and one LED representing all of the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans. You can program each of the twelve input alarm contacts separately. You can program each of the sixteen input alarm contacts separately. Choices include: • Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open • Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported) • Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level • 63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you provision the alarm input. The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire: • Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a Minor alarm or above is the trigger. Green/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input A. It is red when the input voltage on supply input A is out of range. Green/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input B. It is red when the input voltage on supply input B is out of range. Yellow INPUT LED The INPUT LED is yellow when there is an alarm condition on at least one of the alarm inputs. Yellow OUTPUT LED The OUTPUT LED is yellow when there is an alarm condition on at least one of the alarm outputs. Green RING LED The RING LED on the local orderwire (LOW) side is flashing green when a call is received on the LOW. Green RING LED The RING LED on the express orderwire (EOW) side is flashing green when a call is received on the EOW. Table 2-21 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level LEDs Description2-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards AIC-I Card • Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local NE alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only. • Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output. You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present. Note For ANSI shelves, the number of inputs and outputs can be increased using the AEP. The AEP is connected to the shelf backplane and requires an external wire-wrap panel. 2.9.3 Orderwire Orderwire allows a craftsperson to plug a phoneset into an ONS 15454 and communicate with craftspeople working at other ONS 15454s or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead. The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead channel) orderwire channels on a SONET/SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device. You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for DCC/GCC channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up so that all NEs on the ring can reach one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can be configured as on or off on a particular SONET/SDH facility. The ONS 15454 supports up to four orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small hub-and-spoke configurations. Orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR), multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), path protection, or subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring. Caution Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel. The ONS 15454 implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The line acts as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the express orderwire party line. Up to four OC-N/STM-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are provisionable as orderwire paths. The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity, which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the DTMF pad. Table 2-22 shows the pins on the orderwire connector that correspond to the tip and ring orderwire assignments. 2-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards AIC-I Card When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel. Figure 2-8 shows the standard RJ-11 connectors used for orderwire ports. Figure 2-8 RJ-11 Connector 2.9.4 Power Monitoring The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for presence, undervoltage, and overvoltage. 2.9.5 User Data Channel The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two user data channels, UDC-A and UDC-B, through separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each UDC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454. For instructions, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. Table 2-23 lists the UDC pin assignments. Table 2-22 Orderwire Pin Assignments RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 Four-wire receive ring 2 Four-wire transmit tip 3 Two-wire ring 4 Two-wire tip 5 Four-wire transmit ring 6 Four-wire receive tip 61077 Pin 1 Pin 6 RJ-11 Table 2-23 UDC Pin Assignments RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 For future use 2 TXN 3 RXN2-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card 2.9.6 Data Communications Channel The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two data communications channels, DCC-A and DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each DCC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454. For instructions, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The DCC ports are synchronous serial interfaces. The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles. Table 2-24 lists the DCC pin assignments. 2.10 MS-ISC-100T Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card Specifications” section on page A-11. The Multishelf Internal Switch Card (MS-ISC-100T) is an Ethernet switch used to implement the multishelf LAN. It connects the node controller shelf to the network and to subtending shelves. The MS-ISC-100T must always be equipped on the node controller shelf; it cannot be provisioned on a subtending controller shelf. The recommended configuration is to implement LAN redundancy using two MS-ISC-100T cards: one switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 7, and the other switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 11. The Ethernet 4 RXP 5 TXP 6 For future use Table 2-23 UDC Pin Assignments (continued) RJ-11 Pin Number Description Table 2-24 DCC Pin Assignments RJ-45 Pin Number Description 1 TCLKP 2 TCLKN 3 TXP 4 TXN 5 RCLKP 6 RCLKN 7 RXP 8 RXN2-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card is part of the software package and is automatically loaded. The MS-ISC-100T card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 on the node controller shelf; the recommended slots are Slot 6 and Slot 12. Table 2-25 lists the MS-ISC-100T port assignments. Figure 2-9 shows the card faceplate. Caution Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for interbuilding applications. Table 2-25 MS-ISC-100T Card Port Assignments Port Description DCN 1and DCN 2 Connection to the network SSC1 to SSC7 Connection to subtending shelves NC Connection to TCC2/TCC2P using a cross-over cable PRT Connection to the PRT port of the redundant MS-ISC-100T2-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card Figure 2-9 MS-ISC-100T Faceplate 2.10.1 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators The MS-ISC-100T card supports two card-level LED indicators. The card-level indicators are described in Table 2-26. FAIL ACT MS ISC 100T CONSOLE 145274 DC2 SSC1 SSC2 SSC3 SSC4 SSC5 SSC6 SSC7 NC PRT DCN12-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections 2.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections This section describes the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs, which provide power, external alarm, and timing connections for the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf. 2.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.3.8 MIC-A/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section on page A-10. The MIC-A/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in Slot 23 in the center of the subrack Electrical Facility Connection Assembly (EFCA) area. The MIC-A/P FMEC has the following features: • Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs • Connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card) • Connection for four configurable alarm inputs/outputs • Connection for sixteen alarm inputs • Storage of manufacturing and inventory data For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf. Figure 2-10 shows the MIC-A/P faceplate. Figure 2-10 MIC-A/P Faceplate Figure 2-11 shows a block diagram of the MIC-A/P. Table 2-26 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description FAIL LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational. ACT LED (Green) The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the card. If the ACT LED is green, it indicates that the card is active and the software is operational. MIC-A/P ALARM IN/OUT CLEI CODE BARCODE POWER RATING GND CAUT BATTERY B ION TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE GHTEN THE FACEPLATE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE 2713052-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections Figure 2-11 MIC-A/P Block Diagram Table 2-27 shows the alarm interface pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 connector. Inventory Data (EEPROM) 61332 B a c k p l a n e 3W3 Connector Alarms DB62 Connector Power 16 Alarm inputs 4 Alarm in/outputs Table 2-27 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description 1 ALMCUTOFF N Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair 2 ALMCUTOFF P Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair 3 ALMINP0 N Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires 4 ALMINP0 P Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires 5 ALMINP1 N Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires 6 ALMINP1 P Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires 7 ALMINP2 N Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires 8 ALMINP2 P Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires 9 ALMINP3 N Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires 10 ALMINP3 P Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires 11 EXALM0 N External customer alarm 1 12 EXALM0 P External customer alarm 1 13 GND Ground 14 EXALM1 N External customer alarm 2 15 EXALM1 P External customer alarm 2 16 EXALM2 N External customer alarm 3 17 EXALM2 P External customer alarm 3 18 EXALM3 N External customer alarm 4 19 EXALM3 P External customer alarm 4 20 EXALM4 N External customer alarm 5 21 EXALM4 P External customer alarm 5 22 EXALM5 N External customer alarm 6 23 EXALM5 P External customer alarm 6 24 EXALM6 N External customer alarm 7 25 EXALM6 P External customer alarm 72-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections 26 GND Ground 27 EXALM7 N External customer alarm 8 28 EXALM7 P External customer alarm 8 29 EXALM8 N External customer alarm 9 30 EXALM8 P External customer alarm 9 31 EXALM9 N External customer alarm 10 32 EXALM9 P External customer alarm 10 33 EXALM10 N External customer alarm 11 34 EXALM10 P External customer alarm 11 35 EXALM11 N External customer alarm 12 36 EXALM11 P External customer alarm 12 37 ALMOUP0 N Normally open output pair 1 38 ALMOUP0 P Normally open output pair 1 39 GND Ground 40 ALMOUP1 N Normally open output pair 2 41 ALMOUP1 P Normally open output pair 2 42 ALMOUP2 N Normally open output pair 3 43 ALMOUP2 P Normally open output pair 3 44 ALMOUP3 N Normally open output pair 4 45 ALMOUP3 P Normally open output pair 4 46 AUDALM0 N Normally open Minor audible alarm 47 AUDALM0 P Normally open Minor audible alarm 48 AUDALM1 N Normally open Major audible alarm 49 AUDALM1 P Normally open Major audible alarm 50 AUDALM2 N Normally open Critical audible alarm 51 AUDALM2 P Normally open Critical audible alarm 52 GND Ground 53 AUDALM3 N Normally open Remote audible alarm 54 AUDALM3 P Normally open Remote audible alarm 55 VISALM0 N Normally open Minor visual alarm 56 VISALM0 P Normally open Minor visual alarm 57 VISALM1 N Normally open Major visual alarm 58 VISALM1 P Normally open Major visual alarm 59 VISALM2 N Normally open Critical visual alarm 60 VISALM2 P Normally open Critical visual alarm Table 2-27 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued) Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description2-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections 2.11.2 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.3.9 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section on page A-10. The MIC-C/T/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs. Install the MIC-C/T/P in Slot 24. The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has the following features: • Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs • Connection for two serial ports for local craft/modem (for future use) • Connection for one LAN port • Connection for two system timing inputs • Connection for two system timing outputs • Storage of manufacturing and inventory data For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the shelf. Figure 2-12 shows the MIC-C/T/P FMEC faceplate. Figure 2-12 MIC-C/T/P Faceplate Figure 2-13 shows a block diagram of the MIC-C/T/P. 61 VISALM3 N Normally open Remote visual alarm 62 VISALM3 P Normally open Remote visual alarm Table 2-27 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued) Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description MIC-C/T/P CLEI CODE BARCODE POWER RATING GND T BATTERY A IMING A IN TIMING B OUT CAUTION TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE GHTEN THE FACEPLATE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE 271306 LAN AUX TERM L ACT INK2-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections Figure 2-13 MIC-C/T/P Block Diagram The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has one pair of LEDs located on the RJ45 LAN connector. The green LED is on when a link is present, and the amber LED is on when data is being transferred. Inventory Data (EEPROM) 61334 B a c k p l a n e 3W3 connector Power RJ-45 connectors System management serial ports RJ-45 connectors System management LAN 4 coaxial connectors Timing 2 x in / 2 x outCHAPTER 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 3 Optical Service Channel Cards This chapter describes the optical service channel (OSC) cards for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless noted otherwise, the cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 3.1 Card Overview, page 3-1 • 3.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels, page 3-3 • 3.3 OSCM Card, page 3-5 • 3.4 OSC-CSM Card, page 3-9 3.1 Card Overview This section provides card summary and compatibility information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. An optical service channel (OSC) is a bidirectional channel connecting two adjacent nodes in a DWDM ring. For every DWDM node (except terminal nodes), two different OSC terminations are present, one for the west side and another for the east side. The channel transports OSC overhead that is used to manage ONS 15454 DWDM networks. An OSC signal uses the 1510-nm wavelength and does not affect client traffic. The primary purpose of this channel is to carry clock synchronization and orderwire channel communications for the DWDM network. It also provides transparent links between each node in the network. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. 3-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards Card Overview There are two versions of the OSC modules: the OSCM, and the OSC-CSM, which contains the OSC wavelength combiner and separator component in addition to the OSC module. The Mesh/Multiring Upgrade (MMU) card is used to optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration. Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC card includes the functions of the OSCM card. OSC can be created on the OC3 port (SFP-0) of the TNC card. The TNC card supports two optical service channels (OSC): primary OSC and secondary OSC. The primary optical service channel (SFP-0) supports the following interfaces: • OC-3/STM-1 • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE). The secondary optical service channel (SFP-1) supports the following interfaces: • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE). 3.1.1 Card Summary Table 3-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each card. 3.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 3-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the OSC and OSCM cards. Table 3-1 OSCM, OSC-CSM, and MMU Card Summary Card Port Description For Additional Information OSCM The OSCM has one set of optical ports and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 8 and 10. See the “3.3 OSCM Card” section on page 3-5. OSC-CSM The OSC-CSM has three sets of optical ports and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “3.4 OSC-CSM Card” section on page 3-9. Table 3-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Service Channel Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 OSCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OSC-CS M Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes3-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 3.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 3.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label The Class 1 Laser Product label is shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label Class 1 lasers are products whose irradiance does not exceed the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) value. Therefore, for Class 1 laser products the output power is below the level at which it is believed eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of a Class 1 laser will not result in eye injury and may therefore be considered safe. However, some Class 1 laser products may contain laser systems of a higher Class but there are adequate engineering control measures to ensure that access to the beam is not reasonably likely. Anyone who dismantles a Class 1 laser product that contains a higher Class laser system is potentially at risk of exposure to a hazardous laser beam 3.2.2 Hazard Level 1 Label The Hazard Level 1 label is shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. 3.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 3-3. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 145952 HAZARD LEVEL 1 655423-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards Class 1 Laser Safety Labels Figure 3-3 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. 3.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 3-4 FDA Statement Label Figure 3-5 FDA Statement Label 3.2.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 3-6. 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 20073-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card Figure 3-6 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. This section describes the optical service channel cards. An optical service channel (OSC) is a bidirectional channel connecting two adjacent nodes in a DWDM ring. For every DWDM node (except terminal nodes), two different OSC terminations are present, one for the west side and another for the east side. The channel transports OSC overhead that is used to manage ONS 15454 DWDM networks. An OSC signal uses the 1510-nm wavelength and does not affect client traffic. The primary purpose of this channel is to carry clock synchronization and orderwire channel communications for the DWDM network. It also provides transparent links between each node in the network. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. There are two versions of the OSC modules: the OSCM, and the OSC-CSM, which contains the OSC wavelength combiner and separator component in addition to the OSC module. 3.3 OSCM Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For OSCM card specifications, see the “A.4.1 OSCM Card Specifications” section on page A-11. Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC card includes the functions of the OSCM card. The OSCM card is used in amplified nodes that include the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L booster amplifier. The OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards include the required OSC wavelength combiner and separator component. The OSCM cannot be used in nodes where you use OC-N/STM-N cards, electrical cards, or cross-connect cards. The OSCM uses Slots 8 and 10, which are also cross-connect card slots. The OSCM supports the following features: • OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC • Supervisory data channel (SDC) forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing • Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring • 100BaseT far-end (FE) User Channel (UC) • Monitoring functions such as orderwire support and optical safety 655413-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card The OC-3/STM-1 section data communications channel (SDCC or RS-DCC) overhead bytes are used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, then it is regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing through the system communication link (SCL) bus on the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card. The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a packet-over-SONET/SDH (POS) processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 connector. The OSCM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the DWDM cards. The DWDM cards then forward the clock information to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.3-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card Figure 3-7 shows the OSCM card faceplate and block diagram. Figure 3-7 OSCM Card Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “3.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on page 3-3. Figure 3-8 shows the block diagram of the variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the OSCM. OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX 96464 ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC Line OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII 145944 Processor VOA Physical Interface DC/DC 19.44 MHz Line Ref clock Power supply Input filters MT CLKt BAT A&B 0 Slot 1-6 MT CLKt 0 Slot 12-17 6 M P SCL Bus to TCCs FE FE User Channel 6 TOH & Cell Bus3-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card Figure 3-8 OSCM VOA Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 3.3.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiode P1 monitors the power for the OSCM card. The returned power level value is calibrated to the OSC TX port (Table 3-3). For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 3.3.2 OSCM Card-Level Indicators The OSCM card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 3-4. P1 P1 OSC TX Physical photodiode OSC Variable optical attenuator Control Module OSC RX Control Interface 124968 Table 3-3 OSCM VOA Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 Output OSC OSC TX Table 3-4 OSCM Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.3-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card 3.3.3 OSCM Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The OSCM has one OC-3/STM-1 optical port located on the faceplate. One long-reach OSC transmits and receives the OSC to and from another DWDM node. Both DCN data and FE payload are carried on this link. 3.4 OSC-CSM Card Note For OSC-CSM card specifications, see the “A.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Specifications” section on page A-12. The OSC-CSM card is used in unamplified nodes. This means that the booster amplifier with the OSC wavelength combiner and separator is not required for OSC-CSM operation. The OSC-CSM can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. To operate in hybrid mode, the OSC-CSM cards must be accompanied by cross-connect cards. The cross-connect cards enable functionality on the OC-N/STM-N cards and electrical cards. The OSC-CSM supports the following features: • Optical combiner and separator module for multiplexing and demultiplexing the optical service channel to or from the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) signal • OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC • SDC forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing • Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring • 100BaseT FE UC • Monitoring functions such as orderwire support • Optical safety: Signal loss detection and alarming, fast transmitted power shut down by means of an optical 1x1 switch • Optical safety remote interlock (OSRI), a feature capable of shutting down the optical output power Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OSCM is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame alignment (LOF), line alarm indication signal (AIS-L), or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber signal fail (SF) LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off. Table 3-4 OSCM Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level Indicators Description3-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card • Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “12.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 12-27. The WDM signal coming from the line is passed through the OSC combiner and separator, where the OSC signal is extracted from the WDM signal. The WDM signal is sent along with the remaining channels to the COM port (label on the front panel) for routing to the OADM or amplifier units, while the OSC signal is sent to an optical transceiver. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. The OC-3/STM-1 SDCC or RS-DCC overhead bytes are used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, and then it is regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing via the SCL bus on the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card. The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a POS processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 front panel connector. The OSC-CSM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The clock distribution is different from the OSCM card because the OSC-CSM does not use Slot 8 or 10 (cross-connect card slots). Note S1 and S2 (Figure 3-11 on page 3-13) are optical splitters with a splitter ratio of 2:98. The result is that the power at the MON TX port is about 17 dB lower than the relevant power at the COM RX port, and the power at the MON RX port is about 20 dB lower than the power at the COM TX port. The difference is due to the presence of a tap coupler for the P1 photodiode.3-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card Figure 3-9 shows the OSC-CSM faceplate. Figure 3-9 OSC-CSM Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “3.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on page 3-3. Figure 3-10 shows a block diagram of the OSC-CSM card. 96465 OSC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC combiner separator OSC Line COM OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII TOH & Cell Bus 145943 Processor Physical Interface DC/DC Power supply Input filters MPMP BAT A&B SCL Bus to TCCs RxClkRef FE User Channel3-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card Figure 3-10 OSC-CSM Block Diagram ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC combiner separator OSC Line COM OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII TOH & Cell Bus 96477 Processor Physical Interface DC/DC Power supply Input filters MPMP BAT A&B SCL Bus to TCCs RxClkRef FE User Data Channel3-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card Figure 3-11 shows the OSC-CSM optical module functional block diagram. Figure 3-11 OSC-CSM Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 3.4.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P5 monitor the power for the OSC-CSM card. Their function is as follows: • P1: The returned power value is calibrated to the LINE RX port, including the insertion loss of the previous filter (the reading of this power dynamic range has been brought backward towards the LINE RX output). • P2: The returned value is calibrated to the LINE RX port. • P3: The returned value is calibrated to the COM RX port. • P5: The returned value is calibrated to the OSC TX port, including the insertion loss of the subsequent filter. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 3-5. P P P P P V V 124897 MON RX MON TX COM TX OSC RX LINE TX COM RX LINE RX DROP section ADD section OSC TX Control Interface Filter Filter S1 P1 P2 P5 P4 PV1 PV2 P3 HW Switch Control Opt. Switch S2 Virtual photodiode Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P V Optical splitter Control3-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card The OSC power on the LINE TX is the same as the power reported from P5. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 3.4.2 Alarms and Thresholds Table 3-6 lists the alarms and its related thresholds for the OSC-CSM card. 3.4.3 OSC-CSM Card-Level Indicators The OSC-CSM card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 3-7. Table 3-5 OSC-CSM Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameters P1 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported OSC Power P2 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P3 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported P5 Output OSC OSC TX OSC Power Supported Table 3-6 Alarms and Thresholds Port Alarms Thresholds LINE RX LOS None LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low LINE TX None None OSC TX OPWR-DEG-HIGH OPWR-DEG-HIGH Th OPWR-DEG-LOW OPWR-DEG-LOW Th OPWR-FAIL-LOW OPWR-FAIL-LOW Th OSC RX None None COM TX None None COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low3-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card 3.4.4 OSC-CSM Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The OSC-CSM has a OC3 port and three other sets of ports located on the faceplate. Table 3-7 OSC-CSM Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OSC-CSM is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, AIS-L, or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.3-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 3 Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM CardCHAPTER 4-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 4 Optical Amplifier Cards This chapter describes the optical amplifier cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 4.1 Card Overview, page 4-1 • 4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels, page 4-5 • 4.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card, page 4-7 • 4.4 OPT-BST Amplifier Card, page 4-11 • 4.5 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card, page 4-16 • 4.6 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card, page 4-19 • 4.7 OPT-AMP-L Card, page 4-24 • 4.8 OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 4-29 • 4.9 OPT-AMP-C Card, page 4-33 • 4.10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 4-38 4.1 Card Overview This section provides summary and compatibility information for the optical amplifier cards. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the "Card Slot Requirements" section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 4-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview Optical amplifiers are used in amplified nodes (such as hub nodes), amplified OADM nodes, and line amplifier nodes. The nine types of ONS 15454 DWDM amplifiers are: • Optical Preamplifier (OPT-PRE) • Optical Booster amplifier (OPT-BST) • Optical Booster Enhanced amplifier (OPT-BST-E) • Optical Booster L-band amplifier (OPT-BST-L) • Optical L-band preamplifier (OPT-AMP-L) • Optical C-band amplifier (OPT-AMP-17-C). • Optical C-band high-gain high-power amplifier (OPT-AMP-C) • Optical C-band Raman amplifier (OPT-RAMP-C) • Optical C-band enhanced Raman amplifier (OPT-RAMP-CE) Optical amplifier card architecture includes an optical plug-in module with a controller that manages optical power, laser current, and temperature control loops. An amplifier also manages communication with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card and operation, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) functions such as provisioning, controls, and alarms. 4.1.1 Applications Using CTC (CTC > Card > Provisioning), the following amplifiers can be configured as booster or preamplifiers: • OPT-AMP-C • OPT-AMP-17C • OPT-AMP-L • OPT-BST-E • OPT-BST The amplifier functions as a booster amplifier by default. The amplifier role is automatically configured when the CTP NE update configuration file is loaded in CTC. The amplifier role can also be manually modified. Note The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifiers are supported as preamplifiers in sites that are equipped with the OPT-RAMP-C card. In any other configuration, the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards must be configured as a booster amplifier. For more information about the supported configurations and network topologies, see Chapter 11, “Node Reference” and Chapter 12, “Network Reference.” 4.1.2 Card Summary Table 4-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each optical amplifier card.4-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview 4.1.3 Card Compatibility Table 4-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each optical amplifier card. Table 4-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 Card Port Description For Additional Information OPT-PRE The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports (three sets) located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card” section on page 4-7. OPT-BST The OPT-BST amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.4 OPT-BST Amplifier Card” section on page 4-11. OPT-BST-E The OPT-BST-E amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.5 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on page 4-16. OPT-BST-L The OPT-BST-L L-band amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.6 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card” section on page 4-19. OPT-AMP-L The OPT-AMP-L L-band preamplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It is a two-slot card that operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.7 OPT-AMP-L Card” section on page 4-24. OPT-AMP-17-C The OPT-AMP-17-C C-band low-gain preamplifier/booster amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.8 OPT-AMP-17-C Card” section on page 4-29. OPT-AMP-C The OPT-AMP-C C-band high-gain, high-power preamplifier/booster amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates as a preamplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slots 2 to 6 and 11 to 16 or as a booster amplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slot 1 and 17. See the “4.9 OPT-AMP-C Card” section on page 4-33. OPT-RAMP-C The OPT-RAMP-C C-band amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “4.10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 4-38. OPT-RAMP-CE The OPT-RAMP-CE C-band amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “4.10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 4-38.4-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview Table 4-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards Card Type R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R 9.2 OPT-PRE 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OPT-BST 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OPT-BST-E No No 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OPT-BST-L No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M OPT-AMP-L No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M OPT-AMP-17-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OPT-AMP-C No No No No No No No No 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OPT-RAMP-C No No No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M6 OPT-RAMP-CE No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM ONS 15454, 15454 -M64-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 4.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds Table 4-3 lists the alarms and related thresholds for the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C cards. 4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to the optical amplifier cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 4.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Figure 4-1 shows the Class 1M Laser Product statement. Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. Figure 4-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Table 4-3 Alarms and Thresholds Port Alarms Thresholds LINE RX LOS None LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low LINE TX OPWR-FAIL OPWR Fail Low OSC TX None None OSC RX None None COM TX None None COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 1459534-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 4.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label Figure 4-2 shows the Hazard Level 1M label. The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Figure 4-2 Hazard Level Label 4.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label Figure 4-3 shows the Laser Source Connector label. This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label appears. Figure 4-3 Laser Source Connector Label 4.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5. Figure 4-4 FDA Statement Label HAZARD LEVEL 1M 145990 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 20014-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Figure 4-5 FDA Statement Label These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. 4.2.5 Shock Hazard Label Figure 4-6 shows the Shock Hazard label. This label alerts you to an electrical hazard within the card. The potential for shock exists when you remove adjacent cards during maintenance or touch exposed electrical circuity on the card. Figure 4-6 Shock Hazard Label 4.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.1 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-13. Note For OPT-PRE card safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-PRE is a C-band, DWDM, two-stage erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with midamplifier loss (MAL) that can be connected to a dispersion compensating unit (DCU). The OPT-PRE is equipped with a built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) that controls the gain tilt and can also be used to pad the DCU to a reference value. You can install the OPT-PRE in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card is designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-PRE features include: • Fixed gain mode with programmable tilt • True variable gain 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 655414-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • MAL for fiber-based DCU • Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • Four signal photodiodes to monitor the input and output optical power of the two amplifier stages through CTC • An optical output port for external monitoring Note The optical splitter has a ratio of 1:99, resulting in about 20 dB-lower power at the MON port than at the COM TX port. 4.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON is the output monitor port • COM RX (receive) is the input signal port • COM TX (transmit) is the output signal port • DC RX is the MAL input signal port • DC TX is the MAL output signal port4-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Figure 4-7 shows the OPT-PRE amplifier card faceplate. Figure 4-7 OPT-PRE Faceplate 4.3.2 OPT-PRE Block Diagrams Figure 4-8 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-PRE card’s features. OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX 964664-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Figure 4-8 OPT-PRE Block Diagram Figure 4-9 shows the a block diagram of how the OPT-PRE optical module functions. Figure 4-9 OPT-PRE Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.3.3 OPT-PRE Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-PRE card. Table 4-4 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module COM RX DC RX 96478 Processor DC TX COM TX MON FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98298 DCU COM RX COM TX DC TX DC RX MON P1 P2 P3 P4 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Table 4-4 OPT-PRE Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 Input Com COM RX P2 Output DC DC TX P3 Input DC DC RX P4 Output COM (Total Output) COM TX Output COM (Signal Output)4-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST Amplifier Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.3.4 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card-Level Indicators Table 4-5 shows the three card-level LED indicators on the OPT-PRE amplifier card. 4.3.5 OPT-PRE Amplifier Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 4.4 OPT-BST Amplifier Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.2 OPT-BST Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-13. Note For OPT-BST card safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-BST is designed to ultimately support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-BST is a C-band, DWDM EDFA with optical service channel (OSC) add-and-drop capability. When an OPT-BST installed in the an ONS 15454, an OSCM card is also needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt) • Gain range of 5 to 20 dB in constant gain mode and output power mode • True variable gain • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Fast transient suppression Table 4-5 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-PRE is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST Amplifier Card • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI), a CTC software feature capable of shutting down optical output power or reducing the power to a safe level (automatic power reduction) • Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “12.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 12-27. Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power. 4.4.1 OPT-BST Faceplate Ports The OPT-BST amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.4-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST Amplifier Card Figure 4-10 shows the OPT-BST amplifier card faceplate. Figure 4-10 OPT-BST Faceplate 4.4.2 OPT-BST Block Diagrams Figure 4-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST card’s features. OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 964674-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST Amplifier Card Figure 4-11 OPT-BST Block Diagram Figure 4-12 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST optical module functions. Figure 4-12 OPT-BST Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.4.3 OPT-BST Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-BST card. Table 4-6 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 96479 Processor Line TX COM TX Com RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98300 MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P3 P4 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode Table 4-6 OPT-BST Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported4-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST Amplifier Card The power on the OSC TX and COM TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P3 and P4. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.4.4 OPT-BST Card-Level Indicators Table 4-7 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OPT-BST card. 4.4.5 OPT-BST Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-6 OPT-BST Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter Table 4-7 OPT-BST Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-BST is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 4.5 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.3 OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-14. Note For OPT-BST-E safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-BST-E amplifier card is a gain-enhanced version of the OPT-BST card. It is designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-BST-E is a C-band, DWDM EDFA with OSC add-and-drop capability. When an OPT-BST-E installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST-E in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt) • True variable gain • Gain range of 8 to 23 dBm with the tilt managed at 0 dBm in constant gain mode and output power mode • Enhanced gain range of 23 to 26 dBm with unmanaged tilt • Built-in VOA to control the gain tilt • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power. 4.5.1 OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports The OPT-BST-E amplifier card has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).4-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. Figure 4-13 shows the OPT-BST-E amplifier card faceplate. Figure 4-13 OPT-BST-E Faceplate 4.5.2 OPT-BST-E Block Diagrams Figure 4-14 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST-E card’s features. OPT BST-E FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 1459394-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Figure 4-14 OPT-BST-E Block Diagram Figure 4-15 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST-E optical module functions. Figure 4-15 OPT-BST-E Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.5.3 OPT-BST-E Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-BST-E card. Table 4-8 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 96479 Processor Line TX COM TX Com RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98300 MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P3 P4 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode Table 4-8 OPT-BST-E Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported4-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P3 and P4. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.5.4 OPT-BST-E Card-Level Indicators Table 4-9 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the OPT-BST-E amplifier card. 4.5.5 OPT-BST-E Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 4.6 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-8 OPT-BST-E Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter Table 4-9 OPT-BST-E Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-BST-E is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.4 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-15. Note For OPT-BST-L safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-BST-L is an L-band, DWDM EDFA with OSC add-and-drop capability. The card is well suited for use in networks that employ dispersion shifted (DS) fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The OPT-BST-L is designed to ultimately support 64 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing, but in Software R9.0 and earlier it is limited to 32 channels at 100-GHz spacing.When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-BST-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt) • Standard gain range of 8 to 20 dB in the programmable gain tilt mode • True variable gain • 20 to 27 dB gain range in the uncontrolled gain tilt mode • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power. 4.6.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports The OPT-BST-L amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. 4-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. Figure 4-16 shows the OPT-BST-L card faceplate. Figure 4-16 OPT-BST-L Faceplate 4.6.2 OPT-BST-L Block Diagrams Figure 4-17 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST-L card’s features. OPT BST-L FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 1809294-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Figure 4-17 OPT-BST-L Block Diagram Figure 4-18 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST-L optical module functions. Figure 4-18 OPT-BST-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.6.3 OPT-BST-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor the power for the OPT-BST-L card. Table 4-10 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 180930 Processor Line TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 134976 MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P4 P5 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode P3 Table 4-10 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported4-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power values reported from P4 and P5. The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P3. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.6.4 OPT-BST-L Card-Level Indicators Table 4-11 shows the three card-level LEDs on the OPT-BST-L card. 4.6.5 OPT-BST-L Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P5 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-10 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter Table 4-11 OPT-BST-L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-BST-L is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 4.7 OPT-AMP-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.5 OPT-AMP-L Preamplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-15. Note For OPT-AMP-L card safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-AMP-L is an L-band, DWDM optical amplifier card consisting of a two-stage EDFA with midstage access loss (MSL) for an external DCU and OSC add-and-drop capability. Using CTC, the card is provisionable as a preamplifier (OPT-PRE) or booster amplifier (OPT-BST), and is well suited for use in networks that employ DS or SMF-28 fiber. The amplifier can operate up to 64 optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the 1570 nm to 1605 nm wavelength range. When an OPT-AMP-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the two-slot OPT-AMP-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card has the following features: • Maximum power output of 20 dBm • True variable gain amplifier with settable range from 12 to 24 dBm in the standard gain range and 24 dBm to 35 dbM with uncontrolled gain tilt • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Up to 12 dBm MSL for an external DCU • Fast transient suppression; able to adjust power levels in hundreds of microseconds to avoid bit errors in failure or capacity growth situations • Nondistorting low frequency transfer function • Midstage access loss for dispersion compensation unit • Constant pump current mode (test mode) • Constant output power mode (used during optical node setup) • Constant gain mode • Internal ASE compensation in constant gain mode and in constant output power mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down control (less than one second), and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “12.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 12-27. Note Before disconnecting any OPT AMP-L fiber for troubleshooting, first make sure the OPT AMP-L card is unplugged.4-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 4.7.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports The OPT-AMP-L amplifier card has ten optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • DC TX is the output signal to the DCU. • DC RX is the input signal from the DCU.4-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card Figure 4-19 shows the OPT-AMP-L card faceplate. Figure 4-19 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate 4.7.2 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagrams Figure 4-20 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-L card’s features. OPT-AMP-L FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX RX DC TX 1809314-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card Figure 4-20 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagram Figure 4-21 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-AMP-L optical module functions. Figure 4-21 OPT-AMP-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram Optical module Monitor Line RX Line RX DC RX Processor Line TX DC TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 180932 MON TX OSC RX OSC TX COM RX COM TX MON RX LINE TX LINE RX P1 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P2 P3 P6 P4 DC TX DC RX External Mid-Stage Loss OSC Add OSC Drop P7 P5 Transmit Section Receive Section 1452564-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 4.7.3 OPT-AMP-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P7 monitor the power for the OPT-AMP-L card. Table 4-12 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power values reported from P5 and P6. The power values on the LINE TX port is calculated by adding the IL to the power value reported from P7. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.7.4 OPT-AMP-L Card-Level Indicators Table 4-13 shows the three card-level LEDs on the OPT-AMP-L card. Table 4-12 OPT-AMP-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output DC (total power) DC TX Channel Power Supported Output DC (signal power) P3 Input DC (input power) DC RX Channel Power Supported P4 Output Line (total power) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (signal power) P5 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P6 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P7 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-13 OPT-AMP-L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-AMP-L is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card 4.7.5 OPT-AMP-L Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 4.8 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.6 OPT-AMP-17-C Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-16. Note For OPT-AMP-17-C safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-AMP-17-C is a 17-dB gain, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier with OSC add-and-drop capability. It supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-17-C installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-17-C in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (no programmable tilt) • Standard gain range of 14 to 20 dB at startup when configured as a preamplifier • Standard gain range of 20 to 23 dB in the transient mode when configured as a preamplifier • Gain range of 14 to 23 dB (with no transient gain range) when configured as a booster amplifier • True variable gain • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS 4.8.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports The OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. 4-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. Figure 4-22 shows the OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card faceplate. Figure 4-22 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate OPT -AMP 17-C FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 1595204-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card 4.8.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Block Diagrams Figure 4-23 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-17C card’s features. Figure 4-23 OPT-AMP17-C Block Diagram Figure 4-24 shows how the OPT-AMP-17-C optical module functions. Figure 4-24 OPT-AMP-17-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 180928 Processor Line TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P4 P5 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode P3 OSC add OSC drop 1595194-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card 4.8.3 OPT-AMP-17-C Automatic Power Control A transient gain range of 20 to 23 dB is available to APC in order to permit other amplifiers to reach their expected set points. However, operation in this range is not continuous. At startup, the OPT-AMP-17-C card caps the gain at a maximum of 20 dB. Note When the OPT-AMP-17-C operates as a booster amplifier, APC does not control its gain. 4.8.4 OPT-AMP-17-C Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor power for the OPT-AMP-17-C card. Table 4-14 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P3 and P4. The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P5. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.8.5 OPT-AMP-17-C Card-Level Indicators Table 4-15 shows the three card-level LEDs on the OPT-AMP-17-C card. Table 4-14 OPT-AMP-17-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P5 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.4-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card 4.8.6 OPT-AMP-17-C Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 4.9 OPT-AMP-C Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.7 OPT-AMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-17. Note For OPT-AMP-C card safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-AMP-C card is a 20-dB output power, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier. It contains mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). To control gain tilt, a VOA is used. The VOA can also be used to attenuate the signal to the DCU to a reference value. The amplifier module also includes the OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters. The OPT-AMP-C card supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-C card installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Slots 2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a preamplifier, and slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a booster amplifier. The card’s features include: • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Mid-stage access for DCU • Constant pump current mode (test mode) • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • Constant gain mode • ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes • Programmable tilt Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-AMP-17-C is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off. Table 4-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level Indicators Description4-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Gain range with gain tilt control of 12 to 24 dB • Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 24 to 35 dB • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS 4.9.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports The OPT-AMP-C amplifier card has 10 optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • DC RX is the input DCU port. • DC TX is the output DCU port. • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • LINE TX is the output signal port. 4-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card Figure 4-25 shows the OPT-AMP-C amplifier card faceplate. Figure 4-25 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate 4.9.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Block Diagrams Figure 4-26 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-C card features. OPT -AMP -C FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX DC TX RX LINE TX 2745104-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card Figure 4-26 OPT-AMP-C Block Diagram Figure 4-27 shows how the OPT-AMP-C optical module functions. Figure 4-27 OPT-AMP-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 240356 Processor COM TX COM RX Line TX OSC TX Monitor Line TX DCU TX DCU RX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B MON TX OSC RX OSC TX COM RX COM TX MON RX LINE TX LINE RX P1 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P2 P3 P6 P4 DC TX DC RX External Mid-Stage Loss OSC Add OSC Drop P7 P5 Transmit Section Receive Section 1452564-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card 4.9.3 OPT-AMP-C Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P7 monitor the power for the OPT-AMP-C card (see Table 4-16). The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P5 and P6. The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P7. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in Table 19-31. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.9.4 OPT-AMP-C Card-Level Indicators Table 4-17 shows the three card-level LEDs on the OPT-AMP-C card. Table 4-16 OPT-AMP-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameters P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output DC (total power) DC TX Channel Power Supported Output DC (signal power) P3 Input DC (input power) DC RX Channel Power Supported P4 Output Line (total power) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (signal power) P5 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P6 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P7 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported Table 4-17 OPT-AMP-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-AMP-C card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 4.9.5 OPT-AMP-C Card Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 4.10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.8 OPT-RAMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-17 and “A.5.9 OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Card Specifications” section on page A-18. Note For OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card safety labels, see the “4.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-5. The OPT-RAMP-C card is a double-slot card that improves unregenerated sections in long spans using the span fiber to amplify the optical signal. Different wavelengths in C-band receive different gain values. To achieve Raman amplification, two Raman signals (that do not carry any payload or overhead) are required to be transmitted on the optical fiber because the gain generated by one signal is not flat. The energy of these Raman signals transfer to the higher region of the spectrum thereby amplifying the signals transmitted at higher wavelengths. The Raman effect reduces span loss but does not compensate it completely. When the Raman optical powers are set correctly, a gain profile with limited ripple is achieved. The wavelengths of the Raman signals are not in the C-band of the spectrum (used by MSTP for payload signals). The two Raman wavelengths are fixed and always the same. Due to a limited Raman gain, an EDFA amplifier is embedded into the card to generate a higher total gain. An embedded EDFA gain block provides a first amplification stage, while the mid stage access (MSA) is used for DCU loss compensation. The OPT-RAMP-CE card is a 20 dBm output power, gain-enhanced version of the OPT-RAMP-C card and is optimized for short spans. The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can support up to 80 optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing over the C-band of the optical spectrum (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm). To provide a counter-propagating Raman pump into the transmission fiber, the Raman amplifier provides up to 500 mW at the LINE-RX connector. The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16, and supports all network configurations. However, the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card must be equipped on both endpoints of a span. The Raman total power and Raman ratio can be configured using CTC. For information on how to configure the Raman parameters, refer the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The Raman configuration can be viewed on the Maintenance > Installation tab. The features of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card include: • Raman pump with embedded EDFA gain block • Raman section: 500 mW total pump power for two pump wavelengths • EDFA section: – OPT-RAMP-C: 16 dB gain and 17 dB output power4-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards – OPT-RAMP-CE: 11 dB gain and 20 dB output power • Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) for Raman plus EDFA ripple compensation • MSA for DC units • VOA for DC input power control • Full monitoring of pump, OSC, and signal power • Fast gain control for transient suppression • Low-FIT (hardware-managed) optical laser safety • Hardware output signals for LOS monitoring at input photodiodes • Optical service channel add and drop filters • Raman pump back-reflection detector 4.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards have ten optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port. • DC RX is the input DCU port. • DC TX is the output DCU port. • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • LINE TX is the output signal port. Figure 4-28 shows the OPT-RAMP-C card faceplate.4-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Figure 4-28 OPT-RAMP-C Faceplate The OPT-RAMP-CE card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-RAMP-C card. 4.10.2 Card Block Diagram Figure 4-29 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card features. 270710 LINE OSC DC COM MOM RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX FAIL ACT DF OPT-RAMP-C4-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Figure 4-29 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Block Diagram Figure 4-30 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card functions. Figure 4-30 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functional Block Diagram Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 240356 Processor COM TX COM RX Line TX OSC TX Monitor Line TX DCU TX DCU RX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 270709 OSC-TX W to E section E to W section Line-TX Line-RX COM-RX COM-TX OSC Drop OSC Add Pump 1 Pump 2 PD 8 PD 9 PD 11 PD 10 PD 12 PD 7 PD 5 PD 6 PD 1 PD 2 PD 3 PD 4 Pump Drop Pump Add PD Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator4-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Two Raman pump lasers are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-RX port, thereby counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. An EDFA gain block provides further amplification of the DWDM signal, which allows regulated output power entry in the mid stage access and acts upon the VOA attenuation. While the optical filters are present for the OSC add and drop functions, the OSC signal counter-propagates with the DWDM signal. Two monitor ports, MON-RX and MON-TX, are provided at the EDFA input and output stages and are used to evaluate the total gain ripple. A total of 12 photodiodes (PDs) are provided, allowing full monitoring of RP power, DWDM power, and OSC power in each section of the device. In particular, PD12 allows the detection of the remnant Raman pump power at the end of the counter-pumped span, while PD11 detects the amount of Raman pump power backscattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. The EDFA section calculates the signal power, considering the expected ASE power contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop. The ASE power is derived according to the working EDFA gain. PD2, PD3, and PD4 provide the total power measured by the photodiode and the signal power is derived by calculating the total power value. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical attenuation of the two monitor ports are stored into the card’s not-volatile memory. 4.10.3 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD12 monitor the power for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards (see Table 4-18). For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 4.10.4 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Level Indicators Table 4-19 shows the three card-level LEDs on the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards. Table 4-18 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port PD1 EDFA DWDM Input Power LINE-RX PD2 EDFA Output Power (pre-VOA attenuation) DC-TX (port with 0 dB VOA attenuation) PD3 DCU Input Power DC-TX PD4 DCU Output Power DC-RX PD5 DWDM Input Power COM-RX PD6 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX PD7 OSC DROP Output Power OSC-TX PD8 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX PD9 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX PD10 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX PD11 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX PD12 Remnant Pump Power LINE-TX4-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 4.10.5 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Port-Level Indicators You can determine the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. Table 4-19 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.4-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 4 Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE CardsCHAPTER 5-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards This chapter describes legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, see the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 5.1 Card Overview, page 5-1 • 5.2 Safety Labels, page 5-8 • 5.3 32MUX-O Card, page 5-13 • 5.4 32DMX-O Card, page 5-17 • 5.5 4MD-xx.x Card, page 5-21 Note For a description of the 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, and 40-WXC-C cards, see Chapter 9, “Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards.” 5.1 Card Overview The card overview section contains card summary, compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation plan information for legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the "Card Slot Requirements" section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 5-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview 5.1.1 Card Summary Table 5-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards. 5.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 5-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the legacy cards. 5.1.3 Interface Classes The 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 5-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output power of each interface class. Table 5-1 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information 32MUX-O The 32MUX-O has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “5.3 32MUX-O Card” section on page 5-13. 32DMX-O The 32DMX-O has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. “5.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 5-17 4MD-xx.x The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.5 4MD-xx.x Card” section on page 5-21. Table 5-2 Software Compatibility for Legacy Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Release Cards 32MUX-O 32DMX-O 4MD-xx.x R4.5 Yes Yes Yes R4.6 Yes Yes Yes R4.7 Yes Yes Yes R5.0 Yes Yes Yes R6.0 Yes Yes Yes R7.0 Yes Yes Yes R7.2 Yes Yes Yes R8.0 Yes Yes Yes R8.5 Yes Yes Yes R9.0 Yes Yes Yes R9.1 Yes Yes Yes R9.2 Yes Yes Yes5-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 5-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Table 5-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, and 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) without FEC D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and 40G-MXP-C cards with E-FEC enabled Table 5-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm5-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 5-5 lists the optical performance parameters that provide signal input for the 40-Gbps multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Transmitted Power Range3 OC-192 LR ITU — — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 5-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Table 5-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10G) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10E) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm5-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 5-6 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. 5.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan ONS 15454 DWDM multiplexer and demultiplexer cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. Table 5-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels. 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 5-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No No No No Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –27 dBm –33 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm Transmitted Power Range1 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –2.0 to 0 dBm TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –1000 to +3200 ps/nm5-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Note In some cases, a card uses only one of the bands (C band or L band) and some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU grid. See the specific card description or Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications” for more details. Table 5-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.365-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 5-8 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the L-band channels. 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 5-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 5-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.065-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels 5.2 Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some of the cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 5.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Labels The 32MUX-O card has a Class 1 laser. The labels that appear on the card are described in the following sections. 5.2.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label The Class 1 Laser Product label is shown in Figure 5-1. 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 5-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)5-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels Figure 5-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label Class 1 lasers are products whose irradiance does not exceed the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) value. Therefore, for Class 1 laser products the output power is below the level at which it is believed eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of a Class 1 laser will not result in eye injury and may therefore be considered safe. However, some Class 1 laser products may contain laser systems of a higher class but there are adequate engineering control measures to ensure that access to the beam is not reasonably likely. Anyone who dismantles a Class 1 laser product that contains a higher Class laser system is potentially at risk of exposure to a hazardous laser beam 5.2.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label The Hazard Level 1 label is shown in Figure 5-2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Figure 5-2 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. 5.2.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 145952 HAZARD LEVEL 1 65542 966355-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels 5.2.1.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 5-4 FDA Statement Label Figure 5-5 FDA Statement Label 5.2.1.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. 5.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards The 32DMX-O and 4MD-xx.x cards have Class IM lasers. The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following subsections. 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 655415-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels 5.2.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement The Class 1M Laser Product statement is shown in Figure 5-7. Figure 5-7 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. 5.2.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label The Hazard Level 1M label is shown in Figure 5-8. Figure 5-8 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. 5.2.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 5-9. Figure 5-9 Laser Source Connector Label CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 145953 HAZARD LEVEL 1M 145990 966355-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. 5.2.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 5-10 FDA Statement Label Figure 5-11 FDA Statement Label 5.2.2.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 5-6. Figure 5-12 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 655415-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card 5.3 32MUX-O Card Note See the “A.7.1 32MUX-O Card Specifications” section on page A-20 for hardware specifications. The 32-Channel Multiplexer (32MUX-O) card multiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 32MUX-O card takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. The 32MUX-O features include: • Arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) device that enables full multiplexing functions for the channels. • Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation prior to multiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. • Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation. An additional optical monitoring port with 1:99 splitting ratio is available. Figure 5-13 shows the 32MUX-O faceplate.5-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card Figure 5-13 32MUX-O Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “5.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Labels” section on page 5-8. Figure 5-14 shows a block diagram of the 32MUX-O card. 30.3 - 36.6 38.1 - 44.5 46.1 - 52.5 54.1 - 60.6 32MUX-0 COM TX RX MON FAIL ACT SF 964685-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card Figure 5-14 32MUX-O Block Diagram The 32MUX-O card has four receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 32MUX-O card also has two LC-PC-II optical connectors, one for the main output and the other for the monitor port. Figure 5-15 shows the 32MUX-O optical module functional block diagram. Figure 5-15 32MUX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.3.1 Channel Plan The 32MUX-O is typically used in hub nodes and provides the multiplexing of 32 channels, spaced at 100 GHz, into one fiber before their amplification and transmission along the line. The channel plan is shown in Table 5-9. Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS RX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS RX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS RX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS RX 134413 Processor MON COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98301 1 32 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator MON COM TX Inputs P32 P31 P30 P29 P4 P3 P2 P1 P5-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card Table 5-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan Channel Number1 1. The Channel Number column is only for reference purposes. The channel ID is consistent with the ONS 15454 and is used in card identification. Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 1 30.3 195.9 1530.33 2 31.2 195.8 1531.12 3 31.9 195.7 1531.90 4 32.6 195.6 1532.68 5 34.2 195.4 1534.25 6 35.0 195.3 1535.04 7 35.8 195.2 1535.82 8 36.6 195.1 1536.61 9 38.1 194.9 1538.19 10 38.9 194.8 1538.98 11 39.7 194.7 1539.77 12 40.5 194.6 1540.56 13 42.1 194.4 1542.14 14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 15 43.7 194.2 1543.73 16 44.5 194.1 1544.53 17 46.1 193.9 1546.12 18 46.9 193.8 1546.92 19 47.7 193.7 1547.72 20 48.5 193.6 1548.51 21 50.1 193.4 1550.12 22 50.9 193.3 1550.92 23 51.7 193.2 1551.72 24 52.5 193.1 1552.52 25 54.1 192.9 1554.13 26 54.9 192.8 1554.94 27 55.7 192.7 1555.75 28 56.5 192.6 1556.55 29 58.1 192.4 1558.17 30 58.9 192.3 1558.98 31 59.7 192.2 1559.79 32 60.6 192.1 1560.615-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card 5.3.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P32 monitor the power for the 32MUX-O card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 5-10. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 5.3.3 32MUX-O Card-Level Indicators The 32MUX-O card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-11. 5.3.4 32MUX-O Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The 32MUX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM TX is the line output. COM MON is the optical monitoring port. The xx.x to yy.y RX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y, according to the channel plan. 5.4 32DMX-O Card Note See the “A.7.2 32DMX-O Card Specifications” section on page A-20 for hardware specifications. Table 5-10 32MUX-O Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD COM TX Table 5-11 32MUX-O Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32MUX-O is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.5-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card The 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX-O) card demultiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 32DMX-O takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. The 32DMX-O features include: • AWG that enables channel demultiplexing functions. • Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation after demultiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. • The 32DXM-O has four physical receive connectors that accept MPO cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. Note In contrast, the single-slot 32DMX card does not have VOAs on each drop port for optical power regulation. The 32DMX optical demultiplexer module is used in conjunction with the 32WSS card in ONS 15454 Multiservice Transport Platform (MSTP) nodes. • Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation. Figure 5-16 shows the 32DMX-O card faceplate.5-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card Figure 5-16 32DMX-O Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “5.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 5-10. Figure 5-17 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-O card. 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 36.6 38.1 - 44.5 46.1 - 52.5 TX 54.1 - 60.6 RX COM MON 1459355-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card Figure 5-17 32DMX-O Block Diagram Figure 5-18 shows the 32DMX-O optical module functional block diagram. Figure 5-18 32DMX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.4.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-O card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 5-12. Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS TX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS TX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS TX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS TX 96480 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98302 1 32 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P32 P31 P30 P29 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P33 Table 5-12 32DMX-O Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX5-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 5.4.2 32DMX-O Card-Level Indicators The 32DMX-O card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-13. 5.4.3 32DMX-O Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The 32DMX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. MON is the output monitor port. COM RX is the line input. The xx.x to yy.y TX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y according to the channel plan. 5.5 4MD-xx.x Card Note See the “A.7.3 4MD-xx.x Card Specifications” section on page A-21 for hardware specifications. The 4-Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4MD-xx.x) card multiplexes and demultiplexes four 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 4MD-xx.x card is designed to be used with band OADMs (both AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x). The card is bidirectional. The demultiplexer and multiplexer functions are implemented in two different sections of the same card. In this way, the same card can manage signals flowing in opposite directions. There are eight versions of this card that correspond with the eight sub-bands specified in Table 5-14 on page 5-24. The 4MD-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 4MD-xx.x has the following features implemented inside a plug-in optical module: • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel multiplex/demultiplex function. • Software-controlled VOAs at every port of the multiplex section regulate the optical power of each multiplexed channel. Table 5-13 32DMX-O Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32DMX-O is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.5-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card • Software-monitored photodiodes at the input and output multiplexer and demultiplexer ports for power control and safety purposes. • Software-monitored virtual photodiodes at the common DWDM output and input ports. A virtual photodiode is a firmware calculation of the optical power at that port. This calculation is based on the single channel photodiode reading and insertion losses of the appropriated paths. Figure 5-19 shows the 4MD-xx.x faceplate. Figure 5-19 4MD-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “5.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 5-10. Figure 5-20 shows a block diagram of the 4MD-xx.x card. 4MD -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX COM TX 964705-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card Figure 5-20 4MD-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 5-21 shows the 4MD-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 5-21 4MD-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram The optical module shown in Figure 5-21 is optically passive and consists of a cascade of interferential filters that perform the channel multiplexing and demultiplexing functions. VOAs are present in every input path of the multiplex section in order to regulate the optical power of each multiplexed channel. Some optical input and output ports are monitored by means of photodiodes implemented both for power control and for safety purposes. An internal control manages VOA settings and functionality as well as photodiode detection and alarm thresholds. The power at the main output Optical Module Channel Inputs 96482 Processor COM TX COM RX Channel Outputs FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P DC/DC converter Power supply input filters BAT A&B 98303 Virtual photodiode COM TX COM RX Demux RX channels TX channels Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Control Control interface V1 V Mux P1 P2 P3 P3 P5 P6 P7 P8 P V25-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card and input ports is monitored through the use of virtual photodiodes. A virtual photodiode is implemented in the firmware of the plug-in module. This firmware calculates the power on a port, summing the measured values from all single channel ports (and applying the proper path insertion loss) and then providing the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card with the obtained value. 5.5.1 Wavelength Pairs Table 5-14 shows the band IDs and the add/drop channel IDs for the 4MD-xx.x card. 5.5.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P8 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the 4MD-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 5-15. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 5.5.3 4MD-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The 4MD-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-16. Table 5-14 4MD-xx.x Channel Sets Band ID Add/Drop Channel IDs Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2, 31.9, 32.6 Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0, 35.8, 36.6 Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9, 39.7, 40.5 Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9, 43.7, 44.5 Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9, 47.7, 48.5 Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9, 51.7, 52.5 Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9, 55.7, 56.5 Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9, 59.7, 60.6 Table 5-15 4MD-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX V1 OUT COM COM TX V2 IN COM COM RX5-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card 5.5.4 4MD-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM RX is the line input. COM TX is the line output. The 15xx.x TX ports represent demultiplexed channel outputs 1 to 4. The 15xx.x RX ports represent multiplexed channel inputs 1 to 4. Table 5-16 4MD-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 4MD-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.5-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 5 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x CardCHAPTER 6-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units This chapter explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. The T-DCU unit compensates for chromatic dispersion (CD) of the transmission fiber. The T-DCU provides two line cards with varied set of tunable wavelengths to compensate for CD. This chapter includes: • 6.1 Card Overview, page 6-1 • 6.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels, page 6-2 • 6.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 6-3 • 6.4 Monitoring Optical Performance, page 6-7 6.1 Card Overview The T-DCU card provides a selectable set of discrete negative chromatic dispersion values to compensate for chromatic dispersion of the transmission line. The card operates over the entire C-band (in the range of 1529.0 nm to 1562.5 nm) and monitors the optical power at the input and the output ports. The two types of T-DCU line cards are: • TDC-CC (Coarse T-DCU) • TDC-FC (Fine T-DCU) Note Each T-DCU card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the 1.16.1 Card Slot Requirements section on page 1-59 for a list of slots and symbols.6-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 6.1.1 Card Summary Table 6-1 lists and summarizes the information about the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards. 6.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some of the cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 6.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Cards The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards can be connected to Class 1M lasers. The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following subsections. Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. 6.2.1.1 Hazard Level 1M Label The Hazard Level 1M label is shown in Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. Table 6-1 T-DCU Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information TDC-CC The TDC-CC has one set of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1 to 6 and slots 12 to 17. See the 6.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards section. TDC-FC The TDC-FC has one set of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1 to 6 and slots 12 to 17. CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 1459536-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 6.2.1.2 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. 6.2.1.3 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 6-3 FDA Statement Label Figure 6-4 FDA Statement Label 6.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards The TDC-CC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -1650 ps/nm with a granularity of 110 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum. The TDC-FC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -675 ps/nm with a granularity of 45 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum. 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 20076-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards You can configure the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards for the CD value listed in Table 6-2. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide to set the compensating value using CTC. 6.3.1 Key Features The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards provide the following features: • Single slot card with three LEDs on the front panel. • Two LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. • Operates in slots from slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. • Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) of the optical spectrum. • Allows upto 16 provisionable CD values for chromatic dispersion compensation. • Connects to OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE amplifiers and 40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 cards. • Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling for selectable thresholds. • Allows monitoring and provisioning using CTC, SNMP, or TL1. Table 6-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm] 0 0 1 1. The default value of the TDC-CC CD value for Coarse Unit is 0. 0 2 2. The default value of the TDC-FC value for Fine Unit is 0. 1 -110 -45 2 -220 -90 3 -330 -135 4 -440 -180 5 -550 -225 6 -660 -270 7 -770 -315 8 -880 -360 9 -990 -405 10 -1100 -450 11 -1210 -495 12 -1320 -540 13 -1430 -585 14 -1540 -630 15 -1650 -6756-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 6.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram Figure 6-5 shows the TDC-CC and TDC-FC faceplate diagram. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards can be installed or pulled out of operation from any user interface slot, without impacting other service cards operating within that shelf. To install the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards, refer the section NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Figure 6-5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplates Note The coarse T-DCU is identified with the card label as TDC-CC and the fine T-DCU with TDC-FC in the faceplate of the T-DCU card. TDC-CC FAIL ACT SF DC RX TX TDC-FC FAIL ACT SF DC RX TX Any of the 12 general purpose slots 2764446-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 6.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports The T-DCU unit contains the DC-RX (input) and DC-TX (output) ports. The optical signal enters the DC-RX port, compensates the chromatic dispersion and then exits from the DC-TX port. 6.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards embed an optical module with four spools (D1, D2, D3, and D4) of dispersion compensating fiber that connects through the 2x2 bypass switches (Figure 6-6). Each bypass switch allows the corresponding dispersion compensation fiber spools to connect to the optical path from the DC-RX (input port) to the DC-TX (output port). The switch configuration selects the requested CD value and combines the four spools based on the 16 chromatic dispersion compensation values fetched. The photodiodes PD1 and PD2 are used to monitor the input and output ports respectively. Figure 6-6 Block Diagram of TDC-CC and TDC-FC 6.3.5 Lamp Test The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards support a lamp test function that is activated either from the ONS 15454 front panel or CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. 6.3.6 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Card-Level Indicators Table 6-3 lists the card-level LEDs on the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards. 276445 2x2 Switch D1 2x2 Switch D2 2x2 Switch D3 2x2 Switch D4 S1 S2 S3 S4 DC-RX DC-TX PD1 PD26-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Monitoring Optical Performance 6.4 Monitoring Optical Performance The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards monitor the optical input power and optical output power of the fiber. It monitors the insertion loss from the input (DC-RX) to the output (DC-TX) port, with the help of the two photodiodes PD1 and PD2. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards report the minimum, average, and maximum power statistics of each of the monitored ports or channels in the specific card. To view the optical power statistics of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The performance data is recorded at 15 minutes and 24 hours intervals. Note You can view the performance monitoring (PM) data of the card using CTC, SNMP, and TL1 interfaces. Note The PM data is stored on a wrap-around basis at 32 x 15 min and 2 x 24 hour intervals. Table 6-3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is ON during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The Amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS and LOF on one or more of the card ports. The amber SF LED is also ON if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns OFF.6-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 6 Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Monitoring Optical PerformanceCHAPTER 7-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 7 Protection Switching Module This chapter describes the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 7.1 PSM Card Overview • 7.2 Key Features • 7.3 PSM Block Diagram • 7.4 PSM Faceplate Ports • 7.5 PSM Card-Level Indicators • 7.6 PSM Bidirectional Switching 7.1 PSM Card Overview The PSM card performs splitter protection functions. In the transmit (TX) section of the PSM card (see Figure 7-1), the signal received on the common receive port is duplicated by a hardware splitter to both the working and protect transmit ports. In the receive (RX) section of the PSM card (Figure 7-1), a switch is provided to select one of the two input signals (on working and protect receive ports) to be transmitted through the common transmit port. The PSM card supports multiple protection configurations: • Channel protection—The PSM COM ports are connected to the TXP/MXP trunk ports. • Line (or path) protection—The PSM working (W) and protect (P) ports are connected directly to the external line. • Multiplex section protection—The PSM is equipped between the MUX/DMX stage and the amplification stage. • Standalone—The PSM can be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations.7-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 7 Protection Switching Module Key Features The PSM card is a single-slot card that can be installed in any node from Slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The PSM card includes six LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. In channel protection configuration, the PSM card can be installed in a different shelf from its peer TXP/MXP card. Note It is strongly recommended that you use the default layouts designed by Cisco Transport Planner, which place the PSM card and its peer TXP/MXP card as close as possible to simplify cable management. For more information on the node configurations supported for the PSM card, see the “11.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card” section on page 11-38. For more information on the network topologies supported for the PSM card, see the “12.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card” section on page 12-19. 7.2 Key Features The PSM card provides the following features: • Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) and L-band (wavelengths from 1570.5 nm to 1604 nm) of the optical spectrum. • Implements bidirectional nonrevertive protection scheme. For more details on bidirectional switching, see the “7.6 PSM Bidirectional Switching” section on page 7-5. • Supports automatic creation of splitter protection group when the PSM card is provisioned. • Supports switching priorities based on ITU-T G.873.1. • Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds. • Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. ALS is applicable only in line protection configuration. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “12.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 12-27. 7.3 PSM Block Diagram Figure 7-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the PSM card.7-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 7 Protection Switching Module PSM Faceplate Ports Figure 7-1 PSM Block Diagram 7.4 PSM Faceplate Ports The PSM card has six optical ports located on the faceplate: • COM-RX (receive) is the input signal port. • COM-TX (transmit) is the output signal port. • W-RX is the working input signal port (receive section). • W-TX is the working output signal port (transmit section). • P-RX is the protect input signal port (receive section). • P-TX is the protect output signal port (transmit section). All ports are equipped with photodiodes to monitor optical power and other related thresholds. The COM-RX port is equipped with a virtual photodiode (firmware calculations of port optical power) to monitor optical power. The W-RX, P-RX, W-TX, and P-TX ports have optical power regulation, which are provided by variable optical attenuators (VOA). All VOAs equipped within the PSM card work in control attenuation mode. Figure 7-2 shows the PSM card faceplate. 270910 TX Section RX Section COM-RX W-TX P-TX W-RX P-RX COM-TX PD5 VOA3 1x2 Switch 50/50 Splitter PD2 PD4 PD3 VOA1 PD1 VOA2 Virtual PD7-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 7 Protection Switching Module PSM Card-Level Indicators Figure 7-2 PSM Card Faceplate 7.5 PSM Card-Level Indicators Table 7-1 shows the three card-level indicators on the PSM card. 270911 PSM FAIL ACT SF P COM RX TX RX TX RX TX W 1345567 Any of the 12 general purpose slots Table 7-1 PSM Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.7-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 7 Protection Switching Module PSM Bidirectional Switching 7.6 PSM Bidirectional Switching A VOA is equipped after the hardware splitter within the PSM card. The VOA implements bidirectional switching when there is a single fiber cut in a protection configuration involving two peer PSM cards. Figure 7-3 shows a sample configuration that explains the bidirectional switching capability of the PSM card. Figure 7-3 PSM Bidirectional Switching In this example, there is a fiber cut in the working path from Station A to Station B as shown in Figure 7-3. As a result of the fiber cut, an LOS alarm is raised on the W-RX port of Station B and it immediately switches traffic on to its P-RX port. Station B simultaneously also stops transmission (for approximately 25 milliseconds) on its W-TX port, which raises an LOS alarm on the W-RX port of Station A. This causes Station A to also switch traffic to its P-RX port. In this way, PSM implements bidirectional switching without any data exchange between the two stations. Since the two stations do not communicate using signaling protocols (overhead bytes), a Manual or Force protection switch on the PSM card is implemented by creating a traffic hit. For example, consider that you perform a Manual or Force protection switch on Station A. The TX VOA on the active path is set to automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) state for 25 milliseconds. This causes Station B to switch traffic to the other path because it cannot differentiate between a maintenance operation and a real fail. After 25 milliseconds, the VOA in Station A is automatically reset. However, Station B will not revert back by itself because of nonrevertive switching protection scheme used in the PSM card. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the PSM is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off. Table 7-1 PSM Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level Indicators Description 270915 TX Section RX Section COM-RX W-TX P-TX W-RX P-RX W-RX P-RX W-TX P-TX COM-TX PD5 RX Section TX Section COM-TX COM-RX PD3 PD4 PD2 PD1 A B PD3 PD4 PD2 PD1 PD57-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 7 Protection Switching Module PSM Bidirectional Switching To effectively implement switching, the Lockout and Force commands must be performed on both the stations. If these commands are not performed on both the stations, the far-end and near-end PSMs can be misaligned. In case of misalignment, when a path recovers, traffic might not recover automatically. You might have to perform a Force protection switch to recover traffic. Note The order in which you repair the paths is important in the event of a double failure (both the working and protect paths are down due to a fiber cut) on the PSM card in line protection configuration when the active path is the working path. If you repair the working path first, traffic is automatically restored. However, if you repair the protect path first, traffic is not automatically restored. You must perform a Force protection switch to restore traffic on the protect path.CHAPTER 8-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards This chapter describes optical add/drop cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 8.1 Card Overview, page 8-1 • 8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers, page 8-8 • 8.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card, page 8-11 • 8.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card, page 8-14 • 8.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card, page 8-18 • 8.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card, page 8-22 • 8.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card, page 8-25 8.1 Card Overview The card overview section contains card overview, software compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation information for optical add/drop cards. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the "Card Slot Requirements" section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. Optical add/drop cards are divided into two groups: band optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) cards and channel OADM cards. Band OADM cards add and drop one or four bands of adjacent channels. The cards in this chapter, including the 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) and the 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) 8-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview are utilized only in the C band. Channel OADM cards add and drop one, two, or four adjacent channels; they include the 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x), the 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x), and the 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.x). Note For information about L band add and drop capability, see Chapter 9, “Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards.” 8.1.1 Card Summary Table 8-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the optical add/drop cards. 8.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 8-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical add/drop card. Table 8-1 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information AD-1C-xx.x The AD-1C-xx.x card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “8.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card” section on page 8-11. AD-2C-xx.x The AD-2C-xx.x card has four sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “8.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card” section on page 8-14. AD-4C-xx.x The AD-4C-xx.x card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “8.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card” section on page 8-18. AD-1B-xx.x The AD-1B-xx.x card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “8.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card” section on page 8-22. AD-4B-xx.x The AD-4B-xx.x card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “8.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card” section on page 8-25.8-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 8.1.3 Interface Classes The AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates from. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 8-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performances and output power of each interface class. Table 8-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 AD-1C-xx.x 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM , 15454- M2, 15454- M6 AD-2C-xx.x 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM , 15454- M2, 15454- M6 AD-4C-xx.x 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM , 15454- M2, 15454- M6 AD-1B-xx.x 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM AD-4B-xx.x 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DW DM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454 -DWD M 15454- DWDM8-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 8-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards. Table 8-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, and 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC and the 10-Gbps muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L), and 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) without FEC D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and 40G-MXP-C cards with E-FEC enabled Table 8-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm8-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 8-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards. Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 OC-192 LR ITU — — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 8-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Table 8-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10G) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm —8-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards have the interface performance parameters listed in Table 8-6. 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10E) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 8-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Table 8-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No No No No Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –27 dBm –33 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm Transmitted Power Range1 TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –2.0 to 0 dBm — — TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm —8-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 8.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan ONS 15454 DWDM channel OADM and band OADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. Table 8-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels. Note In some cases, a card uses only some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU-T grid. See specific card descriptions in Appendix A, “Hardware Specifications,” for more details. 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) — — — — +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –1000 to +3200 ps/nm 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 8-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited Table 8-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.1168-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers 8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers This section lists the safety labels attached to the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4c-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.xx cards. 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 8-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)8-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers 8.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement The Class 1M Laser Product statement is shown in Figure 8-1. Figure 8-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. 8.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label The Hazard Level 1M label is shown in Figure 8-2. Figure 8-2 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. 8.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 8-3. CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 145953 HAZARD LEVEL 1M 1459908-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers Figure 8-3 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. 8.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 8-4 FDA Statement Label Figure 8-5 FDA Statement Label 8.2.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 8-6. 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 20078-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1C-xx.x Card Figure 8-6 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. 8.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Note See the “A.9.1 AD-1C-xx.x Card Specifications” section on page A-44 for hardware specifications. The 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops one of the 32 channels utilized within the 100-GHz-spacing of the DWDM card system. Thirty-two versions of this card—each designed only for use with one wavelength—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. Each wavelength version of the card has a different part number. The AD-1C-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The AD-1C-xx.x has the following internal features: • Two cascaded passive optical interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • One software-controlled variable optical attenuator (VOA) regulates the optical power of the inserted channel. • Software-controlled VOA regulates the insertion loss of the express optical path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds, are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculations of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports are monitored within the software. Figure 8-7 shows the AD-1C-xx.x faceplate. 655418-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1C-xx.x Card Figure 8-7 AD-1C-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers” section on page 8-8. Figure 8-8 shows a block diagram of the AD-1C-xx.x card. AD-1C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 964738-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1C-xx.x Card Figure 8-8 AD-1C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 8-9 shows the AD-1C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 8-9 AD-1C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8.3.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-1C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 8-8. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124074 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx 98304 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Channel 15xx.xx RX Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V1 P COM TX P1 P3 P5 P4 V2 P2 V Table 8-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 ADD DROP RX P2 DROP DROP TX8-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 8.3.2 AD-1C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The AD-1C-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 8-9. 8.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The AD-1C-xx.x has six LC-PC-II optical ports: two for add/drop channel client input and output, two for express channel input and output, and two for communication. 8.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Note See the “A.9.2 AD-2C-xx.x Card Specifications” section on page A-44 for hardware specifications. The 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops two adjacent 100-GHz channels within the same band. Sixteen versions of this card—each designed for use with one pair of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. Each version of the card has a different part number. The AD-2C-xx.x has the following features: P3 IN EXP EXP RX P4 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX Table 8-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Table 8-9 AD-1C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the AD-1C-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure. The SF LED also illuminates when the transmitting and receiving fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the LED turns off.8-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • Two software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power of inserted channels. • Software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express channels. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports are monitored within the software. Figure 8-10 shows the AD-2C-xx.x faceplate. Figure 8-10 AD-2C-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers” section on page 8-8. AD-2C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 964748-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card Figure 8-11 shows a block diagram of the AD-2C-xx.x card. Figure 8-11 AD-2C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 8-12 shows the AD-2C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 8-12 AD-2C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8.4.1 Wavelength Pairs The AD-2C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the wavelength pairs listed in Table 8-10. In this table, channel IDs are given rather than wavelengths. To compare channel IDs with the actual wavelengths they represent, see wavelengths in Table 8-7 on page 8-7. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 98305 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply input filters BAT A&B Add RX Drop TX Add RX Drop TX CH 1 CH 2 98306 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Second channel TX RX RX Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 V2 COM TX First channel P1 P P3 P4 P2 P5 P7 P68-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card 8.4.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-2C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 8-11. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 8.4.3 AD-2C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The AD-2C-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 8-12. Table 8-10 AD-2C-xx.x Channel Pairs Band ID Add/Drop Channel ID Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2 31.9, 32.6 Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0 35.8, 36.6 Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9 39.7, 40.5 Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9 43.7, 44.5 Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9 47.7, 48.5 Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9 51.7, 52.5 Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9 55.7, 56.5 Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9 59.7, 60.6 Table 8-11 AD-2C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P2 ADD COM TX P3–P4 DROP DROP TX P5 IN EXP EXP RX P6 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX8-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card 8.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The AD-2C-xx.x card has eight LC-PC-II optical ports: four for add/drop channel client input and output, two for express channel input and output, and two for communication. 8.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card Note See the “A.9.3 AD-4C-xx.x Card Specifications” section on page A-45 for hardware specifications. The 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops all four 100-GHz-spaced channels within the same band. Eight versions of this card—each designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. There are eight versions of this card with eight part numbers. The AD-4C-xx.x has the following features: • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • Four software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power of inserted channels. • Two software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express and drop path, respectively. • Internal control of the VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds. • Software-monitored virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports. Figure 8-13 shows the AD-4C-xx.x faceplate. Table 8-12 AD-2C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the AD-2C-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.8-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card Figure 8-13 AD-4C-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers” section on page 8-8. Figure 8-14 shows a block diagram of the AD-4C-xx.x card. AD-4C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 964758-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card Figure 8-14 AD-4C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 8-15 shows the AD-4C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 8-15 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8.5.1 Wavelength Sets The AD-4C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the sets of four 100-GHz-spaced wavelengths shown Table 8-13 on page 8-21. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124075 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 1 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 2 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 3 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 4 98299 Control Control interface 4Ch OADM module Virtual photodiode COM RX COM TX EXP RX EXP TX TX Channels RX Channels Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 V2 P1 P9 P11 P10 P12 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P8-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card 8.5.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-4C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 8-14. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 8.5.3 AD-4C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The AD-4C-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 8-15. Table 8-13 AD-4C-xx.x Channel Sets Band ID Add/Drop Wavelengths Band 30.3 (A) 1530.3, 1531.2, 1531.9, 1532.6 Band 34.2 (B) 1534.2, 1535.0, 1535.8, 1536.6 Band 38.1 (C) 1538.1, 1538.9, 1539.7, 1540.5 Band 42.1 (D) 1542.1, 1542.9, 1543.7, 1544.5 Band 46.1 (E) 1546.1, 1546.9, 1547.7, 1548.5 Band 50.1 (F) 1550.1, 1550.9, 1551.7, 1552.5 Band 54.1 (G) 1554.1, 1554.9, 1555.7, 1556.5 Band 58.1 (H) 1558.1, 1558.9, 1559.7, 1560.6 Table 8-14 AD-4C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX P9 IN EXP EXP RX P10 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX Table 8-15 AD-4C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.8-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card 8.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The AD-4C-xx.x card has 12 LC-PC-II optical ports: eight for add/drop channel client input and output, two for express channel input and output, and two for communication. 8.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note See the “A.9.4 AD-1B-xx.x Card Specifications” section on page A-47 for hardware specifications. The 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops a single band of four adjacent 100-GHz-spaced channels. Eight versions of this card with eight different part numbers—each version designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other. The AD-1B xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to17 and has the following features: • Passive cascaded interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • Two software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the express and drop OADM paths (drop section). • Output power of the dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of the VOA drop. • The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output are monitored within the software. Figure 8-16 shows the AD-1B-xx.x faceplate. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the AD-4C-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off. Table 8-15 AD-4C-xx.x Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level Indicators Description8-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card Figure 8-16 AD-1B-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers” section on page 8-8. Figure 8-17 shows a block diagram of the AD-1B-xx.x card. AD-1B -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX XX.X TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 964718-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card Figure 8-17 AD-1B-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 8-18 shows the AD-1B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 8-18 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8.6.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-1B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 8-16. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124073 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Band xx.x Rx Band xx.x Tx 98307 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Band xx.x Physical photodiode RX Physical photodiode V V2 V1 COM TX P1 P3 P5 P4 P2 P Table 8-16 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 ADD BAND RX P2 DROP BAND TX8-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 8.6.2 AD-1B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The AD-1B-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 8-17. 8.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The AD-1B-xx.x has six LC-PC-II optical ports: two for add/drop channel client input and output, two for express channel input and output, and two for communication. 8.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops four bands of four adjacent 100-GHz-spaced channels. Two versions of this card with different part numbers—each version designed for use with one set of bands—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other. The AD1B-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and has the following features: P3 IN EXP EXP RX P4 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX Table 8-16 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Table 8-17 AD-1B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the AD-1B-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.8-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card • Five software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the OADM paths. • Output power of each dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of each VOA drop. • The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output port are monitored within the software. Figure 8-19 shows the AD-4B-xx.x faceplate. Figure 8-19 AD-4B-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “8.2 Class 1M Laser Product Safety Lasers” section on page 8-8. Figure 8-20 shows a block diagram of the AD-4B-xx.x card. AD-4B -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 964728-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card Figure 8-20 AD-4B-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 8-21 shows the AD-4B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 8-21 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 8.7.1 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P11 and virtual photodiode V1 monitor the power for the AD-4B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 8-18. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124075 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 1 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 2 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 3 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 4 Virtual photodiode COM RX TX B30.3 or B46.1 RX Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 EXP RX EXP TX COM TX TX B34.2 or B50.1 RX TX B38.1 or B54.1 RX TX RX B42.1 or B58.1 98308 P1 P P2 P3 P4 P9 P11 P12 P10 P5 P6 P7 P88-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 8 Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 8.7.2 AD-4B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators The AD-4B-xx.x card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 8-19. 8.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the card port using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. The AD-4B-xx.x has 12 LC-PC-II optical ports: eight for add/drop band client input and output, two for express channel input and output, and two for communication. Table 8-18 AD-4B-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX P9 IN EXP EXP RX P10 OUT EXP EXP TX P11 IN COM COM RX V1 OUT COM COM TX Table 8-19 AD-4B-xx.x Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the AD-4B-xx.x card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.CHAPTER 9-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 cards deployed in reconfigurable optical add/drop (ROADM) networks. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 9.1 Card Overview, page 9-2 • 9.2 Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards, page 9-14 • 9.3 32WSS Card, page 9-16 • 9.4 32WSS-L Card, page 9-23 • 9.5 32DMX Card, page 9-30 • 9.6 32DMX-L Card, page 9-35 • 9.7 40-DMX-C Card, page 9-40 • 9.8 40-DMX-CE Card, page 9-45 • 9.9 40-MUX-C Card, page 9-50 • 9.10 40-WSS-C Card, page 9-55 • 9.11 40-WSS-CE Card, page 9-61 • 9.12 40-WXC-C Card, page 9-68 • 9.13 80-WXC-C Card, page 9-74 • 9.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards, page 9-81 • 9.15 MMU Card, page 9-929-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Note This chapter contains information about cards that perform mesh topology functions. Multiplexer and demultiplexer cards that do not perform these functions are described in Chapter 5, “Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards.” 9.1 Card Overview The ROADM cards include six add drop cards utilized in the C-band (32WSS, 32DMX, 32DMX-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, and MMU), two add drop cards utilized for the L-band (32WSS-L, and 32DMX-L), and two single module ROADM (SMR) cards utilized in the C-band (40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C). This section provides card summary, compatibility, channel allocation, and safety information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots that have the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the "Card Slot Requirements" section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 9.1.1 Card Summary Table 9-1 lists and summarizes information about each ROADM card. Table 9-1 ROADM Card Summary Card Port Description For Additional Information 32WSS The 32WSS card has seven sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.3 32WSS Card” section on page 9-16 32WSS-L The 32WSS-L card has seven sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.4 32WSS-L Card” section on page 9-23 32DMX The 32DMX has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.5 32DMX Card” section on page 9-30 32DMX-L The 32DMX-L has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.6 32DMX-L Card” section on page 9-35 40-DMX-C The 40-DMX-C has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.7 40-DMX-C Card” section on page 9-40 40-DMX-CE The 40-DMX-CE has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.8 40-DMX-CE Card” section on page 9-45 40-MUX-C The 40-MUX-C has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.9 40-MUX-C Card” section on page 9-50.9-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 9-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for the ROADM cards. 40-WSS-C The 40-WSS-C card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.10 40-WSS-C Card” section on page 9-55 40-WSS-CE The 40-WSS-CE card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.11 40-WSS-CE Card” section on page 9-61 40-WXC-C The 40-WXC-C card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.12 40-WXC-C Card” section on page 9-68 80-WXC-C The 80-WXC-C card has 14 ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.13 80-WXC-C Card” section on page 9-74. 40-SMR1-C The 40-SMR1-C card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards” section on page 9-81 40-SMR2-C The 40-SMR2-C card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “9.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards” section on page 9-81 MMU The MMU card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.15 MMU Card” section on page 9-92 Table 9-1 ROADM Card Summary (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 32WSS No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM 32WSS-L No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM 40-WSS-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 40-WSS-CE No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 69-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 32DMX No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 32DMX-L No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM 40-DMX-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 40-DMX-C E No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 40-MUX-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 40-WXC-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 80-WXC-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 6 40-SMR1-C No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 2, 15454-M 6 40-SMR2-C No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM, 15454-M 2, 15454-M 6 MMU No No No No No 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454- DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454 -DWD M 15454-D WDM Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.29-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.3 Interface Classes The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 9-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output power of each interface class. Table 9-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L), 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, and 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) and muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G) without FEC C OC-192 LR ITU cards without FEC, 10-Gbps multirate transponder (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) cards with FEC disabled D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected; FEC disabled; and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) enabled, and 40-Gbps muxponder card (40G-MXP-C) K OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, 100GHz 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled L 40Gbps Duobinary CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card M 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF N 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10E_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_MR_10DME_C) with E-FEC enabled O 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC enabled P 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC enabled9-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 9-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards. T 40Gbps DPSK CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card V OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, full tunable 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled, full tunable W 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC enabled, full tunable X 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC enabled, full tunable Y 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with FEC enabled and maximum likelihood sequence estimator (MLSE) correction Z 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with E-FEC enabled and MLSE correction Table 9-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes (continued) Input Power Class Card Table 9-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Optimum Maximum BER2 2. BER = bit error rate 10–15 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. OC-192 LR ITU — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm9-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 9-5, Table 9-6, and Table 9-7 lists the optical performance parameters for 10-Gbps cards. Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limit ed Power Limited OSNR Limite d Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneratio n 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) No Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Average Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 10–12 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 8.5 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 6 dB 23 dB3 16 dB3 23 dB4 17 dB4 23 dB5 17 dB5 Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm –24 dBm3 –17 dBm3 –23 dBm4 –18 dBm4 –23 dBm5 –17 dBm5 Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm –7 dBm Transmitted Power Range6 10-Gbps multirate transponder/ 10-Gbps FEC transponder +2.5 to 3.5 dBm (for TXP_MR_10G) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm (for TXP_MR_10E) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder — — — — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm Dispersion compensatio n tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm –400 to +800 ps/nm9-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. This value is for Xen Pak XFP used with Catalyst card. 4. This value is for XFP used with Catalyst, Xponder, and ADM-10G cards. 5. This value is for X2 XFP used with Catalyst card. 6. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. Table 9-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) No Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Average Maximum BER2 2. BER = bit error rate 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–12 OSNR1 sensitivity 19 dB 5 dB 11 dB 11 dB 23 dB 8 dB 23 dB 16 dB Power sensitivity –27 dBm –20 dBm –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –18 dBm –24 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbp s FEC transponder +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — — — OC-192 LR ITU — — — 0 to +3.0 dBm 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1600 ps/nm9-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 9-8 and Table 9-9 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards. Table 9-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Optimum Maximum BER2 2. BER = bit error rate 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 8.5 dB 8.5 dB 19 dB 5 dB 23 dB 8 dB 19 dB 5.5 dB Power sensitivity –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –20 dBm –24 dBm –20 dBm –27 dBm –20 dBm Power overload –7 dBm –7 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm OC-192 LR ITU — — — — 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder 0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm — — Dispersion compensation tolerance –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1300 ps/nm –800 to +1600 ps/nm –2200 to +3700 ps/nm Table 9-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R FEC Yes No No Threshold Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 5 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 15 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –24 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm9-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Transmitted Power Range1 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) ——— 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF ——— Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 9-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M) Parameter Class G Class H Class M Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC No No No Threshold Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 14 dB 9 dB Power sensitivity –27 dBm –23 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –28 dBm –22 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –7 dBm –9 dBm Transmitted Power Range1 TXP_MR_2.5G — — — TXPP_MR_2.5G — MXP_MR_2.5G –2.0 to 0 dBm MXPP_MR_2.5G — OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) –1200 to +3300 ps/nm 0 to +3 dBm — Table 9-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F) (continued) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited9-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans ONS 15454 DWDM ROADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. . The following cards operate in the C-band: • 32WSS • 32DMX • 32DMX-C • 40-MUX-C • 40-WXC-C • 80-WXC-C • 40-SMR1-C • 40-SMR2-C • MMU Table 9-10 lists the C-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a comprehensive C-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities. . 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF — 0 to +4 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –800 to +2400 ps/nm 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 9-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M) (continued) Parameter Class G Class H Class M Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Table 9-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.5159-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview The following add drop cards utilize the L-band DWDM channels: 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 1. Channels on the C-band are 4-skip-1, starting at 1530.33 nm. Table 9-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)9-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview • 32WSS-L • 32DMX-L Table 9-11 lists the L-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a comprehensive L-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities. Table 9-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.179-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards 9.2 Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some of the cards. The card faceplates are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. The 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards have Class IM lasers. The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following subsections. 9.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Figure 9-1 shows the Class 1M Laser Product statement. Figure 9-1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 1. Channels on the L-band are contiguous, starting at 1577.86 nm. The channels listed in this table begin with 1570.83 nm for backward compatibility with other ONS products. Table 9-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 1459539-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards 9.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label Figure 9-2 shows the Hazard Level 1M label. The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation by Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Figure 9-2 Hazard Level Label 9.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label Figure 9-3 shows the Laser Source Connector label. This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label is located. Figure 9-3 Laser Source Connector Label 9.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 9-4 and Figure 9-5. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 9-4 FDA Statement Label HAZARD LEVEL 1M 145990 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 20019-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 9-5 FDA Statement Label 9.2.5 Shock Hazard Label Figure 9-6 shows the Shock Hazard label. This label alerts you to electrical hazards within a card. A shock hazard exists when you remove adjacent cards during maintenance, or when you touch exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. Figure 9-6 Shock Hazard Label 9.3 32WSS Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note See the “A.8.3 32WSS Card Specifications” section on page A-26 for hardware specifications. The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card performs channel add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS card can be installed in the following pairs of slots: • Slots 1 and 2 • Slots 3 and 4 • Slots 5 and 6 • Slots 12 and 13 • Slots 14 and 15 • Slots 16 and 17 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 655419-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card 9.3.1 32WSS Faceplate Ports The 32WSS has six types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (listed in Table 9-13 on page 9-22). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether that channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a variable optical attenuator (VOA). The 32WSS has four physical receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces.Each MPO cable breaks out into eight separate cables. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS card in the same network element (NE). • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS card within the NE. • COM TX port: The COM TX (line input) port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, OPT-BST) for transmission outside of the NE. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal containing drop channels to the 32DMX card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 9-7 shows the 32WSS card front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports. 9-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 9-7 32WSS Faceplate and Ports 9.3.2 32WSS Block Diagram Figure 9-8 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS card and Figure 9-9 on page 9-20 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports. 115291 FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 DROP RX TX TX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS 32 Add Ports Add 1-8 Add 9-16 Add 17-24 Add 25-32 DROP TX EXP RX EXP TX COM RX COM TX9-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 9-8 32WSS Block Diagram Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX port are processed in two ways: Add channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in Figure 9-9, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS card. EXP RX port (In from other 32WSS within the network element) EXP TX port (To the other 32WSS within the network element) DROP TX port dropped channels (To COM RX port of 32DMX) COM RX port (In from preamplifier, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-BST or OSC-CSM) 115293 32 add ports Add 1 Add 2 Add 32 Optical splitter Add channel or pass-through Wavelength selective switch9-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 9-9 32WSS Optical Block Diagram The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows: • EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS card within the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked. After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal, which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no amplification is needed). • COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS card’s optical splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX where the drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow out of the 32WSS card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WSS module within the NE. 1 2 32 Add 32 32 1 pass-through EXP RX port (In from 32WSS) EXP TX port (To 32WSS) DROP TX port (To 32DMX) 2 pass-through 32 pass-through Optical splitter Dropped channels 2 Photodiode VOA COM RX port (In from OPT-PRE preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-BST or OSC-CSM) Add 2 2 Add 1 1 115292 Optical DMUX (AWG) Optical MUX (AWG) Optical switch (Add channel or pass-through) P1 P33 P2 P34 P32 P64 P65 P66 P67 P68 P699-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card • COM TX Port Monitoring The COM TX value can be measured by either a physical or a virtual photodiode of the 15454-32WSS card. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is between 1024 (0x400) and 2047 (0x800) the COM TX value is measured by physical photodiode. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is greater than 2048 (0x800), the COM TX value is measured by the virtual photodiode. For COM TX values measured by virtual photodiode, check the values at the RX port in the downstream of the COM TX port (COM-RX port on OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card). 9.3.3 32WSS ROADM Functionality The 32WSS card works in combination with the 32DMX card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). ROADM functionality using the 32WSS card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (totalling six slots needed in the ONS 15454 chassis). For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 9.3.4 32WSS Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS card. Table 9-12 shows how the returned power level values are calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. Table 9-12 32WSS Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX P33–P641 1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state of the optical switch PASS THROUGH COM TX ADD (Power) COM TX P65 OUT EXP EXP TX P66 IN EXP EXP RX P67 OUT COM COM TX P68 IN COM COM RX P69 DROP DROP TX9-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card 9.3.5 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan The 32WSS Card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 9-13. Table 9-13 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.1 195.1 1536.61 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.87 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.46 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.619-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 9.3.6 32WSS Card-Level Indicators Table 9-14 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the 32WSS card. 9.3.7 32WSS Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 32WSS card’s ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.4 32WSS-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note See the “A.8.4 32WSS-L Card Specifications” section on page A-28 for hardware specifications. The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch L-Band (32WSS-L) card performs channel add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.The 32WSS-L card can be installed in the following pairs of slots: • Slots 1 and 2 • Slots 3 and 4 • Slots 5 and 6 • Slots 12 and 13 • Slots 14 and 15 • Slots16 and 17 Table 9-14 32WSS Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32WSS card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 9.4.1 32WSS-L Faceplate Ports The 32WSS-L card faceplate has six types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (which are listed in Table 9-16 on page 9-29). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether the channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS-L card in the same NE. • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS-L card within the NE. • COM TX port: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal with drop channels to the 32DMX-L card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 9-10 shows the 32WSS-L module front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports. 9-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 9-10 32WSS-L Faceplate and Ports 9.4.2 32WSS-L Block Diagram Figure 9-11 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS-L card and Figure 9-12 on page 9-27 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports. 134973 FAIL ACT SF 98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6 DROP RX TX TX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS-L 32 Add Ports Add 1-8 Add 9-16 Add 17-24 Add 25-32 DROP TX EXP RX EXP TX COM RX COM TX9-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 9-11 32WSS-L Block Diagram Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX ports are processed in two ways: add channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in Figure 9-12, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS-L card. EXP RX port (In from other 32WSS-L within the network element) EXP TX port (To the other 32WSS-L within the network element) DROP TX port dropped channels (To COM RX port of 32DMX) COM RX port (In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To o OPT-AMP-L booster or OSC-CSM) 134971 32 add ports Add 1 Add 2 Add 32 Optical splitter Add channel or pass-through Wavelength selective switch9-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 9-12 32WSS-L Optical Block Diagram The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows: • EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS-L card within the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked. After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal, which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-AMP-L or OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no amplification is needed). • COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS-L card’s optical splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX-L where the drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow out of the 32WSS-L card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WS-L module within the NE. 1 2 32 Add 32 32 1 pass-through EXP RX port (In from 32WSS-L) EXP TX port (To 32WSS-L) DROP TX port (To 32DMX-L) 2 pass-through 32 pass-through Optical splitter Dropped channels 2 Photodiode VOA Add 2 2 Add 1 1 134972 Optical DMUX (AWG) Optical MUX (AWG) Optical switch (Add channel or pass-through) P1 P33 P2 P34 P32 P64 P65 P66 P67 P68 P69 COM RX port (In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-AMP-L booster or OSC-CSM)9-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 9.4.3 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality The 32WSS-L works in combination with the 32DMX-L to implement L-band (1570 to 1620 nm) functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32WSS-L card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (totalling six slots needed in the ONS 15454 chassis). For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. Note A terminal site can be configured using a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 9.4.4 32WSS-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS-L card. Table 9-15 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.4.5 32WSS-L Channel Plan The 32WSS-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 9-16. Table 9-15 32WSS-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX P33–P641 1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state of the optical switch PASS THROUGH COM TX ADD (Power) COM TX P65 OUT EXP EXP TX P66 IN EXP EXP RX P67 OUT COM COM TX P68 IN COM COM RX P69 DROP DROP TX9-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Table 9-16 32WSS-L Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86 78.6 189.9 1578.69 79.5 189.8 1579.52 80.3 189.7 1580.35 B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18 82.0 189.5 1582.02 82.8 189.4 1582.85 83.6 189.3 1583.69 B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53 85.3 189.1 1585.36 86.2 189 1586.20 87.0 188.9 1587.04 B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88 88.7 188.7 1588.73 89.5 188.6 1589.57 90.4 188.5 1590.41 B91.2 91.2 188.4 591.26 92.1 188.3 1592.10 92.9 188.2 1592.95 93.7 188.1 1593.79 B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64 95.4 187.9 1595.49 96.3 187.8 1596.34 97.1 187.7 1597.19 B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04 98.8 187.5 1598.89 99.7 187.4 1599.75 00.6 187.3 1600.60 B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46 02.3 187.1 1602.31 03.1 187 1603.17 04.0 186.9 1604.039-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card 9.4.6 32WSS-L Card-Level Indicators Table 9-17 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the 32WSS-L card. 9.5 32DMX Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note See the “A.8.1 32DMX Card Specifications” section on page A-22 for hardware specifications. The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX) card is an optical demultiplexer. The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17. 9.5.1 32DMX Faceplate Ports The 32DMX card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power monitoring. • DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 9-19 on page 9-33) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. The incoming optical signal to the demultiplexer comes into the COM RX port. This input port is connected using a single LC duplex optical connector.Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “5.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 5-17. Figure 9-13 shows the 32DMX card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports. Table 9-17 32WSS-L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32WSS-L card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card Figure 9-13 32DMX Faceplate and Ports 9.5.2 32DMX Block Diagram A block diagram of the 32DMX card is shown in Figure 9-14. 145936 32DMX FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 COM RX TX MON 32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports Logical View Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 32WSS on COM RX) COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-329-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card Figure 9-14 32DMX Block Diagram Figure 9-15 shows the 32DMX optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-15 32DMX Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.5.3 32DMX ROADM Functionality The 32DMX card works in combination with the 32WSS card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (for six slots total in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS TX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS TX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS TX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS TX 96480 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 1 32 Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX 20 dB max attenuation DROP TX P4 P3 P2 P1 P32 P31 P30 P29 P33 P34 P 1249679-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card For information about the ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 9.5.4 32DMX Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-18. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.5.5 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan The 32DMX card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 9-19. Table 9-18 32DMX Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX Table 9-19 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.1 195.1 1536.61 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.87 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.469-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card 9.5.6 32DMX Card-Level Indicators Table 9-20 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the 32DMX card. B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 Table 9-19 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-20 32DMX Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32DMX card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card 9.5.7 32DMX Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 32DMX card’s ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.6 32DMX-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note See the “A.8.2 32DMX-L Card Specifications” section on page A-24 for hardware specifications. The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer L-Band card (32DMX-L) is an L-band optical demultiplexer. The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) 100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The 32DMX-L card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17. 9.6.1 32DMX-L Faceplate Ports The 32DMX-L card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power monitoring. • DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX-L card provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 9-25 on page 9-43) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX-L do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “5.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 5-17. Figure 9-16 shows the 32DMX-L card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports.9-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card Figure 9-16 32DMX-L Faceplate and Ports 9.6.2 32DMX-L Block Diagram Figure 9-17 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-L card. 145940 32DMX FAIL ACT SF 98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6 COM RX TX 32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports Logical View Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 32WSS-L on COM RX) COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-32 MON9-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card Figure 9-17 32DMX-L Block Diagram Figure 9-18 shows the 32DMX-L optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-18 32DMX-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.6.3 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality The 32DMX-L card works in combination with the 32WSS-L card to implement ROADM functionality. AS a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX-L card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 77.8 to 83.6 8 CHS TX 84.5 to 90.4 8 CHS TX 91.2 to 97.1 8 CHS TX 98.0 to 04.0 8 CHS TX 134969 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 1 32 Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX 20 dB max attenuation DROP TX P4 P3 P2 P1 P32 P31 P30 P29 P33 P34 P 1249679-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 9.6.4 32DMX-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-L card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-21. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.6.5 32DMX-L Channel Plan The 32DMX-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 9-22. Table 9-21 32DMX-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX Table 9-22 32DMX-L Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86 78.6 189.9 1578.69 79.5 189.8 1579.52 80.3 189.7 1580.35 B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18 82.0 189.5 1582.02 82.8 189.4 1582.85 83.6 189.3 1583.69 B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53 85.3 189.1 1585.36 86.2 189 1586.20 87.0 188.9 1587.049-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card 9.6.6 32DMX-L Card-Level Indicators Table 9-23 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the 32DMX-L card. B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88 88.7 188.7 1588.73 89.5 188.6 1589.57 90.4 188.5 1590.41 B91.2 91.2 188.4 1591.26 92.1 188.3 1592.10 92.9 188.2 1592.95 93.7 188.1 1593.79 B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64 95.4 187.9 1595.49 96.3 187.8 1596.34 97.1 187.7 1597.19 B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04 98.8 187.5 1598.89 99.7 187.4 1599.75 00.6 187.3 1600.60 B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46 02.3 187.1 1602.31 03.1 187 1603.17 04.0 186.9 1604.03 Table 9-22 32DMX-L Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-23 32DMX-L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 32DMX-L card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card 9.6.7 32DMX-L Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 32DMX-L card’s ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.7 40-DMX-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.6 40-DMX-C Card Specifications” section on page A-30 for hardware specifications. The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band (40-DMX-C) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 9-25 on page 9-43), and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-C card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 9.7.1 40-DMX-C Faceplate Ports The 40-DMX-C has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. • DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-C card provides 40 drop ports that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. Figure 9-19 shows the 40-DMX-C card faceplate.9-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card Figure 9-19 40-DMX-C Faceplate 9.7.2 40-DMX-C Block Diagram Figure 9-20 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-C card. 159554 40-DMX-C 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 42.9 - 48.5 49.3 - 54.9 55.7 - 61.4 TX COM RX FAIL ACT SF 40 Drop Ports Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 Drop 33-40 40 Drop Port Outputs Logical View COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-40 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 40-WSS-C on COM RX)9-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card Figure 9-20 40-DMX-C Block Diagram Figure 9-21 shows the 40-DMX-C optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-21 40-DMX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.7.3 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality The 40-DMX-C card works in combination with the 40-WSS-C card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-C card requires two single-slot 40-DMX-C cards and two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 151971 Processor COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 36.6 to 42.1 8 CHS RX 30.3 to 35.8 8 CHS RX 42.9 to 48.5 8 CHS RX 49.3 to 54.9 8 CHS RX 55.7 to 61.4 8 CHS RX 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P41 1519729-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. 9.7.4 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-C card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 9-24 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.7.5 40-DMX-C Channel Plan Table 9-25 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-C card. Table 9-24 40-DMX-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 DROP DROP TX P41 INPUT COM COM RX Table 9-25 40-DMX-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.359-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card 9.7.6 40-DMX-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-DMX-C card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 9-26. B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 9-25 40-DMX-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)9-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card 9.7.7 40-DMX-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-DMX-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.8 40-DMX-CE Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.7 40-DMX-CE Card Specifications” section on page A-31 for hardware specifications. The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band, even channels (40-DMX-CE) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced even-numbered channels identified in the channel plan (Table 9-28 on page 9-48), and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-CE card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 9.8.1 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate Ports The 40-DMX-CE card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. Table 9-26 40-DMX-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-DMX-C card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card • DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-CE card provides 40 drop ports that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. Figure 9-22 shows the 40-DMX-CE card faceplate. Figure 9-22 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate 9.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram Figure 9-23 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-CE card. 240642 40-DMX-C 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2 43.3 - 48.9 49.7 - 55.3 56.2 - 61.8 TX COM RX FAIL ACT SF 40 Drop Ports Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 Drop 33-40 40 Drop Port Outputs Logical View COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-40 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 40-WSS-CE on COM RX)9-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card Figure 9-23 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram Figure 9-24 shows the 40-DMX-CE card optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-24 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality The 40-DMX-CE card works in combination with the 40-WSS-CE card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-CE card requires two single-slot 40-DMX-CE cards and two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 240641 Processor COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 37.0 to 42.5 8 CHS RX 30.7 to 36.2 8 CHS RX 43.3 to 48.9 8 CHS RX 49.7 to 55.3 8 CHS RX 56.1 to 61.8 8 CHS RX 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P41 1519729-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card For the ROADM functionality of other cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. 9.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-CE card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 9-27 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan Table 9-28 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-CE card. Table 9-27 40-DMX-CE Card Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 DROP DROP TX P41 INPUT COM COM RX Table 9-28 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.5 195.75 1531.51 32.3 195.65 1532.29 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.9 195.45 1533.86 B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.4 195.25 1535.43 36.2 195.15 1536.22 37.0 195.05 1537.00 37.8 194.95 1537.79 B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.4 194.75 1539.37 40.1 194.65 1540.16 40.9 194.55 1540.95 41.8 194.45 1541.759-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card 9.8.6 40-DMX-CE Card-Level Indicators The 40-DMX-CE card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 9-29. B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54 43.3 194.25 1543.33 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.7 193.95 1545.72 B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52 47.3 193.75 1547.32 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.7 193.45 1549.72 B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52 51.3 193.25 1551.32 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.7 192.95 1553.73 B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54 55.3 192.75 1555.34 56.1 192.65 1556.15 56.9 192.55 1556.96 57.8 192.45 1557.77 B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.4 192.25 1559.39 60.2 192.15 1560.20 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.8 191.95 1561.83 Table 9-28 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-29 40-DMX-CE Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.9-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card 9.8.7 40-DMX-CE Card Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-DMX-CE card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to the “Manage Alarms” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.9 40-MUX-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.5 40-MUX-C Card Specifications” section on page A-30 for hardware specifications. The single-slot 40-Channel Multiplexer C-band (40-MUX-C) card multiplexes forty ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan in Table 9-25 on page 9-43. The 40-MUX-C card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-MUX-C card is typically used in hub nodes. 9.9.1 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate Ports The 40-MUX-C card has two types of ports: • COM TX port: COM TX is the line output port for the aggregate optical signal being multiplexed. This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. • DROP RX ports (1 to 40): The 40-MUX-C card provides 40 input optical channels. These ports are connected using five physical receive connectors on the card’s front panel that accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main output. For the wavelength range, see Table 9-25 on page 9-43. Figure 9-25 shows the 40-MUX-C card faceplate. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-DMX-CE card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off. Table 9-29 40-DMX-CE Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level Indicators Description9-51 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card Figure 9-25 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate 9.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram Figure 9-26 shows a block diagram of the 40-MUX-C card. 40-MUX-C 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 42.9 - 48.5 49.3 - 54.9 55.7 - 61.4 RX COM TX FAIL ACT SF 159555 Client ports 1-8 Client ports 9-16 Client ports 17-24 Client ports 25-32 Client ports 33-40 Logical View COM TX Client-1 Client-2 Client-40 40 Client Channel Inputs 40 Client Ports COM TX Sends combined signal to OPT- BST9-52 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card Figure 9-26 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram Figure 9-27 shows the 40-MUX-C optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-27 40-MUX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power of the individual input ports to the 40-MUX-C card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed output power, calibrated to the COM-TX port. Table 9-30 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module 36.6 to 42.1 8 CHS RX 30.3 to 35.8 8 CHS RX 42.9 to 48.5 8 CHS RX 49.3 to 54.9 8 CHS RX 55.7 to 61.4 8 CHS RX Processor COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 151974 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Inputs COM TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P 1519759-53 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan Table 9-31 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are multiplexed by the 40-MUX-C card. Table 9-30 40-MUX-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 ADD ADD RX P41 OUTPUT COM COM-TX Table 9-31 40-MUX-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.329-54 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card 9.9.5 40-MUX-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-MUX-C card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 9-32. B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 9-31 40-MUX-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-32 40-MUX-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-MUX-C card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-55 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card 9.9.6 40-MUX-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-MUX-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.10 40-WSS-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.8 40-WSS-C Card Specifications” section on page A-32 for hardware specifications. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch C-Band (40-WSS-C) card switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 9-25 on page 9-43) and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-C card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 The 40-WSS-C features include: • Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port (EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. • Signal splitting in a 70%-to-30% ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-C for dropping signals, then to the other 40-WSS-C card. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a variable optical attenuator (VOA). In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. Within the 40-WSS-C card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port. 9.10.1 40-WSS-C Faceplate Ports The 40-WSS-C has eight types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-WSS-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.9-56 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-C card in the same NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-C card within the NE. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 9-28 shows the 40-WSS-C card faceplate. Figure 9-28 40-WSS-C Faceplate 9.10.2 40-WSS-C Block Diagram Figure 9-29 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-C card. 159394 40-WSS-C 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 42.9 - 48.5 49.3 - 54.9 55.7 - 61.4 ADD RX COM RX TX EXP RX TX DROP TX FAIL ACT SF9-57 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card Figure 9-29 40-WSS-C Block Diagram Figure 9-30 shows the 40-WSS-C optical module functional block diagram. 159393 ADD RX CONTROL Control Interface Comon TX Comon RX EXPRESS RX 2 2 ADD 2 2 Pas Through EXPRESS TX Virtual photodiode DROP TX 1 1 ADD 1 1 Pas Through 40 40 ADD 70/30 40 2 Pas Through9-58 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card Figure 9-30 40-WSS-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.10.3 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality The 40-WSS-C card works in combination with the 40-DMX-C card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-C card requires two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-C single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. 9.10.4 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring The 40-WSS-C has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 9-33 lists the physical diode descriptions. Optical module 159392 uP8260 COM RX COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management 2xSCL Buses DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B EXP RX ADD RX LC connector MPO connector EXP TX DROP TX Table 9-33 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX9-59 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. Additionally, the 40-WSS-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 9-34 lists the virtual diodes. 9.10.5 40-WSS-C Channel Plan Table 9-35 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by the 40-WSS-C card. PDi3 1 RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi4 1 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power) 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. Table 9-33 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration (continued) Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) Table 9-34 40-WSS-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power) Table 9-35 40-WSS-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.409-60 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card 9.10.6 40-WSS-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-WSS-C card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 9-36. B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 9-35 40-WSS-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)9-61 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card 9.10.7 40-WSS-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-WSS-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to the “Manage Alarms” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.11 40-WSS-CE Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.9 40-WSS-CE Card Specifications” section on page A-34 for hardware specifications. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch Even-Channel C-Band (40-WSS-CE) card switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 9-39 on page 9-66) and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-CE card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-WSS-CE features include: • Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port (EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. • Signal splitting in a 70-to-30 percent ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-CE card for dropping signals, then to the other 40-WSS-CE card. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. Within the 40-WSS-CE card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port. Table 9-36 40-WSS-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-WSS-C is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-62 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card 9.11.1 40-WSS-CE Faceplate Ports The 40-WSS-CE card has eight types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-WSS-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-CE card in the same NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-CE card within the NE. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 9-31 shows the 40-WSS-CE card faceplate.9-63 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 9-31 40-WSS-CE Faceplate 9.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card Block Diagram Figure 9-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-CE card. 240643 40-WSS-C 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2 43.3 - 48.9 49.7 - 55.3 56.2 - 61.8 ADD RX COM RX TX EXP RX TX DROP TX FAIL ACT SF9-64 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 9-32 40-WSS-CE Block Diagram Figure 9-33 shows the 40-WSS-CE optical module functional block diagram. 159393 ADD RX CONTROL Control Interface Comon TX Comon RX EXPRESS RX 2 2 ADD 2 2 Pas Through EXPRESS TX Virtual photodiode DROP TX 1 1 ADD 1 1 Pas Through 40 40 ADD 70/30 40 2 Pas Through9-65 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 9-33 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality The 40-WSS-CE card works in combination with the 40-DMX-CE card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco TransportPlanner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-CE card requires two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-CE single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). For information about ROADM functionality for another cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. 9.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring The 40-WSS-CE card has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 9-37 lists the physical diode descriptions. Optical module 159392 uP8260 COM RX COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management 2xSCL Buses DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B EXP RX ADD RX LC connector MPO connector EXP TX DROP TX Table 9-37 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX9-66 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. Additionally, the 40-WSS-CE card has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 9-38 lists the virtual diodes. 9.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan Table 9-39 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by the 40-WSS-CE card. PDi3 1 RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi4 1 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power) 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. Table 9-37 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration (continued) Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) Table 9-38 40-WSS-CE Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power) Table 9-39 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.5 195.75 1531.51 32.3 195.65 1532.29 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.9 195.45 1533.86 B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.4 195.25 1535.43 36.2 195.15 1536.22 37.0 195.05 1537.00 37.8 194.95 1537.799-67 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card 9.11.6 40-WSS-CE Card-Level Indicators The 40-WSS-CE card has three card-level LED indicators, described in Table 9-40. B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.4 194.75 1539.37 40.1 194.65 1540.16 40.9 194.55 1540.95 41.8 194.45 1541.75 B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54 43.3 194.25 1543.33 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.7 193.95 1545.72 B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52 47.3 193.75 1547.32 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.7 193.45 1549.72 B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52 51.3 193.25 1551.32 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.7 192.95 1553.73 B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54 55.3 192.75 1555.34 56.1 192.65 1556.15 56.9 192.55 1556.96 57.8 192.45 1557.77 B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.4 192.25 1559.39 60.2 192.15 1560.20 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.8 191.95 1561.83 Table 9-39 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)9-68 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card 9.11.7 40-WSS-CE Card Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-WSS-CE card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to the “Manage Alarms” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.12 40-WXC-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note See the “A.8.10 40-WXC-C Card Specifications” section on page A-37 or hardware specifications. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (40-WXC-C) card selectively sends any wavelength combination coming from nine input ports to a common output port. The device can manage up to 41 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 9-10 on page 9-11. Each channel can be selected from any input. The card is optically passive and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. .The 40-WXC-C card provides the following features: • Demultiplexing, selection, and multiplexing of DWDM aggregate signal from input ports to common output port. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. • VOAs are deployed in every channel path in order to regulate the channel’s optical power. In the case of an electrical power failure, VOAs are set to their maximum attenuation value, or to a fixed and configurable one. The VOA can also be set manually. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. The 40-WXC-C card acts as a selector element with the following characteristics: • It is able to select a wavelength from one input port and pass the wavelength through to the common out port. Simultaneously, the card can block the same wavelength coming from the other eight input ports. • It is able to stop wavelengths from all nine inputs. Table 9-40 40-WSS-CE Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-WSS-CE card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-69 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card • It is able to monitor optical power and control path attenuation using per channel VOA independently of the wavelength input-to-out port connection. 9.12.1 40-WXC-C Faceplate Ports The 40-WXC-C card has six types of ports: • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WXC-C card within the NE. • MON TX: The optical service channel (OSC) monitor. • ADD/DROP RX: The 40-WXC-C card provides 40 input optical channels. For the wavelength range, see Table 9-43 on page 9-73. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-WXC-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 9-34 shows the 40-WXC-C card faceplate.9-70 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Figure 9-34 40-WXC-C Faceplate 9.12.2 40-WXC-C Block Diagram Figure 9-35 shows the 40-WXC-C optical module functional block diagram. 159396 40-WXC EXP COM RX TX EXP TX ADD DROP RX TX MON TX FAIL ACT SF RX EXP RX Ports (from 1 to 8): fibres come FROM Mesh PP Monitor Port: monitors the traffic transmitted on COM TX Port DROP TX: fibre connected to 40-DMX for local chs drop ADD RX: fibre connected to 40- MUX or xx-WSS for local chs Add EXP TX: internal connection TO Mesh PP COM RX: line RX interface FROM Pre-Amplifier COM TX: line TX interface TO Booster Amplifier9-71 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Figure 9-35 40-WXC-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.12.3 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring The 40-WXC-C has 83 physical diodes (P1 through P40) that monitor power at the outputs of the card. Table 9-41 describes the physical diodes. WXC optical module COM TX ADD RX Virtual PDi3 P5 Table 9-41 40-WXC-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX PDi3 1 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi4 1 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power)9-72 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. Additionally, the 40-WXC-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 9-42 lists the virtual diodes. The usage of WXC and mesh PP power readings to troubleshoot a LOS-P in WXC COM TX port in Side A is described in the following example. The example is explained assuming a single wavelength 1558.17 in the setup that comes from Side H to Side A. If there is more than one wavelength, then there is a risk of dropping traffic when pulling common fibers. The example is explained below: When the wavelength from side H is 1558.17, you can check the power reading at WXC EXP TX port of the WXC card and verify the consistency with side H pre output power and WXC COMRX-EXPTX port loss. You can also check with a power meter connected to the 8th fiber (since it is from side H) of an MPO-FC (or LC) cable connected to the TAP-TX port of the MESH-PP. This value should be consistent with the previous reading, less than the insertion loss of the installed PP-MESH. If it is consistent, the issue is with the MPO between side A WXC and PP-MESH. If it is not consistent, the issue is with the PP-MESH or the LC-LC from side H. With only the PP-MESH already tested during installation, the only issue can be with the patch cord b. You can check if the 1558.17 wavelength from side H is unequalized (that is, if the channel is not aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels) by keeping the DMX COM-RX port of side H in maintenance, and checking both the signal and ASE levels of CHAN-TX ports of the DMX card. If the channel is equalized (that is, if the channel is aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels), then the issue is in the WXC side A that cannot properly regulate the VOA for such channel. If the channel is unequalized, then the issue is on a remote node. Note With an OSA or a spare 40 DMX, you can see the light coming from all the sides from TAP-TX of the PP-MESH. 9.12.4 40-WXC-C Channel Plan Table 9-43 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross connected by the 40-WXC-C card. Table 9-42 40-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power)9-73 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Table 9-43 40-WXC-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Ch. 01 29.5 196 1529.55 B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.339-74 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 9.12.5 40-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-WXC-C card has three card-level LED indicators described in Table 9-44. 9.12.6 40-WXC-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-WXC-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.13 80-WXC-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 1. This channel is unused by the 40-WXC-C Table 9-43 40-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-44 40-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 40-WXC-C is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-75 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card Note See the “A.8.11 80-WXC-C Card Specifications” section on page A-38 or hardware specifications. The double-slot 80-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (80-WXC-C) card manages up to 80 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 9-10 on page 9-11) and sends them to dedicated output ports. Each channel can be selected from any input port to any output port. The card is optically passive, and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 the ONS 15454 chassis and Slots 2 to 6 in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis. The 80-WXC-C card provides the following functionalities: • When used in the multiplexer or bidirectional mode, the 80-WXC-C card allows selection of a single wavelength or any combination of wavelengths from any of the nine input ports to the common output port. • When used in the bidirectional mode, the output wavelength from the COM-RX port is split to manage the express and drop wavelengths. • When used in the demultiplexer mode, the 80-WXC-C card, allows selection of a single wavelength or a combination of wavelengths from the common input port to any of the nine output ports. • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port. • Per-channel (closed loop) power regulation on the output port based on OCM block feedback. • Per-channel (open loop) attenuation regulation on the output port which is not based on the OCM feedback. The OCM unit provides per-channel optical power monitoring on the following ports: • COM port in output direction • COM port in input direction • DROP-TX port in output direction • Eight Express/Add/Drop (EAD) ports and one Add/Drop (AD) port in both input and output directions 9.13.1 80-WXC-C Faceplate and Optical Module Functional Block Diagram The 80-WXC-C card has 14 types of ports: • MON: The MON port monitors power on the COM T/R port. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX: In the bidirectional mode, the DROP TX port sends the optical signal to the demultiplexer. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE . • COM T/R: The COM port is bidirectional. It functions as a COM TX port in the multiplexer mode and as a COM RX port in the demultiplexer mode. • AD T/R: The AD port functions as ADD RX port in bidirectional and multiplexer modes and as a DROP port in the demultiplexer mode. • EAD T/R i (where i = 1 to 8): The EAD ports function as EXP ports in the bidirectional mode, as ADD ports in the multiplexer mode, and as DROP ports in the demultiplexer mode.9-76 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card Figure 9-36 shows the 80-WXC-C card faceplate and the optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-36 80-WXC-C Faceplate and the Optical Module Functional Block Diagram COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 5 6 7 ADD / DROP 8 3 4 EXP DROP TX RX COM TX 1 2 R/T COM T/R MON FAIL ACT SF 80-WXC-C EXP / ADD / DROP R/T R/T R/T R/T 249126 VPD4 VPD3 VOA DROP_TX OCM 12 PD2 EAD 1...8 OCM 1...9 AD DROP TX EXP TX COM RX MON COM LC connectors Variable optical attenuator OUT OCM 10 OCM 11 1 10 PD1 9 40/60 12x1 Optical Switch OCM WXC9-77 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card The different units of the 80-WXC-C card are: • 40/60 splitter with VOA on drop path—The preamplifier output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 40%-to-60% ratio; 40% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port) and 60% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photodiode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 80-WXC-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C or a 40-WXC-C card. • 50 Ghz 10 port WXC—The WXC block is optically passive and has bidirectional capability. The WXC block can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from the eight input EAD ports and one AD port to a common (COM) output port, when used as a multiplexer, whereas it can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from its common (COM) input port to any of the eight output EAD ports and one AD port, when used as a demultiplexer. The WXC block can manage (on each port) up to 80 channels according to the channel grid reported in Table 9-47. Each channel can be selected from any input and routed to any output. • 50 Ghz Optical Channel Monitor (OCM)—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the COM T/R, DROP-TX, AD, and EADi (i=1 to 8) ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. 9.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring The 80-WXC-C has two physical photodiodes and an OCM unit that monitors power at the different ports of the card. Table 9-45 describes the physical photodiodes. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. Table 9-45 80-WXC-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 COM Total Power COM PD2 EXP-TX Total Power EXP-TX OCM1 EAD 1 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-1 OCM2 EAD 2 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-2 OCM3 EAD 3 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-3 OCM4 EAD 4 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-4 OCM5 EAD 5 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-5 OCM6 EAD 6 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-6 OCM7 EAD 7 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-7 OCM8 EAD 8 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-8 OCM9 AD Per-Channel and Total Power AD OCM10 Output Per-Channel and Total Power COM OCM11 Input Per-Channel and Total Power COM OCM12 Drop Per-Channel and Total Power DROP-TX9-78 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card Additionally, the 80-WXC-C has two virtual photodiodes. Table 9-46 lists the virtual photodiodes. 9.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan Table 9-47 shows the 80 ITU-T 50-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross connected by the 80-WXC-C card. Table 9-46 80-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD3 DROP-TX Total Power DROP-TX VPD4 COM-RX Total Power COM-RX Table 9-47 80-WXC-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Ch. 01 - 196 1529.55 30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.5 195.75 1531.51 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.3 195.65 1532.29 32.7 195.6 1532.68 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.5 195.5 1533.47 33.9 195.45 1533.86 34.3 34.3 195.4 1534.25 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.4 195.25 1535.43 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.2 195.15 1536.22 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.0 195.05 1537 37.4 195 1537.40 37.8 194.95 1537.799-79 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 38.2 38.2 194.9 1538.19 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.0 194.8 1538.98 39.4 194.75 1539.37 39.8 194.7 1539.77 40.2 194.65 1540.16 40.6 194.6 1540.56 41.0 194.55 1540.95 41.3 194.5 1541.35 41.7 194.45 1541.75 42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.5 194.35 1542.94 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.3 194.25 1543.33 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.5 194.1 1544.53 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.3 194 1545.32 45.7 193.95 1545.72 46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.5 193.85 1546.52 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.3 193.75 1547.32 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.5 193.6 1548.51 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.3 193.5 1549.32 49.7 193.45 1549.72 Table 9-47 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)9-80 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 9.13.4 80-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators The 80-WXC-C card has three card-level LED indicators described in Table 9-48. 50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.5 193.35 1550.52 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.3 193.25 1551.32 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.5 193.1 1552.52 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.3 193 1553.33 53.7 192.95 1553.73 54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.5 192.85 1554.54 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.3 192.75 1555.34 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.2 192.65 1556.15 56.6 192.6 1556.55 57.0 192.55 1556.96 57.4 192.5 1557.36 57.8 192.45 1557.77 58.2 58.2 192.4 1558.17 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.0 192.3 1558.98 59.4 192.25 1559.39 59.8 192.2 1559.79 60.2 192.15 1560.20 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.4 192 1561.42 61.8 191.95 1561.83 1. This channel is unused by the 80-WXC-C Table 9-47 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)9-81 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.13.5 80-WXC-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 80-WXC-C card ports using the LCD screen or unit. The LCD screen is on the ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M2 fan-tray assembly and is a separate unit in ONS 15454 M6. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, see the “Manage Alarms” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards Note See the “A.8.12 40-SMR1-C Card Specifications” section on page A-39 and “A.8.13 40-SMR2-C Card Specifications” section on page A-40, or hardware specifications. Note For 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C safety label information, see the “9.2 Safety Labels for Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 9-14. The single-slot 40-channel single module ROADM (SMR-C) cards integrate the following functional blocks onto a single line card: • Optical preamplifier • Optical booster amplifier • Optical service channel (OSC) filter • 2x1 wavelength cross-connect (WXC) or a 4x1 WXC • Optical channel monitor (OCM) The SMR-C cards are available in two versions: • 9.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card • 9.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card The SMR-C cards can manage up to 40 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 9-10. The cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Table 9-48 80-WXC-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the 80-WXC-C is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-82 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features The optical amplifier units in the SMR-C cards provide the following features: • Embedded gain flattening filter • Mid-stage access for dispersion compensation unit (only applicable for preamplifier erbium-doped fiber amplifier [EDFA]) • Fixed output power mode • Fixed gain mode • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain and fixed output power mode • Fast transient suppression • Programmable tilt (only applicable for preamplifier EDFA) • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. • EDFA section calculates the signal power, by taking into account the expected ASE power contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop. The 1x2 WXC unit (40-SMR1-C card) provides the following features: • Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXP-RX or ADD-RX ports • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port • Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit • Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port The 1x4 WXC unit (40-SMR2-C card) provides the following features: • Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) or ADD-RX ports • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port • Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit • Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port The OCM unit provides per channel optical power monitoring at EXP-RX, ADD-RX, DROP-TX, and LINE-TX ports. 9.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card The 40-SMR1-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x2 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier unit (single EDFA). 9.14.2.1 40-SMR1-C Faceplate Ports The 40-SMR1-C card has the following types of ports: • MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port.9-83 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port. • DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU) and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input. • DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU. • OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port. • ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section of the NE. • LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port. • LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port. • EXP RX: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE. Figure 9-37 shows the 40-SMR1-C card faceplate. Figure 9-37 40-SMR1-C Faceplate 9.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram Figure 9-38 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR1-C card. LEVEL 1M HAZARD OSC DC EXP MON RX TX ADD & DROP RX TX LINE RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX SF ACT FAIL 1-C 40-SMR COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND FOR DEVIATIONS 1040.11 EXCEPT NOTICE No.50, DATED PURSUANT TO LASER JUNE 24, 2007 2764409-84 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards Figure 9-38 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram The different units of the 40-SMR1-C card are: • OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel. • Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses (5 dB to 35 dB). • 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio, 70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 40-SMR1-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card. • 1x2 WXC—The 1x2 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received from either its ADD-RX or EXP-RX port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x2 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor the optical power. • OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXP-RX, ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX OSC-RX ADD-RX OCM Block OCM4 OCM3 OCM2 OCM1 VOA3 VOA2 LINE TX LINE RX MON-TX EXP-RX EXP-TX MON-RX EDFA 1 (variable Gain VOA1 30% 70% OSC DROP PD2 PD3 PD4 TAP TAP PD5 TAP PD8 OSC ADD TAP TAP TAP 276446 TAP PD6 WXC Block PD1 LC connector9-85 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring The 40-SMR1-C card has seven physical diodes (PD1 through PD6 and PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 9-49). 9.14.2.4 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan Table 9-50 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the 40-SMR1-C card. Table 9-49 40-SMR1-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 LINE LINE-RX PD2 LINE LINE-RX PD3 DC DC-TX PD4 DC DC-RX PD5 EXP EXP-TX PD6 OSC OSC-RX PD8 LINE LINE-TX OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX OCM4 EXP OCH EXP-RX Table 9-50 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.409-86 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.2.5 40-SMR1-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-SMR1-C card has three card-level LED indicators described in Table 9-51. B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 9-50 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)9-87 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.2.6 40-SMR1-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-SMR1-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 9.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card The 40-SMR2-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x4 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier and booster amplifier units (double EDFA). 9.14.3.1 40-SMR2-C Faceplate Ports The 40-SMR2-C card has the following types of ports: • MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port. • MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port. • DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU) and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input. • DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU. • OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port. • ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section of the NE. • LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port. • LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE. Table 9-51 40-SMR1-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-88 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3): The EXPi-RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit. Figure 9-37 shows the 40-SMR2-C card faceplate. Figure 9-39 40-SMR2-C Faceplate 9.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram Figure 9-38 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR2-C card. Figure 9-40 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram The different units of the 40-SMR2-C card are: 276441 EXP OSC DC RX TX ADD & DROP RX TX LINE RX TX RX TX RX TX MON SF ACT FAIL 2-C 40-SMR COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND FOR DEVIATIONS 1040.11 EXCEPT NOTICE No.50, DATED PURSUANT TO LASER JUNE 24, 2007 LEVEL 1M HAZARD OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX OSC-RX ADD-RX LINE TX LINE RX MON-TX EXP1-RX EXP2-RX EXP3-RX MON-RX EDFA 1 (Variable Gain) EDFA 2 (Fixed Gain) 30% 70% OSC DROP PD2 PD3 PD4 TAP TAP PD5 TAP PD8 PD7 OSC ADD TAP TAP 276447 TAP PD6 4x1 WXC Block PD1 TAP TAP LC connector MPO connector EXP-TX 6 ports OCM Block9-89 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel. • Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses (5 dB to 35 dB). • 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio, 70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 40-SMR2-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port by a 40-WSS-C, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card. • 1x4 WXC—The 1x4 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received from either its ADD-RX or EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x4 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor the optical power. • Single-stage fixed gain EDFA booster amplifier—The booster amplifier amplifies the output signal from the 1x4 WXC unit before transmitting it into the fiber. Since it is a fixed gain (17 dB) amplifier, it does not allow gain tilt control. • OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3), ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. 9.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring The 40-SMR2-C card has eight physical diodes (PD1 through PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 9-52). Table 9-52 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 LINE LINE-RX PD2 LINE LINE-RX PD3 DC DC-TX PD4 DC DC-RX PD5 EXP EXP-TX PD6 OSC OSC-RX PD7 Not reported on CTC Internal port PD8 LINE LINE-TX OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX OCM4 EXP-1 OCH EXP1-RX9-90 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.3.4 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan Table 9-53 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the 40-SMR2-C card. OCM5 EXP-2 OCH EXP2-RX OCM6 EXP-3 OCH EXP3-RX Table 9-52 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration (continued) Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) Table 9-53 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.329-91 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 9.14.3.5 40-SMR2-C Card-Level Indicators The 40-SMR2-C card has three card-level LED indicators described in Table 9-54. 9.14.3.6 40-SMR2-C Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the 40-SMR2-C card ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 9-53 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Table 9-54 40-SMR2-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that an internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-92 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card 9.15 MMU Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The single-slot Mesh Multi-Ring Upgrade Module (MMU) card supports multiring and mesh upgrades for ROADM nodes in both the C-band and the L-band. Mesh/multiring upgrade is the capability to optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration. In each node, you need to install one east MMU and one west MMU. The card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17. 9.15.1 MMU Faceplate Ports The MMU has six types of ports: • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on the NE. • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on the NE. • EXP-A RX port: The EXP-A RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on other NEs or rings. • EXP-A TX port: The EXP-A TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on other NEs or rings. • COM TX port: The COM TX port sends the optical signal to the fiber stage section. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from the fiber stage section. Figure 9-41 shows the MMU card faceplate. 9-93 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card Figure 9-41 MMU Faceplate and Ports 9.15.2 MMU Block Diagram Figure 9-42 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the MMU card. 145190 ACT FAIL MMU SF RX TX EXP A RX TX EXP RX TX COM9-94 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card Figure 9-42 MMU Block Diagram 9.15.3 MMU Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P3 monitor the power for the MMU card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-55. VP1 to VP3 are virtual photodiodes that have been created by adding (by software computation) the relevant path insertion losses of the optical splitters (stored in the module) to the real photodiode (P1 to P3) measurement. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2. 9.15.4 MMU Card-Level Indicators Table 9-56 describes the three card-level LED indicators on the MMU card. 145191 COM TX VPD2 75/25 PD1 EXP RX PD2 EXP A RX COM RX VPD3 95/5 95/5 VPD1 EXP TX Legend LC PC II Connector Optical splitter/coupler Real photodiode Virtual photodiode PD3 EXP A TX Table 9-55 MMU Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 1 (EXP-RX) EXP RX P2 5 (EXP A-RX) EXP A RX P3 6 (EXP A-TX) EXP A TX VP1 2 (EXP-TX) EXP TX VP2 4 (COM-TX) COM TX VP3 3 (COM-RX) COM RX9-95 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card 9.15.5 MMU Port-Level Indicators You can find the alarm status of the MMU card’s ports using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. The screen displays the number and severity of alarms on a given port or slot. For the procedure to view these counts, refer to “Manage Alarms” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Table 9-56 MMU Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that n internal hardware failure occurred. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the MMU card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED also turns on when the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light turns off.9-96 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU CardCHAPTER 10-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards, as well as their associated plug-in modules (Small Form-factor Pluggables [SFPs or XFPs]). For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Chapter topics include: • 10.1 Card Overview, page 10-2 • 10.2 Safety Labels, page 10-8 • 10.3 TXP_MR_10G Card, page 10-13 • 10.4 TXP_MR_10E Card, page 10-16 • 10.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 10-21 • 10.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 10-25 • 10.7 MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 10-29 • 10.8 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 10-40 • 10.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 10-49 • 10.10 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards, page 10-55 • 10.11 40G-MXP-C Card, page 10-64 • 10.12 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 10-7110-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview • 10.13 ADM-10G Card, page 10-96 • 10.14 OTU2_XP Card, page 10-111 • 10.15 MLSE UT, page 10-121 • 10.16 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 10-121 • 10.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, page 10-125 • 10.18 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 10-132 • 10.19 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection, page 10-139 • 10.20 Far-End Laser Control, page 10-142 • 10.21 Jitter Considerations, page 10-142 • 10.22 Termination Modes, page 10-143 • 10.23 SFP and XFP Modules, page 10-144 Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1 interfaces. 10.1 Card Overview The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter and provides compatibility information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the "Card Slot Requirements" section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. The purpose of a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is to convert the “gray” optical client interface signals into trunk signals that operate in the “colored” dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) wavelength range. Client-facing gray optical signals generally operate at shorter wavelengths, whereas DWDM colored optical signals are in the longer wavelength range (for example, 1490 nm = violet; 1510 nm = blue; 1530 nm = green; 1550 nm = yellow; 1570 nm = orange; 1590 nm = red; 1610 nm = brown). Some of the newer client-facing SFPs, however, operate in the colored region. Transponding or muxponding is the process of converting the signals between the client and trunk wavelengths. An MXP generally handles several client signals. It aggregates, or multiplexes, lower rate client signals together and sends them out over a higher rate trunk port. Likewise, it demultiplexes optical signals coming in on a trunk and sends them out to individual client ports. A TXP converts a single client signal to a single trunk signal and converts a single incoming trunk signal to a single client signal. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as TXPs, as MXPs, or as Layer 2 switches. All of the TXP and MXP cards perform optical to electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. As a result, they are not optically transparent cards. The reason for this is that the cards must operate on the signals passing through them, so it is necessary to do an OEO conversion. 1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G.10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview On the other hand, the termination mode for all of the TXPs and MXPs, which is done at the electrical level, can be configured to be transparent. In this case, neither the Line nor the Section overhead is terminated. The cards can also be configured so that either Line or Section overhead can be terminated, or both can be terminated. Note The MXP_2.5G_10G card, by design, when configured in the transparent termination mode, actually does terminate some of the bytes. See Table 10-64 on page 10-143 for details. 10.1.1 Card Summary Table 10-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card. Table 10-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information TXP_MR_10G The TXP_MR_10G card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.3 TXP_MR_10G Card” section on page 10-13. TXP_MR_10E The TXP_MR_10E card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.4 TXP_MR_10E Card” section on page 10-16. TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards have two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards” section on page 10-21. TXP_MR_2.5G The TXP_MR_2.5G card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 10-25. TXPP_MR_2.5G The TXPP_MR_2.5G card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 10-25. MXP_2.5G_10G The MXP_2.5G_10G card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.7 MXP_2.5G_10G Card” section on page 10-29. MXP_2.5G_10E The MXP_2.5G_10E card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.7.4 MXP_2.5G_10E Card” section on page 10-33. MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.8 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards” section on page 10-40. MXP_MR_2.5G The MXP_MR_2.5G card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 10-49. MXPP_MR_2.5G The MXPP_MR_2.5G card has ten sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 10-49.10-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.10 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards” section on page 10-55. 40G-MXP-C The 40G-MXP-C card has five ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.11 40G-MXP-C Card” section on page 10-64. GE_XP and GE_XPE The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. See the “10.12 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 10-71. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. See the “10.12 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 10-71. ADM-10G The ADM-10G card has 19 sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.13 ADM-10G Card” section on page 10-96. OTU2_XP The OTU2_XP card has four ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.14 OTU2_XP Card” section on page 10-111. TXP_MR_10EX_C The TXP_MR_10EX_C card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.16 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card” section on page 10-121. MXP_2.5G_10EX_C The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card” section on page 10-125. MXP_MR_10DMEX_C The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “10.18 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card” section on page 10-132. Table 10-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information10-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview 10.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 10-2 lists the platform and Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card. Table 10-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 TXP_MR_10G 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M TXP_MR_10E No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 TXP_MR_10E_C No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 TXP_MR_10E_L No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M TXP_MR_2.5G 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 TXPP_MR_2.5G 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_2.5G_10G 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M10-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview MXP_2.5G_10E No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_2.5G_10E_L No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M MXP_MR_2.5G No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXPP_MR_2.5G No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_MR_10DME_C No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_MR_10DME_L No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M Table 10-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.210-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview GE_XP No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 10GE_XP No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 10GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 ADM-10G No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 OTU2_XP No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 Table 10-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.210-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels 10.2 Safety Labels This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some of the cards. The faceplates of the cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning labels before working on these cards. 10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards The MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP cards have Class 1 lasers. The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following sections. 10.2.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label The Class 1 Laser Product label is shown in Figure 10-1. TXP_MR_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 MXP_MR_10DMEX_ C No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DW DM 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 40G-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454 -DWD M, 15454 -M2, 15454 -M6 Table 10-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.210-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels Figure 10-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label Class 1 lasers are products whose irradiance does not exceed the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) value. Therefore, for Class 1 laser products the output power is below the level at which it is believed eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of a Class 1 laser will not result in eye injury and can therefore be considered safe. However, some Class 1 laser products might contain laser systems of a higher Class but there are adequate engineering control measures to ensure that access to the beam is not reasonably likely. Anyone who dismantles a Class 1 laser product that contains a higher Class laser system is potentially at risk of exposure to a hazardous laser beam 10.2.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label The Hazard Level 1 label is shown in Figure 10-2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Figure 10-2 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. 10.2.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 10-3. Figure 10-3 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 145952 HAZARD LEVEL 1 65542 9663510-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels 10.2.1.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 10-4 and Figure 10-5. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 10-4 FDA Statement Label Figure 10-5 FDA Statement Label 10.2.1.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 10-6. Figure 10-6 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. 10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards The TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and 40G-MXP-C cards have Class 1M lasers. 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 6554110-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following subsections. 10.2.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement The Class 1M Laser Product statement is shown in Figure 10-7. Figure 10-7 Class 1M Laser Product Statement Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam. Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments. 10.2.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label The Hazard Level 1M label is shown in Figure 10-8. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards. Figure 10-8 Hazard Level Label The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2. 10.2.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure 10-9. CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS λ = = 1400nm TO 1610nm 145953 HAZARD LEVEL 1M 14599010-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels Figure 10-9 Laser Source Connector Label This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed. 10.2.2.4 FDA Statement Label The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure 10-10 and Figure 10-11. These labels show compliance to FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2. Figure 10-10 FDA Statement Label Figure 10-11 FDA Statement Label 10.2.2.5 Shock Hazard Label The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure 10-12. 96635 96634 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 282324 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO.50, DATED JUNE 24, 200710-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card Figure 10-12 Shock Hazard Label This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself. 10.3 TXP_MR_10G Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The TXP_MR_10G processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 10-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an STM-64/OC-192 short reach (1310-nm) signal, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, or a 10GBASE-LR signal compliant with IEEE 802.3. The TXP_MR_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The trunk port operates at 9.95328 Gbps (or 10.70923 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) and at 10.3125 Gbps (or 11.095 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_10G card does not display circuits under card view. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10G card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10G card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10G card. 6554110-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card You can install TXP_MR_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)/Multiplex Section - Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRing), a path protection/single node control point (SNCP), or a regenerator. They can only be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing and 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10G port features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk port and a 1310-nm laser for the for the client port and contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. Figure 10-13 shows the TXP_MR_10G faceplate and block diagram.10-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card Figure 10-13 TXP_MR_10G Faceplate and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. 10.3.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds and is user-configurable. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 145948 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 SR-1 optics modules or 10GBASE-LR B a c k p l a n e DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 10G MR TXP 1530.33 - 1531.12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX CLIENT 1530.33 1531.12 DWDM TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm10-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card 10.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Card-Level Indicators Table 10-3 lists the three card-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_10G card. 10.3.3 TXP_MR_10G Port-Level Indicators Table 10-4 lists the four port-level LEDs in the TXP_MR_10G card. 10.4 TXP_MR_10E Card The TXP_MR_10E card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G card. It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side) that is tunable over four wavelength channels (spaced at 100 GHz on the ITU grid) in the C band and tunable over eight wavelength channels (spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) in the L band. There are eight versions of the C-band card, with each version covering four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 wavelengths. There are five versions of the L-band card, with each version covering eight wavelengths, for a total coverage of 40 wavelengths. Table 10-3 TXP_MR_10G Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description FAIL LED (Red) Red indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Green indicates that the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. Amber indicates that the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. SF LED (Amber) Amber indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), or high bit error rates (BERs) on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also illuminated if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the LED turns off. Table 10-4 TXP_MR_10G Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green Wavelength 1 LED Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is configured for Wavelength 1. Green Wavelength 2 LED Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is configured for Wavelength 2.10-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card You can install TXP_MR_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10E card features a 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E card must be installed in Slots 6, 7, 12 or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 10.4.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10E card are: • A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately) – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 10.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 10-14 shows the TXP_MR_10E faceplate and block diagram.10-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card Figure 10-14 TXP_MR_10E Faceplate and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10E card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10E card. 10.4.3 Client Interface The client interface is implemented with a separately orderable XFP module. The module is a tri-rate transceiver, providing a single port that can be configured in the field to support an OC-192 SR-1 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) or STM-64 I-64.1 (ITU-T G.691) optical interface, as well as 10GE LAN PHY (10GBASE-LR), 10GE WAN PHY (10GBASE-LW), or 10G FC signals. The client side XFP pluggable module supports LC connectors and is equipped with a 1310-nm laser. 10.4.4 DWDM Trunk Interface On the trunk side, the TXP_MR_10E card provides a 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 interface. There are four tunable channels available in the 1550-nm band or eight tunable channels available in the 1580-nm band on the 50-GHz ITU grid for the DWDM interface. The TXP_MR_10E card provides 3R (retime, reshape, uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 131186 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10 Gb/s TP 1538.19 1538.98 Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) B a c k p l a n e TX RX RX TX DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 4 tunable channels (C-band) or 8 tunable channels (L-band) on the 100-GHz ITU grid10-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card and regenerate) transponder functionality for this 10-Gbps trunk interface. Therefore, the card is suited for use in long-range amplified systems. The DWDM interface is complaint with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards. The DWDM trunk port operates at a rate that is dependent on the input signal and the presence or absence of the ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC. The possible trunk rates are: • OC192 (9.95328 Gbps) • OTU2 (10.70923 Gbps) • 10GE (10.3125 Gbps) or 10GE into OTU2 (ITU G.sup43 11.0957 Gbps) • 10G FC (10.51875 Gbps) or 10G FC into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change. 10.4.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature A key feature of the TXP_MR_10E is the availability to configure the forward error correction in three modes: NO FEC, FEC, and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • NO FEC—No forward error correction • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7 algorithm, which is a super FEC code Note The E-FEC of the ONS 15454 and Cisco ASR 9000 are not compatible. 10.4.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client side traffic passes through the TXP_MR_10E card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode, E-FEC mode, or no error correction at all. The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower optical signal-to-noise ratio [OSNR]) with a lower bit error rate than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned off, FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC. Caution Because the transponder has no visibility into the data payload and detect circuits, the TXP_MR_10E card does not display circuits under the card view. 10.4.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping The TXP_MR_10E card can perform ODU2-to-OCh mapping, which allows operators to provision data payloads in a standard way across 10-Gbps optical links. 10-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card Digital wrappers that define client side interfaces are called Optical Data Channel Unit 2 (ODU2) entities in ITU-T G.709. Digital wrappers that define trunk side interfaces are called Optical Channels (OCh) in ITU-T G.709. ODU2 digital wrappers can include Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching (G-MPLS) signaling extensions to ITU-T G.709 (such as Least Significant Part [LSP] and Generalized Payload Identifier [G-PID] values) to define client interfaces and payload protocols. 10.4.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.4.9 TXP_MR_10E Card-Level Indicators Table 10-5 lists the three card-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_10E card. 10.4.10 TXP_MR_10E Port-Level Indicators Table 10-6 lists the two port-level LEDs in the TXP_MR_10E card. Table 10-5 TXP_MR_10E Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-6 TXP_MR_10E Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 10.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards TXP_MR_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are multirate transponders for the ONS 15454 platform. The cards are fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards. They processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10E_C is tunable over the entire set of C-band wavelength channels (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). The TXP_MR_10E_L is tunable over the entire set of L-band wavelength channels (80 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) and is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The advantage of these cards over previous versions (TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E) is that there is only one version of each card (one C-band version and one L-band version) instead of several versions needed to cover each band. You can install TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards feature a universal transponder 2 (UT2) 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a UT2 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E-L card is required to be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards contain two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 10.5.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are: • A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately): – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) • A UT2 module tunable through the entire C band (TXP_MR_10E_C card) or L band (TXP_MR_10E_L card). The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid. • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping. • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.10-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 10.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 10-15 shows the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L faceplates and block diagram. Figure 10-15 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E_L card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the cards. 10.5.3 Client Interface The client interface is implemented with a separately orderable XFP module. The module is a tri-rate transceiver, providing a single port that can be configured in the field to support an OC-192 SR-1 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) or STM-64 I-64.1 (ITU-T G.691) optical interface, as well as 10GE LAN PHY (10GBASE-LR), 10GE WAN PHY (10GBASE-LW), or 10G-FC signals. The client side XFP pluggable module supports LC connectors and is equipped with a 1310-nm laser. uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 134975 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) B a c k p l a n e DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 82 tunable channels (C-band) or 80 tunable channels (L-band) on the 50-GHz ITU grid FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP L TX RX RX TX FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP C TX RX RX TX10-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 10.5.4 DWDM Trunk Interface On the trunk side, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards provide a 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 interface. There are 80 tunable channels available in the 1550-nm C band or 82 tunable channels available in the 1580-nm L band on the 50-GHz ITU grid for the DWDM interface. The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_C cards provide 3R transponder functionality for this 10-Gbps trunk interface. Therefore, the card is suited for use in long-range amplified systems. The DWDM interface is compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards. The DWDM trunk port operates at a rate that is dependent on the input signal and the presence or absence of the ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC. The possible trunk rates are: • OC192 (9.95328 Gbps) • OTU2 (10.70923 Gbps) • 10GE (10.3125 Gbps) or 10GE into OTU2 (ITU G.sup43 11.0957 Gbps) • 10G-FC (10.51875 Gbps) or 10G-FC into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change. 10.5.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature A key feature of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards is the availability to configure the forward error correction in three modes: NO FEC, FEC, and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • NO FEC—No forward error correction • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7 algorithm, which is a super FEC code 10.5.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client side traffic passes through the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode, E-FEC mode, or no error correction at all. The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower OSNR) with a lower bit error rate than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned off, FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC. Caution Because the transponder has no visibility into the data payload and detect circuits, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards do not display circuits under the card view. 10-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 10.5.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards can perform ODU2-to-OCh mapping, which allows operators to provision data payloads in a standard way across 10-Gbps optical links. Digital wrappers that define client side interfaces are called ODU2 entities in ITU-T G.709. Digital wrappers that define trunk side interfaces are called OCh in ITU-T G.709. ODU2 digital wrappers can include G-MPLS signaling extensions to ITU-T G.709 (such as LSP and G-PID values) to define client interfaces and payload protocols. 10.5.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.5.9 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Card-Level Indicators Table 10-7 lists the three card-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. 10.5.10 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Port-Level Indicators Table 10-8 lists the two port-level LEDs in the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. Table 10-7 TXP_MR_10E _C and TXP_MR_10E_L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-8 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The TXP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into one 8-Mbps to 2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The TXPP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into two 8-Mbps to 2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signals (trunk side). It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are tunable over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. They are available in eight versions, each of which covers four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it, and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The trunk/line port operates at up to 2.488 Gbps (or up to 2.66 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 360 km (223.7 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or higher if dispersion compensation is used. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card does not display circuits under card view. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards support 2R (retime, regenerate) and 3R (retime, reshape, and regenerate) modes of operation where the client signal is mapped into a ITU-T G.709 frame. The mapping function is simply done by placing a digital wrapper around the client signal. Only OC-48/STM-16 client signals are fully ITU-T G.709 compliant, and the output bit rate depends on the input client signal. Table 10-9 shows the possible combinations of client interfaces, input bit rates, 2R and 3R modes, and ITU-T G.709 monitoring. Table 10-9 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709 OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R — 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON) 2.125 Gbps 3R1 On or Off High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R — Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off 1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R — SDI/D1/DVB-ASI video 270 Mbps 2R —10-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Note ITU-T G.709 and FEC support is disabled for all the 2R payload types in the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. The output bit rate is calculated for the trunk bit rate by using the 255/238 ratio as specified in ITU-T G.709 for OTU1. Table 10-10 lists the calculated trunk bit rates for the client interfaces with ITU-T G.709 enabled. For 2R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to pass data through transparently from client side interfaces to a trunk side interface, which resides on an ITU grid. The data might vary at any bit rate from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps, including ESCON, DVB-ASI, ISC-1, and video signals. In this pass-through mode, no performance monitoring (PM) or digital wrapping of the incoming signal is provided, except for the usual PM outputs from the SFPs. Similarly, this card has the ability to pass data through transparently from the trunk side interfaces to the client side interfaces with bit rates varying from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps. Again, no PM or digital wrapping of received signals is available in this pass-through mode. For 3R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards apply a digital wrapper to the incoming client interface signals (OC-N/STM-N, 1G-FC, 2G-FC, GE). PM is available on all of these signals except for 2G-FC, and varies depending upon the type of signal. For client inputs other than OC-48/STM-16, a digital wrapper might be applied but the resulting signal is not ITU-T G.709 compliant. The card applies a digital wrapper that is scaled to the frequency of the input signal. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to take digitally wrapped signals in from the trunk interface, remove the digital wrapper, and send the unwrapped data through to the client interface. PM of the ITU-T G.709 OH and SONET/SDH OH is implemented. ISC-1 Compat 1.06 Gbps 2R Off ISC-3 1.06 or 2.125 Gbps 2R — ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R — 1. No monitoring Table 10-9 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface (continued) Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709 Table 10-10 Trunk Bit Rates With ITU-T G.709 Enabled Client Interface ITU-T G.709 Disabled ITU-T G.709 Enabled OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 2.66 Gbps 2G-FC 2.125 Gbps 2.27 Gbps GE 1.25 Gbps 1.34 Gbps 1G-FC 1.06 Gbps 1.14 Gbps OC-12/STM-3 622 Mbps 666.43 Mbps OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 166.07 Mbps10-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10.6.1 Faceplate Figure 10-16 shows the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates. Figure 10-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. 10.6.2 Block Diagram Figure 10-17 shows a block diagram of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. CLIENT 2.5G MR TXP-P 1530.33 - 1532.68 2.5G MR TXP 1530.33 - 1532.68 FAIL ACT/STBY SF HAZARD LEVEL 1M TX RX DWDM A RX TX DWDM B RX TX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm CLIENT ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm FAIL ACT/STBY SF HAZARD LEVEL 1M TX RX RX TX DWDM 14594610-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Figure 10-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. You can install TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards cannot be provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm laser for the client port. It contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination. The TXPP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client port and contains three transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination. 10.6.3 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. SFP Client Switch Switch Driver Tunable Laser Switch Cross Switch Limiting Amp Limiting Amp Main APD+TA Protect APD+TA Mux Demux Mux Demux Mux Demux CPU Main ASIC Protect FPGA ASIC SCL FPGA SCL BUS 2R Tx path Trunk Out 2R Rx path CELL BUS CPU I/F CELL BUS DCC CPU to GCC 9663610-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card 10.6.4 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators Table 10-11 lists the three card-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 10.6.5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators Table 10-12 lists the four port-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 10.7 MXP_2.5G_10G Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The MXP_2.5G_10G card multiplexes/demultiplexes four 2.5-Gbps signals (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one extended long-range STM-64/OC-192 port per card on the trunk side (compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE) and four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. Table 10-11 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM LED (TXP_MR_2.5G only) The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM A LED (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) The green DWDM A LED indicates that the DWDM A port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM B LED (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) The green DWDM B LED indicates that the DWDM B port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Client ports on the MXP_2.5G_10G card are also interoperable with SONET OC-1 (STS-1) fiber optic signals defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE. An OC-1 signal is the equivalent of one DS-3 channel transmitted across optical fiber. OC-1 is primarily used for trunk interfaces to phone switches in the United States. There is no SDH equivalent for SONET OC-1. The MXP_2.5G_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The port can also operate at 10.70923 Gbps in ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC mode. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, an MXP_2.5G_10G card does not display circuits under card view. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_2.5G_10G card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_2.5G_10G card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10G card. You can install MXP_2.5G_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Caution Do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1or 2. Likewise, do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 17 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 15 or 16. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors. You can provision this card in a linear configuration. MXP_2.5G_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10G port features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and SFP connectors on the client side for optical cable termination. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. Figure 10-18 shows the MXP_2.5G_10G faceplate.10-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Figure 10-18 MXP_2.5G_10G Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-8. Figure 10-19 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10G card. CLIENT DWDM 1 2 4x 2.5G 10G MXP 1530.33 - 1531.12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX TX RX 3 TX RX 4 TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm TX RX 1530.33 1531.12 14594510-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Figure 10-19 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Block Diagram 10.7.1 Timing Synchronization The MXP_2.5G_10G card is synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock during normal conditions and transmits the ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card can operate from an external building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, an internal Stratum 3 clock, or from clock recovered from one of the four valid client clocks. If clocks from both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are not available, the MXP_2.5G_10G card switches automatically (with errors, not hitless) to an internal 19.44 MHz clock that does not meet SONET clock requirements. This will result in a clock alarm. 10.7.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_2.5G_10G card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.7.3 MXP_2.5G_10G Card-Level Indicators Table 10-13 describes the three card-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10G card. uP bus uP Flash RAM ASIC Optical Transceiver STM-64 / OC-192 9.953, 10.3125, 10.709, or 11.095 Gbps SCI 83659 B a c k p l a n e Optical Transceiver STM-64 / OC-192 9.95328 or 10.70923 Gbps Framer/FEC/DWDM Processor DWDM (Trunk) Client10-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card 10.7.3.1 MXP_2.5G_10G Port-Level Indicators Table 10-14 describes the four port-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10G card. 10.7.4 MXP_2.5G_10E Card The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10E MXP.” The MXP_2.5G_10E card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports full transparent termination the client side. The card multiplexes four 2.5 Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E provides wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up generic communications channels (GCCs) for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. Table 10-13 MXP_2.5G_10G Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-14 MXP_2.5G_10G Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED (four LEDs) The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. The card has four client ports, and so has four Client LEDs. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green Wavelength 1 LED Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is configured for Wavelength 1. Green Wavelength 2 LED Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is configured for Wavelength 2.10-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card The MXP_2.5G_10E works with optical transport network (OTN) devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.7.7 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-36. The MXP_2.5G_10E card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support full transparent termination. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision this card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10E features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and uses SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are short reach (SR) or intermediate reach (IR) and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 10.7.4.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10E card has the following high level features: • Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard Reed-Solomon (RS, specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new block code (BCH) algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E card has modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • High level provisioning support: The MXP_2.5G_10E card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Link monitoring and management: The MXP_2.5G_10E card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.10-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC is not available, the MXP_2.5G_10E automatically synchronizes to one of the input client interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages multiplex section alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) insertion. 10.7.5 Faceplate Figure 10-20 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E faceplate. Figure 10-20 MXP_2.5G_10E Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-8. Figure 10-21 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10E card. 145937 FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MxP 530.33- 1550.12 RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX Client LEDs DWDM LED10-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Figure 10-21 MXP_2.5G_10E Block Diagram 10.7.6 Client Interfaces The MXP_2.5G_10E provides four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. Both SR-1 or IR-1 optics can be supported and the ports use SFP connectors. The client interfaces use four wavelengths in the 1310-nm, ITU 100-MHz-spaced, channel grid. 10.7.6.1 DWDM Interface The MXP_2.5G_10E serves as an OTN multiplexer, transparently mapping four OC-48 channels asynchronously to ODU1 into one 10-Gbps trunk. The DWDM trunk is tunable for transmission over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz spaced channel grid. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_2.5G_10E card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_2.5G_10E card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10E card. 10.7.7 Multiplexing Function The muxponder is an integral part of the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) network. The key function of MXP_2.5G_10E is to multiplex 4 OC-48/STM16 signals onto one ITU-T G.709 OTU2 optical signal (DWDM transmission). The multiplexing mechanism allows the signal to be terminated at a far-end node by another MXP_2.5G_10E card. Termination mode transparency on the muxponder is configured using OTUx and ODUx OH bytes. The ITU-T G.709 specification defines OH byte formats that are used to configure, set, and monitor frame alignment, FEC mode, section monitoring, tandem connection monitoring, and termination mode transparency. uP bus Serial bus Processor Onboard Flash memory RAM Optical transceiver 115357 FEC/ Wrapper Processor (G.709 FEC) E-FEC DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR) SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver B a c k p l a n e10-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card The MXP_2.5G_10E card performs ODU to OTU multiplexing as defined in ITU-T G.709. The ODU is the framing structure and byte definition (ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper) used to define the data payload coming into one of the SONET/SDH client interfaces on MXP_2.5G_10E. The term ODU1 refers to an ODU that operates at 2.5-Gbps line rate. On the MXP_2.5G_10E, there are four client interfaces that can be defined using ODU1 framing structure and format by asserting a ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper. The output of the muxponder is a single 10-Gbps DWDM trunk interface defined using OTU2. It is within the OTU2 framing structure that FEC or E-FEC information is appended to enable error checking and correction. 10.7.8 Timing Synchronization The MXP_2.5G_10E card is synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock during normal conditions and transmits the ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. No holdover function is implemented. If neither TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock is available, the MXP_2.5G_10E switches automatically (hitless) to the first of the four valid client clocks with no time restriction as to how long it can run on this clock. The MXP_2.5G_10E continues to monitor the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card is restored to working order, the MXP_2.5G_10E reverts to the normal working mode of running from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock. If there is no valid TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock and all of the client channels become invalid, the card waits (no valid frames processed) until one of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards supplies a valid clock. In addition, the card is allowed to select the recovered clock from one active and valid client channel and supply that clock to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. 10.7.9 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability The MXP_2.5G_10E can configure the FEC in three modes: NO FEC, FEC, and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • NO FEC—No FEC • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7, two orthogonally concatenated BCH super FEC code. This FEC scheme contains three parameterizations of the same scheme of two orthogonally interleaved BCH. The constructed code is decoded iteratively to achieve the expected performance. 10.7.10 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client side traffic passes through the MXP_2.5G_10E card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode error correction or E-FEC mode error correction (or no error correction at all). The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower OSNR) with a lower BER than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned off, FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC.10-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card 10.7.11 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing The card passes the incoming SONET/SDH data stream and its overhead bytes for the client signal transparently. The card can be provisioned to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. 10.7.12 Client Interface Monitoring The following parameters are monitored on the MXP_2.5G_10E card: • Laser bias current is measured as a PM parameter • LOS is detected and signaled • Transmit (TX) and receive (RX) power are monitored The following parameters are monitored in real time mode (one second): • Optical power transmitted (client) • Optical power received (client) In case of loss of communication (LOC) at the DWDM receiver or far-end LOS, the client interface behavior is configurable. AIS can be invoked or the client signal can be squelched. 10.7.13 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wave-locked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Table 10-15 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths. The laser is tunable over eight wavelengths at 50-GHz spacing or four at 100-GHz spacing. Table 10-15 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths Band Wavelength (nm) 30.3 1530.33 30.3 1531.12 30.3 1531.90 30.3 1532.68 34.2 1534.25 34.2 1535.04 34.2 1535.82 34.2 1536.61 38.1 1538.19 38.1 1538.98 38.1 1539.77 38.1 1540.56 42.1 1542.14 42.1 1542.9410-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card 10.7.14 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_2.5G_10E card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.7.15 Jitter For SONET and SDH signals, the MXP_2.5G_10E card complies with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.825, and ITU-T G.873 for jitter generation, jitter tolerance, and jitter transfer. See the “10.21 Jitter Considerations” section on page 10-142 for more information. 10.7.16 Lamp Test The MXP_2.5G_10E card supports a lamp test function that is activated from the ONS 15454 front panel or through CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. 42.1 1543.73 42.1 1544.53 46.1 1546.12 46.1 1546.92 46.1 1547.72 46.1 1548.51 50.1 1550.12 50.1 1550.92 50.1 1551.72 50.1 1552.52 54.1 1554.13 54.1 1554.94 54.1 1555.75 54.1 1556.55 58.1 1558.17 58.1 1558.98 58.1 1559.79 58.1 1560.61 Table 10-15 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Band Wavelength (nm)10-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 10.7.17 Onboard Traffic Generation The MXP_2.5G_10E card provides internal traffic generation for testing purposes according to pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS), SONET/SDH, or ITU-T G.709. 10.7.18 MXP_2.5G_10E Card-Level Indicators Table 10-16 describes the three card-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10E card. 10.7.19 MXP_2.5G_10E Port-Level Indicators Table 10-17 describes the port-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10E card. 10.8 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are DWDM muxponders for the ONS 15454 platform that support transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the cards is “4x2.5G 10E MXP C” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card and “4x2.5G 10E MXP L” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The cards multiplex four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and Table 10-16 MXP_2.5G_10E Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-17 MXP_2.5G_10E Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED (four LEDs) A green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. The card has four client ports, and so has four Client LEDs. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards work with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.8.5 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-44. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The MXP_2.5G_10E_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 10.8.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have the following high level features: • Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.10-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards • Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_2.5G_10E_C) or full L band (MXP_2.5G_10E_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. 10.8.2 Faceplate Figure 10-22 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L faceplates and block diagram. 10-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Figure 10-22 MXP_2.5G_10E _C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-8. 10.8.3 Client Interfaces The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. Both SR-1 and IR-1 optics can be supported and the ports use SFP connectors. The client interfaces use four wavelengths in the 1310-nm, ITU 100-GHz-spaced, channel grid. 10.8.4 DWDM Interface The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards serve as OTN multiplexers, transparently mapping four OC-48 channels asynchronously to ODU1 into one 10-Gbps trunk. For the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card, the DWDM trunk is tunable for transmission over the entire C band and for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card, the DWDM trunk is tunable for transmission over the entire L band. Channels are spaced at 50-GHz on the ITU grid. FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP C RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP L RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RAM Processor 145941 Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver B a c k p l a n e FEC/ Wrapper E-FEC Processor (G.709 FEC) Serial bus uP bus Onboard Flash memory Client LEDs DWDM LED SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR)10-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. 10.8.5 Multiplexing Function The muxponder is an integral part of the ROADM network. The key function of the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards is to multiplex four OC-48/STM16 signals onto one ITU-T G.709 OTU2 optical signal (DWDM transmission). The multiplexing mechanism allows the signal to be terminated at a far-end node by another similar card. Transparent termination on the muxponder is configured using OTUx and ODUx OH bytes. The ITU-T G.709 specification defines OH byte formats that are used to configure, set, and monitor frame alignment, FEC mode, section monitoring, tandem connection monitoring, and transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10E and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards perform ODU to OTU multiplexing as defined in ITU-T G.709. The ODU is the framing structure and byte definition (ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper) used to define the data payload coming into one of the SONET/SDH client interfaces on the cards. The term ODU1 refers to an ODU that operates at 2.5-Gbps line rate. On the cards, there are four client interfaces that can be defined using ODU1 framing structure and format by asserting a ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper. The output of the muxponder is a single 10-Gbps DWDM trunk interface defined using OTU2. It is within the OTU2 framing structure that FEC or E-FEC information is appended to enable error checking and correction. 10.8.6 Timing Synchronization The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock during normal conditions and transmit the ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. No holdover function is implemented. If neither TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock is available, the card switches automatically (hitless) to the first of the four valid client clocks with no time restriction as to how long it can run on this clock. The card continues to monitor the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card is restored to working order, the card reverts to the normal working mode of running from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock. If there is no valid TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock and all of the client channels become invalid, the card waits (no valid frames processed) until one of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards supplies a valid clock. In addition, the card is allowed to select the recovered clock from one active and valid client channel and supply that clock to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. 10.8.7 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards can configure the FEC in three modes: NO FEC, FEC, and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • NO FEC—No FEC • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm10-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7, two orthogonally concatenated BCH super FEC code. This FEC scheme contains three parameterizations of the same scheme of two orthogonally interleaved block codes (BCH). The constructed code is decoded iteratively to achieve the expected performance. 10.8.8 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client side traffic passes through the card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode error correction or E-FEC mode error correction (or no error correction at all). The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower OSNR) with a lower BER than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned off, FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC. 10.8.9 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing The card passes the incoming SONET/SDH data stream and its overhead bytes for the client signal transparently. The card can be provisioned to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. 10.8.10 Client Interface Monitoring The following parameters are monitored on the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards: • Laser bias current is measured as a PM parameter. • LOS is detected and signaled. • Rx and Tx power are monitored. The following parameters are monitored in real time mode (one second): • Optical power transmitted (client) • Optical power received (client) In case of LOC at the DWDM receiver or far-end LOS, the client interface behavior is configurable. AIS can be invoked or the client signal can be squelched. 10.8.11 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Both the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards implement the UT2 module. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card uses an L-band version. Table 10-18 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.10-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Table 10-18 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.38910-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Table 10-19 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-18 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-19 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.7610-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 10.8.12 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.8.13 Jitter For SONET and SDH signals, the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards comply with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.825, and ITU-T G.873 for jitter generation, jitter tolerance, and jitter transfer. See the “10.21 Jitter Considerations” section on page 10-142 for more information. 10.8.14 Lamp Test The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards support a lamp test function that is activated from the ONS 15454 front panel or through CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 10-19 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)10-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10.8.15 Onboard Traffic Generation The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide internal traffic generation for testing purposes according to PRBS, SONET/SDH, or ITU-T G.709. 10.8.16 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card-Level Indicators Table 10-20 describes the three card-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. 10.8.17 MXP_2.5G_10E and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators Table 10-21 describes the port-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. 10.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The MXP_MR_2.5G card aggregates a mix and match of client Storage Area Network (SAN) service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Table 10-20 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-21 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED (four LEDs) A green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. The card has four client ports, and so has four Client LEDs. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Note In Software Release 7.0 and later, two additional operating modes have been made available to the user: pure ESCON (all 8 ports running ESCON), and mixed mode (Port 1 running FC/GE/FICON, and Ports 5 through 8 running ESCON). When the card is part of a system running Software Release 6.0 or below, only one operating mode, (FC/GE) is available for use. The 2.5-Gbps Multirate Muxponder–Protected–100 GHz–Tunable 15xx.xx-15yy.yy (MXPP_MR_2.5G) card aggregates various client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per card and is compliant with ITU-T G.957 and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Because the cards are tunable to one of four adjacent grid channels on a 100-GHz spacing, each card is available in eight versions, with 15xx.xx representing the first wavelength and 15yy.yy representing the last wavelength of the four available on the card. In total, 32 DWDM wavelengths are covered in accordance with the ITU-T 100-GHz grid standard, G.692, and Telcordia GR-2918-CORE, Issue 2. The card versions along with their corresponding wavelengths are shown in Table 10-22. The muxponders are intended to be used in applications with long DWDM metro or regional unregenerated spans. Long transmission distances are achieved through the use of flat gain optical amplifiers. The client interface supports the following payload types: • 2G FC • 1G FC • 2G FICON • 1G FICON • GE • ESCON Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 2.5 Gbps. Table 10-22 Card Versions Card Version Frequency Channels at 100 GHz (0.8 nm) Spacing 1530.33–1532.68 1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm 1534.25–1536.61 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm 1538.19–1540.56 1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm 1542.14–1544.53 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm 1546.12–1548.51 1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm 1550.12–1552.52 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm 1554.13–1556.55 1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm 1558.17–1560.61 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm10-51 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Table 10-23 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the ITU-T Transparent Generic Framing Procedure (GFP-T) G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed serializer/deserializer (SERDES) is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. Table 10-24 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client ports. The table is intended to show the full client payload configurations for the card. Table 10-23 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate ITU-T GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 2G FICON 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FICON 1.06 Gbps Yes GE 1.25 Gbps Yes ESCON 0.2 Gbps Yes Table 10-24 Client Data Rates and Ports Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate 2G FC 1 2.125 Gbps 1G FC 1, 2 2.125 Gbps 2G FICON 1 2.125 Gbps 1G FICON 1, 2 2.125 Gbps GE 1, 2 2.5 Gbps 1G FC ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.06 Gbps 0.8 Gbps 1.86 Gbps total 1G FICON ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.06 Gbps 0.8 Gbps 1.86 Gbps total GE ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.25 Gbps 0.8 Gbps Total 2.05 Gbps ESCON 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1.6 Gbps10-52 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 10.9.1 Performance Monitoring GFP-T performance monitoring (GFP-T PM) is available via remote monitoring (RMON), and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE. 10.9.2 Distance Extension A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication The MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5 cards support FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.2 miles) for 1G FC and up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled. 10.9.3 Slot Compatibility You can install MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card is the only other card required to be used with these muxponder cards. Cross-connect cards do not affect the operation of the muxponder cards. 10.9.4 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch. 10.9.5 Client and Trunk Ports The MXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with a 45 degree downward angle. The MXPP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client port. The card contains eight 12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. There are two trunk port connectors (one for working and one for protect). Each is a dual-LC connector with a 45-degree downward angle. 10.9.6 Faceplates Figure 10-23 shows the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates.10-53 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Figure 10-23 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. 10.9.7 Block Diagram Figure 10-24 shows a block diagram of the MXP_MR_2.5G card. The card has eight SFP client interfaces. Ports 1 and 2 can be used for GE, FC, FICON, or ESCON. Ports 3 through 8 are used for ESCON client interfaces. There are two SERDES blocks dedicated to the high-speed interfaces (GE, FC, FICON, and ESCON) and two SERDES blocks for the ESCON interfaces. A FPGA is provided to support different configurations for different modes of operation. This FPGA has a Universal Test and MXP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G 124077 MXP MR 2.5G 15xx.xx 15xx.xx FAIL ACT/STBY SF MXPP MR 2.5G 15xx.xx 15xx.xx RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX DWDMA DWDMB FAIL ACT/STBY SF RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX DWDM RX TX10-54 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Operations Physical Interface for ATM (UTOPIA) interface. A transceiver add/drop multiplexer (TADM) chip supports framing. Finally, the output signal is serialized and connected to the trunk front end with a direct modulation laser. The trunk receive signal is converted into an electrical signal with an avalanche photodiode (APD), is deserialized, and is then sent to the TADM framer and FPGA. The MXPP_MR_2.5G is the same, except a 50/50 splitter divides the power at the trunk interface. In the receive direction, there are two APDs, two SERDES blocks, and two TADM framers. This is necessary to monitor both the working and protect paths. A switch selects one of the two paths to connect to the client interface. Figure 10-24 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback configuration on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 10.9.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. SFP 1 SFP 6 SFP 5 SFP 4 SFP 3 SFP 2 SFP 8 SERDES FPGA (for FC, GE, FICON, ESCON, PCS, B2B, GFP-T) SERDES SFP 7 High-speed SERDES QDR SRAM TADM framer Laser APD Serializer Deserializer ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON Trunk interface 134986 GE, FC, FICON, ESCON GE, FC, FICON, ESCON10-55 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 10.9.9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators Table 10-25 lists the card-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 10.9.10 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators Table 10-26 lists the port-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 10.10 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards MXP_MR_10DME_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Table 10-25 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description FAIL LED (Red) Red indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Green indicates that the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. Amber indicates that the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. SF LED (Amber) Amber indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also illuminated if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the LED turns off. Table 10-26 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Client LEDs (eight LEDs) Green indicates that the port is carrying traffic (active) on the interface. Amber indicates that the port is carrying protect traffic (MXPP_MR_2.5G). Red indicates that the port has detected a loss of signal. DWDM LED (MXP_MR_2.5G) Green (Active) Red (LOS) Green indicates that the card is carrying traffic (active) on the interface. A red LED indicates that the interface has detected an LOS or LOC. DWDMA and DWDMB LEDs (MXPP_MR_2.5G) Green (Active) Amber (Protect Traffic) Red (LOS) Green indicates that the card is carrying traffic (active) on the interface. When the LED is amber, it indicates that the interface is carrying protect traffic in a splitter protection card (MXPP_MR_2.5G). A red LED indicates that the interface has detected an LOS or LOC.10-56 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards aggregate a mix of client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10.0 Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957. The cards support aggregation of the following signal types: • 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 1-Gigabit Ethernet • 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1) • 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3) Note On the card faceplates, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are displayed as 10DME_C and 10DME_L, respectively. Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it safely. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.7.7 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-36. Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 10 Gbps. You can install MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The MXP_MR_10DME_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector.10-57 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Table 10-27 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. There are two FPGAs on each MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L, and a group of four ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 10-28 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port. GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE. A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards support FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards feature a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The cards contains eight 12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with a 45 degree downward angle. Table 10-27 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 1.06 Gbps Yes Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes Table 10-28 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC 1 5 X XXX 2 6 X X —— 3 7 X XX— 4 8 X X ——10-58 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards The throughput of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards is affected by the following parameters: • Distance extension—If distance extension is enabled on the card, it provides more throughput but more latency. If distance extension is disabled on the card, the buffer to buffer credits on the storage switch affects the throughput; higher the buffer to buffer credits higher is the throughput. Note For each link to operate at the maximum throughput, it requires a minimum number of buffer credits to be available on the devices which the link connects to. The number of buffer credits required is a function of the distance between the storage switch extension ports and the link bandwidth, that is, 1G, 2G, or 4G. These buffer credits are provided by either the storage switch (if distance extension is disabled) or by both the storage switch and the card (if distance extension is enabled). • Forward Error Correction (FEC)—If Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) is enabled on the trunk port of the card, the throughout is significantly reduced in comparison to standard FEC being set on the trunk port. Note If distance extension is enabled on the card, the FEC status does not usually affect the throughput of the card. • Payload size—The throughput of the card decreases with decrease in payload size. The resultant throughput of the card is usually the combined effect of the above parameters. 10.10.1 Key Features The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have the following high-level features: • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • Y-cable protection: Supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the same port number and signal rate. See the “10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page 10-139 for more detailed information. • High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • ALS: A safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.10-59 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards • Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. Note MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards cannot be used for line timing. • Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_MR_10DME_C) or full L band (MXP_MR_10DME_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. • You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch. • From Software Release 9.0, the fast switch feature of MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards along with the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature of MDS switches, prevents reinitialization of ISL links during Y-cable switchovers. 10.10.2 Faceplate Figure 10-25 shows the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L faceplates and block diagram.10-60 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Figure 10-25 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards. 10.10.3 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Both the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards implement the UT2 module. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_MR_10DME_L card uses an L-band version. 10DME-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF 145767 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 DWDM RX TX 10DME-L FAIL ACT/STBY SF RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 DWDM RX TX SPF 1/1 4G FC SerDes 1 x QDR 2M x 36bit Burst4 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA Framer G.709/FEC OTN MXP UT2 Data path 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 2/1 SPF 3/1 CPU Core FPGA Power supply DCC/GCC CPUC bus SPF 4/1 SPF 6/1 4G FC SerDes 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 7/1 SPF 8/1 SPF 9/1 Client ports Group 1 Group 210-61 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Table 10-29 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 10-29 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.57810-62 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Table 10-30 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_L card. The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-29 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-30 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.9110-63 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 10.10.4 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card-Level Indicators Table 10-31 describes the three card-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards. 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 10-30 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-31 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.10-64 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card 10.10.5 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Port-Level Indicators Table 10-32 describes the port-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards. 10.11 40G-MXP-C Card The 40G-MXP-C card aggregates a variety of client service inputs (GigabitEthernet, Fibre Channel, OTU2, OTU2e, and OC192) into one 40.0 Gbps OTU3/OTU3e signal on the trunk side. The 40G-MXP-C card supports aggregation of the following signals: • With overclock enabled on the trunk port: – 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel – OTU2e • With overclock disabled on the trunk port: – 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel – 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (GFP framing) – 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (WIS framing) – OC-192/STM-64 – OTU2 Caution Handle the card with care. Dropping or misuse of the card could result in permanent damage. The 40G-MXP-C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently, section, or line termination. Table 10-32 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Port LED (eight LEDs, four for each group, one for each SFP) Green/Red/Amber/Off When green, the port LED indicates that the client port is either in service and receiving a recognized signal (that is, no signal fail), or Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or locked, maintenance) and the signal fail and alarms are being ignored. When red, the port LED indicates that the client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS). When amber, the port LED indicates that the port is provisioned and in a standby state. When off, the port LED indicates that the SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted, or the SFP hardware has failed. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-65 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. The 40G-MXP-C card work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODTU23 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping client payloads into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.7.7 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-36. You can install and provision the 40G-MXP-C card in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis The 40G-MXP-C card client port interoperates with all the existing TXP/MXP (OTU2 trunk) cards. The 40G-MXP-C card client port does not interoperate with OTU2_XP card when the signal rate is OTU1e (11.049 Gbps) and the “No Fixed Stuff” option is enabled on the trunk port of OTU2_XP card. For OTU2 and OTU2e client protocols, Enhanced FEC (EFEC) is not supported in Port 1 of the 40G-MXP-C card. Table 10-33 lists the FEC configuration supported on OTU2/OTU2e protocol for 40G-MXP-C card. When setting up the card for the first time, or when the card comes up after clearing the LOS-P condition due to fiber cut, the trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card takes a about six minutes to lock a signal. The trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card raises an OTUK-LOF alarm when the card is comes up. The alarm clears when the trunk port locks the signal. When protection switch occurs on the 40G-MXP-C card, the recovery from PSM protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes. The 40G-MXP-C card is tunable over C-band on the trunk port. The 40G-MXP-C card supports pluggable XFPs on the client ports on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side, and XFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The XFP pluggable modules are SR, LR, MM, DWDM, or CWDM and support an LC fiber connector. The 40G-MXP-C card contains four XFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each XFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector facing downward at 45 degrees. Table 10-34 shows the input data rate for each client interface. Table 10-33 40G-MXP-C Client Interface Data Rates 40G-MXP-C Client Port FEC Configuration Supported on OTU2/OTU2e Client Protocol Port 1 Only Standard FEC Port 2 Standard and Enhanced FEC Port 3 Standard and Enhanced FEC Port 4 Standard and Enhanced FEC Table 10-34 40G-MXP-C Client Interface Input Data Rates Client Interface Input Data Rate 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel 8.48 Gbps 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel 10.519 Gbps 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy 10.312 Gbps10-66 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card 10.11.1 Key Features The 40G-MXP-C card comprises of the following key features: • The 40G-MXP-C card uses the RZ-DQPSK 40G modulation format. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The E-FEC functionality improves the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (239,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented (according to G.975.1 I.7) in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. The 40G-MXP-C card supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC standard, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. • Y-cable protection: Supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the same port number and signal rate. For more information on Y-cable protection, see “10.19 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection” section on page 10-139. Note Y-cable cannot be created on 10 GE port when WIS framing is enabled on the 40G-MXP-C card. • Unidirectional regeneration: The 40G-MXP-C card supports unidirectional regeneration configuration. Each 40G-MXP-C card in the configuration regenerates the signal received from another 40G-MXP-C card in one direction. Note When you configure the 40G-MXP-C card in Unidirectional Regen mode, ensure that the payload is not configured on pluggable port modules of the 40G-MXP-C card. Figure 10-26 shows a typical unidirectional regeneration configuration. Figure 10-26 40G-MXP-C Cards in Unidirectional Regeneration Configuration • High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco Transport Planner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. 10-GigabitEthernet WAN-Phy 9.953 Gbps OC-192/STM-64 9.953 Gbps OTU2 10.709 Gbps OTU2e 11.096 Gbps Table 10-34 40G-MXP-C Client Interface Input Data Rates (continued) Client Interface Input Data Rate 278759 Client DWDM System DWDM System 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C Client DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk10-67 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card • Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): A safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. The Auto Restart ALS option is supported only for OC192/STM64 and OTU2 payloads. The Manual Restart ALS option is supported for all payloads. For more information on ALS provisioning for the 40G-MXP-C card, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The 40G-MXP-C card synchronizes to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card is not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. • Squelching policy: The cards are set to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver, or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The card is tunable across the full C band wavelength. 10.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 10-27 shows the 40G-MXP-C card faceplate and block diagram.10-68 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card Figure 10-27 40G-MXP-C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the 40G-MXP-C card. 10.11.3 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The 40G-MXP-C card implements the UT2 module. The 40G-MXP-C card uses a C-band version of the UT2. Table 10-35 lists the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the 40G-MXP-C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. 278757 XFP XFP XFP XFP MSA 100 40 G FEC/EF EC Trunk module TDC EDFA XFP Child card Tx Rx Trunk 4x XFI SFI 5.1 interface Threshold control 40G-MXP-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF XFP1 XFP2 XFP3 XFP4 TRUNK RX 2 TX RX 1 TX RX 3 TX RX 4 TX TRUNK TX MX RX HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 200710-69 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card Table 10-35 40G-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.38910-70 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C Card 10.11.4 40G-MXP-C Card-Level Indicators Table 10-36 describes the three card-level indicators on the 40G-MXP-C card. 10.11.5 40G-MXP-C Card Port-Level Indicators Table 10-37 describes the port-level indicators on the 40G-MXP-C card. 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-35 40G-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-36 40G-MXP-C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicator Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.10-71 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are Gigabit Ethernet Xponders for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. Note GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the GE_XP card and 10GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the 10GE_XP card. The cards aggregate Ethernet packets received on the client ports for transport on C-band trunk ports that operate on a 100-GHz grid. The trunk ports operate with ITU-T G.709 framing and either FEC or E-FEC. The GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards are designed for bulk point-to-point transport over 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths. The GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards are designed for bulk GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, multipoint-to-multipoint transport over 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths. You can install and provision the GE_XP, and GE_XPE cards in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The GE_XP and GE_XPE are double-slot cards with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE are single-slot cards with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client ports support SX, LX, and ZX SFPs and SR and 10GBASE-LR XFPs. (LR2 XFPs are not supported.) The trunk ports support a DWDM XFP. Table 10-37 40G-MXP-C Card Port-Level Indicators Port-Level Indicator Description Port LED (eight LEDs, four for each group, one for each XFP) Green/Red/Amber/Off The green port LED indicates that the client port is either in service and receiving a recognized signal (that is, no signal fail), or Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or locked, maintenance) and the signal fail and alarms are being ignored. The red port LED indicates that the client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS). The amber port LED indicates that the port is provisioned and in a standby state. The port LED, when switched off, indicates that the SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted, or the SFP hardware failed. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-72 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The RAD pluggables (ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW= and ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW=) do not support: • No loopbacks (Terminal or Facility) • RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) alarm • AIS and LOS alarm Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf, or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned to perform different Gigabit Ethernet transport roles. All the cards can work as Layer 2 switches. However, the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can also perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponders (10GE TXP mode), and the GE_XP and GE_XPE can perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponders (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP mode). Table 10-38 shows the card modes supported by each card. Note Changing the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode requires the ports to be in a OOS-DSBL (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI) service state. In addition, no circuits can be provisioned on the cards when the mode is being changed. 10.12.1 Key Features The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have the following high-level features: • Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) that allows you to bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. • Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) protocol that facilitates proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation. Table 10-38 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes Card Mode Cards Description Layer 2 Ethernet switch GE_XP 10GE_XP GE_XPE 10GE_XPE Provides capability to switch between any two ports irrespective of client or trunk port. Supported Ethernet protocols and services include 1+1 protection, QoS (Quality of Service), CoS (Class of Service), QinQ, MAC learning, MAC address retrieval, service provider VLANs (SVLANs), IGMP snooping and Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR), link integrity, and other Ethernet switch services. 10GE TXP 10GE_XP 10GE_XPE Provides a point-to-point application in which each 10 Gigabit Ethernet client port is mapped to a 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk port. 10GE MXP 20GE MXP GE_XP GE_XPE Provides the ability to multiplex the twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports on the card to one or both of its 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The card can be provisioned as a single MXP with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to one trunk port (Port 21) or as two MXPs with ten Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to a trunk port (Ports 1 to 10 mapped to Port 21, and Ports 11-20 mapped to Port 22).10-73 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol that facilitates link monitoring, remote failure indication, and remote loopback. • Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) that controls network loops, handles link failures, and improves convergence time. • Configurable service VLANs (SVLANs) and customer VLANs (CVLANs). • Ingress rate limiting that can be applied on both SVLANs and CVLANs. You can create SVLAN and CVLAN profiles and can associate a SVLAN profile to both UNI and NNI ports; however, you can associate a CVLAN profile only to UNI ports. • CVLAN rate limiting that is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. • Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) to class of service (CoS) mapping that you can configure for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. • Ports, in Layer 2 switch mode, can be provisioned as network-to-network interfaces (NNIs) or user-network interfaces (UNIs) to facilitate service provider to customer traffic management. • Broadcast drop-and-continue capability for VOD and broadcast video applications. • Gigabit Ethernet MXP, TXP, and Layer 2 switch capability over the ONS 15454 DWDM platform. • Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf assembly, ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly, ONS 15454 M2, and the ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. Compatible with TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, and TSC cards. • Far-End Laser Control (FELC) that is supported on copper SFPs from Release 8.52 and later releases. For more information on FELC, see the “10.20 Far-End Laser Control” section on page 10-142. • Layer 2 switch mode that provides VLAN translation, QinQ, ingress CoS, egress QoS, Fast Ethernet protection switching, and other Layer 2 Ethernet services. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. Also interoperable with Cisco Catalyst 6500 and Cisco 7600 series Gigabit Ethernet, 10 GE interfaces and CRS-1 10GE interfaces. • The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client Gigabit Ethernet signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing when configured in one of the MXP modes (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP). • ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous and asynchronous mapping. E-FEC with ITU-T G.709 ODU and 2.7 Gbps with greater than 8 dB coding gain. • IEEE 802.3 frame format that is supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable. • MAC learning capability in Layer 2 switch mode. • MAC address retrieval in cards provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode. • When a port is in UNI mode, tagging can be configured as transparent or selective. In transparent mode, only SVLANs in the VLAN database of the node can be configured. In selective mode, a CVLAN- to-SVLAN relationship can be defined. • Layer 2 VLAN port mapping that allows the cards to be configured as multiple Gigabit Ethernet TXPs and MXPs. • Y-cable protection is configurable in TXP and MXP modes.10-74 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Two protection schemes are available in Layer 2 mode. They are: – 1+1 protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for client ports. – Fast Automatic Protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for trunk ports. • End-to-end Ethernet link integrity. • Pluggable client interface optic modules (SFPs and XFPs)—Client ports support tri-rate SX, LX, and ZX SFPs, and 10-Gbps SR1 XFPs. • Pluggable trunk interface optic modules; trunk ports support the DWDM XFP. • Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping that restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present. • Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network. • Ingress CoS that assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of incoming frames. • Egress QoS that defines the QoS capabilities for the egress port. • MAC address learning that facilitates switch processing. • Storm Control that limits the number of packets passing through a port. You can define the maximum number of packets allowed per second for the following types of traffic: Broadcast, Multicast, and Unicast. The threshold for each type of traffic is independent and the maximum number of packets allowed per second for each type of traffic is 16777215. 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list Table 10-39 lists the protocol compatibility for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 10.12.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 10-28 shows the GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram looks the same. Table 10-39 Protocol Compatibility List for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Protocol L1 1+1 FAPS IGMP REP LACP CFM EFM L1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No 1+1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No FAPS Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No IGMP Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No REP No No No Yes No Yes No LACP No No No No No No No CFM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No EFM No No No No No No No10-75 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Figure 10-28 GE_XP and GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports are displayed as follows: • Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate • 21-1 and 22-1 on CTC • 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table Figure 10-29 shows the 10GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The 10 GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram looks the same. FAIL ACT SF GE-XP 1 TX RX 2 TX RX 3 TX RX 4 TX RX 5 TX RX 6 TX RX 7 TX RX 8 TX RX 9 TX RX 10 TX RX 11 TX RX 12 TX RX 13 TX RX 14 TX RX 15 TX RX 16 TX RX 17 TX RX 18 TX RX 19 TX RX 20 TX RX TX RX 2 TRUNK 1 CONSOLE T2 T1 TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL CLIENT: +3dBm TRUNK: +1dBm HAZARD LEVEL 1 159052 12GE Client ports CONN 8GE Client ports XAUI to SF14 XAUI to SF14 FEC SERDES XFP WDM FEC SERDES XFP WDM MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking BCM 5650x SCL FPGA COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 Client Ports 9-14 Client GE Ports 1-8 GE Client Ports 15-20 Trunk GE Ports 1-2 10GE BCM 5650x with Ethernet ASIC10-76 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Figure 10-29 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are displayed as follows: • Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate • 3-1 and 4-1 on CTC • 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL CLIENT: +3dBm TRUNK: +1dBm HAZARD LEVEL 1 10GE XP RX 2 TX TRUNK RX 1 TX RX 2 TX CLIENT RX 1 TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 FAIL ACT SF CONSOLE 159053 159053 XFP XAUI SERDES XFP XAUI SERDES XAUI to SF14 XAUI to SF14 FEC SERDES XFP WDM FEC SERDES XFP WDM MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking BCM 5650x with Ethernet ASIC SCL FPGA Client Ports 1-2 10GE Trunk Ports 1-2 10GE10-77 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.4 Client Interface The client interface is implemented with separately orderable SFP or XFP modules. The client interfaces support the following tri-rate SFPs and XFPs using dual LC connectors and multimode fiber: • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC - 850 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-SX) • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-LX) • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-ZX) • SFP - 10/100/1000Base-T - Copper (PID ONS-SE-ZE-EL) Intra office up to 100; Cable: RJ45 STP CAT5, CAT5E, and CAT6 • SFP - 1000Base BX D/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXD) • SFP - 1000Base BX U/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXU) • SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-LX10) • SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-FX) • SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS1/E1 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP1) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS3/E3 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP3) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - E1/DS1 over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - E3/DS3 PDH over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW) (GE_XPE only) Note The resommended topology for using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs is shown in Figure 10-30. Figure 10-30 Recommended Topology for Using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS -SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs The client interfaces support the following dual-rate XFP using dual LC connectors and single-mode fiber: • XFP - OC-192/STM-64/10GE/10-FC/OTU2 - 1310 SR - SM LC (PID: ONS-XC-10G-S1) • XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-L2) • XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-C) Note If ONS-XC-10G-C XFP is used on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards on client port 1, the maximum temperature at which the system qualifies is +45 degree Celsius. 249504 Network A with Internal Timing Network B with LoopbackTiming Node A Ethernet Network ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW on Port n of GE_XPE Card in Node A with Loopback Timing ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW on Port n of GE_XPE Card in Node B with AdaptiveTiming Node B10-78 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The client interfaces support the following multimode XFP using dual LC connectors and multi-mode fiber: • XFP - OC-192/10GFC/10GE - 850 nm MM LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM) 10.12.5 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card-Level Indicators Table 10-40 describes the three card-level LEDs on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 10.12.6 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Port-Level Indicators Table 10-41 describes the port-level LEDs on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. Table 10-40 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT LED Green (Active) If the ACT LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates that a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs is present one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-41 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Port LEDs Green/Red/Amber/Off Green—The client port is either in service and receiving a recognized signal (that is, no signal fail), or Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or locked, maintenance) in which case the signal fail and alarms will be ignored. Red—The client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS). Amber—The port is provisioned and in a standby state. Off—The SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted, or the SFP hardware has failed. Green DWDM LED Green—The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and receiving a recognized signal (that is, no signal fail), or Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or locked, maintenance) in which case the signal fail and alarms will be ignored. Red—The client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS). Amber—The port is provisioned and in a standby state. Off—The SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted, or the SFP hardware has failed.10-79 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.7 DWDM Trunk Interface The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports operating at 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10.3125 Gbps) or 10 Gigabit Ethernet into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps). The ports are compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards. The ports are capable of carrying C-band and L-band wavelengths through insertion of DWDM XFPs. Forty channels are available in the 1550-nm C band 100-GHz ITU grid, and forty channels are available in the L band. The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change. 10.12.8 Configuration Management The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following configuration management parameters: • Port name—User-assigned text string. • Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status. • MTU—Provisionable maximum transfer unit (MTU) to set the maximum number of bytes per frames accepted on the port. • Mode—Provisional port mode, either Autonegotiation or the port speed. • Flow Control—Flow control according to IEEE 802.1x pause frame specification can be enabled or disabled for TX and RX ports. • Bandwidth—Provisionable maximum bandwidth allowed for the port. • Ingress CoS—Assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of incoming frames. • Egress QoS—Defines the QoS capabilities at the egress port. • NIM—Defines the port network interface management type based on Metro Ethernet Forum specifications. Ports can be defined as UNI or NNI. • MAC Learning—MAC address learning to facilitate switch processing. • VLAN tagging provided according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Note When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are provisioned in a MXP or TXP mode, only the following parameters are available: Port Name, State, MTU, Mode, Flow control, and Bandwidth. 10.12.9 Security GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card ports can be provisioned to block traffic from a user-defined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic is normally switched. You can manually specify the set of blocked MAC addresses for each port. Each port of the card can receive traffic from a limited predefined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic will be dropped. This capability is a subset of the Cisco IOS “Port Security” feature. 10-80 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.10 Card Protection The following section describes various card protection schemes available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 10.12.10.1 1+1 Protection 1+1 protection of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards is provided in the Layer 2 (L2) card mode to protect against client port and card failure. 1+1 protection is supported in both single shelf and multishelf setup. This means that the working card can be in one shelf and the protect card can be in another shelf of a multishelf setup. Communication between the two cards is across 10 Gigabit Ethernet interconnection interface using Ethernet packets. The Inter link (ILK) trunk or internal pathcord must be provisioned on both the cards. This link is used to transmit protection switching messages and data. For information on how to provision ILK or internal patchcords, refer Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Note With 1+1 protection mechanisms, the switch time of a copper SFP is 1 second. With 1+1 protection, ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of ports. The protection takes place on the port level, and any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the working card. To make the 1+1 protection scheme fully redundant, enable L2 protection for the entire VLAN ring. This enables Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS). The VLAN configured on the 1+1 port must be configured as protected SVLAN. For information on how to enable FAPS, see Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 1+1 protection can be either revertive or nonrevertive. With nonrevertive 1+1 protection, when a failure occurs and the signal switches from the working card to the protect card, the signal remains on the protect card until it is manually changed. Revertive 1+1 protection automatically switches the signal back to the working card when the working card comes back online. 1+1 protection uses trunk ports to send control traffic between working and protect cards. This trunk port connection is known as ILK trunk ports and can be provisioned via CTC. For information on how to provision an ILK link, see “DLP-G460 Provision an ILK Link” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The standby port can be configured to turn ON or OFF but the traffic coming to and from the standby port will be down. If the laser is ON at the standby port, the other end port (where traffic originates) will not be down in a parallel connection. Traffic is blocked on the standby port. 1+1 protection is bidirectional and nonrevertive by default; revertive switching can be provisioned using CTC. For information on how to provision the cards, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.12.10.2 Y-Cable Protection The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards support Y-cable protection when they are provisioned in 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 20 Gigabit Ethernet MXP card mode. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards support Y-cable protection when they are provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode. Two cards can be joined in a Y-cable protection group with one card assigned as the working card and the other defined as the protection card. This protection mechanism provides redundant bidirectional paths. See the “10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page 10-139 for more detailed information. The Y-cable protection mechanism is 10-81 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards provisionable and can be set ON or OFF (OFF is the default mode). When a signal fault is detected (LOS, LOF, SD, or SF on the DWDM receiver port in the case of ITU-T G.709 mode) the protection mechanism software automatically switches between paths. Y-cable protection also supports revertive and nonrevertive mode. 10.12.10.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards are in L2-over-DWDM card mode, protection is handled by the hardware at the Layer 1 and Layer 2 levels. Fault detection and failure propagation is communicated through the ITU-T G.709 frame overhead bytes. For protected VLANs, traffic is flooded around the 10 Gigabit Ethernet DWDM ring. To set up the Layer 2 protection, you identify a node and the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE port that is to serve as the master node and port for the VLAN ring on the card view Provisioning > Protection tab. If a failure occurs, the node and port are responsible for opening and closing VLAN loops. Note The Forced option in the Protection drop-down list converts all the SVLANs to protected SVLANs irrespective of the SVLAN protection configuration in the SVLAN database. This is applicable to a point-to-point linear topology. The SVLAN protection must be forced to move all SVLANs, including protected and unprotected SVLANs, to the protect path irrespective of provisioned SVLAN attributes. A FAPS switchover happens in the following failure scenarios: • DWDM line failures caused by a fiber cut • Unidirectional failure in the DWDM network caused by a fiber cut • Fiber pull on the master card trunk port followed by a hard reset on the master card • Hard reset on the master card • Hard reset on the slave card • An OTN failure is detected (LOS, OTUK-LOF, OTUK-LOM, OTUK-LOM, OTUK-SF, or OTUK-BDI on the DWDM receiver port in the case of ITU-T G.709 mode) • Trunk ports are moved to OOS,DSBLD (Locked,disabled) state • Improper removal of XFPs A FAPS switchover does not happen in the following scenarios: • Slave card trunk port in OOS,DSBLD (Locked,disabled) state followed by a hard reset of the slave card • OTN alarms raised on the slave card trunk port followed by a hard reset of the slave card 10.12.11 IGMP Snooping As networks increase in size, multicast routing becomes critically important as a means to determine which segments require multicast traffic and which do not. IP multicasting allows IP traffic to be propagated from one source to a number of destinations, or from many sources to many destinations. Rather than sending one packet to each destination, one packet is sent to the multicast group identified by a single IP destination group address. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can learn upto a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. This includes groups on all the VLANs. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present.10-82 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card receives an IGMP leave group message from a host, it removes the host port from the multicast forwarding table after generating group specific queries to ensure that no other hosts interested in traffic for the particular group are present on that port. Even in the absence of any “leave” message, the cards have a timeout mechanism to update the group table with the latest information. After a card relays IGMP queries from the multicast router, it deletes entries periodically if it does not receive any IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients. In a multicast router, general queries are sent on a VLAN when Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) is enabled on the VLAN. The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card forwards queries to all ports belonging to the VLAN. All hosts interested in this multicast traffic send Join requests and are added to the forwarding table entry. The Join requests are forwarded only to router ports. By default, these router ports are learned dynamically. However, they can also be statically configured at the port level in which case the static configuration overrides dynamic learning. For information on interaction of IGMP with other protocols, see the 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list. 10.12.11.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions The following guidelines and restrictions apply to IGMP snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards: • IGMP snooping V2 is supported as specified in RFC 4541. • IGMP snooping V3 is not supported and the packets are flooded in the SVLAN. • Layer 2 multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic. • GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support IGMP snooping on 128 stacked VLANs and GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support up to 256 stacked VLANs that are enabled. • IGMP snooping can be configured per SVLAN or CVLAN. By default, IGMP snooping is disabled on all SVLANs and CVLANs. • IGMP snooping on CVLAN is enabled only when: – MVR is enabled. – UNI ports are in selective add and selective translate modes. For each UNI port, a CVLAN must be specified for which IGMP snooping is to be enabled. • IGMP snooping can be enabled only on one CVLAN per port. If you enable IGMP snooping on CVLAN, you cannot enable IGMP snooping on the associated SVLAN and vice versa. The number of VLANs that can be enabled for IGMP snooping cannot exceed 128. • When IGMP snooping is enabled on double-tagged packets, CVLAN has to be the same on all ports attached to the same SVLAN. • When IGMP snooping is working with the Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS) in a ring-based setup, it is advisable to configure all NNI ports as static router ports. This minimizes the multicast traffic hit when a FAPS switchover occurs. The following conditions are raised from IGMP snooping at the card: • MCAST-MAC-TABLE-FULL—This condition is raised when the multicast table is full and a new join request is received. This table is cleared when at least one entry gets cleared from the multicast table after the alarm is raised. • MCAST-MAC-ALIASING—This condition is raised when there are multiple L3 addresses that map to the same L2 address in a VLAN. This is a transient condition.10-83 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards For more information on severity level of these conditions and procedure to clear these alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide. 10.12.11.2 Fast-Leave Processing Note Fast-Leave processing is also known as Immediate-Leave. IGMP snooping Fast-Leave processing allows the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE to remove an interface that sends a leave message from the forwarding table without first sending group specific queries to the interface. When you enable IGMP Fast-Leave processing, the card immediately removes a port from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message on that port. 10.12.11.3 Static Router Port Configuration Multicast-capable ports are added to the forwarding table for every IP multicast entry. The card learns of such ports through the PIM method. 10.12.11.4 Report Suppression Report suppression is used to avoid a storm of responses to an IGMP query. When this feature is enabled, a single IGMP report is sent to each multicast group in response to a single query. Whenever an IGMP snooping report is received, report suppression happens if the report suppression timer is running. The Report suppression timer is started when the first report is received for a general query. Then this time is set to the response time specified in general query. 10.12.11.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters An entry in a counter contains multicasting statistical information for the IGMP snooping capable GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. It provides statistical information about IGMP messages that have been transmitted and received. IGMP statistics and counters can be viewed via CTC from the Performance > Ether Ports > Statistics tab. This information can be stored in the following counters: • cisTxGeneralQueries—Number of general queries transmitted through an interface. • cisTxGroupSpecificQueries—Total group specific queries transmitted through an interface. • cisTxReports—Total membership reports transmitted through an interface. • cisTxLeaves—Total Leave messages transmitted through an interface. • cisRxGeneralQueries—Total general queries received at an interface. • cisRxGroupSpecificQueries—Total Group Specific Queries received at an interface. • cisRxReports—Total Membership Reports received at an interface. • cisRxLeaves—Total Leave messages received at an interface. • cisRxValidPackets—Total valid IGMP packets received at an interface. • cisRxInvalidPackets—Total number of packets that are not valid IGMP messages received at an interface.10-84 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.12 Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast traffic across an Ethernet-ring-based service provider network (for example, the broadcast of multiple television channels over a service-provider network). MVR allows a subscriber on a port to subscribe and unsubscribe to a multicast stream on the network-wide multicast VLAN. It allows the single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while subscribers remain in separate VLANs. MVR provides the ability to continuously send multicast streams in the multicast VLAN, but to isolate the streams from the subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons. MVR assumes that subscriber ports subscribe and unsubscribe (“Join” and “Leave”) these multicast streams by sending out IGMP Join and Leave messages. These messages can originate from an IGMP version-2-compatible host with an Ethernet connection. MVR operates on the underlying mechanism of IGMP snooping. MVR works only when IGMP snooping is enabled. The card identifies the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated MAC addresses in the card forwarding table, intercepts the IGMP messages, and modifies the forwarding table to include or remove the subscriber as a receiver of the multicast stream, even though the receivers is in a different VLAN than the source. This forwarding behavior selectively allows traffic to cross between different VLANs. Note When MVR is configured, the port facing the router must be configured as NNI in order to allow the router to generate or send multicast stream to the host with the SVLAN. If router port is configured as UNI, the MVR will not work properly. 10.12.13 MAC Address Learning The GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses. MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards. The cards learn the MAC address of packets they receive on each port and add the MAC address and its associated port number to the MAC address learning table. As stations are added or removed from the network, the GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards update the MAC address learning table, adding new dynamic addresses and aging out those that are currently not in use. MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN. When the configuration is changed from enable to disable, all the related MAC addresses are cleared. The following conditions apply: • If MAC address learning is enabled on per port basis, the MAC address learning is not enabled on all VLANs, but only on VLANs that have MAC address learning enabled. • If per port MAC address learning is disabled then the MAC address learning is disabled on all VLANs, even if it is enabled on some of the VLAN supported by the port. • If the per port MAC address learning is configured on GE-XP and 10 GE-XP cards, before upgrading to GE-XPE or 10 GE-XPE cards, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Failing to do so disables MAC address learning. 10.12.14 MAC Address Retrieval MAC addresses learned can be retrieved or cleared on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC addresses can be retrieved using the CTC or TL1 interface.10-85 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses and GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support 16K MAC addresses. To avoid delay in processing requests, the learned MAC addresses are retrieved using an SVLAN range. The valid SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093. The MAC addresses of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can also be retrieved. The card MAC addresses are static and are used for troubleshooting activities. One MAC address is assigned to each client, trunk, and CPU ports of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. These internal MAC addresses can be used to determine if the packets received on the far-end node are generated by GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. For MAC address retrieval, the following conditions apply: • The cards must be provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. • MAC address learning must be enabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE cards. • MAC address learning must be enabled per port on GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards. For information on how to retrieve or clear MAC addresses learned, refer to the “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.12.15 Link Integrity The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card support end-to-end Ethernet link integrity. This capability is integral to providing an Ethernet private line service and correct operation of Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols on the attached Ethernet devices. The link integrity feature propagates a trunk fault on all the affected SVLAN circuits in order to squelch the far end client interface. Ethernet-Advanced IP Services (E-AIS) packets are generated on a per-port/SVLAN basis. An E-AIS format is compliant with ITU Y.1731. Note E-AIS packets are marked with a CoS value of 7 (also called .1p bits). Ensure that the network is not overloaded and there is sufficient bandwidth for this queue in order to avoid packet drops. When link integrity is enabled on a per-port SVLAN basis, E-AIS packets are generated when the following alarms are raised; • LOS-P • OTUKLOF/LOM • SIGLOSS • SYNCHLOSS • OOS • PPM not present When link integrity is enabled, GE_XP and 10 GE_XP card supports up to128 SVLANs and GE_XPE, 10 GE_XPE can support up to 256 SVLANs. 10.12.16 Ingress CoS Ingress CoS functionality enables differentiated services across the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. A wide range of networking requirements can be provisioned by specifying the class of service applicable to each transmitted traffic. 10-86 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards When a CVLAN is configured as ingress CoS, the per-port settings are not considered. A maximum of 128 CVLAN and CoS relationships can be configured. 10.12.17 CVLAN Rate Limiting CVLAN rate limiting is supported on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. CVLAN rate limiting is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. The following limitations and restrictions apply to CVLAN rate limiting: • CVLAN rate limiting is not supported for the following service types: – Selective translate mode – Transparent mode – Selective double add mode – Selective translate add mode – Untagged packets – CVLAN range – Services associated with the channel group • CVLAN rate limiting and SVLAN rate limiting cannot be applied to the same service instance. • Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) is not supported for CVLAN rate limiting. • A VLAN profile with Link Integrity option enabled cannot be used to perform CVLAN rate limiting. • On GE_XP and 10 GE_XP cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 128 services. However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 192 minus the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of 64 CVLAN rate limiting service instances). • On GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 256 services. However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 384 minus the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of 128 CVLAN rate limiting service instances). 10.12.18 DSCP to CoS Mapping DSCP to CoS mapping can be configured for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. PCLI is not supported for DSCP to CoS mapping. DSCP to CoS mapping is supported for the following service types: – Selectice add mode – Selective translate mode – Transparent mode – Selective double add mode – Selective translate add mode – Untagged packets – CVLAN range10-87 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards – Services associated with the channel group 10.12.19 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of the IEEE802.3ad standard that allows you to bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a network device such as a switch to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer device. LACP allows you to form a single Layer 2 link automatically from two or more Ethernet links. This protocol ensures that both ends of the Ethernet link are functional and agree to be members of the aggregation group before the link is added to the group. LACP must be enabled at both ends of the link to be operational. For more information on LACP, refer to the IEEE802.3ad standard. For information on interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list. 10.12.19.1 Advantages of LACP LACP provides the following advantages: • High-speed network that transfers more data than any single port or device. • High reliability and redundancy. If a port fails, traffic continues on the remaining ports. • Hashing algorithm that allows to apply load balancing policies on the bundled ports. 10.12.19.2 Functions of LACP LACP performs the following functions in the system: • Maintains configuration information to control aggregation. • Exchanges configuration information with other peer devices. • Attaches or detaches ports from the link aggregation group based on the exchanged configuration information. • Enables data flow when both sides of the aggregation group are synchronized. 10.12.19.3 Modes of LACP LACP can be configured in the following modes: • On — Default. In this mode, the ports do not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports. • Active — In this mode, the ports send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports. • Passive — In this mode, the ports do not send LACP packets until the partner sends LACP packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports send LACP packets. 10.12.19.4 Parameters of LACP LACP uses the following parameters to control aggregation: • System Identifier—A unique identification assigned to each system. It is the concatenation of the system priority and a globally administered individual MAC address.10-88 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Port Identification—A unique identifier for each physical port in the system. It is the concatenation of the port priority and the port number. • Port Capability Identification—An integer, called a key, that identifies the capability of one port to aggregate with another port. There are two types of keys: – Administrative key—The network administrator configures this key. – Operational key—The LACP assigns this key to a port, based on its aggregation capability. • Aggregation Identifier—A unique integer that is assigned to each aggregator and is used for identification within the system. 10.12.19.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes LACP supports the following unicast hashing schemes: • Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port • Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port • Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port • Ucast Src IP TCP UDP • Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP • Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP Note Unicast hashing schemes apply to unicast traffic streams only when the destination MAC address is already learned by the card. Hence, MAC learning must be enabled to support load balancing as per the configured hashing scheme. If the destination MAC address is not learned, the hashing scheme is Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP. 10.12.19.6 Supported LACP Features The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following LACP features as per the IEEE802.3ad standard: • DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC • DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC • DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC • DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC See the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide for information on these procedures. 10.12.19.7 LACP Limitations and Restrictions The LACP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • Hot standby link state is not supported on the channel group. • Marker protocol generator is not supported. • ALS cannot be configured on the channel group. • Loopback configuration cannot be applied on the channel group.10-89 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.20 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is part of the IEEE 802.1ag standard. The Ethernet CFM is an end-to-end per service instance that supports the Ethernet layer Operations, Administration, and Management (OAM) protocol. It includes proactive connectivity monitoring, link trace on a per service basis, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks (MANs) and WANs. CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM is enabled on all the ports by default. For more information on CFM, refer to the IEEE 802.1ag standard. For information on interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list. The following sections contain conceptual information about Ethernet CFM. 10.12.20.1 Maintenance Domain A maintenance domain is an administrative domain that manages and administers a network. You can assign a unique maintenance level (from 0 to 7) to define the hierarchical relationship between domains. The larger the domain, the higher the maintenance level for that domain. For example, a service provider domain would be larger than an operator domain and might have a maintenance level of 6, while the operator domain maintenance level would be 3 or 4. Maintenance domains cannot intersect or overlap because that would require more than one entity to manage it, which is not allowed. Domains can touch or nest if the outer domain has a higher maintenance level than the nested domain. Maintenance levels of nesting domains must be communicated among the administrating organizations. For example, one approach would be to have the service provider assign maintenance levels to operators. The CFM protocol supports up to eight maintenance domains on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 10.12.20.2 Maintenance Association A maintenance association identifies a service within the maintenance domain. You can have any number of maintenance associations within each maintenance domain. The CFM protocol supports up to 1500 maintenance associations on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. Note Each maintenance association is mapped to a maintenance domain. This mapping is done to configure a Maintenance End Point (MEP). The CFM protocol supports up to 1000 mappings on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 10.12.20.3 Maintenance End Points Maintenance End Points (MEPs) reside at the edge of the maintenance domain and are active elements of the Ethernet CFM. MEPs transmit Continuity Check messages at periodic intervals and receive similar messages from other MEPs within a domain. MEPs also transmit Loopback and Traceroute messages at the request of the administrator. MEPs confine CFM messages within the boundary of a maintenance domain through the maintenance level. There are two types of MEPs: • Up (Inwards, towards the bridge) • Down (Outwards, towards the wire).10-90 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. The MEP continuity check database (CCDB) stores information that is received from other MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MEP CCDB entries. 10.12.20.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) are internal to the maintenance domain and are passive elements of the Ethernet CFM. They store information received from MEPs and respond to Linktrace and Loopback CFM messages. MIPs forward CFM frames received from MEPs and other MIPs, drop all CFM frames at a lower level, and forward all CFM frames at a higher level. You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. The MIP CCDB maintains the information received for all MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MIP CCDB entries. 10.12.20.5 CFM Messages The Ethernet CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards supports the following messages: • Continuity Check—These messages are exchanged periodically among MEPs. They allow MEPs to discover other MEPs within a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs. These messages are confined to a domain. • Loopback—These messages are unicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an administrator, to verify connectivity to a specific maintenance point. A reply to a loopback message indicates whether a destination is reachable. • Traceroute—These messages are multicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an administrator, to track the path to a destination MEP. 10.12.20.6 Supported CFM Features The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following Ethernet CFM features as per the IEEE 802.1ag standard: • DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC • DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC • DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC • DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC • DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC • DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC • DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC • DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC • DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC See the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide for information on these procedures.10-91 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.20.7 CFM Limitations and Restrictions The CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • CFM is not supported on channel groups. • CFM is not enabled on ptotected ports running REP, FAPS, and 1+1. • Y.1731 enhancements including AIS, LCK, and performance monitoring messages along with CFM are not supported. • IEEE CFM MIB is not supported. • L1 and CFM are mutually exclusive on a SVLAN because LI and CFM use the same MAC address. • MAC security and CFM are mutually exclusive on the card due to hardware resource constraints. 10.12.21 Ethernet OAM The Ethernet OAM protocol is part of the IEEE 802.3ah standard and is used for installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting Ethernet MANs and Ethernet WANs. This protocol relies on an optional sublayer in the data link layer of the OSI model. The Ethernet OAM protocol was developed for Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) applications. The terms Ethernet OAM and EFM are interchangeably used and both mean the same. Normal link operation does not require Ethernet OAM. You can implement Ethernet OAM on any full-duplex point-to-point or emulated point-to-point Ethernet link for a network or part of a network (specified interfaces). OAM frames, called OAM Protocol Data Units (OAM PDUs), use the slow protocol destination MAC address 0180.c200.0002. OAM PDUs are intercepted by the MAC sublayer and cannot propagate beyond a single hop within an Ethernet network. Ethernet OAM is disabled on all interfaces by default. When Ethernet OAM is enabled on an interface, link monitoring is automatically turned on. For more information on Ethernet OAM protocol, refer to IEEE 802.3ah standard. For information on interaction of Ethernet OAM with other protocols, see the 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list. 10.12.21.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM consists of two major components, the OAM Client and the OAM Sublayer. 10.12.21.1.1 OAM Client The OAM client establishes and manages the Ethernet OAM on a link. The OAM client also enables and configures the OAM sublayer. During the OAM discovery phase, the OAM client monitors the OAM PDUs received from the remote peer and enables OAM functionality. After the discovery phase, the OAM client manages the rules of response to OAM PDUs and the OAM remote loopback mode. 10.12.21.1.2 OAM Sublayer The OAM sublayer presents two standard IEEE 802.3 MAC service interfaces: • One interface facing toward the superior sublayers, which include the MAC client (or link aggregation). • Other interface facing toward the subordinate MAC control sublayer.10-92 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The OAM sublayer provides a dedicated interface for passing OAM control information and OAM PDUs to and from the client. 10.12.21.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM provides the following benefits: • Competitive advantage for service providers • Standardized mechanism to monitor the health of a link and perform diagnostics 10.12.21.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM The Ethernet OAM protocol has the following OAM features: • Discovery—Identifies devices in the network and their OAM capabilities. The Discovery feature uses periodic OAM PDUs to advertise the OAM mode, configuration, and capabilities. An optional phase allows the local station to accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity. • Link Monitoring—Detects and indicates link faults under a variety of conditions. It uses the event notification OAM PDU to notify the remote OAM device when it detects problems on the link. • Remote Failure Indication—Allows an OAM entity to convey the failure conditions to its peer through specific flags in the OAM PDU. • Remote Loopback—Ensures link quality with a remote peer during installation or troubleshooting. 10.12.21.4 Ethernet OAM Supported Features The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following Ethernet OAM features as per the IEEE 802.3ah standard: • DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC • DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC • DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC • DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC See the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide for information on these procedures. 10.12.21.5 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions The Ethernet OAM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • CFM, REP, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, IGMP on SVLAN and L2 1+1 protection are not supported with EFM. • IEEE EFM MIB is not supported. • EFM cannot be enabled or disabled at the card level. • Unidirectional functionality is not supported. • Errored Symbol Period, Rx CRC errors, Tx CRC errors are not supported. • OAM PDUs are limited to 1 frame per second. • Dying Gasp and critical events are not supported.10-93 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Note Dying Gasp RFI is not generated on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. However, if the peer device sends a dying gasp RFI, the card detects it and raises an alarm. 10.12.22 Resilient Ethernet Protocol The Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) is a protocol used to control network loops, handle link failures, and improve convergence time. REP performs the following tasks: • Controls a group of ports connected in a segment. • Ensures that the segment does not create any bridging loops. • Responds to link failures within the segment. • Supports VLAN load balancing. For information on interaction of REP with other protocols, see the 10.12.2 Protocol Compatibility list. 10.12.22.1 REP Segments A REP segment is a chain of ports connected to each other and configured with a segment ID. Each segment consists of regular segment ports and two edge ports. A GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card can have up to 2 ports that belong to the same segment, and each segment port can have only one external neighbor port. A segment protects only against a single link failure. Any more failures within the segment result in loss of connectivity. 10.12.22.2 Characteristics of REP Segments REP segments have the following characteristics: • If all the ports in the segment are operational, one port blocks traffic for each VLAN. If VLAN load balancing is configured, two ports in the segment control the blocked state of VLANs. • If any port in the segment is not operational, all the other operational ports forward traffic on all VLANs to ensure connectivity. • In case of a link failure, the alternate ports are immediately unblocked. When the failed link comes up, a logically blocked port per VLAN is selected with minimal disruption to the network. 10.12.22.3 REP Port States Ports in REP segments take one of three roles or states: Failed, Open, or Alternate. • A port configured as a regular segment port starts as a failed port. • When the neighbor adjacencies are determined, the port transitions to the alternate port state, blocking all the VLANs on the interface. Blocked port negotiations occur and when the segment settles, one blocked port remains in the alternate role and all the other ports become open ports. • When a failure occurs in a link, all the ports move to the failed state. When the alternate port receives the failure notification, it changes to the open state, forwarding all VLANs.10-94 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 10.12.22.4 Link Adjacency Each segment port creates an adjacency with its immediate neighbor. Link failures are detected and acted upon locally. If a port detects a problem with its neighbor, the port declares itself non-operational and REP converges to a new topology. REP Link Status Layer (LSL) detects its neighbor port and establishes connectivity within the segment. All VLANs are blocked on an interface until the neighbor port is identified. After the neighbor port is identified, REP determines the neighbor port that must be the alternate port and the ports that must forward traffic. Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. When a segment port starts, the LSL layer sends packets that include the segment ID and the port ID. A segment port does not become operational if the following conditions are satisfied: • No neighbor port has the same segment ID or more than one neighbor port has the same segment ID. • The neighbor port does not acknowledge the local port as a peer. 10.12.22.5 Fast Reconvergence REP runs on a physical link and not on per VLAN. Only one hello message is required for all VLANs that reduces the load on the protocol. REP Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) is a transmission mechanism that floods packets in hardware on an admin VLAN. HFL avoids the delay that is caused by relaying messages in software. HFLis used for fast reconvergence in the order of 50 to 200 milliseconds. 10.12.22.6 VLAN Load Balancing You must configure two edge ports in the segment for VLAN load balancing. One edge port in the REP segment acts as the primary edge port; the other edge port as the secondary edge port. The primary edge port always participates in VLAN load balancing in the segment. VLAN load balancing is achieved by blocking certain VLANs at a configured alternate port and all the other VLANs at the primary edge port. 10.12.22.7 REP Configuration Sequence You must perform the following tasks in sequence to configure REP: • Configure the REP administrative VLAN or use the default VLAN 1. The range of REP admin VLAN is 1 to 4093. VLAN 4094 is not allowed. • Add ports to the segment in interface configuration mode. • Enable REP on ports and assign a segment ID to it. REP is disabled on all ports by default. The range of segment ID is 1 to 1024. • Configure two edge ports in the segment; one port as the primary edge port and the other as the secondary edge port. • If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority. The Primary option is enabled only on edge ports. • Configure the primary edge port to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs) and VLAN load balancing to another port or to other segments. STCNs and VLAN load balancing configurations are enabled only for edge ports.10-95 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Note A port can belong to only one segment. Only two ports can belong to the same segment. Both the ports must be either regular ports or edge ports. However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can be an edge port and another port can be a regular port. 10.12.22.8 REP Supported Interfaces REP supports the following interfaces: • REP is supported on client (UNI) and trunk (NNI) ports. • Enabling REP on client ports allows protection at the access or aggregation layer when the cards are connected to the L2 network. • Enabling REP on trunk ports allows protection at the edge layer when the cards are connected in a ring. 10.12.22.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions The REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • Fast re-convergence and VLAN load balancing are not supported on UNI ports in transparent mode. • Native VLAN is not supported. • CFM, EFM, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, and L2 1+1 protection are not supported on ports that are configured as part of REP segment and vice versa. • NNI ports cannot be configured as the primary edge port or blocking port at the access or aggregation layer. • Only three REP segments can be configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. • Consider the following configuration: More than one REP closed segment is configured on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and the same HFL admin VLAN is enabled on the switches. If two different segments are configured on more than one common switch, the following consequences happen. – Layer 1 loop – Flooding of HFL packets across segments if one REP segment fails – Segment goes down due to LSL time out even if the segment does not have faults Hence, it is recommended not to configure two different segments on more than one common switch. • Consider the following configuration: – VLAN Load Balancing is configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards by specifying the VLB preempt delay. – Primary and secondary edge ports are configured on the same switch. – HFL or LSL is activated. This configuration leads to high convergence time during manual premption, VLB activation, and deactivation (400 to 700 milliseconds).10-96 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 10.13 ADM-10G Card The ADM-10G card operates on ONS 15454 SONET, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6, and DWDM networks to carry optical signals and Gigabit Ethernet signals over DWDM wavelengths for transport. The card aggregates lower bit-rate client SONET or SDH signals (OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet) onto a C-band tunable DWDM trunk operating at a higher OC-192/STM-64 rate. In a DWDM network, the ADM-10G card transports traffic over DWDM by mapping Gigabit Ethernet and SONET or SDH circuits onto the same wavelength with multiple protection options. You can install and provision the ADM-10G card in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in standard and high-density ONS 15454 ANSI shelves (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD), the ETSI ONS 15454 standard shelf assembly, or the ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where the ADM-10G card is installed. The card is compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.783 for SDH signals. It supports concatenated and nonconcatenated AU-4 mapped STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 signals as specified in ITU-T G.707. The card also complies with Section 5.6 of Telcordia GR-253-CORE and supports synchronous transport signal (STS) mapped OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 signals as specified in the standard. The client SFP and trunk XFP are compliant with interface requirements in Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.957 and/or ITU-T G.959.1, and IEEE 802.3. 10.13.1 Key Features The ADM-10G card has the following high-level features: • Operates with the TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, or TSC. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and OTU2_XP cards. • Has built-in OC-192/STM-64 add/drop multiplexing function including client, trunk, and STS cross-connect. • Supports both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. • Supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between a client port and a trunk port. Path protection/SNCP is supported only between two client ports or two trunk ports. • Supports 1+1 protection on client ports for double-card configuration only. • Supports SONET, SDH, and Gigabit Ethernet protocols on client SFPs. • Supports XFP DWDM trunk interface single wavelengths. • Returns zero bit errors when a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card switches from active to standby or when manual or forced protection switches occur. • Has 16 SFP-based client interfaces (gray, colored, coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM), and DWDM optics available).10-97 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card • Supports STM1, STM4, STM16, and Gigabit Ethernet client signals (8 Gigabit Ethernet maximum). • Has one XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for double-card configuration. • Has two XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for single-card configuration. • Has two SR XFP interlink interfaces supporting redundancy connection with protection board and pass-through traffic for double-card configuration. • Supports frame-mapped generic framing procedure (GFP-F) and LEX mapping for Ethernet over SONET or SDH. • Can be installed or pulled from operation, in any slot, without impacting other service cards in the shelf. • Supports client to client hairpinning, that is, creation of circuits between two client ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. See the “10.13.11 Circuit Provisioning” section on page 10-104 for more detailed information. 10.13.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC The ADM-10G card supports Cisco EoS LEX (LEX) and generic framing procedure framing (GFP-F) encapsulation on 8 POS ports corresponding to 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. You can provision framing on the ADM-10G card as either the default GFP-F or LEX framing. With GFP-F framing, you can configure a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or none (no CRC) (the default). LEX framing supports 16-bit or 32-bit CRC configuration. The framing type cannot be changed when there is a circuit on the port. On the CTC, navigate to card view and click the Provisioning > Line> Ethernet Tab. To see the various parameters that can be configured on the ethernet ports, see “CTC Display of ethernet Port Provisioning Status”. Parameters such as, admin state, service state, framing type, CRC, MTU and soak time for a port can be configured. It is possible to create an end-to-end circuit between equipment supporting different kinds of encapsulation (for example, LEX on one side and GFP-F on other side). But, under such circumstances, traffic does not pass through, and an alarm is raised if there is a mismatch. 10.13.2.1 POS Overview Ethernet data packets need to be framed and encapsulated into a SONET/SDH frame for transport across the SONET/SDH network. This framing and encapsulation process is known as packet over SONET/SDH (POS). The Ethernet frame comes into the ADM-10G card on a standard Gigabit Ethernet port and is processed through the card’s framing mechanism and encapsulated into a POS frame. When the POS frame exits, the ADM-10G card is in a POS circuit, and this circuit is treated as any other SONET circuit (STS) or SDH circuit (VC) in the ONS node. It is cross-connected and rides the SONET/SDH signal out the port of an optical card and across the SONET/SDH network. The destination of the POS circuit is a card or a device that supports the POS interface. Data packets in the destination card frames are removed and processed into ethernet frames. The Ethernet frames are then sent to a standard Ethernet port of the card and transmitted onto an Ethernet network.10-98 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 10.13.2.2 POS Framing Modes A POS framing mode is the type of framing mechanism employed by the ADM-10G card to frame and encapsulate data packets into a POS signal. These data packets were originally encapsulated in Ethernet frames that entered the standard Gigabit Ethernet interface of the ADM-10G card. 10.13.2.2.1 GFP-F Framing The GFP-F framing represent standard mapped Ethernet over GFP-F according to ITU-T G.7041. GFP-F defines a standard-based mapping of different types of services onto SONET/SDH. GFP-F maps one variable length data packet onto one GFP packet. GFP-F comprises of common functions and payload specific functions. Common functions are those shared by all payloads. Payload-specific functions are different depending on the payload type. GFP-F is detailed in the ITU recommendation G.7041. 10.13.2.2.2 LEX Framing LEX encapsulation is a HDLC frame based Cisco Proprietary protocol, where the field is set to values specified in Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 1841. HDLC is one of the most popular Layer 2 protocols. The HDLC frame uses the zero insertion/deletion process (commonly known as bit stuffing) to ensure that the bit pattern of the delimiter flag does not occur in the fields between flags. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore relies on the physical layer to provide a method of clocking and synchronizing the transmission and reception of frames. The HDLC framing mechanism is detailed in the IETF’s RFC 1662, “PPP in HDLC-like Framing.” 10.13.2.3 GFP Interoperability The ADM-10G card defaults to GFP-F encapsulation that is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. This mode allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). GFP encapsulation also allows the ADM-10G card to interoperate with other vendors Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that adhere to the ITU-T G.7041 standard. 10.13.2.4 LEX Interoperability The LEX encapsulation is compliant with RFC 1841. This mode allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example, G1000-4/G1K-4 cards, CE-1000-4, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). 10.13.3 Faceplate Figure 10-31 shows the ADM-10G card faceplate.10-99 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Figure 10-31 ADM-10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 10.13.4 Port Configuration Rules ADM-10G card client and trunk port capacities are shown in Figure 10-32. FAIL ACT SF ADM-10G ILK1 TRK2/ILK2 TRK1 12 11 10 9 8 7 654 3 2 1 TX RX TX RX TX RX 16 15 14 13 TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 10xGE MAC 10G GFP-over SONET/SDH framer 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 2 G.709-FEC framer 1 G.709-FEC framer 2 XFP DWDM TRUNK ILK XFP ILK XFP VCAT RLDR switch CPU-Core SCL FPGA alarm cpld alarm cpld Main board Daughter card 4 x OC48/STM16 4 x OC3/OC12 or 4 x STM1/STM4 12 x OC3/OC12 or 12 x STM1/STM4 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 3 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 4 13 SFP 14 15 16 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SFP SFP SFP switch STS-1 cross-connect HAZARD LEVEL 1 250482 19 17 1810-100 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Figure 10-32 ADM-10G Card Port Capacities Port 17 acts as trunk2 or ILK1 interface based on single-card or double-card configuration. 10.13.5 Client Interfaces The ADM-10G card uses LC optical port connectors and, as shown in Figure 10-32, supports up to 16 SFPs that can be utilized for OC-N/STM-N traffic. Eight of the SFPs can be used for Gigabit Ethernet. The interfaces can support any mix of OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet of any reach, such as SX, LX, ZX, SR, IR, or LR. The interfaces support a capacity of: • 4 x OC-48/STM-16 • 16 x OC-12/STM-4 • 16 x OC-3/STM-1 • 8 x GE The supported client SFPs and XFPs are: • Gray SFPs – 1000Base-SX SFP 850 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-SX=) – 1000Base-LX SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-LX=) – OC48/STM16 IR1, OC12/STM4 SR1, OC3/STM1 SR1, GE-LX multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-Z1=) – OC3/STM1 IR1, OC12/STM4 IR1 multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-622-I1=) – OC48/STM16 SR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-S1=) – OC48/STM16 IR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-I1=) – OC48/STM16, 1550 LR2, SM LC (ONS-SE-2G-L2=) GE G r ay SFP 1 13 14 15 16 ILK1/ TRK2(17) ILK2/ TRK2(18) TRK1 (19) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GE G r ay SFP GE G r ay SFP GE OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 G r ay SFP G r ay SFP G r ay XFP *Gray/ DWDM XFP D WDM XFP O TU2/OC192/STM64 *OTU2/OC192/STM64 G r ay SFP G r ay SFP G r ay SFP GE G r ay SFP GE G r ay SFP GE G r ay SFP GE G r ay SFP or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or G r ay SFP G r ay SFP G r ay SFP OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 G r ay SFP OC192/STM64 243481 *DWDM XFP and OTU2 is supported only when Port 18 is configured as a trunk interface. 10-101 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card • Colored DWDM SFPs – 1000Base-ZX SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-GE-ZX=) – OC3/STM1 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-155-L2=) – OC48/STM16 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-2G-L2=) – OC48/STM16 SFP (ONS-SC-2G-xx.x) Note xx.x = 28.7 to 60.6. ONS-SC-2G-28.7, ONS-SC-2G-33.4, ONS-SC-2G-41.3, ONS-SC-2G-49.3, and ONS-SC-2G-57.3 are supported from Release 8.5 and later. • CWDM SFPs – OC48/STM16/GE CWDM SFP (ONS-SC-Z3-xxxx) • XFPs – OC-192/STM-64/10GE XFP 1550 nm (ONS-XC-10G-I2) 10.13.6 Interlink Interfaces Two 2R interlink interfaces, called ILK1 (Port 17) and ILK2 (Port 18), are provided for creation of ADM-10G peer groups in double-card configurations. In a single-card configuration, Port 17 (OC-192/STM-64) and Port 18 (OC-192/STM-64 or OTU2 payload) must be configured as trunk interfaces. In a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group), Ports 17 and 18 must be configured as ILK1 and ILK2 interfaces, respectively. Physically cabling these ports between two ADM-10G cards, located on the same shelf, allows you to configure them as an ADM-10G peer group.The ILK ports carry 10 Gb of traffic each. The interlink interfaces support STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) and 10GE BASE SR (ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM=) XFPs. 10.13.7 DWDM Trunk Interface The ADM-10G card supports OC-192/STM-64 signal transport and ITU-T G.709 digital wrapping according to the ITU-T G.709 standard.The ADM-10G card supports three trunk XFPs: • Two DWDM trunks, and one trunk interface in a single-card configuration. • One DWDM trunk XFP in a double-card configuration. The supported DWDM trunk XFPs are: • 10G DWDM (ONS-XC-10G-xx.x=) (colored XFP) • STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) (gray XFP) 10.13.8 Configuration Management When using OC-48/STM-16 traffic, some contiguous port configurations, listed in Table 10-42, are unavailable due to hardware limitations. This limitation does not impact the Gigabit Ethernet payload.10-102 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Note The ADM-10G card cannot be used in the same shelf with SONET or SDH cross-connect cards. Note The total traffic rate for each trunk cannot exceed OC-192/STM-64 on each ADM-10G card, or for each ADM-10G peer group. Note Gigabit Ethernet is supported on Ports 1 through 8. Ports 9 through Port 12 support only OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4. Additionally, the following guidelines apply to the ADM-10G card: • Trunk Port 17 supports OC-192/STM-64. • Trunk Ports 18 and 19 support OC-192/STM-64 and OTU2. • The interlink port supports OC-192/STM-64. • Up to six ADM-10G cards can be installed in one shelf. • Up to 24 ADM-10G cards can be installed per network element (NE) regardless of whether the card is installed in one shelf or in multiple shelves. • The card can be used in all 15454-SA-ANSI and 15454-SA-HD shelves as well as ETSI ONS 15454 standard and high-density shelves. • A lamp test function can be activated from CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. • The card can operate as a working protected or working nonprotected card. • In a redundant configuration, an active card hardware or software failure triggers a switch to the standby card. This switch is detected within 10 ms and is completed within 50 ms. • ADM-10G cards support jumbo frames with MTU sizes of 64 to 9,216 bytes; the maximum is 9,216. • After receiving a link or path failure, the ADM-10G card can shut down only the downstream Gigabit Ethernet port. Note In ADM-10G cards, the Gigabit Ethernet port does not support flow control. Table 10-42 OC-48/STM-16 Configuration Limitations OC-48/STM-16 Port Number Ports Restricted from Optical Traffic OC-48/STM-16 on Port 13 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 1 through Port 3 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 14 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 4 through Port 6 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 15 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 7 through Port 9 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 16 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 10 through Port 1210-103 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 10.13.9 Security The ADM-10G card that an SFP or XFP is plugged into implements the Cisco Standard Security Code Check Algorithm that keys on the vendor ID and serial number. If a pluggable port module (PPM) is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco PPM, a minor NON-CISCO-PPM alarm is raised. If a PPM with a nonqualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card—that is, the PPM passes the security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the ADM-10G card— a minor UNQUAL-PPM alarm is raised. 10.13.10 Protection The ADM-10G card supports 1+1 and SONET path protection and SDH SNCP protection architectures in compliance with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, Telcordia GR-1400-CORE, and ITU-T G.841 specifications. 10.13.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP circuits at the STS/VC4 (high order) level and can be configured to switch based on signal degrade calculations. The card supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. Note The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk port 17. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk ports 18 or 19. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between port 17 and trunk ports 18 and 19. The card allows open-ended path protection/SNCP configurations incorporating other vendor equipment. In an open-ended path protection/SNCP, you can specify one source point and two possible endpoints (or two possible source points and one endpoint) and the legs can include other vendor equipment. The source and endpoints are part of the network discovered by CTC. For detailed information about path protection configurations and SNCPs, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual. 10.13.10.2 Port Protection Schemes The ADM-10G card supports unidirectional and bidirectional 1+1 APS protection schemes on client ports for double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group) only. 1+1 APS protection scheme is not supported in single-card configuration. For 1+1 optical client port protection, you can configure the system to use any pair of like facility interfaces that are on different cards of the ADM-10G peer group. For information on optical port protection, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual. 10.13.10.3 Flexible Protection Mechanism The ADM-10G card can be provisioned as unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR2 ) or subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) on both Trunk and client side. UPSR or SNCP is supported both in single and double card operation. The ADM-10G card supports up to 288 unprotected high-order (HO) cross connect circuits and up to 192 protected (UPSR or SNCP) per card, resulting in 1728/1152 HO cross 10-104 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card connect circuits per shelf. The HO cross connect circuits provide grooming capabilities for STS level connections, such as STS-1, STS-3c, STS-9c, STS-12c, and STS-24c (CCAT or VCAT) with STS1 level granularity. When installed in a typical central-office bay assembly, a shelf can support up to 5178/3456 HO bidirectional cross connect circuits. 10.13.11 Circuit Provisioning The ADM-10G card supports STS circuit provisioning both in single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. The card allows you to create STS circuits between: • Client and trunk ports • Two trunk ports • Two client ports (client-to-client hairpinning) Note Circuits between two trunk ports are called pass-through circuits. For an ADM-10G card in single-card configuration, if you are creating STS circuits between two client ports, the following limitation must be considered: • Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported. For an ADM-10G card that is part of an ADM-10G peer group, if you are creating STS circuits between two client ports or between client and trunk ports, the following limitations must be considered: • Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported. • Optical channel (OC) to OC, OC to Gigabit Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet to OC connections between two peer group cards are supported. Peer group connections use interlink port bandwidth, hence, depending on the availability/fragmentation of the interlink port bandwidth, it may not be possible to create an STS circuit from the Gigabit Ethernet/OC client port to the peer card trunk port. This is because, contiguous STSs (that is, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and so on) must be available on the interlink port for circuit creation. Note There are no limitations to create an STS circuit between two trunk ports. 10.13.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics The ADM-10G card supports high-order (HO) contiguous concatenation (CCAT) and HO virtual concatenation (VCAT) circuits on 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. To enable end-to-end connectivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, you can use Open-Ended VCAT circuit creation. For more details, refer to the “Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. The ADM-10G card supports flexible non-LCAS VCAT groups (VCGs). With flexible VCGs, the ADM-10G can perform the following operations: 2. The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. 10-105 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card • Add or remove members from groups • Put members into or out of service, which also adds/removes them from the group • Add or remove cross-connect circuits from VCGs Any operation on the VCG member is service effecting (for instance, adding or removing members from the VCG). Adding or removing cross-connect circuits is not service-affecting, if the associated members are not in the group The ADM-10G card allows independent routing and protection preferences for each member of a VCAT circuit. You can also control the amount of VCAT circuit capacity that is fully protected, unprotected, or uses Protection Channel Access (PCA) (when PCA is available). Alarms are supported on a per-member as well as per virtual concatenation group (VCG) basis. The ADM-10G card supports both automatic and manual routing for VCAT circuit, that is, all members are manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different members. Two types of automatic and manual routing are available for VCAT members: common fiber routing and split routing. The ADM-10G card supports VCAT common fiber routing and VCAT split fiber (diverse) routing. With VCAT split fiber routing, each member can be routed independently through the SONET or SDH or DWDM network instead of having to follow the same path as required by CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing. This allows a more efficient use of network bandwidth, but the different path lengths and different delays encountered may cause slightly different arrival times for the individual members of the VCG. The VCAT differential delay is this relative arrival time measurement between members of a VCG. The maximum tolerable VCAT split fiber routing differential delay for the ADM-10G card is approximately 55 milliseconds. A loss of alignment alarm is generated if the maximum differential delay supported is exceeded. The differential delay compensation function is automatically enabled when you choose split fiber routing during the CTC circuit configuration process. CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing do not enable or need differential delay support. Caution Protection switches with switching time of less than 60 milliseconds are not guaranteed with the differential delay compensation function enabled. The compensation time is added to the switching time. Note For TL1, EXPBUFFERS parameter must be set to ON in the ENT-VCG command to enable support for split fiber routing. Available Circuit Sizes Table 10-43 and Table 10-44 show the circuit sizes available for the ADM-10G card. Table 10-43 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 CCAT VCAT High Order STS-1 STS-1-1nV (n= 1 to 21) STS-3c STS-3c-mv (m= 1 to 7) STS-6c10-106 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 10.13.13 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring Intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows a node to monitor the constituent channel of an incoming transmission signal. You can enable IPPM for STS/VC-4s payload on OCn and Trunk ports of ADM-10G card. The IPPM is complaint with GR253/G.826. Software Release 9.2 and higher enables the ADM-10G card to monitor the near-end and far-end PM data on individual STS/VC-4 payloads by enabling IPPM. After provisioning IPPM on the card, service providers can monitor large amounts of STS/VC-4 traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient. IPPM occurs only on STS/VC-4 paths that have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the selected IPPM paths. For a CCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM only on the first STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. For a VCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM independently on each member STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate timing errors on SONET networks. When a network is out of synchronization, jitter and wander occur on the transported signal. Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip. STS-9c STS-12c STS-24c Table 10-44 Supported SDH Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 SDH CCAT VCAT High Order VC-4 VC-4-mv (m= 1 to 7) VC-4-2c VC-4-3c VC-4-4c VC-4-8c Table 10-43 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 CCAT VCAT High Order10-107 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Slips cause different effects in service. Voice service has intermittent audible clicks. Compressed voice technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls. Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience dropped calls. Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames. Encryption service loses the encryption key, causing data to be transmitted again. Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VC4 payloads. The STS payload pointer is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1 byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss. There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification count parameters. PPJC is a count of path-detected (PPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) positive pointer justifications. NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) negative pointer justifications depending on the specific PM name. PJCDIFF is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. PJCS-PDET-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN. A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes. A difference between the counts means that the node transmitting the original pointer justification has timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the STS-1. You must enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for ADM-10Gcard. In CTC, the count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the card view Provisioning tab. Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions This section describes the STS and VC-4 path performance monitoring parameters that ADM-10G card support. Table 10-45 lists the STS near-end path performance monitoring parameters. Table 10-45 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P second register. ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS Path (AIS-P) defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or a Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) defect can also cause an ES-P. SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also cause an SES-P. 10-108 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Table 10-46 gives the VC-4 near-end path performance monitoring parameters definition that ADM-10G card support. UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps, and continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as SES-Ps. FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a Section Trace Identifier Mismatch Path (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three-Bit (Enhanced) Remote Failure Indication Path Connectivity (ERFI-P-CONN) for that path. The failure event ends when these failures are cleared. PPJC-PDET-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal. PPJC-PGEN-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock. NPJC-PDET-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal. NPJC-PGEN-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock. PJCDIFF-P Pointer Justification Count Difference, STS Path (PJCDIFF-P) is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. That is, PJCDiff-P is equal to (PPJC-PGEN-P - NPJC-PGEN-P) - (PPJC-PDET-P - NPJC-PDET-P). PJCS-PDET-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN. Table 10-45 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition10-109 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Table 10-46 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition HP-EB High-Order Path Errored Block (HP-EB) indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block. HP-BBE High-Order Path Background Block Error (HP-BBE) is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES. HP-ES High-Order Path Errored Second (HP-ES) is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. HP-SES High-Order Path Severely Errored Seconds (HP-SES) is a one-second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. HP-UAS High-Order Path Unavailable Seconds (HP-UAS) is a count of the seconds when the VC path was unavailable. A high-order path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP-SESs, and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as HP-SESs. HP-BBER High-Order Path Background Block Error Ratio (HP-BBER) is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs. HP-ESR High-Order Path Errored Second Ratio (HP-ESR) is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. HP-SESR High-Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio (HP-SESR) is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. HP-PPJC-PDET High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected (HP-PPJC-Pdet) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal. HP-NPJC-PDET High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected (HP-NPJC-Pdet) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal. HP-PPJC-PGEN High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated (HP-PPJC-Pgen) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path. HP-NPJC-PGEN High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated (HP-NPJC-Pgen) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path. HP-PJCDIFF High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Difference (HP-PJCDiff) is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. That is, HP-PJCDiff is equal to (HP-PPJC-PGen - HP-NPJC-PGen) - (HP-PPJC-PDet - HP-NPJC-PDet).10-110 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 10.13.14 ADM-10G Card-Level Indicators Table 10-47 describes the card-level LEDs on the ADM-10G card. 10.13.15 ADM-10G Card Port-Level Indicators Table 10-48 describes the port-level LEDs on the ADM-10G card. Note Client or trunk ports can each be in active or standby mode as defined in the related section for each specific protection type. For example, fiber-switched protection has active or standby trunk ports; 1+1 APS protection has active or standby client ports, and client 1+1 protection does not utilize active or standby ports. HP-PJCS-PDET High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PDet) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PDet or HP-NPJC-PDet. HP-PJCS-PGEN High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PGen) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PGen or HP-NPJC-PGen. Table 10-46 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition Table 10-47 ADM-10G Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description ACT LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) Green indicates that the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. Amber indicates that the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. It the card is inserted in a slot that is preprovisioned for a different card, this LED flashes until a Missing Equipment Attribute (MEA) condition is raised. You might also need to replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BER errors on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.10-111 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14 OTU2_XP Card The OTU2_XP card is a single-slot card with four ports with XFP-based multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10GE, 10G FC, IB_5G) Xponder for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. The OTU2_XP card supports multiple configurations. Table 10-49 describes the different configurations supported by the OTU2_XP card and the ports that must be used for these configurations. All the four ports are ITU-T G.709 compliant and support 40 channels (wavelengths) at 100-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm wavelength range). The OTU2_XP card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The OTU2_XP card supports SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs. Table 10-48 ADM-10G Card Port-Level LED Indications Port-Level Status Tri-color LED Description The port-level LED is active and unprotected. • If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off. • If a port is in IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is green. • If a port is in IS state and the PPM is physically equipped but does have alarms, the LED is red. The port-level LED is in standby. • If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off. • If a port is in the IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is amber. • If a port is in IS state and physically equipped but does have alarms, the LED is red. Table 10-49 OTU2_XP Card Configurations and Ports Configuration Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 x 10G transponder Client port 1 Client port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 2 x 10G standard regenerator (with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) only on one port) Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 10 GE LAN Phy to WAN Phy Client port Client port in transponder or trunk port in regenerator configuration Trunk port Trunk port in transponder or regenerator configuration 1 x 10G E-FEC regenerator (with E-FEC on two ports) Not used Not used Trunk port Trunk port 1 x 10G splitter protected transponder Client port Not used Trunk port (working) Trunk port (protect)10-112 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where the OTU2_XP card is installed. 10.14.1 Key Features The OTU2_XP card has the following high-level features: • 10G transponder, regenerator, and splitter protection capability on the ONS 15454 DWDM platform. • Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ETSI ONS 15454 shelf assembly, and the ETSI ONS 15454 high-density shelf assembly. Compatible with TCC2/TCC2P/ TCC3/TNC/TSC cards. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. • Four port, multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, 10G Fibre Channel, IB_5G) client interface. The client signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous mapping. Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) with ITU-T G.709 ODU with greater than 8 dB coding gain. • The trunk rate remains the same irrespective of the FEC configuration. The error coding performance can be provisioned as follows:: – FEC—Standard ITU-T G.709. – E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7. • IEEE 802.3 frame format supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable. • Supports fixed/no fixed stuff mapping (insertion of stuffing bytes) for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy signals (only in transponder configuration). • Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to 10G Ethernet WAN Phy conversion on Ports 1 (client port) and 3 (trunk port). • Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion using CTC and TL1. When enabled on the OTU2_XP card, the first Channel (Ports 1 and 3) supports LAN to WAN conversion. The second channel carries normal 10GE, 10G FC, and OC192/STM64 traffic. • The LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion functions in accordance to WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) mechanism as defined by IEEE802.3ae (IEEE Std 802.3ae-2002, Amendment to CSMA/CD). • Default configuration is transponder, with trunk ports configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FEC. • In transponder or regenerator configuration, if one of the ports is configured the corresponding port is automatically created. • In regenerator configuration, only Ports 3 and 4 can be configured as E-FEC. Ports 1 and 2 can be configured only with standard FEC. • When port pair 1-3 or 2-4 is configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is standard regenerator), the default configuration on Ports 3 and 4 is automatically set to standard FEC. • When Ports 3 and 4 are configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is E-FEC regenerator), the default configuration on both these ports is automatically set to E-FEC.10-113 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card • In splitter protected transponder configuration, the trunk ports (Ports 3 and 4) are configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FECor E-FEC. • Supports protection through Y-cable protection scheme. Note When enabled, the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature does not support Y-cable protection on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3). • Client ports support SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs. • Following are the OTU2 link rates that are supported on the OTU2_XP trunk port: – Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “SONET” (including 10G Ethernet WAN PHY) (9.95328 Gbps). – G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.2 (11.0491 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed Stuff” enabled. – G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.1 (11.0957 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed Stuff” disabled. – G.709 proprietary overclocking mode to transport 10G FC (11.3168 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Fiber Channel” (10.518 Gbps). – Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. • The MTU setting is used to display the ifInerrors and OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 10.14.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 10-33 shows the OTU2_XP card faceplate and block diagram.10-114 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card Figure 10-33 OTU2_XP Card Faceplate and Block Diagram Note The Swan FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled on the OTU2_XP card. The Barile FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is disabled on the OTU2_XP card. 241984 SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES Barile FPGA SWAN FPGA XFP 1 XFP 3 SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES MPC8360 core Power supply Clocking XFP 2 SCL FPGA XFP 410-115 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14.3 OTU2_XP Card-Level Indicators Table 10-50 describes the card-level LEDs on the OTU2_XP card. 10.14.4 OTU2_XP Port-Level Indicators Table 10-51 describes the PPM port-level LEDs on the OTU2_XP card for both client and trunk ports. Note Client or trunk ports can each be in active or standby mode as defined in the related section for each specific protection type. For example, fiber-switched protection has active or standby trunk ports; 1+1 APS protection has active or standby client ports, and client 1+1 protection does not utilize active or standby ports. Table 10-50 OTU2_XP Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. If the card is inserted in a slot that is preprovisioned for a different card, this LED flashes until a Missing Equipment Attribute (MEA) condition is raised. You might also need to replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT LED Green (Active) If the ACT LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BER errors on one or more of the card ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-51 OTU2_XP PPM Port-Level Indicators Port-Level Status Tri-color LED Description The port-level LED is active and unprotected. • If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off. • If a port is in IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is green. • If a port is in IS state and the PPM is physically equipped but does have alarms, the LED is red. The port-level LED is in standby. • If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off. • If a port is in the IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is amber. • If a port is in IS state and physically equipped but does have alarms, the LED is red.10-116 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14.5 OTU2_XP Card Interface The OTU2_XP card is a multi-functional card that operates in different configurations, such as transponder, standard regenerator, E-FEC regenerator, and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion mode. The OTU2_XP card acts as a protected transponder, when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy is in splitter protected transponder configuration mode. Depending on the configuration of the OTU2_XP card, the ports act as client or trunk ports (see Table 10-49). This following section describes the client and trunk rates supported on the OTU2_XP card for different card configurations: 10.14.5.1 Client Interface In transponder and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy card configurations, Ports 1 and 2 act as client ports and in splitter protected transponder configuration, Port 1 acts as a client port. For these card configurations, the client rates supported are: • OC-192/STM-64 • 10G Ethernet WAN Phy • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy • 10G Fibre Channel • IB_5G 10.14.5.2 Trunk Interface In transponder, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, and splitter protected transponder card configurations, Ports 3 and 4 act as trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rates supported are: • OC-192/STM-64 • 10G Ethernet WAN Phy • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy • 10G Fibre Channel • OTU2 G.709 • Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. In standard regenerator card configuration, all four ports act as trunk ports and in E-FEC regenerator configuration, Ports 3 and 4 act as the trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rate supported is OTU2 G.709 Note The above mentioned OTU2 signal must be an OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, or 10G Fibre Channel signal packaged into an OTU2 G.709 frame. Additionally, the standard regenerator and E-FEC regenerator configuration supports an OTU2 signal that is OTU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals.10-117 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14.6 Configuration Management The OTU2_XP card supports the following configuration management parameters: • Card Configuration—Provisionable card configuration: Transponder, Standard Regen, Enhanced FEC, or Mixed, or 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. • Port Mode—Provisionable port mode when the card configuration is set as Mixed. The port mode can be chosen as either Transponder or Standard Regen for each port pair (1-3 and 2-4). For card configurations other than Mixed, CTC automatically sets the port mode depending on the selected card configuration. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the port pair (1-3) as 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. Port pair (2-4) in 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode is selected as Transponder or Standard Regen. • Termination Mode—Provisionable termination mode when the card configuration is set as either Transponder or Mixed. The termination mode can be chosen as Transparent, Section, or Line. For Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, CTC automatically sets the termination mode as Transparent. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the Termination Mode of port pair (1-3) as Line. You cannot provision the Termination Mode parameter. • AIS/Squelch—Provisionable AIS/Squelch mode configuration when the card configuration is set as either Transponder or Mixed. The termination mode configuration can be chosen as AIS or Squelch. For Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, CTC automatically sets the termination mode configuration as AIS. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, the CTC automatically selects the AIS/Squelch of port pair (1-3) as Squelch. You cannot provision the AIS/Squelch parameter. Note When you choose the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion, the Termination mode is automatically set to LINE. The AIS/Squelch is set to SQUELCH and ODU Transparency is set to Cisco Extended Use for Ports 1 and 3. • Regen Line Name—User-assigned text string for regeneration line name. • ODU Transparency—Provisionable ODU overhead byte configuration, either Transparent Standard Use or Cisco Extended Use. See the “10.14.10 ODU Transparency” section on page 10-120 for more detailed information. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the ODU Transparency as Cisco Extended Use. You cannot provision the ODU Transparency parameter. • Port name—User-assigned text string. • Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status. • ALS Mode—Provisionable ALS function. • Reach—Provisionable optical reach distance of the port. • Wavelength—Provisionable wavelength of the port. • AINS Soak—Provisionable automatic in-service soak period. 10.14.7 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules The following rules apply to OTU2_XP card configurations: • When you preprovision the card, port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 come up in the default Transponder configuration.10-118 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card • The port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 can be configured in different modes only when the card configuration is Mixed. If the card configuration is Mixed, you must choose different modes on port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 (that is, one port pair in Transponder mode and the other port pair in Standard Regen mode). • If the card is in Transponder configuration, you can change the configuration to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC. • If the card is in Standard Regen configuration and you have configured only one port pair, then configuring payload rates for the other port pair automatically changes the card configuration to Mixed, with the new port pair in Transponder mode. • If the card is in Standard Regen configuration, you cannot directly change the configuration to Enhanced FEC. You have to change to Transponder configuration and then configure the card as Enhanced FEC. • If the card is in Enhanced FEC configuration, Ports 1 and 2 are disabled. Hence, you cannot directly change the configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. You must remove the Enhanced FEC group by moving the card to Transponder configuration, provision PPM on Ports 1 and 2, and then change the card configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. • If the card is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC configuration, you cannot change the payload rate of the port pairs. You have to change the configuration to Transponder, change the payload rate, and then move the card configuration back to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC. • If any of the affected ports are in IS (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) state, you cannot change the card configuration. • If IB_5G payload has to be provisioned, the NE Default should match the values listed in the Table 10-52. For more information on editing the NE Default values, see the “NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults” task. • If the card is changed to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, the first PPM port is deleted and replaced by a 10G Ethernet port; the third PPM port is deleted and automatically replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH) port. The third PPM port is automatically deleted and the third PPM port is replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH). Table 10-53 provides a summary of transitions allowed for the OTU2_XP card configurations. Table 10-52 OTU2_XP Card Configuration for IB_5G Payload Provisioning Parameter NE Default Name Value FEC OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.FEC Standard ITU-T G.709 OTN OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.G709OTN Enable Termination Mode OTU2-XP.config.port.TerminationMode Transparent ODU Transparency OTU2-XP.config.port.OduTransparency Cisco Extended Use AIS/Squelch OTU2-XP.config.port.AisSquelchMode Squelch Table 10-53 Card Configuration Transition Summary Card Configuration Transition To Transponder Standard Regen Enhanced FEC Mixed 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Transponder — Yes Yes Yes Yes Standard Regen Yes — No Yes Yes10-119 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14.8 Security The OTU2_XP card, when an XFP is plugged into it, implements the Cisco Standard Security Code Check Algorithm that keys on vendor ID and serial number. If a PPM is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco PPM, a NON-CISCO-PPM Not Reported (NR) condition occurs. If a PPM with a nonqualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card, that is, the PPM passes the security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the OTU2_XP card, a UNQUAL-PPM NR condition occurs. 10.14.9 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds. The on and off pulse duration is user-configurable. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Enhanced FEC Yes No — No No Mixed Yes Yes No — Yes 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Yes Yes No The 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy to Mixed is supported if the Port pair 1-3 is chosen as Transponder. The 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy to Mixed is not supported if the Port pair 1-3 is chosen as Standard Regen. — Table 10-53 Card Configuration Transition Summary (continued) Card Configuration Transition To Transponder Standard Regen Enhanced FEC Mixed 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy10-120 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 10.14.10 ODU Transparency A key feature of the OTU2_XP card is the ability to configure the ODU overhead bytes (EXP bytes and RES bytes 1 and 2) using the ODU Transparency parameter. The two options available for this parameter are: • Transparent Standard Use—ODU overhead bytes are transparently passed through the card. This option allows the OTU2_XP card to act transparently between two trunk ports (when the card is configured in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC). • Cisco Extended Use—ODU overhead bytes are terminated and regenerated on both ports of the regenerator group. The ODU Transparency parameter is configurable only for Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configuration. For Transponder card configuration, this parameter defaults to Cisco Extended Use and cannot be changed. Note The Forward Error Correction (FEC) Mismatch (FEC-MISM) alarm will not be raised on OTU2_XP card when you choose Transparent Standard Use. 10.14.11 Protection The OTU2_XP card supports Y-cable and splitter protection. Y-cable protection is provided at the client port level. Splitter protection is provided at the trunk port level. 10.14.11.1 Y-Cable Protection The OTU2_XP card supports Y-cable protection on client ports when it is provisioned in the transponder card configuration. Two cards can be joined in a Y-cable protection group with one card assigned as the working card and the other defined as the protection card. This protection mechanism provides redundant bidirectional paths. See the “10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page 10-139 for more detailed information. When a signal fault is detected (LOS, LOF, SD, or SF on the DWDM receiver port in the case of ITU-T G.709 mode) the protection mechanism software automatically switches between paths. Note When the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled, Y-cable protection is not supported on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3). 10.14.11.2 Splitter Protection The OTU2_XP card supports splitter protection on trunk ports that are not part of a regenerator group (see Table 10-49 for port details). You can create and delete splitter protection groups in OTU2_XP card. In splitter protection method, a client injects a single signal into the client RX port. An optical splitter internal to the card then splits the signal into two separate signals and routes them to the two trunk TX ports. See the “10.19.2 Splitter Protection” section on page 10-141 for more detailed information. In the splitter protected 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, AIS-P and LOP-P acts as trigger (when G.709 is enabled) for the Protection Switch, in addition to the existing switching criteria. The STS parameters such as, SF /SD thresholds, Path PM thresholds, and Path Trace is set for the working path (Port 3). The same parameters are also applicable for the protected path (Port 4).10-121 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MLSE UT 10.15 MLSE UT The maximum likelihood sequence estimation (MLSE) based universal transponder (UT) modules are added to the TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards to support the error decorrelator functionality to enhance system performance. 10.15.1 Error Decorrelator The MLSE feature uses the error decorrelator functionality to reduce the chromatic dispersion (CD) and polarization mode dispersion (PMD), thereby extending the transmission range on the trunk interface. You can enable or disable the error decorrelator functionality using CTC or TL1. The dispersion compensation unit (DCU) is also used to reduce CD and PMD. The MLSE-based UT module helps to reduce CD and PMD without the use of a DCU. 10.16 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully backward compatible with TXP_MR_10E_C cards (only when the error decorrelator is disabled in the CTC on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card). It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is tunable over the 82 channels of C-band (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). You can install TXP_MR_10EX_C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be provisioned in linear, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP configurations or as a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10EX_C card features an MLSE-based Universal Transponder 1550-nm tunable laser and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note The PRE FEC BER performance of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card may be significantly low when compared to the TXP_MR_10E card. However, this does not affect the Post FEC BER performance, but could possibly affect any specific monitoring application that relies on the PRE FEC BER value (for example, protection switching). In this case, the replacement of TXP_MR_10E card with the TXP_MR_10EX_C may not work properly. Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card must be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 10.16.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are: • A multi-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately):10-122 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) – (ONS-XC-10G-S1 version 3 only) IB_5G • An MLSE-based UT module tunable through 82 channels of C-band. The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid. • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping. • Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 10.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 10-34 shows the TXP_MR_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram. Figure 10-34 TXP_MR_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 247063 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver B a c k p l a n e FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP L TX RX RX TX DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 82 tunable channels (C-band) on the 50-GHz ITU Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)10-123 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10EX_C card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with this card, because they can cause irreparable damage to the card. 10.16.3 Client Interface The client interface is implemented with a separately orderable XFP module. The module is a tri-rate transceiver, providing a single port that can be configured in the field to support an OC-192 SR-1 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) or STM-64 I-64.1 (ITU-T G.691) optical interface, as well as 10GE LAN PHY (10GBASE-LR), 10GE WAN PHY (10GBASE-LW), 10G-FC signals, or IB_5G signals. The client-side XFP pluggable module supports LC connectors and is equipped with a 1310-nm laser. 10.16.4 DWDM Trunk Interface On the trunk side, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card provides a 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 interface. In the 1550-nm C-band on the 50-GHz ITU grid for the DWDM interface, 82 tunable channels are available. The TXP_MR_10EX_C card provides 3R transponder functionality for this 10-Gbps trunk interface. Therefore, the card is suited for use in long-range amplified systems. The DWDM interface is compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards. The DWDM trunk port operates at a rate that depends on the input signal and the presence of the ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC. The possible trunk rates are: • OC192 (9.95328 Gbps) • OTU2 (10.70923 Gbps) • 10GE (10.3125 Gbps) or 10GE into OTU2 (ITU G.sup43 11.0957 Gbps) • 10G-FC (10.51875 Gbps) or 10G-FC into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) • Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change. Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be disabled. 10.16.5 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature A key feature of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card is the availability to configure the forward error correction feature in two modes: FEC and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7 algorithm, (a super FEC code)10-124 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 10.16.6 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client-side traffic passes through the TXP_MR_10EX_C card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode or E-FEC mode. The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower OSNR) with a lower bit error rate than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC. Caution Because the transponder has no visibility into the data payload and detect circuits, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card does not display circuits under the card view. 10.16.7 Client-to-Trunk Mapping The TXP_MR_10EX_C card can perform ODU2-to-OCh mapping, which allows operators to provision data payloads in a standard way across 10-Gbps optical links. Digital wrappers that define client-side interfaces are called ODU2 entities in ITU-T G.709. Digital wrappers that define trunk-side interfaces are called OCh in ITU-T G.709. ODU2 digital wrappers can include G-MPLS signaling extensions to ITU-T G.709 (such as LSP and G-PID values) to define client interfaces and payload protocols. 10.16.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds and is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the TXP_MR_10EX_C card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.16.9 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators Table 10-54 lists the card-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card. Table 10-54 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.10-125 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.16.10 TXP_MR_10EX_C Port-Level Indicators Table 10-55 lists the port-level LEDs on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card. 10.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10EX MXP.” The card multiplexes four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4xOC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The card provides wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5-Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card works with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.8.5 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-44. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. You can install the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a linear configuration, a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-54 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level LED Description Table 10-55 TXP_MR_10EX _C Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-126 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode, which are necessary to provision the 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 10.17.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has the following high-level features: • Four 2.5-Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10-Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. • Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has modular interfaces. Two types of optic modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC is not available, the card automatically synchronize to one of the input client-interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. • The MTU setting is used to display the ifInerrors and OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.10-127 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.17.2 Faceplate Figure 10-35 shows the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram. Figure 10-35 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-8. 10.17.3 Client Interfaces The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card provides four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. Both SR-1 and IR-1 optics can be supported and the ports use SFP connectors. The client interfaces use four wavelengths in the 1310-nm, ITU 100-GHz-spaced, channel grid. FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP L RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RAM Processor 247064 Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver B a c k p l a n e FEC/ Wrapper E-FEC Processor (G.709 FEC) Serial bus uP bus Onboard Flash memory SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR)10-128 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.17.4 DWDM Interface The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card serves as OTN multiplexers, transparently mapping four OC-48 channels asynchronously to ODU1 into one 10-Gbps trunk. For the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, the DWDM trunk is tunable for transmission over the entire C-band. Channels are spaced at 50-GHz on the ITU grid. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the card, because they can cause irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card. Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be disabled. 10.17.5 Multiplexing Function The muxponder is an integral part of the ROADM network. The key function of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is to multiplex four OC-48/STM-16 signals onto one ITU-T G.709 OTU2 optical signal (DWDM transmission). The multiplexing mechanism allows the signal to be terminated at a far-end node by another similar card. Transparent termination on the muxponder is configured using OTUx and ODUx OH bytes. The ITU-T G.709 specification defines OH byte formats that are used to configure, set, and monitor frame alignment, FEC mode, section monitoring, tandem connection monitoring, and transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card performs ODU to OTU multiplexing as defined in ITU-T G.709. The ODU is the framing structure and byte definition (ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper) used to define the data payload coming into one of the SONET/SDH client interfaces on the card. The term ODU1 refers to an ODU that operates at 2.5-Gbps line rate. On the card, four client interfaces can be defined using ODU1 framing structure and format by asserting an ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper. The output of the muxponder is a single 10-Gbps DWDM trunk interface defined using OTU2. It is within the OTU2 framing structure that FEC or E-FEC information is appended to enable error checking and correction. 10.17.6 Timing Synchronization The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P /TCC3/TNC/TSC clock during normal conditions and transmits the ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. No holdover function is implemented. If neither TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock is available, the card switches automatically (hitless) to the first of the four valid client clocks with no time restriction as to how long it can run on this clock. The card continues to monitor the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card is restored to working order, the card reverts to the normal working mode of running from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock. If no valid TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock is available and all of the client channels become invalid, the card waits (no valid frames processed) until one of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards supplies a valid clock. In addition, the card is allowed to select the recovered clock from one active and valid client channel and supply that clock to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card.10-129 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.17.7 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Capability The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card can configure the FEC in two modes: FEC and E-FEC. The output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: • FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm • E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7, two orthogonally concatenated BCH super FEC codes. This FEC scheme contains three parameterizations of the same scheme of two orthogonally interleaved block codes (BCH). The constructed code is decoded iteratively to achieve the expected performance. 10.17.8 FEC and E-FEC Modes As client-side traffic passes through the card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode error correction or E-FEC mode error correction. The FEC mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower OSNR) with a lower BER than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side transmission than with FEC. The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC. 10.17.9 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing The card passes the incoming SONET/SDH data stream and its overhead bytes for the client signal transparently. The card can be provisioned to terminate regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. 10.17.10 Client Interface Monitoring The following parameters are monitored on the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card: • Laser bias current is measured as a PM parameter. • LOS is detected and signaled. • Rx and Tx power are monitored. The following parameters are monitored in real-time mode (one second): • Optical power transmitted (client) • Optical power received (client) In the case of LOC at the DWDM receiver or far-end LOS, the client interface behavior is configurable. AIS can be invoked or the client signal can be squelched.10-130 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.17.11 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card implements the MLSE-based UT module. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2. Table 10-56 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 10-56 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.95910-131 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 10.17.12 Automatic Laser Shutdown The ALS procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds and is user-configurable. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.17.13 Jitter For SONET and SDH signals, the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card complies with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.825, and ITU-T G.873 for jitter generation, jitter tolerance, and jitter transfer. See the “10.21 Jitter Considerations” section on page 10-142 for more information. 10.17.14 Lamp Test The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card supports a lamp test function that is activated from the ONS 15454 front panel or through CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. 10.17.15 Onboard Traffic Generation The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card provides internal traffic generation for testing purposes according to PRBS, SONET/SDH, or ITU-T G.709. 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-56 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)10-132 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 10.17.16 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators Table 10-57 describes the card-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card. 10.17.17 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Port-Level Indicators Table 10-58 describes the port-level LEDs on the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card. 10.18 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card aggregates a mix of client SAN service-client inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957. The card supports aggregation of the following signal types: • 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 1-Gigabit Ethernet • 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1) • 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3) Table 10-57 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off. Table 10-58 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Green Client LED (four LEDs) A green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal. The card has four client ports, and so has one Client LED for each port. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-133 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it carefully. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card works with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “10.7.7 Multiplexing Function” section on page 10-36. Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be disabled. Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 10 Gbps. You can install the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Note The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Table 10-59 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. Table 10-59 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 2.125 Gbps Yes10-134 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card includes two FPGAs, and a group of four ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 10-60 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port. GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE. A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card supports FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5-degree downward-tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with a 45-degree downward angle. 10.18.1 Key Features The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has the following high-level features: • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. • Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and 1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 1.06 Gbps Yes Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes Table 10-59 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation (continued) Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation Table 10-60 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC 1 5 X XXX 2 6 X X —— 3 7 X XX— 4 8 X X ——10-135 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • Y-cable protection: The card supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the same port number and signal rate. See the “10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page 10-139 for more detailed information. • High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • ALS: This safety mechanism is used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. • Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH(overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH(overhead) bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC is not available, the card automatically synchronizes to one of the input client-interface clocks. Note MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card cannot be used for line timing. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client-interface output if LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. • You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch. 10.18.2 Faceplate Figure 10-36 shows the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C faceplate and block diagram.10-136 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Figure 10-36 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the card, see the “10.2.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page 10-10. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the card, because they can cause irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. 10.18.3 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card uses a C-band version of the MLSE-based UT module. 10DME-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF 247065 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 DWDM RX TX SPF 1/1 4G FC SerDes 1 x QDR 2M x 36bit Burst4 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA Framer G.709/FEC OTN MXP UT2 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 2/1 SPF 3/1 CPU Core FPGA Power supply SPF 4/1 SPF 6/1 4G FC SerDes 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 7/1 SPF 8/1 SPF 9/1 Client ports Group 1 Group 210-137 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Table 10-61 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 10-61 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.57810-138 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 10.18.4 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card-Level Indicators Table 10-62 describes the card-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. 10.18.5 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Port-Level Indicators Table 10-63 describes the port-level LEDs on the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-61 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-62 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) Amber (Standby) If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational (one or more ports active) and ready to carry traffic. If the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode. Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS, LOF, or high BERs on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber SF LED is also on if the transmit and receive fibers are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is working, the light turns off.10-139 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Y-Cable and Splitter Protection 10.19 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection Y-cable and splitter protection are two main forms of card protection that are available for TXP, MXP, and Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP) cards when they are provisioned in TXP or MXP mode. Y-cable protection is provided at the client port level. Splitter protection is provided at the trunk port level. Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards use VLAN protection when they are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. For information, see the “10.12.10.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” section on page 10-81. The ADM-10G card uses path protection and 1+1 protection. For more information, see the “10.13.10 Protection” section on page 10-103. 10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection Y-cable protection is available for the following ONS 15454 TXP, MXP, and Xponder cards: • TXP_MR_10G • TXP_MR_10E • TXP_MR_2.5G • 40G-TXP-C • MXP_2.5G_10G • MXP_2.5G_10E • MXP_2.5G_10E_C • MXP_2.5G_10E_L • MXP_MR_2.5G • MXP_MR_10DME_C • MXP_MR_10DME_L Table 10-63 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Description Port LED (eight LEDs, four for each group, one for each SFP) Green/Red/Amber/Off When green, the port LED indicates that the client port is either in service and receiving a recognized signal (that is, no signal fail), or the port is in Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or locked, maintenance) state and the signal fail and alarms are being ignored. When red, the port LED indicates that the client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS). When amber, the port LED indicates that the port is provisioned and in a standby state. When off, the port LED indicates that the SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted, or the SFP hardware has failed. Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that it is receiving a recognized signal.10-140 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Y-Cable and Splitter Protection • 40G-MXP-C • GE_XP and GE_XPE (when in 10GE or 20GE MXP card mode) • 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE (when in 10GE TXP card mode) • OTU2_XP (when in Transponder card configuration) To create Y-cable protection, you create a Y-cable protection group for two TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards using the CTC software, then connect the client ports of the two cards physically with a Y-cable. The single client signal is sent into the RX Y-cable and is split between the two TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards. The two TX signals from the client side of the TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards are combined in the TX Y-cable into a single client signal. Only the active card signal passes through as the single TX client signal. The other card must have its laser turned off to avoid signal degradation where the Y-cable joins. When an MXP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, or MXP_MR_10DME_L card that is provisioned with Y-cable protection is used on a storage ISL link (FC1G, FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, or FICON4G), a protection switchover resets the standby port to active. This reset reinitialises the end-to-end link to avoid any link degradation caused due to loss of buffer credits during switchover and results in an end-to-end traffic hit of 15 to 20 seconds. When using the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, enable the fast switch feature and use it with a Cisco MDS storage switch to avoid this 15 to 20 second traffic hit. When enabling fast switch on the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, ensure that the attached MDS switches have the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature enabled. You can also use the TXP_MR_2.5G card to avoid this 15 to 20 second traffic hit. When a Y-cable protection switchover occurs, the storage ISL link does not reinitialize and results in an end-to-end traffic hit of less than 50ms. Note Y-cable connectors will not work with copper SFPs because Y-cables are made up of optical connectors and there is no way to physically connect them to a copper SFP. Y-cable protection is not supported on IB_5G. Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the client ports. Note The OTU2_XP and 40E-MXP-C card cannot implement Y-cable protection for the client ports in 10 GE LAN PHY mode. Hence, a pair of OTU2_XP cards is used at each end in pass-through mode (Transponder mode with G.709 disabled) to implement Y-cable protection. The 40E-MXP-CE card can implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2_XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY GFP mode. However, the 40E-MXP-CE card cannot implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2_XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY WIS mode. Note If you create a GCC on either card of the protect group, the trunk port stays permanently active, regardless of the switch state. When you provision a GCC, you are provisioning unprotected overhead bytes. The GCC is not protected by the protect group. Figure 10-37 on page 10-141 shows the Y-cable signal flow.10-141 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Y-Cable and Splitter Protection Note Loss of Signal–Payload (LOS-P) alarms, also called Incoming Payload Signal Absent alarms, can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group. Note Removing an SFP from the client ports of a card in a Y-cable protection group card causes an IMPROPRMVL (PPM) alarm. The working port raises the IMPROPRMVL alarm and the protected port raises the IMPROPRMVL alarm. The severity on the client ports is changed according to the protection switch state. Figure 10-37 Y-Cable Protection 10.19.2 Splitter Protection Splitter protection, shown in Figure 10-38, is provided with TXPP cards, MXPP cards., and OTU2_XP cards (on trunk ports that are not part of a regenerator group). You can create and delete splitter protection groups in OTU2_XP card. To implement splitter protection, a client injects a single signal into the client RX port. An optical splitter internal to the card then splits the signal into two separate signals and routes them to the two trunk TX ports. The two signals are transmitted over diverse optical paths. The far-end MXPP or TXPP card uses an optical switch to choose one of the two trunk RX port signals and injects it into the TX client port. When using splitter protection with two MXPP or TXPP cards, there are two different optical signals that flow over diverse paths in each direction. In case of failure, the far-end switch must choose the appropriate signal using its built-in optical switch. The triggers for a protection switch are LOS, LOF, SF, or SD. Client "Working" card (TXP or MXP) "Protection" card (TXP or MXP) Y cables TX RX Working Protect Client Port Trunk Port Client Port Trunk Port 12408010-142 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Far-End Laser Control Figure 10-38 Splitter Protection 10.20 Far-End Laser Control The 15454 DWDM cards provide a transparent mode that accurately conveys the client input signal to the far-end client output signal. The client signal is normally carried as payload over the DWDM signals. Certain client signals, however, cannot be conveyed as payload. In particular, client LOS or LOF cannot be carried. Far-end laser control (FELC) is the ability to convey an LOS or LOF from the near-end client input to the far-end client output. If an LOS is detected on the near-end client input, the near-end trunk sets the appropriate bytes in the OTN overhead of the DWDM line. These bytes are received by the far-end trunk, and cause the far-end client laser to be turned off. When the laser is turned off, it is said to be squelched. If the near-end LOS clears, the near-end trunk clears the appropriate bytes in the OTN overhead, the far-end detects the changed bytes, and the far-end client squelch is removed. FELC also covers the situation in which the trunk port detects that it has an invalid signal; the client is squelched so as not to propagate the invalid signal. Payload types with the 2R mode preclude the use of OTN overhead bytes. In 2R mode, an LOS on the client port causes the trunk laser to turn off. The far end detects the LOS on its trunk receiver and squelches the client. FELC is not provisionable. It is always enabled when the DWDM card is in transparent termination mode. However, FELC signaling to the far-end is only possible when ITU-T G.709 is enabled on both ends of the trunk span. 10.21 Jitter Considerations Jitter introduced by the SFPs used in the transponders and muxponders must be considered when cascading several cards. With TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, and TXP_MR_10E cards, several transponders can be cascaded before the cumulative jitter violates the jitter specification. The recommended limit is 20 cards. With TXP_MR_10G cards, you can also cascade several cards, although the recommended limit is 12 cards. With MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E Client Protected Card Working Protect Client Port RX TX Splitter Switch Trunk Port Trunk Port 12407910-143 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Termination Modes cards, any number of cards can be cascaded as long as the maximum reach between any two is not exceeded. This is because any time the signal is demultiplexed, the jitter is eliminated as a limiting factor. The maximum reach between one transponder and the other must be halved if a Y cable is used. For more information on Y-cable operation, see the “10.19.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page 10-139. 10.22 Termination Modes Transponder and muxponder cards have various SONET and SDH termination modes that can be configured using CTC (see the “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide). The termination modes are summarized in Table 10-64. For TXP and MXP cards, adhere to the following conditions while DCC termination provisioning: • For SDCC/RS-DCC provisioning, the card should be in the Section/RS-DCC or Line/MS-DCC termination mode. • For LDCC/MS-DCC provisioning, the card should be in the Line/MS-DCC termination mode. Table 10-64 Termination Modes Cards Termination Mode Description All TXP, MXP, and OTU2_XP cards, with the exception of the MXP_2.5G_10G card (see next section of this table) Transparent Termination All the bytes of the payload pass transparently through the cards. Section Termination The SONET transport overhead (TOH) section bytes and the SDH regenerator section overhead (SOH) bytes are terminated. None of these SOH bytes are passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET TOH section DCC (SDCC) bytes and the SDH regenerator section DCC (RS-DCC) bytes. In the section termination mode, the SONET TOH line and SDH multiplex section overhead bytes are passed transparently. Line Termination In line termination mode, the section and line overhead bytes for SONET and the overhead bytes for the SDH multiplex and regenerator sections are terminated. None of the overhead bytes are passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET SDCC and line DCC (LDCC) bytes and the SDH RS-DCC and multiplexer section DCC (MS-DCC) bytes. MXP_2.5G_10G1 1. Clients operating at the OC48/STM16 rate are multiplexed into an OC192/STM64 frame before going to OTN or DWDM. Transparent Termination All client bytes pass transparently except the following: B1 is rebuilt, S1 is rewritten, A1 to A2 are regenerated, and H1 to H3 are regenerated. Section Termination The SONET TOH section bytes and the SDH regenerator section overhead bytes are terminated. None of these section overhead bytes are passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET TOH section DCC bytes and the SDH RS-DCC bytes. In the section termination mode, the SONET TOH line and SDH multiplex section overhead bytes are passed transparently. Line Termination In the line termination mode, the section and line overhead bytes for SONET and the overhead bytes for the SDH multiplex and regenerators sections are terminated. None of the overhead bytes are passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET SDCC and LDCC bytes and the SDH RS-DCC and MS-DCC bytes.10-144 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 10 Transponder and Muxponder Cards SFP and XFP Modules For more information on enabling termination modes, see the procedures for changing card setting in the “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. 10.23 SFP and XFP Modules SFPs and 10-Gbps SFPs (XFPs) are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. For more information on SFPs/XFPs and for a list of SFPs/XFPs supported by the transponder and muxponder cards, see the Installing the GBIC, SFP, and XFP Optics Modules in Cisco ONS Platforms. In CTC, SFPs/XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). To provision SFPs/XFPs and change the line rate for multirate PPMs, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.CHAPTER 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 11 Node Reference This chapter explains the ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) node types that are available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter cards that are installed in an ONS 15454. The chapter also explains the DWDM automatic power control (APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM) power equalization, span loss verification, and automatic node setup (ANS) functions. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note In this chapter, “OPT-BST” refers to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L cards, and to the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards when they are provisioned in OPT-LINE (optical booster) mode. “OPT-PRE” refers to the OPT-PRE card and to the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode. Chapter topics include: • 11.1 DWDM Node Configurations, page 11-1 • 11.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 11-34 • 11.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card, page 11-38 • 11.4 Multishelf Node, page 11-42 • 11.5 Optical Sides, page 11-44 • 11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks, page 11-53 • 11.7 DWDM Node Cabling, page 11-74 • 11.8 Automatic Node Setup, page 11-90 • 11.9 DWDM Functional View, page 11-96 • 11.10 DWDM Network Functional View, page 11-106 11.1 DWDM Node Configurations The ONS 15454 supports the following DWDM node configurations: hub, terminal, optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM), reconfigurable OADM (ROADM), anti-amplified spontaneous emission (anti-ASE), line amplifier, optical service channel (OSC) regeneration line, multishelf nodes, and node 11-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations configurations for mesh networks. All node configurations can be provisioned with C-band or L-band cards except the OADM and anti-ASE nodes. These nodes require AD-xB-xx.x or AD-xC-xx.x cards, which are C-band only. All node configurations can be single-shelf or multishelf. Note The Cisco TransportPlanner tool creates a plan for amplifier placement and proper node equipment. Note To support multiple optical sides in mesh DWDM networks, east and west are no longer used to reference the left and right sides of the ONS 15454 shelf. If a network running a previous software release is upgraded to this release, west will be mapped to A and east to B. In two-sided nodes, such as a hub or ROADM node, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6 and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17. Terminal nodes have one side labeled “A,” regardless of which slots have cards installed. For more information about configuring the ONS 15454 in mesh DWDM networks, see the “11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 11-53. 11.1.1 Terminal Node A terminal node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards and one of the following combinations: • One 32MUX-O card and one 32DMX-O card • One 32WSS card and either a 32DMX or a 32DMX-O card • One 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card and one 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card • One 40-MUX-C and one 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card • One 80-WXC-C card, one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel, and one 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux patch panel), and 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM • One 40-SMR1-C and one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel • One 40-SMR2-C and one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel along with the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel. Cards in the terminal nodes can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or Slots 12 through 17. The side where cards are installed is always assigned as Side A. Figure 11-1 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 2MUX-O card installed. The channel flow for a terminal node is the same as the hub node (Figure 11-28).11-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-1 Terminal Node Configuration With 32MUX-O Cards Installed Figure 11-2 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-WSS-C card installed. OPT-BST OPT-PRE 32MUX-O DCU Air ramp Available 32DMX-O TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM AIC-I Available TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Available Available Available Available Available Available 24909511-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-2 Terminal Node Configuration with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed Figure 11-3 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-MUX-C card installed. OPT-BST or OSC-CSM OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP 40-WSS-C DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx 40-DMX-C TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM or Blank AIC-I Blank TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP 249104 Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T11-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-3 Terminal Node with 40-MUX-C Cards Installed Figure 11-4 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-SMR1-C card installed. OPT-BST or OSC-CSM OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx 40-DMX-C 40-MUX-C Blank or TXP/MXP TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM or Blank AIC-I Blank TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP 249105 Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T11-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-4 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Figure 11-5 shows an example of a terminal configuration with 40-SMR1-C and booster amplifier cards installed. 248993 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Available 40-SMR1-C LCD Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Available Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel Booster 40-SMR1-C DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available Available Available OSCM M AIC-I Empty TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC 15216 Odd Patch Panel Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-5 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Note When you use the 40-SMR1-C card along with a booster amplifier, the OSCM card must be connected to the booster amplifier. Figure 11-6 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-SMR2-C card installed. 248992 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available 40-SMR1-C Booster (A) LCD Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Available Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel Cisco ONS 15454 Booster 40-SMR1-C DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available Available Available OSCM M AIC-I Empty TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC 15216 Odd Patch Panel Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-6 Terminal Node with 40-SMR2-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 11.1.2 OADM Node An OADM node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with cards installed on both sides and at least one AD-xC-xx.x card or one AD-xB-xx.x card and two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards. This configuration supports 32 channels. In an OADM node, channels can be added or dropped independently from each direction and then passed through the reflected bands of all OADMs in the DWDM node (called express path). They can also be passed through one OADM card to another OADM card without using a TDM ITU-T line card (called optical pass-through) if an external patchcord is installed. Unlike express path, an optical pass-through channel can be converted later to an add/drop channel in an altered ring without affecting another channel. OADM amplifier placement and required card placement is determined by the Cisco TransportPlanner tool or your site plan. OADM nodes can be amplified or passive. In amplified OADMs, booster and preamplifier cards are installed on bode sides of the node. Figure 11-7 shows an example of an amplified OADM node configuration. In addition, OADM nodes can be asymmetric. Amplifiers may be installed in one side, but not the other. Or preamplifiers may be installed in one side, and a booster in the other. 248994 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Available 40-SMR2-C LCD Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Available Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel Cisco ONS 15454 40-SMR2-C Available DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available Available Available OSCM M AIC-I Empty TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC 15216 Odd Patch Panel Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-7 Amplified OADM Node Configuration Example Figure 11-8 shows an example of the channel flow on the amplified OADM node. Since the 32-wavelength plan is based on eight bands (each band contains four channels), optical adding and dropping can be performed at the band level and/or at the channel level (meaning individual channels can be dropped). OPT-BST OPT-PRE OADM or mux/demux DCU Air ramp DCU OADM or mux/demux OADM or mux/demux OADM TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM AIC-I OSCM TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OADM OADM or mux/demux OADM or mux/demux OADM or mux/demux OPT-PRE OPT-BST 24909611-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-8 Amplified OADM Node Channel Flow Example 11.1.3 ROADM Node A ROADM node adds and drops wavelengths without changing the physical fiber connections. A ROADM node is equipped with two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards and one of the following combinations: • Two 32WSS cards and optionally, two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards • Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and optionally, two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards • Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panels • Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panels • Two 80-WXC-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panels Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel along with the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel. Transponders (TXPs) and muxponders (MXPs) can be installed in Slots 6 and 12 and, if amplification is not used, in any open slot. OPT-PRE 4-ch demux 4MD-xx.x OPT-PRE OPT-BST Line Line 96427 OPT-BST DCU DCU OSCM TCC TCC2 OSCM AIC-I AD-yB-xx.x AD-1C-xx.x AD-1C-xx.x AD-yB-xx.x By Ch Ch By 4-ch mux 4-ch demux 4MD-xx.x 4-ch mux11-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Note Although not required, 32DMX-O can be used in a ROADM node. Cisco TransportPlanner automatically chooses the demultiplexer card that is best for the ROADM node based on the network requirements. Figure 11-9 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node configuration with 32DMX cards installed. Figure 11-9 ROADM Node with 32DMX Cards Installed Figure 11-10 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node configuration with 40-WSS-C cards installed. OPT-PRE OPT-BST 32WSS DCU W Air ramp DCU E 32DMX Available TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM AIC-I OSCM TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Available 32DMX 32WSS OPT-BST OPT-PRE 24909811-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-10 ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed Figure 11-11 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR1-C cards installed. 249103 OPT-BST or OSC-CSM OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP 40-WSS-C DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx 40-DMX-C Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM or Blank AIC-I OSCM or Blank TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T 40-DMX-C 40-WSS-C OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP OPT-BST or OSC-CSM11-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-11 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Figure 11-12 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR1-C and booster amplifier cards installed. 248990 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Available 40-SMR1-C LCD Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6 40-SMR1-C Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 40-SMR1-C Available DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available 40-SMR1-C Available OSCM OSCM M AIC-I TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-12 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Note When you use the 40-SMR1-C card along with a booster amplifier, the OSCM card must be connected to the booster amplifier. Figure 11-13 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR2-C cards installed. 248992 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available 40-SMR1-C Booster (A) LCD Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Available Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel Cisco ONS 15454 Booster 40-SMR1-C DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available Available Available OSCM M AIC-I Empty TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC 15216 Odd Patch Panel Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-13 ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Cards Installed - 15454 - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 248991 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Available 40-SMR2-C LCD Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6 40-SMR2-C Available Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 40-SMR2-C Available DCM-xxx Air Ramp DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable Available Available Available Available Available Available 40-SMR2-C OSCM OSCM M AIC-I TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC Fibre Routing Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan Tray 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-14 shows the layout of a 80-channel colored two-degree ROADM node. Figure 11-14 80-Channel Colored Two-Degree ROADM Node 248861 Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available Preamplifier Booster Available Available OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 1 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel11-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations The 80-WXC-C cards are inserted in Slots 3 and 14, and function in the bidirectional mode. Figure 11-15 shows the layout of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel colored two-degree ROADM node. Figure 11-15 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Colored Two-degree ROADM Node 333812 Shelf 2 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray 15216 Odd Patch Panel Shelf 1 15216 Even Patch Panel TNC/TSC Booster Preamplifier 80-WXC-C TNC/TSC Power module LCD Power module Available Available ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray 15216-MD-40-ODD 15216-MD-40-EVEN TNC/TSC Preamplifier Booster 80-WXC-C TNC/TSC Power module LCD Power module Available Available Cable guide Cable guide Air filter Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-16 shows the layout of an 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with omni-directional side. Figure 11-16 80-Channel n-degree ROADM node with Omni-directional Side 248865 Preamplifier Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx Any other side TCC2 OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2 0-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel11-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-17 shows the layout of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with omni-directional side. Figure 11-17 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel n-degree ROADM node with Omni-directional Side Figure 11-18 shows the layout of a 40-channel n-degree ROADM node with a 40-WXC-C based colorless side. 248882 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Preamplifier Preamplifier 80-WXC-C LCD Available Available Cable guide Air filter 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel11-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-18 40-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with 40-WXC-C Based Colorless Side The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-WXC-C card and function as colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer units. 248858 Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available Available Available OSCM 8 AIC-I Empty TCC2P 0-WXC-C 8 40-WXC-C 0-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray11-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-19 shows the layout of a 40-channel four-degree ROADM node with a 40-SMR2-C based colorless side. Figure 11-19 40-Channel Four-degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Based Colorless Side The 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 3 and the 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 5. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR2-C card and function as the colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer units. 248878 DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P OSC-CSM OSC-CSM 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C Available Available OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-20 shows the layout for an 80-channel colorless ROADM node. Figure 11-20 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node An 80 channel colorless two-degree ROADM node requires the following cards: 80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, 15216-MD-48-EVEN, preamplifiers, and boosters. The 80-WXC-C cards can be used at two levels; level1 (L1) and level2 (L2). The L1 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 3 and the L1 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 5. The L2 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 12 and the L2 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 14. 248863 Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available 8 Empty AIC-I Empty TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing ranel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray Side A Side B 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216-MD-40-ODD 15216-MD-40-EVEN 15216Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-21 shows an example of the optical signal flow in an 80-channel colorless two-degree ROADM node from Side A to Side B using 80-WXC-C cards. The optical signal flow from Side B to Side A follows an identical path. Figure 11-21 80-Channel Colorless Two-degree ROADM Node 248860 1x9 DMX L2 1x9 DMX L1 1x9 MUX L2 1x9 DMX L2 1x9 MUX L2 1x9 MUX L1 1x9 MUX L1 1x9 DMX L1 P Booster Side A Side B OSC Booster OSC DMX-E DMX-O MUX-E MUX-O DMX-O DMX-E MUX-O MUX-E P 1 The booster on Side A receives the composite optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical payload and sends the payload to the preamplifier on Side A. 2 The preamplifier compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload and sends it to the L1 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer). 3 Up to eight colorless ports are available on the L1 80-WXC-C card if no colored wavelength is terminated. In Figure 11-21, two EAD ports are connected to 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN units where the colored odd and even wavelengths are dropped. The express wavelengths are sent to the L1 80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) on Side B where the wavelengths are multiplexed with other colored or colorless wavelengths. 4 The L1-80-WXC-C card on Side B sends the composite signal to the booster on Side B. 5 The booster on Side B receives the composite optical signal, adds the optical service channel to the optical payload and sends it to the transmission line. 6 It is possible to configure more colorless ports by cascading the 80-WXC-C cards at two levels. For example, to get 14 colorless ports connect one of the EAD ports of the L1 80-WXC-C card to another 80-WXC-C cards at level 2. There are five colorless ports on the L1 80-WXC-C card and nine colorless ports on the L2 80-WXC-C card. To achieve an 80 channel colorless configuration, connect nine L2 80-WXC-C cards to the nine EAD ports of the L1 80-WXC-C card.11-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-22 shows the layout for an 80-channel colorless ROADM node with OPT-RAMP-C cards. Figure 11-22 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node with OPT-RAMP-C Card 248874 Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C OPT-RAMP-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray Side A Side B 15216-MD-40-ODD 15216-MD-40-EVEN Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C OPT-RAMP-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-23 shows an example of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel two degree colorless ROADM node. Figure 11-23 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Two-degree Colorless ROADM Node The L1 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 4 and the L1 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) is inserted in Slot 6. The L2 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 2 and the L2 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) is inserted in Slot 4. 248873 Shelf 1 Shelf 2 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray 15216-MD-40-ODD 15216-MD-40-EVEN TNC/TSC Booster Preamplifier 80-WXC-C TNC/TSC Power module Power module 80-WXC-C LCD ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel TNC/TSC Preamplifier Booster 80-WXC-C TNC/TSC Power module Power module 80-WXC-C LCD Cable guide Air filter Cable guide Air filter 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 1 2 1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-24 shows an example of a ROADM optical signal flow from Side A to Side B using the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C cards. The optical signal flow from Side B to Side A follows an identical path through the Side B OSC-CSM and 32WSS or 40-WSS-C cards. In this example, OSC-CSM cards are installed, hence OPT-BSTs are not needed. Figure 11-24 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 32WSS or 40-WSS-C Card Figure 11-25 shows an example of an ROADM optical signal flow from Side A to Side B using the 40-SMR1-C card. The optical signal flow from Side B to Side A follows an identical path through the Side B booster and 40-SMR1-C card. 1 The OSC-CSM receives the optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical payload and sends the payload to the OPT-PRE module. 2 The OPT-PRE compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload, and sends it to the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE. 3 The 32WSS or 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE splits the signal into two components. The 80 percent component is sent to the DROP-TX port and the 20 percent component is sent to the EXP-TX port. 4 The drop component goes to the 32DMX card or 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card where it is demultiplexed and dropped. 5 The express wavelength aggregate signal goes to the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE on the other side where it is demultiplexed. Channels are stopped or forwarded based upon their switch states. Forwarded wavelengths are merged with those coming from the ADD path and sent to the OSC-CSM module. 6 The OSC-CSM combines the multiplexed payload with the OSC and sends the signal out the transmission line. 32-ch demux Side B OSC-CSM 115228 Side A OSC-CSM OSC Side B 32WSS Side A 32WSS 80/20 Side B 32DMX Add Add Drop 2 slots 1 slot Side B OPT-PRE Side B Line Side A OPT-PRE Side A Line 32-ch demux Side A 32DMX Drop 1 slot 32R_OAM 80/20 2 slots 32R_OAM 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 6 6 4 4 OSC11-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-25 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 40-SMR1-C Card 11.1.4 Hub Node A hub node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards and one of the following combinations: • Two 32MUX-O cards and two 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards • Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards 1 The booster receives the optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical payload and sends the payload to the preamplifier module within the 40-SMR1-C card. 2 The preamplifier module compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload, and sends it to the 70/30 splitter within the 40-SMR1-C card. 3 The 70/30 splitter splits the signal into two components. The 70 percent component is sent to the DROP-TX port and the 30 percent component is sent to the EXP-TX port. 4 The drop component goes to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD card where it is demultiplexed and dropped. 5 The express wavelength aggregate signal goes to the 40-SMR1-C card on the other side where it is demultiplexed. Channels are stopped or forwarded based upon their switch states. Forwarded wavelengths are merged with those coming from the ADD path and sent to the booster module. 6 The booster combines the multiplexed payload with the OSC, amplifies it, and sends the signal out the transmission line. 276454 Side B Booster OSC Side B Line Side B 40-SMR1-C Side A 40-SMR1-C Side A Booster OSC Side A Line Side B MUX 15216-MD-40-ODD 70/30 70/30 Side A DMX 15216-MD-40-ODD Side B DMX 15216-MD-40-ODD Side A MUX 15216-MD-40-ODD Drop Drop 1 2 4 5 5 6 3 2 3 4 6 111-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations • Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and two 40-DMX-C or 40DMX-CE cards • Two 40-SMR1-C and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux patch panel) • Two 40-SMR2-C and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD card along with the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD card. Note The configuration for a hub node using 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards is identical to the ROADM node, except that there is no patchcord connecting the two 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards. For more details on the ROADM node configuration, see the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10. Note The 32WSS/40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 32DMX/32DMX-L/40-DMX-C/ 40-DMX-CE cards are normally installed in ROADM nodes, but they can also be installed in hub and terminal nodes. If the cards are installed in a hub node, the 32WSS/32WSS-L/ 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE express ports (EXP RX and EXP TX) are not cabled. A dispersion compensation unit (DCU) can also be added, if necessary. Figure 11-26 shows a hub node configuration with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards installed. 11-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-26 Hub Node Configuration Example with 32-Channel C-Band Cards Figure 11-27 shows a 40-channel hub node configuration with 40-WSS-C cards installed. OPT-BST W OPT-PRE W 32MUX-O DCU Air ramp DCU 32DMX-O TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM W AIC-I OSCM E TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 32DMX-O 32MUX-O OPT-PRE E OPT-BST E 24909411-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-27 Hub Node Configuration Example with 40-WSS-C Cards Figure 11-28 shows the channel flow for a hub node. Up to 32 channels from the client ports are multiplexed and equalized onto one fiber. Then, multiplexed channels are transmitted to the OPT-BST amplifier. The OPT-BST output is combined with an output signal from the OSCM card and transmitted to the other side. Received signals are divided between the OSCM card and an OPT-PRE card. Dispersion compensation is applied to the signal received by the OPT-PRE amplifier, and it is then sent to the 32DMX-O card, which demultiplexes and attenuates the input signal. OPT-BST or OSC-CSM OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP 40-WSS-C DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx 40-DMX-C TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM or Blank AIC-I Blank TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP Blank or TXP/MXP 249102 Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T11-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-28 Hub Node Channel Flow Example 11.1.5 Anti-ASE Node In a mesh ring network, the ONS 15454 requires a node configuration that prevents ASE accumulation and lasing. An anti-ASE node can be created by configuring a hub node or an OADM node with some modifications. No channels can travel through the express path, but they can be demultiplexed and dropped at the channel level on one side and added and multiplexed on the other side. The hub node is the preferred node configuration when some channels are connected in pass-through mode. For rings that require a limited number of channels, combine AD-xB-xx.x and 4MD-xx.x cards, or cascade AD-xC-xx.x cards. See Figure 11-8 on page 11-10. Figure 11-29 shows an anti-ASE node that uses all wavelengths in the pass-through mode. Use Cisco TransportPlanner to determine the best configuration for anti-ASE nodes. Client equipment 32DMX-0 32MUX-0 32MUX-0 32DMX-0 OPT-PRE OPT-BST OPT-PRE West side East side OPT-BST Line Line 96426 DCU OSCM TCC TCC2 OSCM AIC-I DCU11-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-29 Anti-ASE Node Channel Flow Example 11.1.6 Line Amplifier Node A line amplifier node is a single ONS 15454 node that is used to amplify the optical signal in long spans. The line amplifier node can be equipped with one of the following sets of cards: • Two OPT-PRE cards, two OPT-BST cards, and two OSCM cards • Two OPT-PRE cards and two OSC-CSM cards • Two OPT-AMP-17-C cards and two OSCM cards • Two OPT-AMP-C cards and two OSCM cards Attenuators might also be required between each preamplifier and OPT-BST amplifier to match the optical input power value and to maintain the amplifier gain tilt value. Two OSCM cards are connected to the OPT-BST cards to multiplex the OSC signal with the pass-though channels. If the node does not contain a booster card, OSC-CSM cards must be installed instead of OSCM cards. Figure 11-30 shows an example of a line amplifier node configuration using OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, and OSCM cards. 4-ch demux 4MD-xx.x Line Express path open Line 96429 DCU DCU OSCM TCC TCC2 OSCM AIC-I B1 Ch Ch B1 4-ch mux 4-ch demux 4MD-xx.x 4-ch mux11-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Configurations Figure 11-30 Line Amplifier Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and Cisco ONS 15454 M2 11.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node The OSC regeneration node is added to the DWDM networks for two purposes: • To electrically regenerate the OSC channel whenever the span links are 37 dB or longer and payload amplification and add/drop capabilities are not present. Cisco TransportPlanner places an OSC regeneration node in spans longer than 37 dB. The span between the OSC regeneration node and the next DWDM network site cannot be longer than 31 dB. • To add data communications network (DCN) capability wherever needed within the network. OSC regeneration nodes require two OSC-CSM cards, as shown in Figure 11-31. The cards are installed in each side of the shelf. 248987 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Preamplifier (A) Booster (A) LCD Cisco ONS 15454 M6 LCD Booster (B) Preamplifier (B) Cable guide 1 2 3 TNC/TSC Preamplifier (B) Preamplifier (A) Cisco ONS 15454 M2 LCD 1 2 3 TNC/TSC OPT-AMP-C (B) OPT-AMP-C (A) Air filter11-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Figure 11-31 OSC Regeneration Line Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, and Cisco ONS 15454 M2 Figure 11-32 shows the OSC regeneration line node signal flow. Figure 11-32 OSC Regeneration Line Node Flow 11.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can be equipped in the following network element type configurations: • C-band odd systems: 248988 ECU 1 2 3 4567 8 Fan tray TNC/TSC TNC/TSC Power module Power module Available Available Available OSC-CSM (A) LCD Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Cisco ONS 15454 M2 OSC-CSM (B) Available Cable guide LCD 1 2 3 TNC/TSC OSC-CSM (B) OSC-CSM-C (A) Air filter Cisco ONS 15454 OSC-CSM Available DCU Air Ramp DCU Av TCC2/TCC2P ailable Available Available Available Available Available OSC-CSM Available Available Available Av AIC-I TCC2/TCC2P ailable Available Fan Tray Fibre Routing Panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 115255 Fiber Fiber Fiber Fiber Side B OSC-CSM Side A OSC-CSM Side B Side A COM-TX Line-TX Side B Side A COM-RX Line-RX Side B Side A COM-RX Side B Side A Side B Side A Side B Side A COM-TX11-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards – C-band terminal site with 32-MUX-O and 32-DMX-O cards – C-band hub node with 32-MUX-O and 32-DMX-O cards – C-band fixed OADM node – C-band line site – C-band 32-channel reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) – C-band terminal site using a 32-WSS and 32-DMX cards – C-band flexible terminal site using AD-xC cards – C-band hub node using a 32-WSS and 32-DMX cards – C-band 40-channel ROADM – C-band terminal site using a 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards – C-band terminal site using 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards – C-band hub node using a 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards – C-band up to 4 degree mesh node – C-band up to 8 degree mesh node – C-band multiring/mesh with MMU node – C-band 4 degree multiring/mesh node (MMU based) • C-band odd and even systems: – C-band 64-channel terminal site – C-band 72-channel terminal site – C-band 80-channel terminal site – C-band 64-channel hub site – C-band 72-channel hub site – C-band 80-channel hub site – C-band 64-channel ROADM site – C-band 72-channel ROADM site – C-band 80-channel ROADM site The following amplifier cards are defined as booster or preamplifiers: • Booster: – OPT-BST – OPT-BST-E – OPT-AMP-17-C – OPT-AMP-C • Preamplifier: – OPT-PRE – OPT-AMP-C – OPT-BST – OPT-BST-E11-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Note When the booster is not needed, it must be replaced with an OSC-CSM card. The maximum number of shelves that can be aggregated in a multishelf node are: • Eight, if the MS-ISC-100T switch card is used. • Twelve, if an external Catalyst 2950 switch is used. 11.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node When the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is equipped in an add/drop node, the booster amplifier is mandatory and cannot be replaced by an OSC-CSM card. The preamplifier is an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-C card, and must be cabled as an unidirectional card. Note that the COM-TX and LINE-RX ports must not be used for any other connections. If a single module ROADM 40-SMR-1-C is used as an add/drop card, a preamplifier is not required. If a single module ROADM 40-SMR-2-C is used as an add/drop card, both the preamplifier and booster are not required. Figure 11-33 shows the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in an add/drop node. Figure 11-33 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node When required, a DCN extension can be used on A/D Side (i) in Figure 11-33. Side (i) in Figure 11-33 can be equipped with the following cards: • WSS + DMX • AD-xC • 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C + MUX + DMX • Single module ROADM 11.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be equipped in a line site node with a booster amplifier in the following configurations: OSCM DCU OPT-RAMP A/D Side (i) Side (i) Booster 247380 DCU Pump Pre-amp11-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards • OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E can be used as booster in a line site node with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE. The booster cards need to be cabled as bidirectional units. Figure 11-34 shows the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in a line site configuration. Figure 11-34 OPT-RAMP-C Card or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Configuration • The OPT-AMP-C can be used as a booster in a line site node with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and needs to be cabled as a bidirectional unit. An additional DCU unit can be equipped between the OPT-AMP-C DC ports. Figure 11-35 shows a line site configured with OPT-AMP-C card and an additional DCU unit. Figure 11-35 Line Site Configured with OPT-AMP-C • A line site can be configured with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on one side only. Figure 11-36 shows the line site configured with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE on side A only. The booster is configured on side B. OSCM DCU OPT-RAMP Side B Booster Booster OPT-RAMP 247377 OSCM DCU Pump Pump OSCM DCU OPT-RAMP Side B Booster OPT-RAMP 247378 OSCM DCU DCU Pump Pump OPT-AMP-C11-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card Figure 11-36 Line Site with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE On One Side In all configurations, the booster amplifier facing the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is mandatory for safety reasons. 11.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card The PSM card supports the following node configurations: • 11.3.1 Channel Protection • 11.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection • 11.3.3 Line Protection • 11.3.4 Standalone 11.3.1 Channel Protection In a channel protection configuration, the PSM card is used in conjunction with a TXP/MXP card. The PSM card in a channel protection configuration can be used in any site apart from a terminal site. Figure 11-37 shows the DWDM functional view of a PSM card in channel protection configuration. OSCM DCU OPT-RAMP Side A Side B Booster 247379 DCU Pump OPT-AMP-C OSCM11-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card Figure 11-37 PSM Channel Protection Configuration In this configuration, the COM-RX and COM-TX ports of the PSM card are connected to the TXP/MXP trunk ports. This configuration is applicable to an n-degree MSTP node, for example, a two-degree ROADM, an n-degree ROADM, or an OADM node. The example block diagram shows a two-degree node with Side A and Side B as the two sides. The Side A and Side B fiber-stage block can be DWDM cards that are used to amplify transmitted or received signal (see the “11.5.1.1 Fiber Stage” section on page 11-45 for the list of cards). The Side A and Side B add/drop stage block can be DWDM cards that can add and drop traffic (see the “11.5.1.2 A/D Stage” section on page 11-47 for the list of cards). In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a TXP/MXP trunk port is split by the PSM card on to the W-TX and P-TX ports. The W-TX and P-TX ports are connected to the ADD-RX ports of the add/drop stage cards in Side A and Side B respectively. The add/drop stage cards multiplex traffic on Side A and Side B line ports that become the working and protect paths respectively. In the receive direction, the W-RX and P-RX ports of the PSM card are connected to the DROP-TX ports of the add/drop stage cards on Side A and Side B respectively. The add/drop stage cards demultiplex traffic received from Side A and Side B line ports that are the working and protect paths respectively. The PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports to be transmitted to the COM-RX port of the PSM card. Note All traffic multiplexed or demultiplexed by the two add/drop stage cards is not protected. Fiber stage card COM-RX COM-TX COM-TX COM-RX EXP-RX DROP-TX ADD-RX Fiber stage card Side A Side A Side B Side B TXP/MXP TX RX Trunk port Working path Protect path W-RX PSM LINE-RX LINE-TX A/D stage card A/D stage card EXP-TX EXP-RX EXP-TX COM-RX COM-TX COM-RX COM-TX LINE-RX LINE-TX ADD-RX DROP-TX W-TX P-TX P-RX COM-RX COM-TX 1X2 Switch 50/50 Splitter 24308711-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 11.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection The PSM card performs multiplex section protection when connected between a multiplexer/demultiplexer card in a terminal site. The multiplexer/demultiplexer stage can be built using WSS and DMX or 40MUX and 40DMX cards. The terminal sites can be 50/100 Ghz band. The number of supported channels can therefore be 32/40 or 72/80. Figure 11-38 shows the block diagram of a PSM card in multiplex section protection configuration. Figure 11-38 PSM Multiplex Section Protection Configuration In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a TXP trunk port is multiplexed by the Side A multiplexer. The PSM card splits traffic on to the W-TX and P-TX ports, which are independently amplified by two separated booster amplifiers. In the receive direction, the signal on the line ports is preamplified by two separate preamplifiers and the PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports to be transmitted to the COM-RX port of the PSM card. The received signal is then demultiplexed to a TXP card. The presence of a booster amplifier is not mandatory. However, if a DCN extension is used, the W-TX and P-TX ports of the PSM card can be connected directly to the line. The presence of a preamplifier is also not mandatory. Note The PSM card cannot be used with Raman amplification in a line protection or section protection configuration. 11.3.3 Line Protection In a line protection configuration, the working and protect ports of the PSM card are connected directly to the external line. This configuration is applicable to any MSTP node that is configured as a terminal site. The multiplexer/demultiplexer stage can be built using WSS and DMX, 40MUX and 40DMX, COM-TX COM-RX ADD-RX DROP-TX Side A Mux/Demux Working Path Amplifier TXP/MXP TX RX Trunk port Working path Protect path W-RX PSM COM-RX COM-TX LINE-RX LINE-TX W-TX P-RX P-TX COM-TX COM-RX 1X2 Switch 50/50 Splitter Protect Path Amplifier COM-RX COM-TX LINE-RX LINE-TX 24308811-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 40-SMR1-C and 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, or 40-SMR2-C and 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD units. The terminal sites can be 50/100 Ghz band. The number of supported channels can therefore be 32/40 or 72/80. Figure 11-39 shows the block diagram of a PSM card in line protection configuration. Figure 11-39 PSM Line Protection Configuration In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a transponder trunk port is multiplexed by the Side A multiplexer and amplified by a booster amplifier. The Line-TX port of the amplifier is connected to the COM-RX port of the PSM card. The PSM card splits traffic received on the COM-RX port on to the W-TX and P-TX ports, which form the working and protect paths. In the receive direction, the PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports to be transmitted to the COM-RX port of the PSM card. The received signal is then preamplified and demultiplexed to the TXP card. The presence of a booster amplifier is not mandatory. However, if a DCN extension is used, the COM-RX port of the PSM card is connected to the multiplex section. The presence of a preamplifier is also not mandatory; the COM-TX port of the PSM card can be connected to the demultiplexer. Note The PSM card cannot be used with Raman amplification in a line protection or section protection configuration. 11.3.4 Standalone In a standalone configuration, the PSM card can be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations. In this configuration, the PSM card provides only basic functionality, such as, protection against a fiber cut, optical safety, and automatic laser shutdown (ALS). It does not provide other functionalities such as, automatic power control (APC), automatic node setup (ANS), network and node alarm correlation, circuit management, and so on. COM-TX COM-RX ADD-RX DROP-TX TXP/MXP Side A Mux/Demux TX RX Trunk port Working path Protect path W-RX PSM W-TX P-RX P-TX COM-TX COM-RX 1X2 Switch 50/50 Splitter LINE-RX COM-TX LINE-TX COM-RX Side A Amplifier 24308911-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Multishelf Node 11.4 Multishelf Node In a multishelf configuration, the ONS 15454-M6 node or the ONS 15454-DWDM node with TCC3 card as the node controller can manage up to 29 subtending shelves as a single entity. The subtending shelves can be 15454-M6 or 15454-DWDM. The node controller is the main shelf with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards running the multishelf functions. Each subtending shelf must be equipped with TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, which run the shelf functions. For internal data exchange between the node controller shelf and subtending shelves, the node controller shelf must be equipped with redundant MS-ISC-100T cards or, as an alternative, the Catalyst 2950 switch. We recommend that you use the MS-ISC-100T cards. If using the Catalyst 2950, it is installed on one of the multishelf racks. All subtending shelves must be located in the same site at a maximum distance of 100 meters or 328 feet from the Ethernet switches used to support the communication LAN. Figure 11-40 shows an example of a multishelf node configuration. Figure 11-40 Multishelf Node Configuration 145236 Air Ramp Storage Air Ramp PDP Air Ramp "Y" Cable 15216 "Y" Cable 15216 Storage DCU 15216 Patch panel Patch panel MSTP - TXP/MXP MSTP - DWDM ETSI MSTP - TXP/MXP or MSPP MSTP - TXP/MXP Air Ramp MSTP - TXP/MXP Air Ramp MSTP - TXP/MXP ETSI MSTP - TXP/MXP or MSPP MSTP - TXP/MXP Air Ramp MSTP - TXP/MXP Air Ramp MSTP - TXP/MXP11-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Multishelf Node A multishelf node has a single public IP address for all client interfaces (Cisco Transport Controller [CTC], Transaction Language One [TL1], Simple Network Management Protocol [SNMP], and HTTP); a client can only connect to the node controller shelf, not to the subtending shelves. The user interface and subtending shelves are connected to a patch panel using straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cables. The node controller shelf has the following functions: • IP packet routing and network topology discovery at the node controller level. • Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) centralized on the node controller shelf. The subtending shelves have the following functions: • Overhead circuits are not routed within a multishelf node but are managed at the subtending controller shelf only. To use overhead bytes, the AIC-I must be installed on the subtending shelf where it is terminated. • Each subtending shelf will act as a single shelf node that can be used as a timing source line, TCC/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock, or building integrated timing supply (BITS) source line. 11.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout Multishelf configurations are configured by Cisco TransportPlanner and are automatically discovered by the CTC software. In a typical multishelf installation, all optical units are equipped on the node controller shelf and TXP/MXP cards are equipped in the aggregated subtended shelves. In addition, all empty slots in the node controller shelf can be equipped with TXP/MXP cards. In a DWDM mesh network, up to eight optical sides can be configured with client and optical cards installed in different shelves to support mesh and ring-protected signal output. Note When a DWDM ring or network has to be managed through a Telcordia operations support system (OSS), every node in the network must be set up as multi-shelf. OLA sites and nodes with one shelf must be set up as "multi-shelf stand-alone" to avoid the use of LAN switches. 11.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations A multishelf node provides the same communication channels as a single-shelf node: • OSC links terminate on OSCM/OSC-CSM cards. Two links are required between each ONS 15454 node. An OSC link between two nodes cannot be substituted by an equivalent generic communications channel/data communications channel (GCC/DCC) link terminated on the same pair of nodes. OSC links are mandatory and they can be used to connect a node to a gateway network element (GNE). • GCC/DCC links terminate on TXP/MXP cards. The maximum number of DCC/GCC/OSC terminations that are supported in a multishelf node is 48. Note Optical Service Channel can be created on the OC3 port of the TNC card.11-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides 11.5 Optical Sides From a topological point of view, all DWDM units equipped in an MSTP node belongs to a side. A side can be identified by a letter (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H), or by the ports (called as side line ports, see 11.5.2 Side Line Ports, page 11-47) that are physically connected to the spans. An MSTP node can be connected to a maximum of 8 different spans. Each side identifies one of the spans the MSTP node is connected to. Note Side A and Side B replace “west” and “east” when referring to the two sides of the ONS 15454 shelf. Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6 (formerly “west”), and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17 (formerly “east”). The line direction port parameter, East-to-West and West-to-East, has been removed. Sides are viewed and managed from the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tab in CTC. 11.5.1 Optical Side Stages All MSTP nodes can be modelled according to Figure 11-41. Figure 11-41 Interconnecting Sides Conceptual View According to Figure 11-41, each MSTP node side includes DWDM units that can be conceptually divided into three stages. • Fiber stage—The set of DWDM cards with ports that directly or indirectly face the span. • A/D stage—The add/drop stage. 159460 Fiber Stage Side A A/D Stage Side E Interconnecting sides I/F TXP/MXP Stage Side F Side B Side G Side C Side H Side D11-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides • TXP/MXP stage—The virtual grouping of all TXP or MXP cards with signals multiplexed or demultiplexed to and from the physical fiber stage. 11.5.1.1 Fiber Stage The fiber stage includes DWDM cards that are used to amplify transmitted or received signals and cards that are used to add optical supervision channels. The fiber stage cards are: • Booster amplifier cards that directly connect to the span, such as: – OPT-BST – OPT-BST-E – OPT-BST-L – OPT-AMP-C, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode – OPT-AMP-L, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode – OPT-AMP-17-C, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode • Preamplifier cards, such as: – OPT-PRE – OPT-AMP-C, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode – OPT-AMP-L, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode – OPT-AMP-17-C, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode • OSC cards, such as: – OSCM – OSC-CSM • OPT-RAMP-C card Table 11-1 shows the commonly deployed fiber stage layouts supported by DWDM mesh nodes. In the table, OPT-BST includes the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards. OPT-AMP includes the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards configured in either OPT-PRE or OPT-LINE mode. Note In the table, L and C suffix is not reported because C-band and L-band amplifiers cannot be mixed in the same layout.11-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides Table 11-1 Supported Fiber Stage Configurations Layout Cards Configurations A OPT-BST <-> OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode) • OPT-BST OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or OSC-CSM LINE ports • OPT-BST LINE ports connected to the span • OPT-BST COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode) or OPT-PRE COM-RX ports • OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode) or OPT-PRE LINE-TX or COM-TX ports connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX port in a ROADM node) • OPT-BST COM-RX ports connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a ROADM node) B OPT-AMP (OPT-BST mode) <-> OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode) • OPT-AMP (BST) OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or OSC-CSM LINE ports • OPT-AMP (BST) LINE ports connected to the span • OPT-AMP (BST) COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP (PRE)/OPT-PRE COM-RX ports • OPT-AMP (PRE)/OPT-PRE LINE-TX/COM-TX port connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX port in a ROADM node) • OPT-AMP (BST) COM-RX port connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a ROADM node) C OSC-CSM <-> OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP(OPT-PRE mode) • OSC-CSM LINE ports connected to the span • OSC-CSM COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP COM-RX ports • OPT-AMP(PRE)/OPT-PRE LINE-TX/COM-TX port connected to the next stage (for example, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX ports in ROADM) • OSC-CSM COM-RX port connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a ROADM node) D OPT-BST • OPT-BST OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or OSC-CSM LINE ports • OPT-BST LINE ports connected to the span • OPT-BST COM ports connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM node) 11-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides 11.5.1.2 A/D Stage The A/D stage includes DWDM cards that can add and drop traffic. The A/D stage is divided into three node types: • Mesh nodes—ONS 15454 nodes configured in multishelf mode can connect to eight different sides. For more detail on mesh node, see 11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks, page 11-53. • Legacy—Half of a ROADM node or an OADM node with cascaded AD-xB-xx-x or AD-xC-xx.x cards • Non-A/D—A line node or a side that does not have A/D capability is included in the A/D stage Stages are built by active cards and patchcords. However, the interconnecting sides are completed by the mesh patch panels (four-degree patch panel or eight-degree patch panel) in mesh nodes, or by patchcords connected to EXP-RX/EXP-TX ports in legacy nodes. 11.5.2 Side Line Ports Side line ports are ports that are physically connected to the spans. Side line ports can be: • All ports terminating the fiber stage and physically labeled as LINE, such as ports on the following cards: – Booster amplifier (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L cards, and the OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-L, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards when provisioned in OPT-LINE mode) – OSC-CSM – OPT-RAMP-C • All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations, such as: – Booster amplifier LINE-RX and LINE-TX ports – OSC-CSM LINE-RX and LINE-TX ports – 40-WXC-C COM-RX and COM-TX ports – MMU EXP-A-RX and EXP-A-TX ports • All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations in a line node, such as: E OPT-AMP (OPT-BST mode) • OPT-AMP OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or OSC-CSM LINE ports • OPT-AMP LINE ports connected to the span • OPT-AMP COM ports connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM node) F OSC-CSM • OSC-CSM LINE ports connected to the span • OSC-CSM COM ports connected to the next stage (for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM node) Table 11-1 Supported Fiber Stage Configurations (continued) Layout Cards Configurations11-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides – Preamplifier (OPT-PRE card and the OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-L, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards when provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) COM-RX and COM-TX ports – Booster amplifier COM-TX port – OSC-CSM COM-TX port • All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations in a 40-channel MUX/DMX terminal node, such as: – 40-MUX-C COM-TX port – 40-DMX-C COM-RX port • All ports that can be physically connected to the external span when PSM cards implement line protection: – PSM W-TX and W-RX ports – PSM P-TX and P-RX ports Note PSM card will support two sides A(w) and A(p). 11.5.3 Optical Side Configurations You can use the following Side IDs depending on the type of node layout: • In legacy nodes (that is, a node with no provisioned or installed 40-WXC-C cards), the permissible Side IDs are only A and B. • In four-degree mesh nodes with four or less 40-WXC-C cards installed, the permissible Side IDs are A, B, C, and D. • In eight-degree mesh nodes with eight or less 40-WXC-C cards installed, the allowed Side IDs are A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H. The system automatically assigns Side IDs when you import the CTP XML configuration file into CTC. You can create a side manually using CTC or TL1 if the following conditions are met: • You use a permissible side identifier, A through H. • The shelf contains a TX and an RX side line port (see the “11.5.2 Side Line Ports” section on page 11-47). • The side line ports are not connected to an internal patchcord. Note We do not recommend that you manually create or modify ONS 15454 optical sides. The following tables show examples of how the system automatically assigns Side IDs for common DWDM layouts. Table 11-2 shows a standard ROADM shelf with Sides A and B provisioned. The shelf is connected to seven shelves containing TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.11-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides Table 11-3 shows a protected ROADM shelf. In this example, Side A and B are Slots 1 through 6 in Shelves 1 and 2. 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE/40-DMX-C or 40-WSS-CE/40-DMX-CE cards are installed in Sides A and B. Slots 12 through 17 in Shelves 1 and 2 contain TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards. Table 11-4 shows a four-degree mesh node. Side A is Shelf 1, Slots 1 through 6. Side B and C are Shelf 2, Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17, and Side D is Shelf 3, Slots 1 through 6. 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are installed in Sides A through D. Table 11-2 Multishelf ROADM Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WSS+DMX A WSS+DMX B 2 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 3 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — Table 11-3 Multishelf Protected ROADM Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WSS+DMX A TXP/MXP — 2 WSS+DMX B TXP/MXP — 3 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 4 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 5 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — Table 11-4 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 WXC Line Termination B WXC Line Termination C 3 WXC Line Termination D TXP/MXP — 4 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —11-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides Table 11-5 shows a protected four-degree mesh node example. In the example, Sides A through D are assigned to Slots 1 through 6 in Shelves 1 through 4. Table 11-6 shows a protected four-degree mesh node example. In the example, Sides A through D are assigned to Slots 1 through 4 in Shelves 1 through 4, and TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards are installed in Shelves 1 through 4, Slots 12-17, and Shelves 5 through 8, Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17. 5 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP — Table 11-4 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example (continued) Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side Table 11-5 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 WXC Line Termination B TXP/MXP — 3 WXC Line Termination C TXP/MXP — 4 WXC Line Termination D TXP/MXP — 5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — Table 11-6 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 WXC Line Termination B TXP/MXP — 3 WXC Line Termination C TXP/MXP — 4 WXC Line Termination D TXP/MXP — 5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —11-51 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides Table 11-7 shows a four-degree mesh node provisioned as an upgrade. In the example, Sides A through D are assigned to Slots 1 through 4. and 12 through 17 in Shelves 1and 2. 40-WXC-C cards in XC termination mode are installed in Sides A and B, and 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are installed in Sides C and D. Table 11-8 shows an eight-degree mesh node. In the example, Sides A through H are assigned to Slots 1 through 6 in Shelf 1, Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17 in Shelves 2 through 4, and Slots 1 through 6 in Shelf 5. 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are installed in Sides A through H. 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — Table 11-6 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example (continued) Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side Table 11-7 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC XC Termination A WXC XC Termination B 2 WXC Line Termination C WXC Line Termination D 3 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — Table 11-8 Multishelf Eight-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 WXC Line Termination B WXC Line Termination C 3 WXC Line Termination D WXC Line Termination E 4 WXC Line Termination F WXC Line Termination G 5 WXC Line Termination H TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —11-52 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Optical Sides Table 11-9 shows another eight-degree mesh node. In the example, Sides A through H are assigned to Slots 1 through 6 in all shelves (Shelves 1 through 8). 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are installed in Sides A through H. Table 11-10 shows a four-degree mesh node with a user-defined side. Because the software assigns sides consecutively, and because the mesh node is four-degrees, the side assigned to Shelf 5, Slots 1 through 6 is “Unknown.” Table 11-9 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 WXC Line Termination B TXP/MXP — 3 WXC Line Termination C TXP/MXP — 4 WXC Line Termination D TXP/MXP — 5 WXC Line Termination E TXP/MXP — 6 WXC Line Termination F TXP/MXP — 7 WXC Line Termination G TXP/MXP — 8 WXC Line Termination H TXP/MXP — Table 11-10 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node User-Defined Layout Example Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side 1 WXC Line Termination A TXP/MXP — 2 TXP/MXP — WXC Line Termination C 1 1. User-defined 3 WXC Line Termination D TXP/MXP — 4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 5 WXC Line Termination U 2 2. Unknown TXP/MXP — 6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP — 8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —11-53 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks ONS 15454 shelves can be configured in mesh DWDM networks using the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C wavelength cross-connect cards and four-degree patch panel or eight-degree patch panels. Mesh DWDM networks can also be configured using the 40-SMR2-C cards and the four-degree patch panel. ONS 15454 DWDM mesh configurations can be up to four degrees (four optical directions) when the four-degree patch panel is installed, and up to eight degrees (eight optical directions) when the eight-degree patch panel is installed. Two mesh node types are available, the line termination mesh node and the cross-connect (XC) termination mesh node. Note Mesh nodes using the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C card requires multishelf management. 11.6.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards The line termination mesh node is installed in native Software Release 9.2 mesh networks. Line termination mesh nodes can support between one and eight line terminations. Each line direction requires the following cards: 40-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE, a preamplifier and a booster. Within this configuration, the following substitutions can be used: • The 40-MUX-C cards can be replaced with 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards. • The OPT-BST cards can be replaced with OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-BST mode) and/or OPT-BST-E cards. • The OPT-PRE can be replaced with an OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-LINE mode) card. Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows: • The 40-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the preamplifier output port. • The 40-WXC-C COM-TX port is connected to the booster amplifier COM-RX port. • The 40-WXC-C DROP TX port is connected to the 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE COM-RX port. • The 40-WXC-C ADD-RX port is connected to the 40-MUX-C COM-TX port. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. Figure 11-42 shows one shelf from a line termination node.11-54 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-42 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf Figure 11-43 shows a functional block diagram of one line termination side using 40-WXC-C and 40-MUX-C cards. OPT-BST OPT-PRE 40-WXC-C DCU-xxx Air ramp DCU-xxx 40-MUX-C 40-DMX-C TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM AIC-I OSCM TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 40-DMX-C 40-MUX-C 40-WXC-C OPT-PRE OPT-BST 24910111-55 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-43 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-MUX-C Cards Figure 11-44 shows a functional block diagram line termination side using 40-WXC-C and 40-WSS-C cards. 40WXC 40-DMX-C Drop Add to/from PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 OPT-PRE AMP-BST 159332 OSCM DCM 40-MUX-C 70/3011-56 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-44 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-WSS-C Cards Figure 11-45 shows a functional block diagram of a node that interconnects a ROADM with MMU cards with two native line termination mesh sides. 40-WXC-C 40-DMX-C Drop Add OPT-PRE AMP-BST 159333 OSCM DCM 40-WSS-C 70/30 70/30 to/from PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-811-57 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-45 Line Termination Mesh Nodes—ROADM With MMU Cards 159336 ADD OPT-PRE OPT-BST Line OSCM DCM xxWSS MMU 70/30 xxDMX DROP xxDMX DROP 40-DMX-C DROP 40-DMX-C DROP 40-MUX-C ADD 40-MUX-C ADD ADD OPT-BST Line DCN Extension OSCM TCC TCC OPT-PRE DCM xxWSS MMU 70/30 OPT-PRE OPT-BST Line OSCM DCM OPT-BST Line OSCM OPT-PRE DCM 40-WXC-C Node A Node B 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C AMP-17-C PP-MESH-4 AMP-17-C 70/30 40-WXC-C 70/3011-58 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 11.6.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as an omni-directional side. The side that is configured as the omni-directional side is connected to a local multiplexer and demultiplexer that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions. In Figure 11-46 side D is configured as the omni-directional side. Wavelengths from the local multiplexer on side D is routed to sides A, B, or C by the patch panel. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C can be dropped on side D. The maximum number of omni-directional channels is 40. Figure 11-46 40-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless side where any wavelength can be added or dropped. The side that is configured as the colorless side is connected to two 80-WXC-C cards configured as a multiplexer and demultiplexer respectively. In Figure 11-47 side D is configured as the colorless side. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the add and drop ports of the 40-WXC-C cards and function as a colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer. A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the 80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) that is connected to the 40-WXC-C card. The wavelengths entering the 40-WXC-C card are sent to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer) and dropped at any of the nine output ports. 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C PP-MESH-4 248859 A C D B P P DMX MUX11-59 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-47 40-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless and omni-directional side. The side that is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side is connected to a multiplexer (80-WXC-C) and demultiplexer (80-WXC-C) that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions. Figure 11-48 shows the layout of a 40-channel n-degree ROADM node with colorless and omni-directional side. Colorless side 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C PP-MESH-4 248856 A C D B11-60 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-48 40-Channel n-Degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omni-directional Side In Figure 11-49 side D is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side. A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the 80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) and then routed to the preamplifier. The preamplifier sends the wavelengths to the 40-WXC-C card that is connected to the patch panel. The patch panel routes the wavelengths to sides A, B, or C. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C are dropped on side D. The incoming wavelengths from the 40-WXC-C card are sent to the preamplifier. The preamplifer amplifies the signal and sends it to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer). The wavelengths are then dropped at any of the nine output ports. 248876 DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available Available Available Preamplifier Preamplifier 8 Empty AIC-I Empty TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 40-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray11-61 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-49 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards Line termination mesh nodes using 80- WXC-C cards can support between one and eight line terminations. Each line direction requires the following units: 80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, and 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN, 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM, a preamplifier, and a booster. • The OPT-BST cards can be replaced with OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-BST mode) or OPT-BST-E cards. • The OPT-PRE can be replaced with an OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-LINE mode) card. Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows: • The 80-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the preamplifier output port. • The 80-WXC-C COM port is connected to the booster amplifier COM-RX port. • The 80-WXC-C DROP TX port is connected to the COM-RX (ODD+EVEN-RX) port of 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM. The ODD-TX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is connected to the COM-RX port of 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD; and the EVEN-TX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is connected to the COM-RX port of 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN. • The 80-WXC-C AD port is connected to the COM-TX (ODD+EVEN-TX) port of 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM. The ODD-RX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is connected to the COM-TX port of 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD; and the EVEN-RX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is connected to the COM-TX port of 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN. 80-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 80-WXC-C PP-MESH-4 248857 A C D B P P11-62 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks • The 80-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. Figure 11-50 shows the layout for a line termination node. Figure 11-50 Line Termination Node Figure 11-51 shows the functional block diagram of a four-degree line termination mesh node using 80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN. All the 80-WXC-C cards are in bidirectional mode. Wavelengths entering from side(i) can be routed to any of the other n-1 sides where n is defined by the PP MESH type. 248881 Booster Preamplifier DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available Preamplifier Booster Available Available OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel PP-MESH-4 1 1 2 2 1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel 2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-63 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-51 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram 11.6.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a omni-directional side. The side that is configured as the omni-directional side is connected to a local multiplexer and demultiplexer that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions. In Figure 11-52, side D is configured as the omni-directional side. Wavelengths from the local multiplexer on side D are routed to sides A, B, or C by the patch panel. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C are dropped on side D. 248880 PP-MESH-4 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C A C D B11-64 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-52 80-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless side where any wavelength can be added or dropped. The side that is configured as the colorless side is connected to two 80-WXC-C cards configured as a multiplexer and demultiplexer respectively. In Figure 11-53, side D is configured as the colorless side. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the add and drop ports of the 80-WXC-C cards as a colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer. A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the 80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) that is connected to the 80-WXC-C card. The wavelengths entering the 80-WXC-C card is passed to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer) and dropped at any of the nine output ports. 248864 DMX MUX 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C PP-MESH-4 A C D B P P11-65 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-53 80-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless and omni-directional side. The side that is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side is connected to a multiplexer (80-WXC-C) and demultiplexer (80-WXC-C) that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions. Figure 11-54 shows the layout of a 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with colorless and omnidirectional side. 249086 PP-MESH-4 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Colorless side 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C A C D B11-66 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-54 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omnidirectional Side In Figure 11-55 side D is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side. A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the 80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) and is then routed to the preamplifier. The preamplifier sends the wavelengths to the 80-WXC-C card that is connected to the patch panel. The patch panel routes the wavelengths to sides A, B, or C. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C can be dropped on side D. The incoming wavelengths from the 80-WXC-C card are sent to the preamplifier. The preamplifer amplifies the signal and sends it to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer). The wavelengths are then dropped at any of the nine output ports. 248875 DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx TCC2P Available Available Available Available Preamplifier Preamplifier OSCM OSCM 8 AIC-I TCC2P 0-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C Fiber routing panel 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Fan tray11-67 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-55 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node 11.6.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards Line termination mesh nodes using the 40-SMR2-C cards can support between one and four line terminations. Each line direction requires the 40-SMR2-C and 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD cards. Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD card along with the 40-SMR2-C card, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD card. Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows: • The 40-SMR2-C LINE-RX port is connected to the external line. • The 40-SMR2-C LINE-TX port is connected to the external line. • The 40-SMR2-C DROP TX port is connected to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (or 40-DMX-C) COM-RX port. • The 40-SMR2-C ADD-RX port is connected to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (or 40-DMX-C) COM-TX port. • The 40-SMR2-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. • The 40-SMR2-C EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port is connected to the mesh patch panel. Figure 11-56 shows the layout for a line termination node. PP-MESH-4 248862 A C D B P P 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C11-68 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-56 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf Figure 11-57 shows the functional block diagram of a four-degree line termination mesh node using 40-SMR2-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, and 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel. 276455 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C DCM-xxx DCM-xxx Av TCC2 ailable OSC-CSM Available Available OSC-CSM 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C Available OSCM OSCM M AIC-I TCC2 S-ISC MS-ISC Fibre Routing Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Air Ramp Fan Tray 1 1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel11-69 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-57 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram 11.6.4 XC Termination Mesh Node The XC termination mesh node, shown in Figure 11-58, is the second mesh node type. It is used to upgrade a non-mesh node to a mesh node or to interconnect two non-mesh nodes. The XC termination mesh nodes contain the following cards: • 40-WXC-C cards • OPT-AMP-17-C cards configured in OPT-PRE mode The XC termination mesh node is connected as follows: • The 40-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the MMU EXP-A-TX port. • The 40-WXC-C COM-TX port is connected to the MMU EXP-A-RX port. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the OPT-AMP-17-C COM-RX port. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the OPT-AMP-17-C COM-TX port. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. • The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the mesh patch panel. 276461 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 15454-PP-4-SMR MUX DDMUX DCU MUX MUX DCU MUX DDMUX DCU MUX MUX DCU 3 4 1 211-70 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-58 XC Termination Mesh Node Shelf 11.6.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts ONS 15454 mesh topologies require the installation of a four-degree patch panel, PP-MESH-4 (for 40-WXC-C cards) or 15454-PP-4-SMR (for 40-SMR2-C cards) or an eight-degree patch panel, PP-MESH-8 (for 40-WXC-C cards). If the four-degree patch panel is installed, mesh topologies of up to four degrees can be created. If the eight-degree patch panel is installed, mesh topologies of up to eight degrees can be created. The four-degree patch panel contains four 1x4 optical splitters, and the eight-degree patch panel contains eight 1x8 splitters. Each mesh patch panel contains a 2x8 splitter that is used for the test access transmit and receive ports. Figure 11-59 shows a block diagram for the PP-MESH-4 patch panel. OPT-AMP-xx OPT-AMP-xx 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C DCU-xxx Air ramp DCU-xxx TCC2 Blank Blank Blank TCC2 40-WXC-C OPT-AMP-xx OPT-AMP-xx 15970011-71 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-59 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Block Diagram At the mesh patch panel, the signal is split into four signals (if a four-degree patch panel is used) or eight signals (if an eight-degree patch panel is used). Figure 11-60 shows the signal flow at the four-degree PP-MESH-4 patch panel. 40-WXC-C cards connect to the four-degree patch panel at the EXP TX and COM RX ports. Figure 11-60 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Signal Flow 159335 EXP TX to all directions COM RX from all directions Test Access TX Ports Test Access RX Port 2x4 splitter #4 1x4 splitters LC connector MPO connector 159334 40-WXC-C Test Access RX Port Test Access TX Ports PP-MESH-4 EXP TX COM RX 40-WXC-C EXP TX COM RX 40-WXC-C EXP TX COM RX 40-WXC-C EXP TX COM RX11-72 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks The mesh patch panels interconnect 40-WXC-C cards to create mesh networks, including four-degree and eight-degree mesh topologies. In addition, shelves with 40-WXC-C cards can be configured with mesh patch panels to create multiring, MMU-based mesh nodes. 40-WXC-C cards can be installed in ROADM nodes with MMU cards to upgrade a two-degree MMU-based ROADM node into four-degree or eight-degree mesh nodes. Figure 11-61 shows the block diagram of the four-degree 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel connected to one 40-SMR2-C card. The 40-SMR2-C cards connect to the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel at the EXP RX ports. Figure 11-61 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Block Diagram You can use the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel to connect upto four 40-SMR2-C cards in a four-degree mesh node. The optical splitters inside the patch panel forward the output signal (EXP-TX port) of the 40-SMR2-C card on each side of the mesh node to the input port of the 40-SMR2-C cards on the other three sides of the mesh node. The 4x1 WXC block inside the 40-SMR2-C card selects which wavelength from which side must be propagated at the output of each side. Figure 11-60 shows the signal flow at the four-degree 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel. 40-SMR2-C cards connect to the four-degree patch panel at the EXP-TX and EXP-RX ports. 276456 OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX OSC-RX ADD-RX 6 ports OCM Block LINE TX LINE RX MONTX EXP-D EXP-B EXP-C EDFA 1 (Variable Gain) EDFA 2 (Fixed Gain) 30% 70% OSC DROP PD2 PD3 PD4 TAP TAP PD5 TAP PD8 PD7 OSC ADD TAP TAP TAP TAP PD6 4x1 WXC Block PD1 TAP TAP In D C B A In D C B A In C B A D In B A D C 4x PP 1x4 1x4 1x4 1x4 EXP-A11-73 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks Figure 11-62 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Signal Flow 11.6.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section Normally, multidegree mesh node use four or eight 40-WXC-C cards and a four-degree or eight-degree patch panel. Each of the 40-WXC-C cards uses a 40-MUX-C card to add wavelengths going to the span and a 40-DMX-C card to drop wavelengths coming in from the span. The 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards are connected to only one of the node directions. These cards can add/drop traffic only to/from the side that is associated to the 40-WXC-C card. The omni-directional configuration allows you to install a local multiplexer/demultiplexer that can add/drop traffic to/from any of the node directions. Figure 11-63 shows an example of how to set up a omni-directional add/drop configuration. By setting up a NE as shown in the figure, it is possible to connect the transmit ports of TXP or MXP cards to a 40-MUX-C card and then connect the output of the 40-MUX-C card to an OPT-BST card. The OPT-BST card then connects to a preferred 40-WXC-C card in the four-degree or eight-degree ROADM node (40-WXC-C connected to port 4 of PP-MESH-4, as shown in the figure). The patch panel splits the traffic coming from the OPT-BST card in all the node directions, through the software configuration. The wavelengths entering the 40-WXC-C cards (ports 1, 2, and 3) can be selectively sent out in any desired outbound direction. In the inbound direction, the patch panel on the preferred 40-WXC-C card, splits any of the wavelengths entering the NE through the 40-WXC-C cards (ports 1, 2, and 3). Through the software configuration, the wavelength can be passed to an OPT-PRE card or stopped. This whole configuration can be managed using a single IP address An example of using a mesh node for omni-directional add/drop section is shown in Figure 11-63. 276457 40-SMR2-C Test Access RX Port Test Access TX Ports EXP A EXP B EXP C EXP D 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 15454-PP-4-SMR 11-74 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-63 Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 11.7 DWDM Node Cabling DWDM node cabling is specified by the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table. The following sections provide examples of the cabling that you will typically install for common DWDM node types. Note The cabling illustrations shown in the following sections are examples. Always install fiber-optic cables based on the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site. 11.7.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling OSC link termination cabling include the following characteristics: • The OPT-BST and OSC-CSM cards are the only cards that directly interface with the line (span) fiber. • The OSCM card only carries optical service channels, not DWDM channels. • The OSCM and OSC-CSM cards cannot both be installed on the same side of the shelf (Side B or Side A). You can have different cards on each side, for example an OSCM card on Side A and an OSC-CSM card on Side B.11-75 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling • When an OPT-BST card and an OSC-CSM card are both used on the same side of the node, the OPT-BST card combines the supervision channel with the DWDM channels and the OSC-CSM card acts as an OSCM card; it does not carry DWDM traffic. • If an OPT-BST and an OSCM card are installed on Side B, the Side B OPT-BST OSC RX port is connected to the Side B OSCM TX port, and the Side B OPT-BST OSC TX port is connected to the Side B OSCM RX port. • If an OPT-BST and an OSC-CSM card are installed on Side B, the Side B OPT-BST OSC RX port is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM LINE TX port, and the Side B OPT-BST OSC TX port is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM LINE RX port. • If an OPT-BST and an OSCM card are installed on Side A, the Side A OPT-BST OSC TX port is connected to the Side A OSCM RX port, and the Side A OPT-BST OSC RX port is connected to the Side A OSCM TX port. • If an OPT-BST and an OSC-CSM card are installed on Side A, the Side A OPT-BST OSC TX port is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM LINE RX port, and the Side A OPT-BST OSC RX port is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM LINE TX port. Figure 11-64 shows an example of OSC fibering for a hub node with OSCM cards installed.11-76 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-64 Fibering OSC Terminations—Hub Node with OSCM Cards 1 Side A OPT-BST LINE RX to Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM LINE TX on adjacent node 5 Side B OSCM TX to Side B OPT-BST OSC RX 115710 DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS OPT AIC BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 TX 54.1 - 58.1 RX COM 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 TX 54.1 - 58.1 RX COM 32MUX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 RX 54.1 - 58.1 TX COM MON 32MUX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 RX 54.1 - 58.1 TX COM MON TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT RX TX RX TX 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-77 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling 11.7.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The following rules generally apply to hub node cabling: • The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card common (COM) TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX port or the Side A 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port. • The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port. • The Side A 32MUX-O/32WSS/32WSS-L COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-BST or Side A OSC-CSM COM RX port. • The Side B 32MUX-O/32WSS/32WSS-L COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-BST or Side B OSC-CSM COM RX port. • The Side B OPT-BST or Side B OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX port or the Side B 32DMX-O/32DMX COM RX port. • The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B 32DMX-O/32DMX COM RX port. Figure 11-65 shows an example of a hub node with cabling. In the example, OSCM cards are installed. If OSC-CSM cards are installed, they are usually installed in Slots 1 and 17. 2 Side A OPT-BST LINE TX to Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM LINE RX on adjacent node 6 Side B OSCM RX to Side B OPT-BST OSC TX 3 Side A OPT-BST OSC TX to Side A OSCM RX 7 Side B OPT-BST LINE TX to Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM LINE RX on adjacent node 4 Side A OPT-BST OSC RX to Side A OSCM TX 8 Side B OPT-BST LINE RX to Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM LINE TX on adjacent node11-78 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-65 Fibering a Hub Node 1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 6 Side B 32DMX-O COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE COM TX 2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 7 Side B 32MUX-O COM TX to Side B OPT-BST COM RX 115422 DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS OPT AIC BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 TX 54.1 - 58.1 RX COM 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 TX 54.1 - 58.1 RX COM 32MUX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 RX 54.1 - 58.1 TX COM MON 32MUX-0 FAIL ACT SF 30.3 - 34.2 38.1 - 42.1 46.1 - 50.1 RX 54.1 - 58.1 TX COM MON TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT RX TX RX TX 3 1 2 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-79 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling 11.7.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The following rules generally apply to terminal node cabling: • A terminal site has only one side (as compared to a hub node, which has two sides). The terminal side can be either Side B or Side A. • The terminal side OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card COM TX port is connected to the terminal side OPT-PRE COM RX port or the 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port. • The terminal side OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the terminal side 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port. • The terminal side 32MUX-O/40-MUX-C COM TX port is connected to the terminal side OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port. 11.7.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The following rules generally apply to line amplifier node cabling: • The line amplifier node layout allows all combinations of OPT-PRE and OPT-BST cards and allows you to use asymmetrical card choices in Side A-to-Side B and Side B-to-Side A configurations. For a given line direction, you can configure the four following possibilities: – Only preamplification (OPT-PRE) – Only booster amplification (OPT-BST) – Both preamplification and booster amplification (where a line amplifier node has amplification in at least one direction) – Neither preamplification nor booster amplification • If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed: – The Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX port. – The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port. • If a Side A OPT-PRE card is not installed, the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port. • If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed: – The Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX port. 3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE COM RX 8 Side B OPT-PRE COM RX to Side B OPT-BST COM TX 4 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side A 32MUX-O COM TX 9 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1 5 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side A 32DMX-O COM RX 10 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1 1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/– 1 dB must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.11-80 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling – The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port. • If an Side B OPT-PRE card is not installed, the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port. Figure 11-66 shows an example of a line amplifier node with cabling. Figure 11-66 Fibering a Line Amplifier Node 115423 DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS OPT AIC BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT RX TX RX TX 1 2 7 8 4 5 3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-81 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling 11.7.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The following rules generally apply to OSC regeneration node cabling: • The Side A OSC-CSM COM TX port connects to the Side B OSC-CSM COM RX port. • The Side A OSC-CSM COM RX port connects to the Side B OSC-CSM COM TX port. • Slots 2 through 5 and 12 through 16 can be used for TXP and MXP cards. Figure 11-67 shows an example of an OSC regeneration node with cabling. 1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/– 1 dB, must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports. 5 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE COM TX 2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 6 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE COM TX 3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE COM RX 7 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1 4 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side B OPT-BST COM RX 8 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX111-82 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-67 Fibering an OSC Regeneration Node 115484 FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS TCC2 AIC FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT OSC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX OSC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX 1 2 5 6 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-83 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling 11.7.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The two sides of the OADM node do not need to be symmetrical. On each side, Cisco TransportPlanner can create one of the following four configurations: • OPT-BST and OPT-PRE • OSC-CSM and OPT-PRE • Only OSC-CSM • Only OPT-BST Note Amplified OADM nodes contain OPT-PRE cards and/or OPT-BST cards. Passive OADM nodes do not. Both contain add/drop channel or band cards. The following rules generally apply for OADM node express path cabled connections: • TX ports should only be connected to RX ports. • EXP ports are connected only to COM ports in between AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x cards that all belong to Side B (that is, they are daisy-chained). • EXP ports are connected only to COM ports in between AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x cards that all belong to Side A (that is, they are daisy-chained). • The EXP port of the last AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card on Side A is connected to the EXP port of the first AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card on Side B. • The OPT-BST COM RX port is connected to the nearest (in slot position) AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x COM TX port. • The OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the nearest (in slot position) AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x COM RX port. • If OADM cards are located in adjacent slots, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card assumes that they are connected in a daisy-chain between the EXP ports and COM ports as noted previously. • The first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM RX port is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM COM TX port. • The first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port. • The first Side B AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM RX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM COM TX port. 1 Side A OSC-CSM LINE RX to Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE TX on adjacent node 4 Side A OSC-CSM COM RX to Side B OSC-CSM COM TX 2 Side A OSC-CSM LINE TX to Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE RX on adjacent node 5 Side B OSC-CSM LINE RX to Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE TX on adjacent node 3 Side A OSC-CSM COM TX to Side B OSC-CSM COM RX 6 Side B OSC-CSM LINE TX to Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE RX on adjacent node11-84 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling • The first Side B AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM RX port. • If a Side A OPT-PRE is present, the Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX port. • If a Side B OPT-PRE is present, the Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX port. The following rules generally apply for OADM node add/drop path cabled connections: • AD-xB-xx.x add/drop (RX or TX) ports are only connected to the following ports: – 4MD-xx.x COM TX or 4MD-xx.x COM RX ports – Another AD-xB-xx.x add/drop port (a pass-through configuration) • An AD-xB-xx.x add/drop band port is only connected to a 4MD-xx.x card belonging to the same band. • For each specific AD-xB-xx.x card, the add and drop ports for that band card are connected to the COM TX and COM RX ports of the same 4MD-xx.x card. • The AD-xB-xx.x and 4MD-xx.x cards are located in the same side (the connected ports all have the same line direction). The following rules generally apply for OADM node pass-through path cabled connections: • Pass-through connections are only established between add and drop ports on the same band or channel and in the same line direction. • AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x add/drop ports must be connected to other AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x add/drop ports (as pass-through configurations). • Add (RX) ports must be connected to drop (TX) ports. • 4MD-xx.x client input/output ports must be connected to other 4MD-xx.x client input/output ports. • A Side A AD-xB-xx.x drop (TX) port is connected to the corresponding Side A 4MD-xx.x COM RX port. • A Side A AD-xB-xx.x add (RX) port is connected to the corresponding Side A 4MD-xx.x COM TX port. • An Side B AD-xB-xx.x drop (TX) port is connected to the corresponding Side B 4MD-xx.x COM RX port. • An Side B AD-xB-xx.x add (RX) port is connected to the corresponding Side B 4MD-xx.x COM TX port. Figure 11-68 shows an example of an amplified OADM node with AD-1C-xx.x cards installed. Note Figure 11-68 is an example. Always install fiber-optic cables based on the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site.11-85 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-68 Fibering an Amplified OADM Node 1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 9 Side A AD-1C-xx.x EXP RX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x EXP TX 2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 10 Side B TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM RX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) TX 3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE COM RX 11 Side B TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM TX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) RX 115424 DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DCC TX OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX TXP MR 2.5G FAIL ACT SF RX CLIENT DWDM TX RX TX TXP MR 2.5G FAIL ACT SF RX CLIENT DWDM TX RX TX RX TX RX TX AD-1C -XX.X FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX AD-1C -XX.X FAIL ACT INPUT/OUTPUT AIC-I PWR A B ACC EOW LOW RING RING DCC-B DCC-A UDC-B UDC-A 1 2 4 5 13 12 15 16 3 14 6 7 10 11 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-86 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-69 shows an example of a passive OADM node with two AD-1C-xx.x cards installed. 4 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x COM TX 12 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM RX to OPT-PRE COM TX 5 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x COM RX 13 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM TX to OPT-BST COM RX 6 Side A AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) RX to Side A TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM TX 14 Side B OPT-PRE COM RX to Side B OPT-BST COM TX 7 Side A AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) TX to Side A TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM RX 15 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1 8 Side A AD-1C-xx.x EXP TX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x EXP RX 16 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1 1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/ 1 dB, must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.11-87 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-69 Fibering a Passive OADM Node 1 Side A OSC-CSM COM TX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x COM RX 4 Side A OSC-CSM EXP RX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x EXP TX 2 Side A OSC-CSM COM RX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x COM TX 5 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM TX to Side B OSC-CSM COM RX 3 Side A OSC-CSM EXP TX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x EXP RX 6 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM RX to Side B OSC-CSM COM TX 115425 FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS OSC AIC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX OSC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT AD-1C -XX.X FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX AD-1C -XX.X FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-88 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling 11.7.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling The following rules generally apply to ROADM node cabling: • The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX port. • The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A 32WSS COM RX port. • The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port is connected to the Side A 32WSS COM TX port. • The Side A OPT-BST (if installed) OSC TX port is connected to the Side A OSCM RX port. • The Side A OPT-BST (if installed) OSC RX port is connected to the Side A OSCM TX port. • The Side A 32WSS EXP TX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS EXP RX port. • The Side A 32WSS EXP RX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS EXP TX port. • The Side A 32WSS DROP TX port is connected to the Side A 32DMX COM RX port. • The Side A 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE DROP TX port is connected to the Side A 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE COM RX port. • The Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX port. • The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS COM RX port. • The Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS COM TX port. • The Side B OPT-BST (if installed) OSC TX port is connected to the Side B OSCM RX port. • The Side B OPT-BST (if installed) OSC RX port is connected to the Side B OSCM TX port. • The Side B 32WSS DROP TX port is connected to the Side B 32DMX COM RX port. • The Side B 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE DROP TX port is connected to the Side B 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE COM RX port. Figure 11-70 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node with cabling. Note Figure 11-70 is an example. Always install fiber-optic cables based on the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site.11-89 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Node Cabling Figure 11-70 Fibering a ROADM Node 1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 8 Side A 32WSS EXP RX to Side B 32WSS EXP TX 2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 9 Side B 32DMX COM RX to Side B 32WSS DROP TX 3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE COM RX 10 Side B 32WSS COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE COM TX 115473 DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East FAIL ACT SF INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 RING CALL LOCAL OW RING CALL EXPRESS OW CONTACT STATUS OPT AIC BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT TCC2 FAIL SF PWR A B CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC ACO ACO LAMP TEST RS-232 TCP/IP LINK ACT RX TX RX TX FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 DROP TX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 DROP TX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS FAIL ACT SF 32DMX 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 COM RX TX FAIL ACT SF 32DMX 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 COM RX TX 32DMX 32DMX 3 1 2 13 14 7 8 4 5 11 10 6 9 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P + +11-90 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup 11.8 Automatic Node Setup Automatic node setup (ANS) is a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC function that adjusts values of the variable optical attenuators (VOAs) on the DWDM channel paths to equalize the per channel power at the amplifier input. This power equalization means that at launch, all channels have the same amplifier power, independent of the input signal on the client interface and independent of the path crossed by the signal inside the node. This equalization is needed for two reasons: • Every path introduces a different penalty on the signal that crosses it. • Client interfaces add their signal to the ONS 15454 DWDM ring with different power levels. To support ANS, integrated VOAs and photodiodes are provided in the following cards: • AD-xB-xx.x card express and drop paths • AD-xC-xx.x card express and add paths • 4MD-xx.x card add paths • 32MUX-O card add paths • 32WSS/40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE/40-WXC-C/80-WXC-C add, drop, and pass through paths • 32DMX-O card drop paths • 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE card input port • 40-MUX-C card output port • 40-SMR1-C/40-SMR2-C add, drop, and pass through ports • PSM card input and output ports (both working and protect path) Optical power is equalized by regulating the VOAs. Based on the expected per channel power, ANS automatically calculates the VOA values by: • Reconstructing the different channel paths. • Retrieving the path insertion loss (stored in each DWDM transmission element). VOAs operate in one of three working modes: • Automatic VOA Shutdown—In this mode, the VOA is set at maximum attenuation value. Automatic VOA shutdown mode is set when the channel is not provisioned to ensure system reliability in the event that power is accidentally inserted. • Constant Attenuation Value—In this mode, the VOA is regulated to a constant attenuation independent from the value of the input signal. Constant attenuation value mode is set on VOAs associated to aggregated paths. 4 Side A 32WSS COM TX to Side A OPT-BST COM RX 11 Side B 32WSS COM TX to Side B OPT-BST COM RX 5 Side A 32WSS COM RX to Side A OPT-PRE COM TX 12 Side B OPT-BST COM TX to Side B OPT-PRE COM RX 6 Side A 32DMX COM RX to Side A 32WSS DROP TX 13 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1 7 Side A 32WSS EXP TX to Side B 32WSS EXP RX 14 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1 1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/–1 dB must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.11-91 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup • Constant Power Value—In this mode, the VOA values are automatically regulated to keep a constant output power when changes occur to the input power signal. This working condition is set on VOAs associated to a single channel path. ANS calculates the following VOA provisioning parameters: • Target attenuation • Target power Optical patchcords are passive devices that are modeled by the two termination points, each with an assigned slot and port. If user-provisioned optical patchcords exist, ANS checks if the new connection is feasible according to internal connection rules. If the user connection violates one of the rules, ANS returns a denied message. ANS requires the expected wavelength to be provisioned. When provisioning the expected wavelength, the following rules apply: • The card family generically characterizes the card name, and not the particular wavelengths supported (for example, AD-2C-xx.x for all two-channel OADMs). • At the provisioning layer, you can provision a generic card for a specific slot using CTC or TL1. • Wavelength assignment is done at the port level. • An equipment mismatch alarm is raised when a mismatch between the identified and provisioned value occurs. The default value for the provisioned attribute is AUTO. ONS 15454 ANS parameters set the values required for the node to operate successfully. Cisco TransportPlanner calculates the ANS parameters based on the requirements for a planned network. Cisco TransportPlanner exports the parameters to an ASCII, NE update file. When the NE update file is imported in CTC, the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab is populated with the ANS parameters to provision the node for the network. These ANS parameters can be modified. All the ANS parameters are mapped to the physical ports of the cards. ANS parameters can also be manually added or deleted in the Provisioning tab. The ranges for the values of the ANS parameters is shown in Table 11-11. For more information on how to add an ANS parameter, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Note The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab in CTC is empty if the NE update file is not imported. Note It is recommended that you use the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update file to provision the ANS parameters instead of manually adding all the parameters in CTC. ANS provisioning parameters must be manually changed by Cisco qualified personnel only. Setting incorrect ANS provisioning (either as preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic. Table 11-11 Ranges and Values for the ANS Parameters ANS Parameter Range/Value OSC LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Channel LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Amplifier Working Mode Control Power, Control Gain, Fixed Gain Amplifier Gain 0.0 to 40.0 dB Amplifier Tilt -15.0 to +15.0 dB OSC Power -24.0 to 0.0 dBm11-92 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup ANS parameters can be viewed in the node view Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab, as shown in Figure 11-71. Figure 11-71 WDM-ANS Provisioning The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab presents the following information: • Selector—Presents the ANS parameters in a tree view based on physical position. Clicking the + or – expands or collapses individual tree elements. Clicking a tree element displays the element parameters in the table on the right. For example, clicking the node name at the top displays all the node ANS parameters or clicking Slot 1 (PSM) displays the PSM amplifier parameters only. The ANS parameters can be sorted according to physical position. • Parameter—Displays the ANS parameter name. • Origin—Indicates how the parameter was calculated: – Imported—The value was set by importing the CTP XML file. Raman Ratio 0.0 to 100.0% Raman Total Power 100 to 450 mW Power -30.0 to +50 dBm WXC Dithering 0 to 33 Min Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB Max Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB VOA Attenuation 0 to 30 dB Table 11-11 Ranges and Values for the ANS Parameters ANS Parameter Range/Value11-93 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup – Provisioned—The value was manually provisioned. – Automatic—The value is automatically calculated by the system using the Raman provisioning wizard. For more information on how to provision using a wizard, see the “DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using an Installation Wizard” task in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. • Value—Displays the ANS parameter value. The values can be modified manually, although manually modifying the ANS parameters is not recommended. • Note—Displays information for parameters that could not be calculated, that is, parameters with Unknown appearing in the Value column. • Port —Displays the port value. Port is represented as Slot.Port. • Active Value —Displays the active parameter value. The active value cannot be modified manually. When you modify the parameter value in the Value field, the active value is updated with the modified value after you run ANS. The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tab presents the following information: • Port—Displays the port value. The port is represented as Slot.Port. • Parameter—Displays the ANS parameter name. • Result—After you run ANS, one of the following statuses is provided for each ANS parameter in the Result column: – Success - Changed—The parameter setpoint was recalculated successfully. – Success - Unchanged—The parameter setpoint did not need recalculation. – Unchanged - Port in IS state—ANS could not modify the setpoint because the port is in IS state. – Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the expected range. – Fail - Missing Input Parameter—The parameter could not be calculated because the required provisioning data is unknown or unavailable. – Not Applicable State—Ports are not in use. • Value—Displays the parameter value. • Set By—Displays the application that sets this parameter. This field can take the following values: – ANS – APC – Circuit Creation – Raman Wizard. A parameter could be set by more than one application. For example, VOA Attenuation parameter could be set by both ANS and APC. In this case, individual entries will be displayed for ANS and APC. • Last Change—Displays the date and time when the parameter was last modified. 11.8.1 Raman Setup and Tuning Raman amplification occurs in the optical fiber and the consequent Raman gain depends on the characteristics of the span (attenuator presence, fiber type, junctions, etc.). As two Raman pumps at two different wavelengths are used to stimulate the Raman effect, not only is the total signal power 11-94 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup calculation significant, but the right mix of power to ensure gain flatness is crucial. These setpoints of the total Raman power and Raman ratio can be configured on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in three ways: • Raman installation wizard • CTP XML file • CTC/TL1 interface For information on how to configure the setpoints on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. Raman amplification on OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards depends on the optical fiber installed. Therefore, Raman total power and Raman ratio values calculated using the Raman installation wizard via CTC is more accurate than the values provisioned by loading the CTP XML file. For this reason, the value provisioned using the wizard cannot be overridden by the CTP XML file. However, the values provisioned using the wizard or the CTP XML file can be overriden by manually provisioning the parameters. When the Raman installation is completed, a report of the status of Raman configuration on a node in the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be viewed in the Maintenance > Installation tab when you are in card view. The Installation tab displays the following fields: • User—Name of user who configured the Raman pump. • Date—Date when the Raman pump was configured. • Status – Raman Not Tuned—The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card was provisioned but ANS was not launched. – Tuned by ANS—ANS was run successfully and the basic ANS parameters were applied. – Tuned by Wizard—The Raman installation wizard was run successfully without errors. – Tuned by User Acceptance—The Raman installation wizard was completed with errors and the user accepted the values that the wizard calculated. – Raman is Tuning—The Raman installation wizard is running. • S1Low (dBm)—See Table 11-12. • S1High (dBm)—See Table 11-12. • S2Low (dBm)—See Table 11-12. • S2High (dBm)—See Table 11-12. • Power (mW)—Total Raman power setpoints. • Ratio—Raman pump ratio setpoint. • Gain—Expected Raman gain that the wizard calculated. • Actual Tilt—Expected Raman tilt that the wizard calculated. • Fiber Cut Recovery—Status of the fiber cut restoration. – Executed—The restore procedure was completed successfully. – Pending—The restore procedure is not complete. – Failed—The system failed to execute the procedure. • Fiber Cut Date—Date when the fiber cut occured.11-95 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Automatic Node Setup The Raman pump is equipped with two different Raman pumps transmitting powers (P1 and P2) at two different wavelengths 1 and 2. During installation, the two pumps alternatively turn ON and OFF at two different power values. 1 and 2 signals are used as probes at the end of spans to measure Raman gain efficiency of the two Raman pumps separately. The example in Figure 11-72 shows the Raman gain on an OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in Node B that was measured by setting the wavelength and power measurements as follows: 1=1530.33 nm signal probe at Node A 2=1560.61 nm signal probe at Node A P1 = 1425 nm power at Node B P2 = 1452 nm power at Node B Plow = 100 mW Phigh = 280 mW Pmin = 8 mW Pmax = 450 mW Figure 11-72 Raman Gain on Node B The S1low, S1high, S2low, and S2low values in the Maintenance > Installation tab are based on the power values read on the LINE-RX port of Node B. λ λ λ λ λ λ 247381 OSC Add Node A Node B Pump Add OSC Drop Pump Drop Pump Drop OSC LINE-RX Drop RAMAN-TX RAMAN-RX RAMAN-RX RAMAN-TX COM-TX COM-RX COM-RX COM-TX DC-RX OSC-RX OSC-TX OSC-RX LINE-TX Probe signals Raman signals Raman Pump Probe signal power LINE-RX LINE-TX DC-TX DC-TX DC-RX PD4 PD5 PD7 PD6 PD3 PD4 PD10 PD12 PD12 PD10 PD3 PD1 PD1 PD6 OSC-TX PD7 PD5 Pump Add OSC Add11-96 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View 11.9 DWDM Functional View DWDM functional view offers a graphical view of the DWDM cards and the internal connections between them in an MSTP node. The functional view also shows cards and connections for multidegree MSTP nodes (up to eight sides). To navigate to the functional view of a DWDM node, use the following navigational path in CTC when you are in node view: Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords > Functional View An example of the functional view for an eight-sided node is shown in Figure 11-73. Table 11-12 Example of Raman Power Measurements Input P1 P2 Raman Power at Node B 1=1530.33 nm at Node A Plow = 100 mW Pmin = 8 mW S1low Phigh = 250 mW Pmin = 8 mW S1high 2=1560.61 nm at Node A Pmin = 8 mW Plow = 100 mW S2low Pmin = 8 mW Phigh = 250 mW S2low λ λ11-97 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-73 Functional View for an Eight-Sided Node 11.9.1 Navigating Functional View The functional view has two main panes. The upper pane contains a tree view of the shelves and a graphical view of the shelf equipment. The lower pane describes alarms and circuits in a tabular format. The upper pane in Figure 11-73 is divided into a left pane and a right pane. The left pane shows a tree structure view of the shelf or shelves in the MSTP system. You can expand the tree view of a shelf to show the slot usage in that shelf. The right pane is a graphical view of the sides in the shelf. In the case of Figure 11-73, there are eight sides (A through H). Side A is located as shown in the figure. All of the cards in each side are grouped together. 240752 Side A Fit to View Zoom Out Zoom In Select11-98 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View The meanings of the icons in the upper right corner are as follows: • Select—use this icon to select a graphical element in the graphical view pane. • Patchcord—Use this icon to create an internal patchcord between cards. Note The Patchcord icon is not functional for Software Release 8.5. • Zoom In/Zoom Out—Use these icons to zoom in or zoom out in the graphical display pane. • Fit to View—Use this icon to have the graphical view fit the space available on your screen. The bottom pane can be used to display alarms (using the Alarms tab) or Circuits (using the Circuits tab). Clicking the Alarms tab displays the same information as the Alarms tab in the network, node, or card view. Clicking the Circuits tab displays the same information as the Alarms tab in the network, node, or card view. 11.9.2 Using the Graphical Display This section explains how to use the graphical portion of the display to gather information about the cards and ports. 11.9.2.1 Displaying a Side Double-click a side to show the details of that side. For example, if you double-click Side A in Figure 11-73, the result is as shown in Figure 11-74. Figure 11-74 Side A Details 2 3 4 7 6 8 9 5 1 24075911-99 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View The green arrows in the diagram represent the DWDM optical path within the selected side. The optical path in this instance is summarized as follows: 1. The light enters the OPT-BST card LINE-RX port from the optical span. 2. The path continues out of the OPT-BST card COM-TX port to the COM-RX port of the OPT-PRE card. 3. The OPT-PRE card sends the optical signal out of its COM-TX port to the 40-WXC COM-RX input port. 4. The 40-WXC card sends the signal to be locally dropped out of its DROP-TX port to the 40-DMX/40-DMX-CE card COM-RX port. 5. The 40-DMX/40-DMX-CE card sends the dropped signal out on one of its multifiber push on (MPO) connectors to the block labeled MPO. When you expand the MPO block (double-click it or right-click it and select Down), you will see a muxponder (MUX) card inside the MPO block. One of the eight optical fibers in the MPO cable is connected to the MUX trunk port. 6. The optical signal from the trunk port of the MXP card inside the MPO block enters the 40-MUX card at one of its five MPO connectors. 7. The 40-MUX card sends the optical signal out of its COM-TX port to the ADD-RX port of the 40-WXC card. 8. The added signal from the MXP gets sent out on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC card to the COM-RX port of the OPT-BST card. 9. Finally, the OPT-BST card sends the optical signal out onto the span from its LINE-TX port. 11.9.2.2 Displaying Card Information In the functional view graphical pane, you can double-click a card to bring up the usual CTC card view. You can also move the mouse over a card to display information about the card. For example, when the mouse is placed over the OPT-BST card in Side A, the tooltip text displays sh1/s1 (OPT-BST), indicating that the OPT-BST card for Side A is located in Shelf 1, Slot 1. See Figure 11-75.11-100 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-75 Side A OPT-BST Card Shelf and Slot Information 11.9.2.3 Displaying Port Information Move the mouse over a port on a card to display information about the port. For example, when the mouse is placed over the top left port of the 40-MUX card in Side A, the tooltip text displays CARD_PORT-BAND-1-RX, indicating that the 40-MUX port being pointed to is for the first band of wavelengths (wavelengths 1 to 8) to be added into the optical path at the 40-MUX card. These wavelengths come into the 40-MUX card from a transponder (TXP) or muxponder (MXP) on an MPO connector, which contains eight integrated optical fibers. See Figure 11-76.11-101 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-76 Side A 40-MUX Port Information 11.9.2.4 Displaying Patchcord Information Move the mouse over a patchcord to see the state of the output and input port associated with that patchcord. See Figure 11-77.11-102 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-77 Patchcord Input and Output Port State Information 11.9.2.5 Displaying MPO Information To show the details inside an MPO block, double-click it or right-click it and select Down. When the detailed view is visible, right-click inside the MPO block and select Upper View to collapse the block. When you move the mouse over the MPO block, the associated wavelengths are displayed as a tool tip (see Figure 11-78).11-103 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-78 MPO Information 11.9.2.6 Alarm Box Information Within the side display, an alarm box is shown that gives the alarm count for the Critical, Major, and Minor alarms that affect that side. This alarm summary is only for the side, and is different from the alarms under the Alarms tab, where all of the alarms for the system are summarized. If an alarm under the Alarms tab appears that has to do with Side A, for example, only the appropriate alarm count in the Alarm box for Side A is incremented. The alarm counts in the Alarm boxes for the other nodes (B through H) are not incremented. In the graphical view of a side, the card icon or port icon changes color to reflect the severity of an alarm associated with the card (red, orange, or yellow). The color of the MPO block reflects the color of highest alarm severity for the elements in the MPO block. 11.9.2.7 Transponder and Muxponder Information All of the TXP and MXP cards connected with patchcords are grouped together under the MPO icon. In the node shown in Figure 11-73, there is an MXP card in Side A that is connected to the 40-MUX card and to the 40-DMX/40-DMX-CE card. The MXP card is connected through the 40-MUX card to the add port on the 40-WXC card and it is also connected through the 40-DMX/40-DMX-CE card to the drop port on the 40-WXC card. To view the connections to the MXP card from the 40-MUX card, double-click the MPO icon. Figure 11-79 shows the MPO icon before double-clicking it and Figure 11-80 shows the result after double-clicking it. Note In the case of a protected TXP (TXPP) or MXP (MXPP) card, the card icon has a label indicating the active trunk and the protected trunk.11-104 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View Figure 11-79 Side A MPO Connection to an MXP Before Double-Clicking Figure 11-80 Side A MPO Connection to an MXP After Double-Clicking 11.9.2.8 Changing the Views When you right-click inside of a side view, a shortcut menu allows you to do the following (see Figure 11-81): • Fit to View—Fits the side view into the available display space. • Delete Side—Deletes the selected side. • Rotate Left—Rotates the side 90 degrees counterclockwise (all connections are maintained). • Rotate Right—Rotates the side 90 degrees clockwise (all connections are maintained). • Horizontal Flip—Flips the side horizontally (all connections are maintained). • Vertical Flip—Flips the side vertically (all connections are maintained). After you have selected Fit to View for a side, you can right-click in the side view to bring up a new menu with the following selections (see Figure 11-82): • Go to Upper View—Returns to the previous view. MPO block 240760 MXP card MPO connector 24076111-105 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Functional View • Perform AutoLayout—Optimizes the placement of the cards and the connections between them. Figure 11-81 Side A View Options Figure 11-82 Side A View Options (after Selecting Fit to View) 11.9.2.9 Selecting Circuits When the Circuits tab is selected, the circuits for the functional view are shown. The patchcord lines in the graphical display are normally black in color. A patchcord line becomes green only when you select a circuit associated with the patchcord that carries the selected circuit. 11.9.2.10 Displaying Optical Path Power To show the optical power present in an optical path, move the mouse over the desired optical path (green line). A tooltip shows the power along the optical path in dBm (see Figure 11-83).11-106 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Network Functional View Figure 11-83 Optical Path Power 11.10 DWDM Network Functional View The DWDM Network Functional View (NFV) displays a graphical representation of the circuit connections, optical power, and alarms in the DWDM network. The NFV allows you to view the circuit connections and flow of data at the network level. The NFV also helps to find an alternate network path if there is a loss of signal in the network. The NFV offers dual options to view the network: • Graphical view—Displays the circuit connections, optical power, and alarms of a circuit through a graphical representation. To view the graphical display of the circuit connections, select the circuit listed in the upper left pane. Click dB, SL, and PV button on the toolbar to view the optical power of the selected circuit, span loss of the desired span, and insertion loss of the patchchord respectively. For more information refer to 11.10.2 Using the Graphical Display, page 11-108. • Viewing the circuit details in tabular format—The circuit connections, optical power, and alarms of a circuit are displayed in a tabular format (seen in the left pane of the Network Functional View). For more information refer to 11.10.2.2 Selecting the Circuit, page 11-109. For information on how to view optical power values and alarms of the circuit selected in the Network Functional View, see the “View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using the Network Functional View” task in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.11-107 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Network Functional View 11.10.1 Navigating Network Functional View This section explains how to navigate to the network functional view (NFV). To navigate to the NFV, go to the network view in the CTC and click the FV button on the toolbar. The DWDM Network Functional View window opens. The NFV is similar to the DWDM functional view in its graphical layout and behavior at the node level. For additional information, see “11.9 DWDM Functional View” section on page 11-96. The network functional view has two main panes (Figure 11-84): • Left pane—Is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane has three tabs that are listed in Table 11-13, and the lower pane displays the graphical overview of the network. • Right pane—Displays the graphical view of all the nodes and devices in the network. You can hide or close the upper and lower panes, and view only the network map in the NFV. Click the Close button on the title bar to close the pane or click the Toggle auto-hide button on the title bar to hide the pane. Click the Reset To Default button on the toolbar to restore (or view) all the panes. Table 11-13 Circuits, Optical Power, and Alarms tab Tab Description Circuits Displays the lists of circuits for the nodes present in the network. Optical Power Displays the optical link and span loss of the circuits. This tab lists the aggregated power-in and power-out of all the internal patchcords for the nodes that have the functional view open. Alarms Displays the alarms of all the circuits for the nodes present in the network.11-108 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Network Functional View Figure 11-84 DWDM Network Functional View 11.10.2 Using the Graphical Display This section explains how to use the graphical display to gather information on circuits, optical power, and alarms for the nodes. To expand a node, click on the network functional view graph and Press F2. The node opens in a double zoom mode and you can read the power information in the zoom out view. Click F2 again to zoom-in or return to the normal view. Additionally, to zoom-in and zoom-out the graph on the network functional view, press the Ctrl key and scroll up and down with the scroll wheel on your mouse. Click Reset Nodes Zoom button on the toolbar to reset the graphical view to the default zoom size. The keystroke commands provide the keyboard shortcuts for graphical control of the NFV. To access the keystroke commands, click Help > Keystroke commands. Note To open and view the nodes in the network functional view, right-click the node and choose Open Node FV. Or double-click on the Node to open the node FV. To navigate to the node level, right-click FV > Node FV. To close all the opened nodes in the FV, click Close Expanded Nodes button on the toolbar. To zoom-in and zoom-out of the open node, press the Ctrl key and scroll up and down with the scroll wheel on your mouse. 274373 Circuits, Optical Power, and Alarms Tabs Title bar Toggle auto-hide Upper Pane Lower Pane Right Pane PV dB Reset Nodes Zoom Close Expanded Nodes Reset To Default SL Refresh Button11-109 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Network Functional View When you have multiple node FVs opened, you cannot view the graphical details of the individual node due to overlapping of the map. To avoid overlapping of the map, do the following: 1. Select the entire expanded node (all sides), and move it out of the map (to the desired location). To select the entire node, click on the title bar of the node and Press Ctrl A. 2. Move the individual sides of the node one-by-one back to the proper position inside the network map. To move the individual sides of the node, select the side and move it to the desired location. 11.10.2.1 Displaying Optical Power The NFV toolbar has the following buttons that displays the optical power information of the circuits: • dB (Power)—Click the dB button on the toolbar to view the optical power information of the circuits. The optical power in the optical path in dBm is displayed in the power balloon. You can view the aggregated power only for those nodes that have the FV open. To open the node FV, right-click the node and choose Open Node FV. It also shows the per channel estimated power of the ports of the selected circuit. Right-click the internal patchcord link and select Flip Power Balloons to view the power balloon of the selected patchcord. The power balloon is flipped and you can see the power details of the selected patchcord without overlapping. • SL (Span Loss)—Click the SL button to see the loss of signal of the desired span. • PV (Patchcord Verification)—Click the PV button to display the insertion loss of the patchcord. The PV calculates the input and output power of the patchcord. You can view the insertion loss of the patchchord only for those nodes that have the FV open. To open the node FV, right-click the node and choose Open Node FV. The insertion loss should not exceed 2dBm. The patchcord lines are colored to indicate the insertion loss: – Red—Indicates that the insertion loss of the patchcords exceeded 2dBm. – White—Indicates that the system was not able to calculate the insertion loss of the patchcord. – Black—Indicates that the insertion loss of the patchcords is within the limit and not more than 2dBm. Note Click Refresh on the toolbar, to refresh the optical power and span loss information. The optical power and span loss information is calculated and is refreshed in the graphical display and optical power table. 11.10.2.2 Selecting the Circuit The Circuit tab in the NFV allows you to view the available circuits in the network. Click the Circuit tab to view the list of circuits in the selected network. Choose the circuit from the list to view the circuit level information. A graphical display of the selected circuit and the impacted span is visible in the map. Additionally, you can view the general information (type, source, and destination), status (IS,OOS [ANSI] or unlocked, locked [ETSI]), and physical connection details (wavelength, direction, and span) of the selected circuit. The circuit can be in any of the following states: • DISCOVERED • PARTIAL • DISCOVERED_TL1 • PARTIAL_TL111-110 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference DWDM Network Functional View When you switch the selection between the circuits, and if both the circuits are in DISCOVERED_TL1 state, the circuit details of the new selection is not displayed (it may still show the previously selected circuit details). If you find that the current selection is not refreshed, do either of the following: • Deselect the selected circuit before selecting the another circuit. Or • Update all the selected circuits using the Reconfigure Circuit option. Go to CTC Tools > Circuits > Reconfigure Circuits menu to reconfigure the selected circuits. During reconfiguration, CTC reassembles all connections of the selected circuits and VCAT members into circuits based on path size, direction, and alignment. Note If the information does not refresh when you switch the selection between the circuits in OCH_CC and its OCH_TRAIL (and vice-versa), follow the suggestion provided on how to view the current selection if the screen is not refreshed. To view the optical power and alarm details of a circuit, click Circuit and select the circuit name from the list to view the following details: • Optical Power—To view the optical power of the selected circuit, click the Optical Power tab. You can view the optical link status and the span loss of the selected circuit. • Alarms—To view the alarms of the selected circuit, click the Alarms tab. If a card has one or more alarms (that is part of the selected circuit), the node turns either yellow or red, depending on the severity of the alarm. The alarm in red indicates a major alarm and yellow indicates a minor alarm. If there is an alarm present in the card that is not part of the selected circuit, then the node appears gray. If a node has alarms that is not part of the selected circuits, then the alarms are not listed in the table, but the node is colored in the graphical view (right pane). Note At the circuit level, you can view both the node and network level information. 11.10.2.3 Exporting Reports You can also export the NFV reports of circuit level information in HTML or JPEG format. The export operation creates two files, an HTML and a JPEG format of the NFV information. The .jpg file provides a graphical representation of the site layout. For more information on exporting the reports, see the “Export Network Functional View Reports” task in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.11-111 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Non-DWDM (TDM) Networks 11.11 Non-DWDM (TDM) Networks Non-DWDM (TDM) Networks take synchronous and asynchronous signals and multiplexes them to a single higher bit rate for transmission at a single wavelength over fiber. When the node is configured as a Non-DWDM Network, the supported MSTP cards — amplifiers, transponders, and muxponders, are used in the standalone mode. MSTP applications like Circuit Provisioning, NLAC and APC are not supported in amplified TDM networks. For more information on how to configure a node as a Non-DWDM network, see the “NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network” section in “Turn Up a Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. When the node is configured as a Not-DWDM network, all the amplifiers are configured by default with the following values: • Working mode = Control Gain • Channel Power Ref. = +1dBm. Booster(LINE) amplifiers enable optical safety when used in Non-DWDM. ALS configuration is set to “Auto Restart” by default. A manual restart request is therefore needed to turn up the bidirectional link, in addition with an appropriated cabling (bi-directional) of LINE TX/RX ports. In NOT-DWDM mode, you must configure significant optical parameters and thresholds before launching the ANS application. For information on how to configure the amplifier, see the “DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier” section in “Turn Up a Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. For information on how to configure the PSM behavior, see the “DLP-G694 Configure the PSM” section in “Turn Up a Node” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. When the ANS application is launched, amplifier ports move into IS state and Gain Setpoint is automatically calculated by the card, after initial APR cycle. Gain Setpoint must be equal to MAX [Min Gain Setpoint of the card ; (Power Ref-Pinput)]; where Pinput is the optical power value at the ingress port (COM-RX) of the amplification stage.11-112 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 11 Node Reference Non-DWDM (TDM) NetworksCHAPTER 12-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 12 Network Reference This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network applications and topologies. The chapter also provides network-level optical performance references. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note In this chapter, “OPT-BST” refers to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L cards, and to the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and OPT-AMP-17-C cards when they are provisioned in OPT-LINE (optical booster) mode. “OPT-PRE” refers to the OPT-PRE card and to the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and OPT-AMP-17-C cards provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode. Note OPT-BST-L, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-L, and OPT-AMP-L cards can be installed only in L-band compatible nodes and networks. OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, 32WSS, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can be installed only in C-band compatible nodes and networks. Chapter topics include: • 12.1 Network Applications, page 12-2 • 12.2 Network Topologies, page 12-2 • 12.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 12-18 • 12.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card, page 12-19 • 12.7 Optical Performance, page 12-19 • 12.8 Automatic Power Control, page 12-20 • 12.9 Power Side Monitoring, page 12-24 • 12.10 Span Loss Verification, page 12-25 • 12.11 Network Optical Safety, page 12-27 • 12.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers, page 12-40 • 12.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations, page 12-46 • 12.14 Even Band Management, page 12-4812-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Applications 12.1 Network Applications Cisco ONS 15454 nodes can be provisioned for metro core DWDM network applications. Metro core networks often include multiple spans and amplifiers, so the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) is the limiting factor for channel performance. Within DWDM networks, the ONS 15454 uses a communications protocol, called Node Services Protocol (NSP), to communicate with other nodes. NSP automatically updates nodes whenever a change in the network occurs. Each ONS 15454 DWDM node can: • Identify other ONS 15454 DWDM nodes in the network. • Identify the different types of DWDM networks. • Identify when the DWDM network is complete and when it is incomplete. 12.2 Network Topologies The ONS 15454 DWDM network topologies include ring networks, linear networks, mesh networks, interconnected rings and spurs. 12.2.1 Ring Networks Ring networks support hubbed, multi-hubbed, any-to-any, and mesh traffic topologies. 12.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology In the hubbed traffic topology (Figure 12-1), a hub node terminates all the DWDM channels. A channel can be provisioned to support protected traffic between the hub node and any node in the ring. Both working and protected traffic use the same wavelength on both sides of the ring. Protected traffic can also be provisioned between any pair of optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) nodes, except that either the working or the protected path must be regenerated in the hub node. Protected traffic saturates a channel in a hubbed topology, that is, no channel reuse is possible. However, the same channel can be reused in different sections of the ring by provisioning unprotected multihop traffic. From a transmission point of view, this network topology is similar to two bidirectional point-to-point links with OADM nodes. For more information about hub nodes, see the “11.1.4 Hub Node” section on page 11-27.12-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 12.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology A multihubbed traffic topology (Figure 12-2) is based on the hubbed traffic topology, except that two or more hub nodes are added. Protected traffic can only be established between the two hub nodes. Protected traffic can be provisioned between a hub node and any OADM node only if the allocated wavelength channel is regenerated through the other hub node. Multihop traffic can be provisioned on this ring. From a transmission point of view, this network topology is similar to two or more point-to-point links with OADM nodes. Hub Amplified OADM Passive OADM Line amplifier 90995 Amplified OADM Passive OADM Amplified OADM OSC OSC12-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 12.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology The any-to-any traffic topology (Figure 12-3) contains only reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) nodes (with or without optical service channel [OSC] regeneration) or optical amplifier nodes. This topology potentially allows you to route every wavelength from any source to any destination node inside the network. See the “11.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 11-10 for more information. Hub Hub Passive OADM Line amplifier 90998 Amplified OADM Passive OADM Amplified OADM OSC OSC12-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 12.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology The meshed traffic topology (Figure 12-4) does not use hubbed nodes; only amplified and passive OADM nodes are present. Protected traffic can be provisioned between any two nodes; however, the selected channel cannot be reused in the ring. Unprotected multihop traffic can be provisioned in the ring. A meshed ring must be designed to prevent amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) lasing. This is done by configuring a particular node as an anti-ASE node. An anti-ASE node can be created in two ways: • Equip an OADM node with 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O cards. This solution is adopted when the total number of wavelengths deployed in the ring is higher than ten. OADM nodes equipped with 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O cards are called full OADM nodes. • When the total number of wavelengths deployed in the ring is lower than ten, the anti-ASE node is configured by using an OADM node where all the channels that are not terminated in the node are configured as “optical pass-through.” In other words, no channels in the anti-ASE node can travel through the express path of the OADM node. For more information about OADM nodes, see the “11.1.2 OADM Node” section on page 11-8. For more information about anti-ASE nodes, see the “11.1.5 Anti-ASE Node” section on page 11-31. ROADM ROADM ROADM 115730 ROADM ROADM ROADM OSC OSC12-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-4 Meshed Traffic Topology 12.2.2 Linear Networks Linear configurations are characterized by the use of two terminal nodes, east and west. The 32-channel terminal nodes can be equipped with a 32MUX-O card and a 32DMX-O card, or with a 32WSS card and a 32DMX or 32DMX-O card. The 40-channel terminal nodes can be equipped with a 40-MUX-C card and a 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card with a 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card, or a 40-SMR1-C/40-SMR2-C card with a 15216-MD-40-ODD card. OADM or line amplifier nodes can be installed between the two terminal nodes. Only unprotected traffic can be provisioned in a linear configuration. Figure 12-5 shows five ONS 15454 nodes in a linear configuration with an amplified and a passive OADM node. Figure 12-5 Linear Configuration with an OADM Node Figure 12-6 shows five ONS 15454 nodes in a linear configuration without an OADM node. See the “11.1.1 Terminal Node” section on page 11-2 for more information. Anti-ASE Amplified OADM Passive OADM Line amplifier 90997 Amplified OADM Passive OADM Amplified OADM OSC OSC Line amplifier Passive OADM 90996 West terminal Amplified OADM East terminal OSC OSC12-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-6 Linear Configuration without an OADM Node A single-span link is a type of linear configuration characterized by a single-span link with preamplification and post-amplification. A single-span link is also characterized by the use of two terminal nodes, east and west. Only unprotected traffic can be provisioned on a single-span link. Figure 12-7 shows two ONS 15454s in a single-span link. Eight channels are carried on one span. Single-span link losses apply to OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards. The optical performance values are valid assuming that the sum of the OADM passive node insertion losses and the span losses does not exceed 35 dB. Figure 12-7 Single-Span Link 12.2.3 Mesh Networks A mesh network can be native or multiring. In a native mesh network (Figure 12-8), any combination of four-degree and eight-degree mesh nodes can work together. Four-degree mesh nodes transmit an optical signal in four directions, while an eight-degree mesh node transmits an optical signal in eight directions. For additional information about mesh nodes, see the “11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 11-53. The intermediate nodes are ROADM nodes. In a mesh node, all wavelengths can be routed through four (four-degree mesh node) to eight (eight-degree mesh node) different optical line termination ports using a 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card without any optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration. It is possible to combine 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 40-SMR2-C, and 32WSS cards in the same mesh network without impacting system performance. For nodes equipped with 32WSS cards, the maximum system capacity is 32 channels. Terminal sites are connected to the mesh network as a spur. Line amplifier 96639 West terminal East terminal OSC OSC Line amplifier Line amplifier 90999 West terminal East terminal ~130/150 km OSC OSC12-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies Figure 12-8 Mesh Network In a multiring mesh network (Figure 12-9), several rings are connected with four-degree or eight-degree mesh nodes. The intermediate ROADM nodes are equipped with MMU cards. All wavelengths can be routed among two or more rings using a 40-WXC-C or 40-SMR2-C card without any optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration. As in a native mesh network, it is possible to combine 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 40-SMR2-C, and 32WSS cards in the same multiring network without impacting system performance. For nodes equipped with 32WSS cards, maximum system capacity is limited to 32 channels. A terminal node is connected to a multiring node as a spur. For information on node configurations for both native mesh and multiring networks, see the “11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 11-53. 159494 OLA Terminal N-degree mesh N-degree mesh N-degree mesh N-degree mesh N-degree mesh N-degree mesh N-degree mesh ROADM ROADM ROADM ROADM Terminal12-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-9 Multiring Network 12.3 Interconnected Rings The interconnected ring configuration allows you to connect two different nodes using external ports to allow traffic flow between different subnets. In Figure 12-10, the main ring consists of nodes R, R1, and R2 and the tributary ring consists of nodes r, r1, and r2. It is possible to connect more than one tributary ring to the main ring at the same point. Node R of the main ring can forward wavelengths to the node r of the tributary ring and vice-versa. Node R is either a colorless and omni-directional n-degree ROADM node (Figure 12-11) or a two-degree colorless ROADM node (Figure 12-12) equipped with 80-WXC-C cards. See the “11.6 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 11-53 for more information about colorless and omni-directional n-degree ROADM nodes and two-degree colorless ROADM nodes. Node r of the tributary ring is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE cards. OTS PPCs are provisioned between the EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C card on node R and the EXP or ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE cards on node r. All the nodes are managed by different IP addresses. 249103 OPT-BST or OSC-CSM OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP 40-WSS-C DCM-xxx Air ramp DCM-xxx 40-DMX-C Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 OSCM or Blank AIC-I OSCM or Blank TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T 40-DMX-C 40-WSS-C OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP OPT-BST or OSC-CSM12-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-10 Interconnected Rings Figure 12-11 Colorless and Omni-directional n- Degree ROADM Node 248900 B R1 R2 R1 r1 r2 r A C c D d a b Main ring Node interconnections Tributary ring 80-WXC-C PP-MESH-4 249088 A C D B P P Connection to tributary ring node (r)12-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-12 Colorless Two-Degree ROADM Node 12.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios In the following sections, three interconnected ring scenarios are given: 12.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring In scenario A-1(Figure 12-13), node R is a three-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node and node r is a two-degree 40-SMR1-c based ROADM node. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed to side A or B of node R. Traffic from side a cannot be added or dropped at node r but can be routed to side b using the express path. 249085 1x9 DMX L2 1x9 DMX L1 1x9 MUX L2 1x9 DMX L2 1x9 MUX L2 1x9 MUX L1 1x9 MUX L1 1x9 DMX L1 P Booster Connection to tributary ring node (r) Side A Side B OSC Booster OSC DMX-E DMX-O MUX-E MUX-O DMX-O DMX-E MUX-O MUX-E P12-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-13 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-1 In scenario A-2 (Figure 12-14), node R is a two-degree colorless ROADM node and node r is a two-degree 40-SMR1-C based ROADM node. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed to one side of node R. For example, traffic can be routed from side a to side A or from side b to side B. Traffic from side a cannot be added or dropped at node r but can be routed to side b using the express path. Figure 12-14 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-2 PP-MESH-4 248896 A A R r B C D a b c d a b B R r P P C-rx D-rx C-tx D-tx Main Ring Traffic c-rx d-tx d-rx c-tx 248895 A A R r B C D a b c d a b B R r C-tx D-rx C-rx D-tx d-tx d-rx c-rx c-tx Main Ring Traffic Booster Booster Tributary Ring Traffic P P12-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings 12.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring In scenario B-1(Figure 12-15), node R is a three-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node and node r is a hub node with two terminal sides equipped with 40-SMR1-C or 40-WSS-C cards. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the EXP ports of the 40-SMR1-C or40-WSS-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed to side A or B of node R. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r. For example, traffic from side a can be dropped at node r but cannot be routed to side b since the EXP ports are not available. Figure 12-15 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-1 In scenario B-2 (Figure 12-16), node R is a two-degree colorless ROADM node and node r is a hub node with two terminal sides equipped with 40-SMR1-C or 40-WSS-C cards. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the EXP ports of the 40-WSS-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed to one side of node R. For example, traffic can be routed from side a to side A or from side b to side B. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r. For example, traffic from side a can be dropped at node r but cannot be routed to side b since the EXP ports are not available. PP-MESH-4 248896 A A R r B C D a b c d a b B R r P P C-rx D-rx C-tx D-tx Main Ring Traffic c-rx d-tx d-rx c-tx12-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-16 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-2 12.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring In scenario C-1(Figure 12-17), nodes R1 and R2 are n-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM nodes. Node r is a terminal site. The EXP ports of the 40-SMR-1C card in node r are connected to the EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C card in nodes R1 and R2. Traffic from node r is routed to side A and B of nodes R1 and R2. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r. 248897 a b r c-rx d-tx d-rx c-tx A B R C-tx D-rx C-rx D-tx Booster Booster P P A R r B C D a b c d Main Ring Traffic12-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Interconnected Rings Figure 12-17 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-1 In scenario C-2(Figure 12-18), node R is an n-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node with 2 omni-directional sides. Nodes r1 and r2 are hub sites. The ADD/DROP ports of 40-SMR-1-C cards in node r1 and r2 are connected to the EAD ports of 80-WXC-C cards in node R. Traffic can be routed from node r1 to node r2 through node R. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r1 and r2. Figure 12-18 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-2 PP-MESH-4 248898 A A A R R R1 r r r r R2 B C B c a a B R P P C-rx C-tx c-rx c-tx Main Ring Tributary Ring r PP-MESH-4 248899 A a b B R r1 P P C-rx D-rx a b r2 P P C-tx D-tx F-rx F-rx E-tx E-tx A R r1 B C D E F a b r2 a b c d c d Main Ring Traffic Tributary Interring Traffic Tributary Interring Traffic Traffic Tributary to Main12-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Spur Configuration 12.4 Spur Configuration Remote terminal sites can be connected to the main network using a spur. In a spur configuration, the multiplexer (MUX) and demultiplexer (DMX) units associated with one of the sides of node R in the main network (Figure 12-19) are moved to the remote terminal site T. This helps to aggregate traffic from the terminal site. The MUX and DMX units in terminal site T are connected to node R with a single fibre couple. Node R is a n-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C cards. Traffic from terminal site T can be routed to side A or side B on node R. Amplification on the spur link is not allowed. PSM is not supported on terminal site T. Figure 12-19 Spur 12.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios In the following sections, three spur scenarios are provided: 12.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in RemoteTerminal T In Figure 12-20, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The remote terminal site T does not have a 15454 chassis and is not shown in the network map in CTC. The terminal site is built using passive MUX and DMX units. All OCHNC circuits originating from 40-SMR1-C on Side A of node R to the remote terminal site are terminated on 40-SMR1-C ADD/DROP ports. A T B Spur 249089 R H R12-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Spur Configuration Figure 12-20 Scenario A: Spur Without 15454 Chassis in RemoteTerminal T 12.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T In Figure 12-21, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The terminal site T is built with a 15454 chassis equipped with TXP units and passive MUX and DMX units. Terminal site T is connected to node R on the network map in CTC. All OCHNC circuits originating from 40-SMR1-C on Side A of node R to the remote site are terminated on 40-SMR1-C ADD/DROP ports. OCHCC and OCHTRAIL circuits are supported on the TXP units in terminal site T. Figure 12-21 Scenario B: Spur With Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 249090 40-SMR-1-C T Side A node R Booster DMX MUX 249091 40-SMR-1-C T TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP Side A node R Booster DMX MUX12-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T In Figure 12-22, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The terminal site T is built with a 15454 chassis equipped with TXP units and active MUX and DMX units. Terminal site T is connected to node R on the network map in CTC. DCN extension is supported between the ADD/DROP ports of 40-SMR1-C and the COM ports of the active MUX and DMX units. OCHNC circuits are terminated on the CHAN ports of the MUX and DMX units of terminal site T. OCHCC and OCHTRAIL circuits are supported on the TXP units in terminal site T. Figure 12-22 Scenario C: Spur with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 12.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be equipped in any of the following network topologies: • Open (hubbed) ring network • Multi-hubbed ring network • Closed (meshed) ring network • Any-to-any ring network • Linear network topology • Point-to-point linear network topology • Multi-ring network • Mesh network • Hybrid network For more information about the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, see Chapter 4, “Optical Amplifier Cards.”. 249091 40-SMR-1-C T TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP TXP Side A node R Booster DMX MUX12-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Network Topologies for the PSM Card 12.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card The PSM card is supported in the following network topologies: • The PSM card in a channel protection configuration is supported in all network topologies except linear networks as it is not possible to configure a working and protect path. • The PSM card in a multiplex section protection configuration is supported in linear point-to-point network topologies. • The PSM card in a line protection configuration is supported in the following network topologies: – Linear point-to-point in a single span network (if the OSC card is used). – Linear point-to-point multispan network when a DCN extension is used (on all spans). In this case, the maximum number of span links can be divided into three according to the DCN extension optical safety requirements. • The PSM card in a standalone configuration is supported in all network topologies. 12.7 Optical Performance This section provides optical performance information for ONS 15454 DWDM networks. The performance data is a general guideline based upon the network topology, node type, client cards, fiber type, number of spans, and number of channels. The maximum number of nodes that can be in an ONS 15454 DWDM network is 16. The DWDM topologies and node types that are supported are shown in Table 12-1. Table 12-1 Supported Topologies and Node Types Number of Channels Fiber Topologies Node Types 32 channels SMF-281 E-LEAF2 TW-RS3 1. SMF-28 = single-mode fiber 28. 2. E-LEAF = enhanced large effective area fiber. 3. TW-RS = TrueWave reduced slope fiber. Ring Linear Linear without OADM Hub Active OADM Passive OADM Terminal Line OSC regeneration 16 channels SMF-28 Ring Linear Linear without OADM Hub Active OADM Passive OADM Terminal Line OSC regeneration 8 channels SMF-28 Linear without OADM Terminal Line12-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Automatic Power Control 12.8 Automatic Power Control The ONS 15454 automatic power control (APC) feature performs the following functions: • Maintains constant per channel power when desired or accidental changes to the number of channels occur. Constant per channel power increases optical network resilience. • Compensates for optical network degradation (aging effects). • Simplifies the installation and upgrade of DWDM optical networks by automatically calculating the amplifier setpoints. Note APC algorithms manage the optical parameters of the OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-17-C, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and 32DMX-L cards. Amplifier software uses a control gain loop with fast transient suppression to keep the channel power constant regardless of any changes in the number of channels. Amplifiers monitor the changes to the input power and change the output power proportionately according to the calculated gain setpoint. The shelf controller software emulates the control output power loop to adjust for fiber degradation. To perform this function, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC needs to know the channel distribution, which is provided by a signaling protocol, and the expected per channel power, which you can provision. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card compares the actual amplifier output power with the expected amplifier output power and modifies the setpoints if any discrepancies occur. 12.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level In constant gain mode, the amplifier power out control loop performs the following input and output power calculations, where G represents the gain and t represents time. Pout (t) = G * Pin (t) (mW) Pout (t) = G + Pin (t) (dB) In a power-equalized optical system, the total input power is proportional to the number of channels. The amplifier software compensates for any variation of the input power due to changes in the number of channels carried by the incoming signal. Amplifier software identifies changes in the read input power in two different instances, t1 and t2, as a change in the traffic being carried. The letters m and n in the following formula represent two different channel numbers. Pin/ch represents the input power per channel. Pin (t1)= nPin/ch Pin (t2) = mPin/ch Amplifier software applies the variation in the input power to the output power with a reaction time that is a fraction of a millisecond. This keeps the power constant on each channel at the output amplifier, even during a channel upgrade or a fiber cut. The per channel power and working mode (gain or power) are set by automatic node setup (ANS). The provisioning is conducted on a per-side basis. A preamplifier or a booster amplifier facing Side i is provisioned using the Side i parameters present in the node database, where i - A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H. Starting from the expected per channel power, the amplifiers automatically calculate the gain setpoint after the first channel is provisioned. An amplifier gain setpoint is calculated in order to make it equal to the loss of the span preceding the amplifier itself. After the gain is calculated, the setpoint is no longer 12-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Automatic Power Control changed by the amplifier. Amplifier gain is recalculated every time the number of provisioned channels returns to zero. If you need to force a recalculation of the gain, move the number of channels back to zero. 12.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer Amplifiers are managed through software to control changes in the input power caused by changes in the number of channels. The software adjusts the output total power to maintain a constant per channel power value when the number of input channel changes. Changes in the network characteristics have an impact on the amplifier input power. Changes in the input power are compensated for only by modifying the original calculated gain, because input power changes imply changes in the span loss. As a consequence, the gain to span loss established at amplifier start-up is no longer satisfied, as shown in Figure 12-23. Figure 12-23 Using Amplifier Gain Adjustment to Compensate for System Degradation In Figure 12-23, Node 1 and Node 2 are equipped with booster amplifiers and preamplifiers. The input power received at the preamplifier on Node 2 (Pin2) depends on the total power launched by the booster amplifier on Node1, Pout1(n) (where n is the number of channels), and the effect of the span attenuation (L) between the two nodes. Span loss changes due to aging fiber and components or changes in operating conditions. The power into Node 2 is given by the following formula: Pin2 = LPout1(n) The phase gain of the preamplifier on Node 2 (GPre-2) is set during provisioning in order to compensate for the span loss so that the Node 2 preamplifier output power (Pout-Pre-2) is equal to the original transmitted power, as represented in the following formula: Pout-Pre-2 = L x GPre-2 x Pout1(n) In cases of system degradation, the power received at Node 2 decreases due to the change of span insertion loss (from L to L'). As a consequence of the preamplifier gain control working mode, the Node 2 preamplifier output power (Pout-Pre-2) also decreases. The goal of APC at the shelf controller layer is simply to detect if an amplifier output change is needed because of changes in the number of channels or to other factors. If factors other than changes in the number of channels occur, APC provisions a new gain at the Node 2 preamplifier (GPre-2') to compensate for the new span loss, as shown in the formula: GPre-2' = GPre-2 (L/ L') = GPre-2 + [Pout-Pre-2 –Exp(Pout-Pre-2)] Generalizing on the above relationship, APC is able to compensate for system degradation by adjusting working amplifier gain or variable optical attenuation (VOA) and to eliminate the difference between the power value read by the photodiodes and the expected power value. The expected power values are calculated using: • Provisioned per channel power value • Channel distribution (the number of express, add, and drop channels in the node) • ASE estimation 159501 Node 1 G1 Node 2 G2 P P L out1 P in2 out212-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual, Release 9.2 78-19285-02 Chapter 12 Network Reference Automatic Power Control Channel distribution is determined by the sum of the provisioned and failed channels. Information about provisioned wavelengths is sent to APC on the applicable nodes during circuit creation. Information about failed channels is collected through a signaling protocol that monitors alarms on ports in the applicable nodes and distributes that information to all the other nodes in the network. ASE calculations purify the noise from the power level reported from the photodiode. Each amplifier can compensate for its own noise, but cascaded amplifiers cannot compensate for ASE generated by preceding nodes. The ASE effect increases when the number of channels decreases; therefore, a correction factor must be calculated in each amplifier of the ring to compensate for ASE build-up. APC is a network-level feature that is distributed among diff